Some symbolic expressions for the yellow colour

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for the yellow colour

CONTENS

अमृत अरुण अवदात असित आपीत उकनाह उकानहः ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र एक एकपिङ्ग कंकुष्ठः कङ्कुष्ठ कर्बूर कषाय काल गव्य गो गौर चित्र चित्राङ्ग जरठ तालकम् पत्रम् पांडु पांडुकः पाण्डु पाण्डुक पाण्डुत्व पाण्डुर पिंग पिंगल पिंजर पिंजरित पिङ्ग पिङ्गल पिङ्गलत्व पिङ्गलिमन् पिङ्गिमन् पिण्जर पिण्जरय पिण्जरिक पिञ्जर पिञ्जरय् पिञ्जरय पिशङ्ग पीत पीतक पीतता पीतरक्त पीतराग पीतल पीतवर्ण पीतहरितच्छाय पीतिमन् ब्रध्न मण्जरीपिण्जरित मलीमस मांश्चतु राज्णी रुचिः रोहित रौचनिक वर्णः वर्णद वर्णिन् विपाण्डु विशद शवल शार शारत्व शाव शिलाधातु शोण शोभा सितरण्जन सु सुवर्ण सुवर्णक हरि हरिक हरिकः हरिण हरिणी हरित् हरित हरितत्व हरिताल हरिद्रा हरिद्राभ हरिद्वर्ण हरिनेत्र हरिपिङ्ग हरिमन् हरिम्भर हरिय हरियः हरिवर्पस् हरिश्चन्द्र हरिश्री हारिद्र हारिद्रः हालक हालकः हेमगौर हैम

अमृत — amṛta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899amṛta «a-mṛta» (cf. mfn. not dead ; immortal &c.; imperishable ;

beautiful, beloved ; m. an immortal, a god &c.; N. of śiva; of Viṣṇu ; of

Dhanvantari ; the plant Phaseolus Trilobus Ait.; the root of a plant ; («ā»)

f. a goddess &c.; spirituous liquor ; Emblica Officinalis, Terminalia Citrina

Roxb., Cocculus Cordifolius, Piper Longum, Ocymum Sanctum; N. of the

mother of Parikshit ; of Dākṣāyaṇī ; of a sister of Amṛitodana ; of a river ;

of the first «kalā» of the moon ; n. collective body of immortals ; world of

immortality, heaven, eternity ; (also «āni» n. pl. ; immortality ; final

emancipation ; the nectar (conferring immortality, produced at the

churning of the ocean), ambrosia (or the voice compared to it, N. ;

nectar-like food; antidote against poison ; N. of a medicament ,

medicament in general ; the residue of a sacrifice (cf. «amṛeta-bhuj»);

unsolicited alms , water ; milk clarified butter (cf. «paṇāmṛta»), boiled

rice ; anything sweet, a sweetmeat ; a pear ; food ; gold ; quicksilver ;

poison ; a particular poison ; a ray of light N. of a metre ; of a sacred

place (in the north) 14095, of various conjunctions of planets (supposed

to confer long life) ; the number, «four»

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

amṛta a.

(1) Not dead; amṛte jārajaḥ kuṁḍaḥ Ak.

(2) Immortal; apāma somamamṛtā abhūma Rv. 8. 48. 3; U. 1. 1; Bg.

14. 27.

(3) Imperishable, indestructible, eternal.

(4) Causing immortality.

(5) Beautiful, agreeable, desired. —taḥ

(1) A god, an immortal, deity.

(2) N. of Dhanvantari, physician of the gods; also N. of Indra, of the

sun, of Prajāpati, of the soul, Viṣṇu and Śiva.

(3) N. of a plant (vanamudga).

(4) N. of the root of a plant (vārāhīkaṁda). —tā

(1) Spirituous liquor.

(2) N. of various plants; e. g. āmalakī, harītakī, guḍūcī; māgadhī;

tulasī, iṁdravāruṇī, jyotiṣmatī, gorakṣadugdhā; ativiṣā; raktatrivṛt; dūrvā,

sthūlamāṁsaharītakī.

(4) N. of one of the Nāḍīs in the body; Mal. 5. 2.

(5) One of the rays of the sun; R. 10. 58. —taṁ

(1)

(a) Immortality, imperishable state; na mṛtyurāsīdamṛtaṁ na tarhi

Rv. 10. 129. 2; Ms. 12. 85.

(b) Final beatitude, absolution; tapasā kilbiṣaṁ haṁti

vidyayāmṛtamaśnute Ms. 12. 104; sa śriye cāmṛtāya ca Ak.

(2) The collective body of immortals.

(3)

(a) The world of immortality, Paradise, Heaven; the power of

eternity, immortal light, eternity.

(4) Nectar of immortality, ambrosia, beverage of the gods (opp. viṣa)

supposed to be churned out of the ocean;

devāsurairamṛtamaṁbunidhirmamaṁthe Ki. 5. 30; viṣādaṣyamṛtaṁ

grāhyaṁ Ms. 2. 239; viṣamapyamṛtaṁ kvacidbhavedamṛtaṁ vā

viṣamīśvarecchayā R. 8. 46; oft. used in combination with words like vāc,

vacanaṁ, vāṇī &c; kumārajanmāmṛtasaṁmitākṣaraṁ R. 3. 16;

āpyāyitosau vacanāmṛtena Mb.; amṛtaṁ śiśire vahniramṛtaṁ

kṣīrabhojanaṁ Pt. 1. 128 the height of pleasure or gratification.

(5) The Soma juice.

(6) Antidote against poison.

(7) The residue or leavings of a sacrifice; (yajñaśeṣa) Ms. 3. 285.

(8) Unsolicited alms, alms got without solicitation; mṛtaṁ

syādyācitaṁ bhaikṣyamamṛtaṁ syādayācitaṁ Ms. 4. 4-5.

(9) Water; amṛtādhmātajīmūta U. 6. 21; amṛtādunmathyamānāt K.

136; cf. also the formulas amṛtopastaraṇamasi svāhā and

amṛtāpidhānamasi svāhā repeated by Brāhmaṇas at the time of sipping

water before the commencement and at the end of meals. (10) A drug.

(11) Clari fied butter; amṛtaṁ nāma yat saṁto maṁtrajihveṣu juhvati

Śi. 2. 107.

(12) Milk.

(13) Food in general.

(14) Boiled rice.

(15) Any thing sweet, any thing lovely or charming; a sweetmeat.

(16) Property.

(17) Gold.

(18) Quicksilver.

(19) Poison. (20) The poison called vatsanābha.

(21) The Supreme Spirit (brahma).

(22) N. of a sacred place.

(23) N. of particular conjunctions of Nakshatras (lunar asterisms) with

week days (vāranakṣatrayoga) or of lunar days with week days

(tithivārayoga).

(24) The number four.

(25) Splendour, light. [cf. Gr. ambrotos, ambrosia; L. immortalis].

— Comp.

—aṁśuḥ, —karaḥ, —dīdhitiḥ, —dyutiḥ, —raśmiḥ &c. epithets of the

moon; amṛtadīdhitireṣa vidarbhaje N. 4. 104; amṛtāṁśūdbhava born from

the moon; from whom was born the moon, N. of Viṣṇu.

—akṣara a. immortal and imperishable; kṣaraṁ

pradhānamamṛtākṣaraṁ haraḥ Śvet. Up.

—aṁdhas, —aśanaḥ, —āśin m. ‘one whose food is nectar’; a god,

an immortal.

—asu a. whose soul is immortal.

—āśaḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. —2. a god.

—āsaṁgaḥ a sort of collyrium.

—āharaṇaḥ N. of Garuḍa who once stole Amṛta.

—iṣṭakā a kind of sacrificial brick shaped like the golden head of

men, beasts &c. (paśuśīrṣāṇi). —īśaḥ, —īśvaraḥ N. of Śiva.

—utpannā a fly. (—nnaṁ), —udbhavaṁ a kind of collyrium

(kharparītutthaṁ), (—vaḥ) N. of the Bilva tree.

—kuṁḍaṁ a vessel containing nectar.

—kṣāraṁ sal ammoniac.

—gatiḥ N. of a metre consisting of 40 syllables.

—garbha a. filled with water or nectar; ambrosial. (

—rbhaḥ) 1. the individual soul —2. the supreme soul.

—citiḥ f. an arrangement or accumulation of sacrificial bricks

conferring immortality.

—ja a. produced by or from nectar. (

—jaḥ) a sort of plant, Yellow Myrobalan.

—jaṭā N. of a plant (jaṭāmāṁsī). —taraṁgiṇī moonlight.

—tilakā N. of a metre of 4 lines, also called tvaritagati. —drava a.

shedding nectar. (

—vaḥ) flow of nectar.

—dhāra a. shedding nectar. (

—rā) 1. N. of a metre. —2. flow of nectar.

—paḥ 1. a drinker of nectar, a god or deity. —2. N. of Viṣṇu. —3.

one who drinks wine; bhruvamamṛtapanāmavāchaṁyāsāvadharamamuṁ

madhupastavājihīte Śi. 7. 42 (where a- has sense 1. also).

—pakṣaḥ 1. having golden or immortal wings, a sort of hawk. —2.

the immortal or golden wings of sacrificial fire. —3. fire itself.

—phalaḥ N. of two trees paṭola and pārāvata. (—lā) 1. a bunch of

grapes, vine plant, a grape (drākṣā). —2. = āmalakī. (—laṁ) a sort of fruit

(ruciphala) found in the country of the Mudgalas according to Bhava P.

—baṁdhuḥ Ved. 1. a god or deity in general. —2. a horse or the

moon.

—bhallātakī a sort of medicinal preparation of ghee mentioned by

Chakradatta.

—bhuj m. an immortal, a god, deity; one who tastes the sacrificial

residues.

—bhū a. free from birth and death.

—mati = -gati q. v.

—maṁthanaṁ churning (of the ocean) for nectar.

—mālinī N. of Durga.

—yogaḥ see under amṛta. —rasaḥ 1. nectar, ambrosia;

kāvyāmṛtarasāsvādaḥ H. 1; vividhakāvyāmṛtarasān pibāmaḥ Bh. 3. 40. —

2. the Supreme spirit. (

—sā) 1. dark-coloured grapes. —2. a sort of cake (Mar. anarsā). —

latā, —latikā a nectar-giving creeping plant (guḍūcī). —vāka a. producing

nectar-like sweet words.

—saṁyāvaṁ a sort of dish mentioned in Bhava P.

—sāra a. ambrosial; -rāṇi prajñānāni U. 7. (

—raḥ) 1. clarified butter. —2. a sort of ayaḥ pāka. -jaḥ raw sugar,

molasses (guḍa). —sūḥ, —sūtiḥ 1. the moon (distilling nectar). —2.

mother of the gods.

—sodaraḥ 1. ‘brother of nectar,’ the horse called uccaiḥśravas. —2.

a horse in general.

—sravaḥ flow of nectar. (

—vā) N. of a plant and tree (rudaṁtī). —srut a. shedding or

distilling nectar; Ku. 1. 45.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

amṛta (3. a + mṛta) P. 6, 2, 116. 1) adj. f. ā. a) «nicht gestorben»

BRĀHMAṆ. 3, 18. — b) «unsterblich» Kār. zu P. 3, 2, 188. yadyūyaṁ

pṛśnimātaro martāsaḥ syātana. stotā vo amṛtaḥ syāt.. ṚV. 1, 38, 4.

marteṣvagniramṛto ni dhāyi 7, 4, 4. apāma somamamṛtā abhūma 8, 48, 1.

1, 166, 3. 3, 20, 3. 4, 35, 8. u. s. w. ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 2, 8. wie die Götter

«unsterblich» wurden 9, 5, 1, 7. 11, 2, 3, 6. «unsterblich» wird man nur

karmaṇā vidyayā vā 10, 4, 3, 9. tasya ha prajāpateḥ. ardhameva

martyamardhamamṛtam 1, 3, 2. 4, 1. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 4, 6. ŚVETĀŚV. UP.

3, 1. BHAG. 14, 27. subst. «ein unsterbliches, gottähnliches Wesen» H.

an. 3, 236. MED. t. 77. tamā no arkamamṛtāya juṣṭamime

dhāsuramṛtāsaḥ purājāḥ ṚV. 7, 97, 5. kasya nūnaṁ katamasyāmṛtānāṁ

manāmahe cāru devasya nāma 1, 24, 1. 72, 2. 10. 189, 3. 3, 21, 1. 4, 42,

1. u. s. w. fem.: yadāsu marto amṛtāsu nispṛk 10, 95, 9. 17, 2. — c)

«unvergänglich»: kuvinme vasvo amṛtasya śikṣāḥ ṚV. 3, 43, 5. īśe

hyāgniramṛtasya bhūrerīśe rāyaḥ suvīryasya dātoḥ 7, 4, 6. idaṁ

tyatpātramindrapānamindrasya priyamamṛtamapāyi 6, 44, 16. VS. 4, 18.

26. yajjyotirantaramṛtaṁ prajāsu 34, 3. Auf solche Stellen mag zum Theil

die Bedeutung «Gold» gegründet sein; vgl. 4, 1. — d) = sundara «schön»

und = atihṛdya «sehr lieblich» VYĀḌI im ŚKDR. (hier als m.). — 2) m. a)

«Gott», s. u. 1,b. — b) N. einer Wurzel (vārāhīkanda) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

c) N. einer Pflanze, «Phaseolus trilobus Ait.» (vanamudga) id. — d) ein

Bein. Śiva’s ŚIV. — e) ein Bein. Dhanvantari’s H. an. 3, 236. MED. t. 77. —

3) f. -tā. a) «ein berauschendes Getränk» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: a) «Emblica officinalis Gaertn.» (āmalakī) AK. 2,

4, 2, 38. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. an. 3, 237. MED. t. 77. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

AINSLIE, Mat. ind. 2, 245. — b) «Terminalia citrina Roxb.» (harītakī,

pathyā) AK. 2, 4, 2, 39. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. an. 3, 237. MED. t. 77.

RĀJAN. = campādeśajasthūlamāṁsā harītakī. sā virecano (sic) praśastā

RĀJAVALLABHA im ŚKDR. — g) «Cocculus cordifolius DC.» (guḍūcī) AK. 2,

4, 3, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 1157. H. an. MED. t. SUŚR. 2, 106, 2. 8. 116,

7. 207, 8. 256, 3. 522, 4. Vgl. amṛtavallī. — d) «Piper longum L.»

(māgadhī) H. an. MED. — e) «Ocymum sanctum L.» (tulasī) ŚABDAM. im

ŚKDR. — z) «Cucumis colocynthis» (indravāruṇī) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — h)

«Halicacabum cardiospermum» (jyotiṣmatī) id. — J) = gorakṣadugdhā id.

— i) = ativiṣā id. — c) = raktatrivṛt id. — l) «Panicum dactylon» (dūrvā) id.

— c) N. pr. Mutter von Parīkṣit MBH. 1, 3794. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. Tochter

Siṁhahanu’s und Schwester Amṛtodana’s SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 233 (3).

— 4) n. a) «das Unsterbliche», d. i. «die Gesammtheit der Unsterblichen»:

niveśayannamṛtaṁ martyaṁ ca ṚV. 1, 35, 2. (stṛṇīta barhiḥ)

yatrāmṛtasya cakṣaṇam 13, 5. tatrāmṛtasya cetanam 170, 4. — b)

«Unsterblichkeit»: devebhyaḥ kamavṛṇīta mṛtyuṁ prajāyai kamamṛtaṁ

nāvṛṇīta ṚV. 10, 13, 4. na mṛtyurāsīdamṛtaṁ na tarhi 129, 2.

dakṣiṇāvanto amṛtaṁ bhajante 1, 125, 6. sūryasya bhāge amṛtasya loke

AV. 8, 1, 1. ṚV. 1, 83, 15. 10, 121, 2. ŚAT. BR. 7, 3, 1, 46. u.s.w. 14, 9, 1,

30 (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 3, 28). ĪŚOP. 11. prajātiramṛtamānanda ityupasthe

TAITT. UP. 3, 10, 3. M. 12, 85. 104. — c) «die Welt der Unsterblichkeit,

das ewige Reich, die Ewigkeit»: uṣaḥ pratīcī bhuvanāni viśvordhvā

tiṣṭhasyamṛtasya ketuḥ ṚV. 3, 61, 3. amṛtasya panthām 4, 35, 3.

amṛtasya nābhiḥ 58, 1. śṛṇvantu viśve amṛtasya putrāḥ 10, 13, 1. 1, 91,

18. amṛtasya patnī heissen «die Morgenröthen» 4, 5, 13. «die Wasser» VS.

6, 34. Aditi 21, 5. Kuhū AV. 7, 47, 2. dvitā vyūrṇvannamṛtasya dhāma ṚV.

9, 94, 2. devā ivāmṛtaṁ rakṣamāṇāḥ AV. 3, 30, 7. pl. «die Kräfte der

Ewigkeit»: viśvarūpo amṛtāni tasthau ṚV. 3, 38, 4. satrā cakrāṇo amṛtāni

viśvā 1, 72, 1. — d) «der Trank der Unsterblichkeit, Lebensessenz», greek

AK. 1, 1, 1, 44. 3, 4, 104. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 89. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 76.

apsvāntaramṛtamapsu bheṣajam ṚV. 1, 23, 19. manye bhejāno amṛtasya

tarhi hiraṇyavarṇā atṛpaṁ yadā vaḥ AV. 3, 13, 6. goṣu priyamamṛtaṁ

rakṣamāṇā ṚV. 1, 71, 9. apāra ūrve amṛtaṁ duhānāḥ 3, 1, 14. 1, 112, 3.

164, 21. VS. 2, 34. AV. 3, 12, 8. amṛtāhutiḥ AIT. BR. 2, 14. M. 2, 162.

239. INDR. 1, 27. amṛtahrada ŚĀK. 100, 17. phalānyamṛtakalpāni R. 5,

74, 6. pātālādamṛtamānīya catvāro ‘pi jīvāpitāḥ VET. 33, 20. Häufig wird

«die Rede» oder «die Stimme» mit amṛta verglichen: vācaṁ

tāmamṛtopamām N. 12, 42. RAGH. 3, 16. -vāṇī ŚRUT. 5. -rutā 35.

vacanāmṛta HIT. 25, 2. «der Gipfel aller Genüsse»: amṛtaṁ śiśire

vahniramṛtaṁ priyadarśanam. amṛtaṁ rājasanmānamamṛtaṁ saṁgatiḥ

satām.. PAÑCAT. I, 144. Entsteht bei der Quirlung des Oceans MBH. 1,

1094. fgg. R. 1, 45. HARIV. 12185. VP. 75. fgg. befindet sich im Monde

238. fgg. Vgl. amṛtataraṁgiṇī, amṛtadīdhiti, amṛtadyuti, amṛtasū. — e) N.

einer Mixtur gegen Vergiftung SUŚR. 2, 250, 17. 285, 9. = rasāyana H. an.

3, 236. = auṣadha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) «Ueberbleibsel eines Opfers»

AK. 2, 7, 28. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 834. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 76. vighasāśī

bhavennityaṁ nityaṁ vāmṛtabhojanaḥ. vighaso bhuktaśeṣaṁ tu

yajñaśeṣaṁ tathāmṛtam.. M. 3, 285. — g) «unerbettelte, freiwillig

dargebotene Almosen» AK. 2, 9, 3. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 866. an. 3, 235.

MED. t. 77. ṛtāmṛtābhyāṁ jīvettu u. s. w. amṛtaṁ syādayācitam M. 4, 4.

5. — h) N. pr. eines Ortes: kṣīrodasyottare kūle udīcyāṁ diśi devatāḥ.

amṛtaṁ nāma paramaṁ sthānamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ.. HARIV. 14095.

amṛteśaya erscheint ebend. S. 927, Z. 4, v. u. als ein Beiname Viṣṇu’s.

Die Lexicographen führen noch folgende Bedeutungen an: i) «Wasser»

NAIGH. 1, 12. AK. 1, 2, 3, 3. 3, 4, 14, 78. TRIK. 3, 3, 143. H. 1069. an. 3,

235. MED. t. 76. — k) «Gold» NAIGH. 1, 2. H. an. 3, 236. Vgl. 1,c. und

amṛteṣṭakā. — l) «geklärte Butter» (ghṛta) H. an. 3, 236. MED. t. 76. — m)

«Milch» H. an. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. «warme Milch» H. ś. 98. — n) «Speise»

(jagdhi) H. an. — o) «gekochter Reis» (anna) id. — p) «Süssigkeit» (svādu)

id. — q) «Liebliches» (hṛdya) id. — r) «Eigenthum» (sva) id. — s) «eine Art

Gift», viṣasāmānya und vatsanābha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — t) «Quecksilber»

id. — u) «Strahl» YĀDAVA bei MALLIN. zu RAGH. 10, 59. ŚAṁKAR. zu

BṚH. ĀR. UP. 4, 4, 16. — v) «die letzte Befreiung» (mokṣa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 15.

TRIK. 1, 1, 134. 3, 3, 143. H. 74. an. 3, 235. MED. t. 77.

amṛta 1) a) hatvā cainaṁ nāmṛtaḥ syādayaṁ me MBH. 13, 23. — b) Z. 3

lies 8, 48, 3 st. 8, 48, 1. subst. «ein unsterbliches Wesen, ein Gott» Spr.

4302. — 3) b) l) sarvauṣadhīnāmamṛtā (= dūrvā Schol.) pradhānā Spr.

5208. — d) Bein. der Dākṣāyaṇī Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,19. 31. — e) N. «der

ersten» Kalā «des Mondes» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 18,b,24. — 4) b) Spr. 3561.

4302. 4331. — e) «ein best. Heilmittel» ŚIŚ. 9, 36. «Arzenei» überh.

WASSILJEW 199. — p) yathāmṛtaghaṭaṁ daṁśāḥ (viśanti) R. 7, 7, 3.

amṛta = kṣaudra Schol. — u) saurībhiriva nāḍībhiramṛtākhyābhiḥ RAGH.

10, 59. — v) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 258,b,10. — w) «ein Metrum von 4 x 54

Silben» ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 4. Ind. St. 8, 107. 111.

amṛta 4) m) Spr. (II) 2986.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

amṛta a-mṛta.

I. adj., f. tā, Immortal, Bhag. 14, 27.

II. m.

1. A god.

2. The soul.

III. n.

1. The beverage of the gods, nectar.

2. A medicine preventing old age, prolonging life, and awakening the

dead, Lass. 33, 20.

3. A medicament; nectar and medicament, Śiś. 9, 36.

4. The residue of sacrificial food, Man. 3, 285.

5. Unsolicited alms, Man. 4, 4.

— Comp. gava-, n. amṛta, consisting of rays, MBh. 3, 17351.

— Cf. [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

amṛta m. immortal. m. a god. n. immortality (also concr. = the gods); the

drink of the gods, i.e. nectar; anything sweet, delightful, or wholesome,

e.g. water, milk, medicine, the remainder of sacrifice, alms unasked.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

amṛta a-mṛta, pp. not hvg. died; immortal; m. god;

ā, f. goddess; a herb; n. immortality; world of immortals; nectar; a

certain remedy; medicine; remnant of a sacrifice; water; milk; ray;

-kara, m. moon;

-kiraṇa, m. id.;

-tejas, m. N. of a fairy prince;

-tva, a. immortality; condition of ambrosia;

-dīdhiti, m. moon;

-drava, a. flowing with nectar;

-dhāyin, a. sipping —;

-pāyin, a. drinking nectar = hearing fine speeches;

-prabha, m. N. of a fairy;

ā, f. N.;

-bhavana, n. N. of a monastery;

-bhāṣ-aṇa, n. nectar-like speech;

-bhuj, m. god;

-bhojana, a. eating the remnants of sacrifices;

-maya, a. (ī) immortal; nectar-like; consisting of nectar;

-raśmi, m. moon;

-rasa, m. nectar; a. tasting like nectar;

-latā, f. creeper yielding nectar;

-loka, m. world of the immortals;

-varṣin, a. raining nectar;

-hrada, m. lake of nectar.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

amṛta tri° na mṛtaḥ . 1 maraṇaśūnye jīvite amṛte jārajaḥ kuṇḍaḥ amaraḥ

apāma somamamṛtā abhūma iti śrutiḥ maraṇañcātra

ābhūtasaṁplavasthānamamṛtatvaṁ hi bhāṣyate iti viṣṇu pu° uktam

mahākalpāvasthāyitvaṁ, devānāmapi tathaivāmṛtatvam kāryātyaye

tadadhyakṣeṇa sahātaḥ paramāmnāyāt śā° sū° kāryabrahmaṇā saha

sarveṣāṁ layābhidhānāt . na mṛtaṁ maraṇaṁ yasmāt . 2 pīyūṣe

tatsevane hi amṛtatvaṁ bhāratādau prasiddham . tacca prathamaṁ

pṛthūpadiṣṭairdairvarindraṁ vatsaṁ kṛtvā gorūpadharāyāḥ pṛthvā

dugdham paścācca durvāsaḥśāpāt samudramadhyaṁ gatam tato

devāsuraiḥ samudre mathite punarutpannamiti paurāṇikī

kathānusandheyā devāsurairamṛtamasvunidhirmamante kirā° na vai devā

aśnanti pibanti etadevāmṛtaṁ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti cā° u° . amṛtadīdhitireṣa

vidarbhaje . bhajasi tāpamanuṣyakimaṁśubhiḥ . yadi bhavanti mṛtāḥ

sakhi! candrikāḥ iti naiṣadham . 3 jale tasya prāṇahetutvāt amṛtatvam .

annamayaṁ hi saumya! mana āpomayaḥ prāṇaḥ ityupakramya

ṣoḍaśakalaḥ saumya! puruṣaḥ pañcadaśāhāni māśīḥ kāmamapaḥ

pibāpomayaḥ prāṇo na pibato vicchetsyate chā° u° . jalapānābhāve

prāṇavicchedaukteḥ tatpāne ca prāṇavṛddheḥ jalasya maraṇāhetutvam .

amṛtopastaraṇamasi svāhā amṛtāpidhānamasi svāheti āpośanamantraḥ .

4 ghṛte tasya, āyurvai ghṛta mityukterāyurjanakatvāt

maraṇāhetutvāttathātvam . amṛtaṁ nāma yat santomantrajihveṣu juhvati

. śobhaiva mandarakṣuvdhakṣubhitāmbhodhivarṇanā māghaḥ . 5 pārade

tasya ca rasāyanādinā pāne abhrakastava vījantu mama vojantu pāradaḥ

anayormelanaṁ devi! mṛtyudāridryanāśanam ityukteḥ

bahukālajīvanahetutvāt tathātvam raseśvaranarśane vivaraṇam . 6

yajñaśiṣṭe dravye yajñaśeṣo’mṛtaṁ smṛta mityuktestathātvam . 7 ayācite

vastuni mṛtaṁ svādyācitaṁ bhaikṣyamamṛtaṁ syāddayācitam

manūktestasya maraṇarūpāpamānahetuyācanaśūnyatvāt tathātvam .

ṛtāmṛtābhyāṁ jīveta manuḥ . 8 dugdhe tasya dehadhārakatvena

maraṇāhetutvāt tathātvam . 9 anne annamūlaṁ hi jīvana

mityuktestathātvam . na mriyate kṣīyate . 10 svarṇe . agnau

suvarṇamakṣīṇamiti yā° uktestasya vahnau bahutāpane’pi

akṣīṇatvāttathātvam ataeva tasya taijasatvaṁ svarṇaṁ

taijasamatyantānalasantāpe’pi anāśyatvādityanumānena si° mu°

sādhitam . evadabhiprāyeṇaiva amṛtaṁ vai hiraṇyamityuktamā śata° brā°

. 11 bhakṣaṇīyadravyamātre, tasyānnavattathātvam 12 svādudravye

amṛtatulyasvādavattvāt . 13 tatsādhane dravyetri° ādityovai devamadhu

ityādi madhuvidyāyām tā evāsyāmṛtāmadhunāḍyaḥ chā° u° pañcakṛtvaḥ

pāṭhaḥ . 14 hṛdye amṛtavadāhlādakatvāt tathātvam 15 viṣe 16

vatsanābhe viṣe tayoḥ vaidyakoktadiśā śodhane amaraṇahetutvāttathā .

ataeva viṣamaṣyamṛtaṁ kvacidbhavediti raghuḥ 17 mokṣe

bidyayāmṛtamaśnute iti śrutiḥ kṣayaśūnyatvāttathā amṛtasyaiṣa seturiti

śrutiḥ sa śriye cāmṛtāya ca amaraḥ . 18 amṛtatulye ānandakaratvāttathā .

amṛtaṁ vālabhāṣitamiti hito° . āpyāyito’sau vacanāmṛtena udbhaṭaḥ .

amṛtamastyasya svāmitvena bhakṣakatvena vā arśa° ac . 19

dhanvantarau sahi samudramathā nasamaye amṛtaṁ bibhradutthitaḥ iti

purāṇe prasiddham . 20 deve tadbhakṣatvena tathātvam .

devānāñcāmṛtadarśanenaiva tṛptatvam na vai devā aśnanti pibanti

etardevāmṛtaṁ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyantoti chā° u° ukteḥ rathenāmṛtaṁ martyañca

ya° 33, 40 amṛtaṁ devādikamiti ve° dī° . na sriyate sma kartari kta . 21

vārāhīkandeṣu tasya bahucchedane’pi punaḥprarūḍhatvāttathā 22

vanamudge ca tasya oṣadhitayā phalapākāntatve’pi

chinnaprarūḍhatvāttathātvam . 23 śuḍūcyām . 24 indravāruṇyāṁ 25

jyotiṣmanyām 26 gorakṣadugdhāyām 27 ativiṣāyāṁ 28 raktatrivṛti 29

dūrvāyām 30 āmalakyāṁ 31 harītakyāṁ 32 tulasyāṁ 33 pippalyāṁ 34

sthūlamāṁsaharītakyāñca strī . etāsāṁ yathāyathaṁ roganivārakatvena

tathātvam . amṛtena sahotpannatvāt amṛtatulyāsvādavattvācca 35

surāyāṁ strī . 36 sūryaraśmibhede strī tāsāṁ śatāmi catvāri raśmīnāṁ

vṛṣṭisarjane . śatatrayaṁ himotsarge tāvadgarbhasya sarjane .

ānandāśca hi meghāśca bhūtanāḥ pṛtanā iti . catuḥśataṁ vṛṣṭivāhāḥ

sarvāstā amṛtā striyaḥ malli° yādavaḥ . tāsāñcāmṛtasya jalasya

dāyitvāttathā . saurībhiriva nāḍībhiramṛtākhyābhirammayaḥ raghuḥ . 37

maraṇaśūgye viṣṇau pu° amṛtaḥ śāśvataḥ sthāṇuḥ vi° sa° . nāsti mṛtaṁ

maraṇaṁ yasmāt . 38 ajaramaratvaprade tri° . indriyasyendriyamidaṁ

payo’mṛtaṁ madhu yaju° 19, 72, 73, 74, 75 . amṛtamajarā

mṛtyupradatvāt ānandakaram amṛtatulyam ve° dī° nandā

bhaumārkayorbhadrā śukrendvośca jayā budhe . śubhayogā gurau riktā

pūrṇā mande’mṛtāhvayā . ādityabhaumayornandā bhadrā

śukraśaśāṅkayoḥ jayā jñosyād gurau riktā pūrṇārke cāmṛtā śubheti iti

jyotiṣokte 39 tithivārayogarūpe yogabhede dhruvagurukaramūlā

pauṣṇabhānyarkaśāre hariyugavidhiyugme phalgunībhādrayugme .

divasakaraturaṅgau śarvarīnāthavāre . guruyumanalavātopāntyapauṣṇāni

kauje . dahanavidhiśatākhyāmaitrabhaṁ saumyavāre .

marudaditibhapuṣyā maitrabhaṁ jīvavāre .

bhagayugajayugaśvoviṣṇumaitre sitāhe . śvasanakamalayonī

saurivāre’mṛtāni rāja mā° ukte ādityahastā gurupuṣyayuktā

budhānurādhā śanirohiṇī ca . some ca viṣṇuḥ kujarevatī ca śukrāśvinī

cāmṛtayogavargāḥ . ukte ca 40 vāranakṣatrayogaje yogabhede yadi

viṣṭivyatīpātau dinaṁvāpyaśubhaṁ bhavet . hanyate’mṛtayogena

bhāskareṇa tamo yathā jyoti° . 41 brahmaṇi na° .

अरुण — aruṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aruṇa mf («ā» [ v, 63, 6, &c.] or «ī» [ x, 61, 4, &, (nom. pl. «aruṇayas»)

95, 6]) n. ( «ṛ» , reddish-brown, tawny, red, ruddy (the colour of the

morning opposed to the darkness of night) &c.

mf («ā») n. perplexed

aruṇa mf («ā») n. dumb

aruṇa m. red colour

aruṇa m. the dawn (personified as the charioteer of the sun)

aruṇa m. the sun

aruṇa m. a kind of leprosy (with red [cf. spots and insensibility of the

skin)

aruṇa m. a little poisonous animal

aruṇa m. the plant Rottleria Tinctoria

aruṇa m. molasses

aruṇa m. N. of a teacher

aruṇa m. of the composer of the hymn (with the patron. Vaitahavya)

aruṇa m. of the Nāga priest Aṭa

aruṇa m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa

aruṇa m. of the Daitya Mura

aruṇa m. of an Asura «varuṇa»), of the father of the fabulous bird Jaṭāyu

aruṇa («aruṇa») m. pl. N. of a pupil of Upaveśi (cf. «aruṇa» m. above) ,

m. pl. N. of a class of Ketus (seventy seven in number)

aruṇa m. (named as the composers of certain Mantras).

aruṇa («ā») f. the plants Betula, madder (Rubia Manjith), Tori, a black

kind of the same, Colocynth or bitter apple, the plant that yields the red

and black berry used for the jewellers weight (called Retti)

aruṇa m. N. of a river , («īs») f. red cow (in the Vedic myths) and

aruṇa m. the dawn

aruṇa («am») n. red colour

aruṇa m. a ruby

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aruṇa a. (ṇā, —ṇī f.) [ṛ-unan; cf. Uṇ. 3. 60]

(1) Reddish brown, tawny, red, ruddy (of the colour of the morning as

opposed to the darkness of night); pratyākhyātaviśeṣakaṁ kurabakaṁ

śyāmāvadātāruṇaṁ M. 3. 5; nayanānyaruṇāni ghūrṇayan Ku. 4. 12.

(2) Perplexed, embarrassed.

(3) Dumb. —ṇaḥ

(1) Red colour, the colour of the dawn or morning twilight.

(2) The dawn personified as the charioteer of the sun;

āviṣkṛtāruṇapuraḥsara ekatorkaḥ S. 4. 1, 7. 4; vibhāvarī yadyaruṇāya

kalpate Ku. 5. 44; R. 5. 71. [Aruṇa is represented as the elder brother of

Garuḍa, being the son of Vinatā by Kaśyapa. Vinatā prematurely hatched

the egg and the child was born without thighs, and hence he is called

Anūru ‘thighless’, or Vipāda ‘footless.’ He cursed his mother that since

she had brought him forth before the due season she would be a slave to

her rival Kadrū; but at her earnest entreaties, he modified the curse and

said that her next son would deliver her from bondage. Aruṇa now holds

the office of the charioteer of the sun. His wife was Śyeni, who bore him

two sons Sampāti and Jaṭayu].

(3) The sun; rāgeṇa bālāruṇakomalena Ku. 3. 30, 5. 8; saṁsṛjyate

sarasijairaruṇāṁśubhinnaiḥ R. 5. 69; S. 1. 32.

(4) A kind of leprosy with red spots and insensibility of the skin.

(5) A little poisonous creature.

(6) N. of a plant puṁnāga; also a synonym of arka q. v.

(7) Molasses (guḍa)

(8) N. of a peak of the Himālaya situated to the west of Kailāsa.

(9) N. of one of the 12 Ādityas, the one presiding over Magha. —ṇā

(1) N. of several plants

(a) ativiṣā (Mar. ativikha);

(b) Madder (maṁjiṣṭhā);

(c) trivṛt commonly called Teori;

(d) a black kind of the same (śyāmākā);

(e) bitter apple (iṁdravāruṇī);

(f) the Gunja plant that yields the red and black berry (guṁja)

used as a weight by jewellers &c.

(g) muṁḍatiktā.

(2) N. of a river. —ṇī

(1) A red cow (Nir.).

(2) The early dawn. —ṇaṁ

(1) Red colour.

(2) Gold.

(3) Saffron.

— Comp.

—agrajaḥ N. of Garuḍa (aruṇaḥ agrajo yasya). —anujaḥ, —avarajaḥ

N. of Garuḍa, younger brother of Aruṇa.

—arcis m. the sun.

—aśva a. having red horses, epithet of the Maruts.

—ātmajaḥ 1. son of Aruṇa, N. of Jaṭāyu. —2. N. of Saturn, Savarṇi

Manu, Karṇa, Sugrīva, Yama and the two Aśvins. (

—jā) N. of Yamuna and Tāpti.

—īkṣaṇa a. red-eyed.

—udakaṁ N. of a lake. (

—kā) N. of a river.

—udayaḥ break of day, dawn; catasro ghaṭikāḥ prātararuṇodaya

ucyate. —upalaḥ a ruby.

—kamalaṁ a red lotus.

—jyotis m. N. of Śiva.

—dūrvā reddish fennel.

—priya a. ‘beloved of red flowers and lotuses’, N. of the sun. (

—yā) 1. the sun’s wife. —2. shadow.

—psu a. [aruṇaṁ psu rūpaṁ yasya] Ved. of reddish shape or

colour.

—babhru a. reddish-yellow.

—yuj a. furnished with red rays of light, epithet of the dawn.

—locana a. red-eyed. (

—naḥ) a pigeon.

—sārathiḥ ‘having Aruṇa for his charioteer,’ the sun.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aruṇa Uṇ. 3, 60. 1) adj. f. ā und ī (ved.). a) «röthlich, rothbraun; die Farbe

des Morgens» im Gegensatz «zum Schwarz der Nacht»: kṛṣṇaṁ ca

varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV. 1, 73, 7 (AV. 12, 1, 52). der Strahlen,

Rinder, Rosse der Morgenröthe 92, 2. 15. 113, 14. 124, 11. 5, 80, 3. des

Soma und der Soma-Pflanze: vṛkṣasya śākhāmaruṇasya bapsataḥ 10, 94,

3. 7, 98, 1. 9, 45, 3. des Wolfs 1, 105, 18. des Aussatzes (vgl. 2,c.) AV. 5,

22, 3. 6, 20, 3. — ṚV. 1, 134, 3. 2, 1, 6. 4, j, 16. 8, 90, 6. VS. 16, 6. 39. 24,

3. 11. 29, 58. AV. 10, 2, 11. 11, 5, 12. 10, 2. 13, 2, 26. ŚAT. BR. 3, 3, 1,

15. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 6, 14. 22, 9, 13. aruṇapuṣpa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 2. KĀTY.

ŚR. 25, 12, 18. prācī digiyamabhavattāvadaruṇā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kuravakaḥ

AK. 2, 4, 2, 55. pallava BRAHMA-P. in LA. 59, 10. kapotāṅgāruṇo dhūmaḥ

R. 3, 5, 7. bhasmāruṇam — dagdhāsthisthānamaṇḍalam 2, 77, 8.

pāṇḍarāruṇavarṇāni nīlalohitakāni ca — mahābhrāṇi cakāśire 5, 55, 15.

pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi vimalānyapi. susruvurgiridhātubhyaḥ

sabhasmāni bhujaṁgavat.. DAŚ. 1, 18. (meghāḥ) gardabhāruṇāḥ R. 3,

30, 4. himāruṇāḥ. śītavṛddhatarāyāmāstriyāmā bhānti sāṁpratam

(hemante), tuṣārāruṇamaṇḍalaḥ saniḥśvāsa ivādarśacandramā na

prakāśate 3, 22, 12. 13. tāṁ nirīkṣya — kṣitau kṣitirajo’ruṇām 5, 33, 2.

karau ca tava — padmapatrāruṇau śubhau 3, 52, 31. nakha ŚĀK. 138.

kopādaruṇalocanaḥ DEV. 3, 7. KUMĀRAS, 4, 12. AMAR. 44. Ueber die

Personification der aruṇāḥ ketavaḥ s. u. ketu. Die Lexicographen

bestimmen die Farbe durch folgende Umschreibungen: avyaktarāga AK.

1, 1, 4, 25. H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 33. bālasaṁdhyābha H. 1396.

saṁdhyārāga H. an. MED. piṅga H. an. 3, 191. kapila MED. ṇ. 34. gaura

AK. 3, 4, 25, 191. ārakta TRIK. 3, 3, 120. Das m. bezeichnet die «rothe

Farbe» in abstr. — b) «verwirrt» (vyākula) TRIK. 3, 3, 120. — c) «stumm»

H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 34, — 2) m. a) «Morgenröthe», personif. «der

Wagenlenker der Sonne» AK. 1, 1, 2, 33. TRIK. 3, 3, 119. H. 102. an. 3,

191. MED. ṇ. 33. aruṇodaye M. 10, 33. R. 2, 71, 17. bālāruṇa KUMĀRAS.

3, 30. aruṇāṁśa RAGH. 5, 69. āviṣkṛtāruṇapuraḥsaraḥ (arkaḥ) ŚĀK. 77.

kiṁ vābhaviṣyadaruṇastamasāṁ vibhettā taṁ cetsahasrakiraṇo dhuri

nākariṣyat 163. KUMĀRAS. 5, 44. ein Sohn der Vinatā und Bruder

Garuḍa’s R. 3, 20, 33. HARIV. 224. 2499. 11556. 12507. 14175. VP. 149.

Schüler des Sūrya Verz. d. B. H. No. 939. — b) «Sonne» AK. 1, 1, 2, 31. 3,

4, 13, 51. TRIK. 1, 1, 100. 3, 3, 119. H. 95. an. 3, 191. MED. ṇ. 33.

pariṇatāruṇaprakāśaḥ śalabhasamūha iva ŚĀK. 31. — c) «eine Art

Aussatz» H. an. MED. Vgl. u. 1,a. — d) N. eines kleinen giftigen Thieres

(mūṣika) SUŚR. 2, 279, 20. — e) N. einer Pflanze, «Rottleria tinctoria»

(puṁnāga) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Als Synonym von arka «Sonne» auch ein

Name für die «Pflanze» arka ŚKDR. — f) «Melasse» (guḍa) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — g) N. pr. ein Lehrer mit dem Bein. Aupaveśi ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 2, 20.

Aupaveśi Gautama 10, 6, 1, 1. Schüler des Upaveśi 14, 9, 4, 33 (hier

proparox.) = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. WEBER, Lit. 129. Vater von Uddālaka

COLEBR. Misc. Ess. I, 37. 54. 83. 84. 87. Sohn Vītadravya’s ṚV. ANUKR.

zu 10, 91. Vgl. āruṇi. — ein Asura (trailokye mahābādhāṁ kariṣyati) DEV.

11, 49. — Aruṇa Āṭa ein Schlangenpriester PAÑCAV. BR. in Ind. St. 1, 35.

— ein König aus dem Sonnengeschlecht LIA. I, Anh. CVI (zu S. VI, N. 8).

— 3) f. -ṇā. a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = ativiṣā, eine «Birkenart»

AK. 2, 4, 3, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 119. H. an. 3, 192. MED. ṇ. 34. — b) «Grapp,

Färberröthe» (mañjiṣṭhā) TRIK. H. an. MED. — g) «Ipomoea Turpethum

R. Br.» (oder wohl eine andere «rothblühende» Species), trivṛt H. an.

MED. — d) «Abrus precatorius» (guñjā), mit «rothen» Beeren RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — e) «die Koloquinthe» (indravāruṇī) id. — z) = muṇḍitikā id. — h)

= śyāmā H. an. MED. — b) N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 59. — 4) f. -ṇī. a) (sc.

go) «die röthliche Kuh», vom Gespann der Morgenröthe und den Kühen im

Indra-Mythus: kṣāmā bhindanto aruṇīrapa vran ṚV. 4, 2, 16. 1, 112, 19.

121, 3. sajūruṣā aruṇībhiḥ VS. 12, 74. Vgl. NAIGH. 1, 15. — b) «die

Morgenröthe»: āvahantyaruṇīrjyotiṣāgāt ṚV. 4, 14, 3. — 5) n. a) «Röthe»:

divispṛgyātyaruṇāni kṛṇvan ṚV. 10, 168, 1. 2, 34, 12. — b) «Gold»: aruṇaṁ

rajatam AV. 13, 4, 5, 6. — Vgl. aruṣa.

aruṇa 1) a) aruṇāḥ ketavaḥ als Verfasser von Mantra Ind. St. 3, 459; vgl.

386. 391, weiter unten u. 2) i) und u. ketu 7). — 2) a) Vater des Jaṭāyu

MBH. 3, 16045. — d) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,20. — g) Aupaveśi TS. 6, 1, 9,

2. 4, 5, 1. TBR. 2, 1, 5, 11. Vaitahavja (lies Vītahavya st. Vītadravya) Ind.

St.3,203,b. ein Sohn Kṛṣṇa’s BHĀG. P. 10, 90, 33. des Daitja Mura 59, 12.

— h) «Röthe, rothe Farbe» BHĀG. P. 10, 29, 2. — i) Bez. «bestimmter»

Ketu (77 an der Zahl) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 24; vgl. oben u. 1, a). — 3) b)

MBH. 9, 2429. fg. — 5) c) «Rubin» BHĀG. P. 4, 25, 15.

aruṇa 2) g) N. pr. eines Asura MBH. 16, 119 nach der Lesart der ed.

Bomb., varuṇa ed. Calc. — 3) b) MBH. 3, 7022.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

aruṇa 1 I

aruṇa 2 II A king of the solar dynasty, and father of Triśaṅku. (Devī

Bhāgavata, Saptama Skandha).

aruṇa 3 III A sage in ancient India. A community of Ṛṣis was denoted by

this name. Those Ṛṣis were called Aruṇas. The Ajas, Pṛśnis, Sikatas,

Ketus and Aruṇas-they attained Svarga by self study. (M.B., Śānti Parva,

Chapter 26, Verse 7).

aruṇa 4 IV A serpent. Karkkoṭaka, Vāsuki, Takṣaka, Pṛthuśravas, Aruṇa,

Kuñjara, Mitra, Śaṁkha, Kumuda, Puṇḍarīka, and the chief of serpents,

Dhṛtarāṣṭra. (M.B., Mausala Parva, Chapter 4, Verse 15).

aruṇa 5 V A Ṛṣi. Taittarīya Āraṇyaka refers to him as born from the flesh

of Brahmā at the time of creation.

aruṇa 6 VI A Dānava (Asura) born in the dynasty of Vipracitti. He did

tapas for long years repeating the Gāyatrī mantra, and got from Brahmā

the boon not to die in war. Becoming very arrogant on account of this

boon he left Pātāla (nether region) for the earth and deputed a

messenger to challenge Indra for war. At that time a heavenly voice

called out that as long as Aruṇa did not give up the Gāyatrī he could not

be worsted in war. Then the Devas sent Bṛhaspati to Aruṇa to make him

give up Gāyatrī. Aruṇa questioned Bṛhaspati as to why he of the enemy

camp had come to him (Aruṇa). Bṛhaspati replied: «You and I are not

different; both of us are worshippers of Gāyatrī Devī. Being told so Aruṇa

gave up worship of Gāyatrī Devī, and she felt offended at this and sent

thousands of beetles against him. Thus, without fighting Aruṇa and his

army were extinguished. (Devī Bhāgavata).

aruṇa 7 VII A son of Narakāsura. When Narakāsura was killed Aruṇa

along with his six brothers fought against Śrī Kṛṣṇa and was killed.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aruṇa aruṇa (akin to arus, cf. aruṣa).

I. adj., f. ṇā and ṇī, Tawny, dark red, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2; Rām. 3,

5, 7.

II. m.

1. The dawn, Man. 10, 33.

2. The sun, Śāk. d. 31 (pariṇata-, The setting sun).

3. A proper name, Dev. 11, 49.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aruṇa f. ā (ved. also ī) ruddy, light-brown, yellowish. m. redness, pers. as

Aruṇa, the Dawn, conceived as the charioteer of the Sun; the Sun itself;

N. of an old teacher etc. f. ī a red cow; the dawn. n. redness, gold, ruby.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aruṇa ar-uṇa, a. (ā; V. also ī) ruddy; lightbrown; golden; m. redness;

dawn (personified as charioteer of the sun); sun;

-kara, m. sun;

-tā, f. redness;

-psu, a. ruddy.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aruṇa pu° ṛ—unan . 1 sūrye, 2 sūryasārathau, 3 guḍe, 4 sandhyārāge 5

niḥśabde, 6 dānavabhede 7 kuṣṭhabhede, 8 punnāgavṛkṣe . 9 avyaktarāge

10 kṛṣṇamiśritaraktavarṇe ca 11 tadvati tri° . 12 kuṅkume, 13 sindūre ca

na° . 14 mañjiṣṭhāyām 15 śyāmākāyām, 16 ativiṣāyām 17 nadībhede 18

kadambapuṣpāyāñca strī . 19 trivṛtāyāṁ medi° 20 indravāruṇyām 21

guñjāyāṁ rājani° 22 muṇḍatiktāyām ca strī . tatra anūrau vibhāvarī

yadyaruṇāya kalpate kumā° yāvat pratāpanidhirākramate na

bhānurahnāya tāvadaruṇena tamonirastam raghuḥ .

tārkṣyaścāriṣṭanemiśca garuḍaśca mahābalaḥ aṁruṇaścāruṇiścaiva

vinatāyāḥ sutāḥ smṛtāḥ hari° aruṇogaruḍabhrātā javāpuṣpasamaprabhaḥ

. yogānāñcaiva sarveṣāṁ sādhyānāmadhipaḥ kṛtaḥ hariva° .

tadutpattyādikathā anūruśabde 191 uktā . sūrye saṁsṛjyate

sarijairaruṇāśubhinnaiḥ raghuḥ rāgeṇa bālāruṇakomalena kumā° . varṇe

tadvati ca nayanānyaruṇāni ghūrṇayan kumā° aruṇapuṣpāṇi phālgunāni

śata° brā° . dadhat sandhyāruṇavyomasphurattārānukāriṇīḥ māghaḥ .

dvādaśādityamadhye māghamāsādhipe 23 ādityabhede aruṇo

māghamāse vai ādityahṛdayam vivaraṇamādityaśabde . 24 deśabhede

pu° . dhūmādi° vuñ . āruṇakaḥ tadbhave tri° guṇavacanāt bhāve imanic

aruṇimā pu° ṣyañ āraṇyam na° . tal aruṇatā strī tva aruṇatvam na° .

raktādivarṇe . apatye iñ . āruṇiḥ jaṭāyau sūryaputremande yame

karṇevaivasvatamanau sugrīve ṛṣibhede ca . aśvinākumārayoḥ dvi° va°

yamunāyāṁ tapatyāṁ ca strī guṇavacanāt bhṛśā° abhūtatdbhāvekyaṅ

aruṇāyate aruṇāyamānaḥ . gaurā° ṅīṣ . 25 aruṇavarṇāyāṁ gavi strī .

aruṇyogāva uṣasāsamiti niruktoktāyām 26 ūṣāyāmapi strī . 27

mandaragiristhe sarovare tasya cāruṇajalatvāttathātvam

sarāṁsyathaiteṣvaruṇañca mānasaṁ mahāhradaḥ śvetajalaṁ

yathākramāt si° śi° . eteṣu mandarādiviṣkambhaśaileṣu

guḍakuṅkumasindūrādīnāñcāruṇavarṇatvāttathātvam .

अवदात — avadāta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899avadāta «ava-dāta» mfn. ( «das»), cleansed, clean, clear

mfn. pure, blameless, excellent &c., of white splendour, dazzling

white

mfn. clear, intelligible

avadāta «ava-dāta» m. white colour

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

avadāta a. [ava-dai-kta]

(1) Beautiful; avadātakāṁtiḥ Dk. 107, 37.

(2) Clean, clear, pure, spotless, refined, purified, polished;

sarvavidyāvadātacetāḥ K. 36; so vidyāvadātaṁ mukhaṁ; śāstra-.

(3) Bright, white; āpiśaṁgāvadātayā dehaprabhayā K. 36, 65, 128,

187, 189, 43, 62, 95; rajanikarakalāvadātaṁ kulaṁ K. 233; kuṁdāvadātāḥ

kalahaṁsamālāḥ Bk. 2. 18; cf. also Bh. 2. 25; Ki. 11. 75, 3. 25; 13. 37;

Śānti. 3. 14.

(4) Virtuous, meritorious; anyasmiñ janmani na kṛtamavadātaṁ karma

K. 62.

(5) Yellow. —taḥ White or yellow colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

avadāta (von dā, dāyati mit ava) adj. 1) «rein» AK. 3, 4, 83. H. 1436. an.

4, 92. MED. t. 178. karuṇāvadāte (hṛdi) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 14. PRAB. 35, 10.

DHŪRTAS. 67, 3. BHAṬṬ. 2, 18. — 2) «weiss» oder «gelb» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22.

3, 4, 83. H. 1393. an. MED. śyāmāvadāta SĀV. 5, 8. R. 5, 14, 23. Als m.

die Farbe in abstr. — 3) «angenehm» (manojña) H. an.

avadāta 4) «klar, deutlich, verständlich» SĀH. D. 124, 14. 268, 11. — Vgl.

u. 7. dā mit ava.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

avadāta a. clean, pure, white, clear.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

avadāta ava-dāta, pp. pure, white, clear: -tā, f. whiteness;

-dāna, n. heroic deed;

-dā-ra, m. breach: -ṇa, n. a. rending; bursting.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

avadāta pu° ava + dai—kta . 1 śubhre, 2 pīte ca varṇe . 3 tadvati 4

viśuddhe anyasmin janmani ca na kṛtamavadātam kāda° . 5 manojñe ca

tri° .

असित — asita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita «a-sita» mfn. unbound

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («sita», «white», appears to have been

formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of

«a» and «sita»; cf. «asura» and «sura»), dark-coloured, black &c.

asita m. the planet Saturn

asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse)

asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic

asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala

([]) or Asita Devala ([

asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa)

asita m. of a son of Bharata

asita m. of a ṛiṣi

asita m. of a mountain

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («as») m. a black snake

asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes)

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («ā») f. a girl attending in the women’s

apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age)

asita m. the indigo plant

asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («asiknī») f. «the dark one», the night

asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments

asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha

asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the

Paṇjāb («asiknī») x, 75, 5.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

asita a.

(1) Unbound(Ved).

(2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured;

asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. —taḥ

(1) The dark or blue colour.

(2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month.

(3) N. of the planet Saturn.

(4) A black snake.

(5) N. of the sage devala.

(6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. —tā

(1) The Indigo plant.

(2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by

age); see asiknī.

(3) The river Yamunā.

(4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha.

(5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab.

— Comp.

—aṁbujaṁ, —utpalaṁ the blue lotus.

—aciṁs m. fire.

—aśman, m.

—upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli.

—keśā a woman having black hair.

—keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair.

—giriḥ, —nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain.

—grīva a. having a black neck. (

—vaḥ) fire.

—ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees.

—nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112.

—pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173.

—phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut.

—bhrū a. having black eye-lids.

—mṛgaḥ the black antelope.

—yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. «ungebunden» ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6.

7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21.

asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form

auch klass. KĀŚ. «dunkelfarbig, schwarz» (als m. «Schwärze») NIR. 9, 26.

AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ)

gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73,

5. viśa asiknīḥ («das dunkle Volk» heissen «die Geister des Dunkels») 7, 5,

3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7,

1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12,

46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3,

4. anantā raśmayastasya — sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ.

3, 166. pakṣa «die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes» H. 147. — 2)

m. a) «der Planet Saturn» H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K.

d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des «Dunkels» und Zauberers:

asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ

(keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito

dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. —

ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5—

24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ

cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht

im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR.

14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn

Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen

Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER,

Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā.

a) = asiknī «b.» (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b)

«die Indigo-Pflanze» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu

H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) «die Dunkle,

Nacht» NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ

yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) «eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren

Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem» AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H.

521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s

HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab,

Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau

yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe

vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. —

Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita «weiss», aber dieses letztere Wort

ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl

dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet

hat.

asita m. «eine schwarze Schlange» AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72,

1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2:

keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die

richtige Betonung sein.

asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1.

asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18.

KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) «ein best. zu den

Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19.

asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

asita [1] a. unbound.

asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth.

being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.;

-pakṣa, m. dark half of a month;

-pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow;

-aś-man, m. sapphire;

-īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed;

-utpala, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne

tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau

antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp

kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ

sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5

yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare

śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6

devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā .

asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari°

18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ .

aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ

sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ

sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat .

pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā

pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā

tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu

sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ

trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ

sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī

. mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu

devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya

dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye

mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca

subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° .

आपीत — āpīta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899āpīta «ā-pīta» mfn. drunk up, exhausted.

āpīta «ā-pīta» mfn. yellowish

āpīta «ā-pīta» m. N. of a species of tree

āpīta «ā-pīta» n. filament of the lotus

āpīta «ā-pīta» n. a pyritic mineral

āpīta «ā-pīta» n. (for 1. «ā-pīta» see under «ā-pā», and for 3. «ā-pīta»

under «ā-pyat»).

āpīta «ā-pīta» mfn. swollen out, puffed up, distended, full, stout, fat

āpīta «ā-pīta» mfn. (for 2. «āpīta» see s.v.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

āpīta a.

(1) Yellowish.

(2) Drunk or sipped a little (as water). —taḥ Yellowish colour. —taṁ A

pyritic mineral (mākṣikadhātu).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

āpīta (2. ā + pīta) 1) adj. «gelblich.» — 2) n. «ein schwefelhaltiges

Mineral» (mākṣikadhātu) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

āpīta [1] a. yellowish.

āpīta [2] a. turgid, swelled, full.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

āpīta ā-pīta, a. yellowish: -ya, den. P. give a yellowish colouring to.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

āpīta na° īṣat pītam prā° ta° . mākṣike dhātau . 2 īṣatpītavarṇe pu° 3

tadvati tri° . īṣat pānaṁ kṛtaṁ yasya tādṛśe 4 jalādau tri° .

उकनाह — ukanāha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ukanāha m. a horse of a red and yellow or red and black colour, a bay or

chestnut horse

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ukanāha m. «ein hell»- oder «dunkelbraunes Pferd» H. 1241. — Wohl ein

Fremdwort.

उकानहः — ukānahaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

ukānahaḥ A horse of a red and yellow (or red and black) colour, a bay or

chesnut horse.

ऊर्ध्वपुण्ड्र — ūrdhvapuṇḍra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ūrdhvapuṇḍra «ūrdhva-puṇḍra» n. = «-tilaka» above.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ūrdhvapuṇḍra (ū- + pu-) m. «eine auf der Stirn eines Brahmanen mit

Sandel u.s.w. senkrecht gezogene Linie» BRAHMĀṆḌA-P. im ĀHNIKAT.

ŚKDR. -puṇḍraka dass. DHŪRTAS. 70, 11.

ūrdhvapuṇḍra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,46. 248,a,26. 258,b,9. 267,b,10. 19.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

ūrdhvapuṇḍra A mark worn on the forehead with yellow ochre. This mark

should be made by earth or ochre, which should be taken from the top of

a mountain peak, banks of rivers, seashore, Śaivite temple serpent-hill or

from under a holy basil. The fruits of wearing the mark will vary according

to the colour of the ochre. Black ochre will afford peace, red soil will

procure docility, yellow soil will get prosperity, and white ochre will give

duty or righteousness. As the fruits vary according to the colour, so also

it will vary according to the finger used to put the sign. If the mark is

made with the thumb the man will become stout. If it is done with the

middle finger he will have long life. If it is done with the fourth finger

(anāmikā), he will get food and if it is made with the index finger (tarjanī)

he will get salvation. The form of the mark also could be changed. The

mark may be made in the form of a flame, the leaf of bamboo reed, a

lotus-bud, a fish, a turtle or a conch. If the mark is as large as ten

fingerbreadths it is superfine. If of nine finger-breadths, it is medium

super-fine; and if it is eight and a half fingerbreadths, it is lower

superfine. In the same way if the finger-breadth of the mark is seven, six

or five they will be super medium, medium medium and lower medium. If

it is four, three and two they will be of the low, medium low and lowest.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ūrdhvapuṇḍra m. the perpendicular line on the forehead of a Brahman.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ūrdhvapuṇḍra pu° ūrdhva ūrdhvamukhaḥ puṇḍraḥ ikṣuyaṣṭiriva .

lalāṭasthe ūrdhvamukhe puṇḍrekṣavat rekhātmake tilakabhede .

taddhāraṇe vidhiniṣedhādikaṁ nirūpyate . ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ mṛdā kṛryāt

tripuṇḍraṁ bhasmanā sadā . tilakaṁ vai dvijaḥ kuryāccandanena

yaddṛcchayā śrā° ta° pu° . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ dvijaḥ kuryāt kṣatriyastu

tripuṇḍrakam . ardhacandrantu vaiśyaśca vartulaṁ śudrayonijaḥ ā° ta°

brahmā° pu° . aśucirvāpya nācāro manasā pāpamācaran . śucireva

bhavennityamūrdhapuṇḍrāṅkitonaraḥ ūrdhapuṇḍradharo martyomriyate

yatra kutracit . śvapāko’pi vimānastho mama loke mahīyate iti brahmapu°

. taddhāraṇe vaidikadvijātiriktasyaivādhikāraḥ yathoktaṁ devībhāgavate

śrīnārāyaṇena ūrdhapuṇḍraṁ triśūlañca vartulaṁ caturasrakam .

ardhacandrādi vā liṅgaṁ vedaniṣṭho na dhārayet! janmanā labdhajātistu

vedapanthānamāśritaḥ . puṇḍrāntaraṁ bhramādvāpi lalāṭe naiva dhārayet

. khyātikāntyādisiddhyarthamapi viṣṇvāvagamādiṣu . sthitaṁ

puṇḍrāntaraṁ naiva ghārayedvaidikojanaḥ . ni° si° sūtasaṁ°

viṣṇvāgamāditantreṣu dīkṣitānāṁ vidhīyate .

śaṅkhacakragadāpadmairaṅkanaṁ nānyadehinām .

vedamārgaikaniṣṭhastu mohenāpyaṅkitoyadi . patatyeva na sandeha

stathā puṇḍrāntarādapi . śaṅkhacakrādyaṅkanaṁ ca gītanṛtyādikaṁ tathā

. ekajāterayaṁ gharmo naṁ jātu syāt dvijanmanaḥ . śaṅkhacakramṛdā

yastu kuryāt taptāyasena vā . sa śūdravadbahiḥ kāryaḥ

sarvasmāddvijacarmaṇaḥ yathā śmaśānajaṁ kāṣṭhamanarhaṁ

sarvakarmasu . dvijastu taptaśaṅkhādiliṅgāṅkitatanustathā . saṁbhāṣya

kauravaṁ yāti yāvadindrāścaturdaśa vṛhannā° . śivakeśavayoraṅkān

śūlacakrādikān dvijaḥ . na dhārayeta matimān vaidike vartmani sthitaḥ

tataśca tripuṇḍrādidhāraṇavidhāyakavākyaṁ vaidiketaradvijaviṣayam

śūdraviṣayañca . yadapi brāhmaṇasya taddhāraṇavidhānam agnihotraṁ

yathā nityaṁ vedasyādhyayanaṁ yathā . brāhmaṇasya tatheveha

taptamudrādidhāraṇam padmapu° . brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo vaiśyaḥ śūdro vā

yadi vetaraḥ . śaṅkhacakrāṅkitatanustulasīmañjarīdharaḥ .

gopīcandanaliptāṅgodṛṣṭaścettadaghaṁ kutaḥ kāśī° . tadapi

vaidiketavavipraparam sarvasāmañjasyāt evaṁ śastrārthesthite’pi

kulācārāt tasyasarvaiḥ kartavyatā . tathaiva bhārataṭīkāyāṁ nīlakaṇṭhena

nirṇītam yathā śroṇāmeka udakaṁ gāmavājati māṁsamekaḥ piṁśati

sūnayā bhṛtam ā nimrucaḥ śakṛdeko apābharat kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ

pitarāvupāvatuḥ śrutiḥ . asyārthaḥhe ṛbhavaḥ! bhavatāṁ madhve ekaḥ

śroṇāṁ ślakṣṇāṁ gāṁ mṛdaṁ gopīcandranādirūpāṁ tīrtha nikaṭasthāṁ

mukhyakarmabhūtāṁ prati udakaṁ jalaṁ gauṇakarma avājati

avagamayati antarbhāvitaṇyartho’jatiḥ . śrīṇāṁ gām udakena

miśrayatītyarthaḥ śroṇāṁ gāṁ raktacandanādirūpāṁ vā tathā . ekaḥ

sūnayā hiṁsayā tatkartrā ābhṛtaṁ āhṛtaṁ māṁsaṁ gorocanākhyaṁ

piṁśati pinaṣṭi udakena saha iti śeṣaḥ nimrucaḥ nitarāmastaṁ gacchato

dagdhendhanasyāgneḥ sambandhi śakṛt gomayaṁ śuṣkagomayotthaṁ

bhasmeti yāvat apābharat apāhṛtavān atrāpyudakena saheti śeṣaḥ

vyavahitāścetichandasi vyavahitenāpyupasargeṇa kriyāyāḥ sambandha .

hṛgraho rbhaśchandasīti hasyabha . etāni mantrapadāni

asaṁpūrṇārthatvāt svārthalābhāya brāhmaṇamapekṣante iṣe tvorje

tvetyādimantravat tatra yathā iṣe tveti śākhāṁ chinatti ūrje

tvetyanumārṣṭīti brāhmaṇānusārāt he śākhe tvā tvām iṣe annāya

chinadmīti ūrje paśubhyaḥ anumājrmīti vyākhyātam evamihāpi

vāsudevopaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusārāt

ūrdhapuṇḍrārthaṁ ślakṣṇāṁ mṛdaṁ jalena miśrayediti vyākhyeyaṁ tathā

kālāgnirudravṛhajjābālādyupaniṣadbrāhmaṇatantrapurāṇopavṛṁhaṇānusā

rāt tripuṇḍrakartuḥ nimrucaḥ śakṛdapābharaditi ca vyākhyeyam

evamitarasyāpi padasya brāhmaṇamantraliṅgādyupavṛṁhaṇe

smṛtibhyaścāṣṭakāprapā vidhivadanumeyaṁ tathāca śroṇāmiti padasya

raktāmiti vyākhyāne sauraśāktagāṇeśānāṁ raktameva pārthivaṁ dravya

puṇḍrārthe tattattantre vidhīyate vaiṣṇavānāṁ pītaṁ śaivānāṁ bhasmeti

anena tattatpuṇḍraviśeṣopalakṣitatattaddevatā bhajanenāpi

devatābhāvaṁ prāpnuvantīti vighīyate . kevalavaidikānāṁ tu śroṇāṁ

ślakṣṇāmiti vyākhyānena tritayasyāpi samuccayaḥ snātvā puṇḍraṁ mṛdā

kuryāt dhutvā caiba tu bhasmanā . devān viprān samabhyarcya

candanena samācarediti smṛtibhyaḥ atra gorocanāgrahaṇaṁ

candanādyaṣṭagandhopalakṣaṇārtham eteṣāṁ

vikalpasamuccayapakṣāṇāṁ pitṛpaitāha paraṁparākrameṇa

vyavasthāmāha kiṁ svit putrebhyaḥ pitarā vupāvaturiti putrahitārthe

yatkiñcidvrataṁ pitarau mātā pitarau pitṛpitāmahau vā upetya svīkṛtya

avatuḥ vrataṁ samyak paripālayāmāsatuḥ tadeva tasya śreyaḥ sādhanati

tyarthaḥ evaṁ sati tīrthāni yajñādayastantramārgeṇa

sūryādyanyatamopāstiḥ kevalavaidikatā ceti devatābhāvaprāptisādhanāni

ityantena . śrāddhakarmaṇi tu tripuṇḍrādau vidhiniṣedhayorvyavasthā ni°

si° uktā yathā . jape home tathā dāne svādhyāye pitṛkarmaṇi . tatsarvaṁ

naśyati kṣipramūrdhvapuṇḍrabinākṛtamiti hemādrāvukteḥ . yajñodānaṁ

japo homaḥ svādhyāyaḥ pitṛkarma ca . vṛthā bhavati viprendrā!

ūrdhvapuṇḍravinākṛtamiti vṛhannāradīyāt ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryāddaive

pitnye ca karmaṇīti vṛddhaparāśarokteśca ūrdhapuṇḍradhāraṇaṁ paitre

vihitam . anye tu ūrdhvapuṇḍrodvijātīnāmagnihotrasamovidhiḥ .

śrāddhakāle ca saṁprāpte kartā bhoktā ca varjayediti vāmahaste ca ye

darbhā gṛhe raṅgabalintathā . lalāṭe tilakaṁ dṛṣṭvā nirāśāḥ pitaro gatāḥ

iti saṁgrahokteḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁ tripuṇḍraṁvā candrākāramathāpi vā .

śrāddhakartā na kurvīta yāvat piṇḍānna nirvapet iti viśvaprakāśe

vacanācca na dhāryamityāhuḥ . atra kulācārādeva vyavasthā . ata eva

vṛhannāradoyeḥ ūrdhvapuṇḍrañca tulasīṁ śrāddhe necchanti kecana

ityatrṛkecanetyuktam ūrdhvapuṇḍravidhiḥ śrāddhabhoktṛparaḥ, niṣedhaḥ

kartṛparaḥ iti pṛthvīcandraḥ . yattu hemādrau devalaḥ lalāṭe puṇḍrakaṁ

vṛṣṭvā skandhe mālyaṁ tathaiva ca . nirāśā pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā ca

vṛṣalīpatimiti . tadgandhatripuṇḍraviṣayam . prākipaṇḍadānāt

gandhādyairnālaṅkuryātsvavigraham ityāśvalāyanokteḥ puṇḍraṁ

vartulamityaparārke madanaratne ca . pṛthvīcandrastu puṇḍraṁ

tripuṇḍram ūrdhvañca tilakaṁ kuryānna kuryādvai tripuṇḍrakam . nirāśāḥ

pitaro yānti dṛṣṭvā caiva tripuṇḍrakamiti vṛddhaparāśarokteḥ .

bhoktustiryaglapo bhavatyeva . varjayettilakaṁ bhāle śrāddhakāle ca

sarvadā . ūrdhvapuṇḍraṁtripuṇḍraṁ vā dhārayettu prayatnataḥ iti

vyāsokterityāha . pṛthvīcandrodaye brāhme sahadarbheṇa hastena yaḥ

kuryāttilakaṁ budhaḥ . ācamya sa viśudhyeta darbhatyāgena caiva hi .

एक — eka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899eka mfn. («i» , probably fr. a base «e»; cf. Zd. ‘ae-va’; Gk. [greek]; Goth.

‘ai-n-s’; also Lat. ‘aequu-s’; g. «sarvādi» ; see Gr. 200), one («eko’pi», or

«ekaś-cana», with «na» preceding or following, no one, nobody; the words

«ekayā na» or «ekān na» are used before decade numerals to lessen them

by one e.g. «ekān na tṛṁśat», twenty-nine) &c.

eka mfn. (with and without «eva») alone, solitary, single, happening only

once, that one only (frequently ifc.; cf. «dharmaika-rakṣa», &c.) &c.

mfn. the same, one and the same, identical &c.

mfn. one of two or many («eka» — «eka, eka» — «dvitīya», the one — the

other; esp. pl. «eke», some, «eke» — «apare» some — others, &c.) &c.

eka mfn. («eka» repeated twice, either as a compound [cf. «ekaika»] or

uncompounded, may have the sense «one and one», «one by one» &c.)

mfn. single of its kind, unique, singular, chief, pre-eminent, excellent

&c.

mfn. sincere, truthful

mfn. little, small

eka mfn. (sometimes used as an indefinite article), a, an &c. (the fem.

of «eka» before a Taddhita suffix and as first member of a compound is

«eka» not «ekā»

eka m. N. of a teacher

eka m. of a son of Raya

eka n. unity, a unit (ifc.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

eka pron. a. [i-kan]

(1) One, single, alone, only; Bh. 3. 14.

(2) Not accompanied by any one; U. 2. 28.

(3) The same, one and the same, identical; ekānvayo mama S. 7;

manasyekaṁ vacasyekaṁ karmaṇyekaṁ mahātmanāṁ H. 1. 101.

(4) Firm, unchanged; Pt. 1. 260.

(5) Single of its kind, unique, singular.

(6) Chief, supreme, prominent, sole; -pārthiva, -dhanurdharaḥ, —

aiśvarya M. 1. 1 sole sovereignty; eko rāgiṣu rājate Bh. 3. 121.

(7) Peerless, matchless.

(8) One of two or many; Me. 30, 78.

(9) Oft. used like the English indefinite article ‘a’ or ‘an’; jyotirekaṁ S.

5. 30. (10) True.

(11) Little. Oft. used in the middle of comp. in the sense of ‘only’, with

an adjectival or adverbial force; doṣaikadṛk looking only to faults;

tvadekeṣu Ku. 3. 15 your arrow only; so bhogaikabaddhaspṛhaḥ. ekaḥ-

anyaḥ, or aparaḥ the one-the other; it is used in the plural in the sense of

some, its correlative being anye or apare (others); Śi. 12. 45; see anya,

apara also. —kaḥ N. of Viṣṇu, the Supreme being. —kā N. of Durgā. [cf.

Persian yak; L. oequus].

— Comp.

—aṁśaḥ a separate part, part in general.

—akṣa a. 1. having only one axle. —2. having one eye. —3. having

an excellent eye. (

—kṣaḥ) 1. a crow. —2. N. of Śiva.

—akṣara a. monosyllabic. (

—raṁ) 1. a monosyllable. —2. the sacred syllable om; Ms. 2. 83. —

kośaḥ a vocabulary of monosyllabic words by Purushottamadeva. —

rabhīvaḥ the production of only one syllable, contraction.

—agra a. 1. fixed on one object or point only. —2. closely attentive,

concentrated, intent; tadgītaśravaṇaikāgrā R. 15. 66; K. 49; Bg. 18. 72;

manumekāgramāsīnaṁ Ms. 1. 1. —3. unperplexed. —4. known,

celebrated. —5. single-pointed. (

—graḥ) (in Math.) the whole of the long side of a figure which is

subdivided. -citta, —manas a. with a concentrated mind, with undivided

attention. -cittaṁ, -cittatā intentness of purpose, concentration of mind.

-dṛṣṭi a. fixing one’s eye on one spot.

—agrya = -a gra. (—gryaṁ) concentration.

—aṁgaḥ 1. a body-guard. —2. the planet Mercury or Mars. —3. N.

of Viṣṇu. (

—gaṁ) 1. a single member or part. —2. sandal wood. —3. the head.

—aṁgikā preparation made with sandal-wood.

—aṁḍaḥ a kind of horse.

—adhipatiḥ a sole monarch or sovereign.

—anaṁśā the only (day) receiving no part of the moon, an epithet

of Kuhū or day of new moon (born together with Kṛṣṇa and worshipped

with Kṛṣṇa and Baladeva and identified with Durga).

—anudiṣṭa a. 1. left as a funeral feast or one who has recently

partaken in it. (

—ṣṭaṁ) a funeral ceremony performed for only one ancestor

(recently dead).

—aṁta a. 1. solitary, retired. —2. aside, apart. —3. directed

towards one point or object only. —4. excessive, great; —

śaityātkadalīviśeṣāḥ Ku. 1. 36. —5. worshipping only only. —6. absolute,

invariable, perpetual; svāyattamekāṁtaguṇaṁ Bh. 2. 7; kasyaikāṁtaṁ

sukhamupagataṁ Me. 109. (

—taḥ) 1. a lonely or retired place, solitude; vyoma- vihāriṇaḥ Pt. 2.

20; H. 1. 52. —2. exclusiveness. —3. an invariable rule or course of

conduct or action; Pt. 3. 7. —4. exclusive aim or boundary. (

—taṁ) an exclusive recourse, a settled rule or principle; tejaḥ

kṣamā vā naikāṁtaṁ kālajñasya mahīpateḥ Śi. 2. 83. (

—taṁ, —tena, —tataḥ, —te) ind. 1. solely, exclusively, invariably,

always, absolutely. —2. exceeding, quite, wholly, very much;

vayamapyekāṁtato niḥspṛhāḥ Bh. 3. 24; duḥkhamekāṁtato vā Me. 109;

oft. in comp.; -vidhvaṁsin sure or destined to perish; R. 2. 57; -bhīru Mu.

3. 5 always timid; so ekāṁtakaruṇa very weak &c. —3. alone, apart,

privately. -bhūta being alone or solitary. -mati a. devoted to one object

only. -vihārin a. a solitary wanderer. -suṣamā ‘containing exclusively good

years’, a division of time with Jainas. -sthita a. staying or remaining

apart.

—aṁtara a. next but one, separated by one remove; S. 7. 27; V. 1.

(

—raḥ) a kind of fever.

—aṁtika a. final, conclusive.

—aṁtitvaṁ devotion to one object.

—aṁtin a. devoted to one object only. (—m.) a worshipper of

Viṣṇu.

—annaṁ one and the same food. (—nnaḥ), —ādin a mess-mate.

—abdā a heifer one year old.

—ayana a. 1. passable for only one (as a foot-path). —2. fixing

one’s thoughts on one object, closely attentive, intent; see ekāgra. (—

naṁ) 1. a lonely or retired place. —2. a meeting. —place, rendezvous. —3.

union of thoughts. —4. monotheism. —5. the sole object; sā snehasya

ekāyanībhūtā M. 2. 15; ekāyanībhūya Mv. 4 with one accord,

unanimously. -gata = ekāyana q. v.

—arṇavaḥ general flood, universal deluge.

—artha a. 1. having one and the same meaning, having the same

object in view; Śi. 2. 114. (

—rthaḥ) 1. the same thing, object, or intention. —2. the same

meaning. —3. N. of a glossary.

—avama a. inferior or less by one.

—avayava a. made up of the same components.

—aśīta or -titama a. eighty-first.

—aśītiḥ f. eighty-one.

—aṣṭakā 1. the first or chief Aṣṭakā after the full moon. —2. the

eighth day of the dark fortnight in the month of Māgha (on which a

śrāddha is to be performed).

—aṣṭhīla a. having one kernel. (

—laḥ) N. of a plant (vakavṛkṣa). —ahan (haḥ) 1. the period of one

day. —2. a sacrifice lasting for one day. -gamaḥ, -adhvā a day’s journey.

—ātapatra a. characterized by only one umbrella (showing

universal sovereignty); ekātapatraṁ jagataḥ prabhutvaṁ R. 2. 47. -trāṁ

bhuvaṁ 18. 4; K. 206; Śi. 12; 33; V. 3. 19.

—ātman a. depending solely on one-self, solitary.

—ādeśaḥ one substitute for two or more letters (got by either

dropping one vowel, or by the blending of both); as the ā in ekāyana. —

āyu a. 1. providing the most excellent food. —2. the first living being.

—āvaliḥ, —lī f. 1. a single string of pearls, beads &c.; ekāvalī

kaṁṭhavibhūṣaṇaṁ vaḥ Vikr. 1. 30; latāviṭape ekāvalī lagnā V. 1. —2. (in

Rhetoric) a series of statements in which there is a regular transition

from a predicate to a subject, or from a subject to a predicate;

sthāpyate’pohyate vāpi yathāpūrvaṁ pararaparaṁ . viśeṣaṇatayā yatra

vastu saikāvalī dvidhā .. K. P. 10; cf. Chandr. 5. 103-4; netre

karṇātaviśrāṁte karṇau doḥstaṁbhadolitau &c. and Bk. 2. 19.

—uktiḥ f. a single expression or word.

—uttara a. greater or increasing by one.

—udakaḥ (a relative) connected by the offering of funeral libations

of water to the same deceased ancestor; Ms. 5. 71.

—udaraḥ, —rā uterine, (brother or sister).

—udātta a. having one Udātta accent.

—uddiṣṭaṁ a Śrāddha or funeral rite performed for one definite

individual deceased, not including other ancestors; Ms. 4. 110.

—ūna a. less by one, minus one.

—ṛc a. consisting of one verse (ṛc). —eka a. one by one, one taken

singly, a single one; ekekamapyanarthāya kimu tatra catuṣṭayaṁ H. Pr.

11; R. 17. 43. (—kaṁ) -ekaikaśaḥ, ind. one by one, singly, severally; S. 6.

11; -kaṁ nirdiśan S. 7 pointing to each severally.

—oghaḥ a continuous current.

—kapāla a. consisting of or contained in one cup.

—kara a. (rī f.) 1. doing only one thing. —2. (

—rā) one-handed. —3. one-rayed.

—kārya a. 1. acting in concert with, cooperating, having made

common cause with; co-worker; asmābhiḥ sahaikakāryāṇāṁ Mu. 2; R.

10. 40. —2. answering the same end. —3. having the same occupation. (

—ryaṁ) sole or same business.

—kālaḥ 1. one time. —2. the same time. (

—laṁ, —le) ind. at one time, at one and the same time. -bhojanaṁ

eating but one meal in any given time.

—kālika, —kālīna a. 1. happening once only. —2. contemporary,

coeval.

—kuṁḍalaḥ N. of Kubera; of Balabhadra: and Śeṣa.

—kuṣṭhaṁ a kind of leprosy; kṛṣṇāruṇaṁ yena bhaveccharīraṁ

tadekakuṣṭhaṁ pravadaṁtyasādhyaṁ Suśr.

—kṣīraṁ the milk of one (nurse &c.).

—gayyaḥ the Supreme spirit.

—guru, —guruka a. having the same preceptor. (

—ruḥ, -rukaḥ) a spiritual brother (pupil of the same preceptor).

—grāma a. living in the same village. (

—maḥ) the same village.

—cakra a. 1. having only one wheel. —2. governed by one king only.

(

—kraḥ) the chariot of the sun. -vartin m. sole master of the whole

universe, universal monarch.

—catvāriṁśat f. forty-one.

—cara a. 1. wandering or living alone, alone; Ki. 13. 3; 3. 53. —2.

having one attendant. —3. living unassisted. —4. going together or at the

same time. —5. gregarious. (

—raḥ) a rhinoceros.

—caraṇa a. having only one foot.

—cārin a. 1. living alone, solitary. —2. going alone or with one

follower only. (

—ṇī) a loyal wife.

—citta a. thinking of one thing only, absorbed in one object. (

—ttaṁ) 1. fixedness of thought upon one object. —2. unanimity;

ekacittībhūya H. 1 unanimously; -tā fixedness of mind, agreement,

unanimity.

—ciṁtanaṁ thinking of only one object.

—cetas, —manas a. unanimous; see -citta. —codana a. resting

upon one rule. (

—naṁ) referring to in the singular number.

—ja a. 1. born alone or single. —2. growing alone (a tree). Pt. 3.

54. —3. alone of its kind. —4. uniform, unchanging.

—jaḥ, —jā a brother or sister of the same parents.

—janman m. 1. a king. —2. a Śūdra; see -jāti below.

—jāta a. born of the same parents.

—jāti a. 1. once born. —2. belonging to the same family or caste. (

—tiḥ) a Śūdra (opp. dvijanman); brāhmaṇaḥ kṣatriyo caiśyastrayo

varṇā dvijātayaḥ . caturtha ekajātistu śūdro nārita tu paṁcamaḥ .. Ms.

10. 4; 8. 270.

—jātīya a. of the same kind or family.

—jyā the chord of an arc: sine of 30-.

—jyotis m. N. of Śiva.

—tāna a. concentrated or fixed on one object only, closely

attentive; brahmaikatānamanaso hi vasiṣṭhamiśrāḥ Mv. 3. 11. (

—naḥ) 1. attention fixed on one object only. —2. musical harmony,

= -tālaḥ. —tālaḥ harmony, accurate adjustment of song, dance, and

instrumental music (cf. tauryatrikaṁ). (

—lī) an instrument for beating time, any instrument having but one

note.

—tīrthin a. 1. bathing in the same holy water. —2. belonging to the

same religious order; Y. 2. 137. (—m.) a fellowstudent, spiritual brother.

—tejana a. Ved. having only one shaft (an arrow).

—triṁśat f. thirty-one; -triṁśa 31st.

—trikaḥ a kind of sacrifice performed in or lasting for a day.

—daṁṣṭraḥ, daṁtaḥ «one-tusked,» epithets of Gaṇeśa.

—daṁḍin m. N. of a class of Sannyāsins or beggars (otherwise

called haṁsa). They are divided into four orders:

—kuṭīcako bahudako haṁsaścaiva tṛtīyakaḥ . caturthaḥ

parahaṁsaśca yo yaḥ paścātsa uttamaḥ .. Harīta.

—diś a. living in the same region or quarter.

—duḥkhasukha a. sympathising, having the same joys and sorrows.

—dṛś, dṛṣṭi a. one-eyed. (—m.) 1. a crow. —2. N. of Śiva. —3. a

philosopher.

—dṛśya a. the sole object of vision, alone being worthy of being

seen.

—dṛṣṭiḥ f. fixed or steady look.

—devaḥ the Supreme god.

—devata, —de(dai) vatya a. devoted, directed, or offered to one

deity.

—deśa a. occupying the same place. (

—śaḥ) 1. one spot or place. —2. a part or portion (of the whole),

one side; -avatīrṇā K. 22; tasyaikadeśaḥ U. 4; Mv. 2; vibhāvitaikadeśena

deyaṁ yadabhiyujyate V. 4. 17 ‘what is claimed should be given by one

who is proved to have got a part of it’; (this is sometimes called

ekadeśavibhāvitanyāya). —deśin a. consisting of parts or portions, divided

into parts.

—deha, —dehin a. 1. having only one body. —2. elegantly formed. (

—haḥ) the planet Mercury.

—dhanaḥ a kind of jug with which water is taken up at certain

religious ceremonies. (

—naṁ) 1. an excellent gift. —2. honorific offering.

—dhanin a. obtaining an honorific offering.

—dharman, —dharmin a. 1. possessing the same properties, of the

same kind. —2. professing the same religion.

—dhura,—dhurāvaha, —dhurīṇa a. 1. fit for but one kind of labour.

—2. fit for but one yoke (as cattle for special burden; P. IV. 4. 79).

—dhurā a particular load or conveyance.

—nakṣatraṁ a lunar mansion consisting of only one star.

—naṭaḥ the principal actor in a drama, the manager (sūtradhāra)

who recites the prologue.

—navataḥ ninety-first.

—navatiḥ f. ninety-one.

—nātha a. having one master. (

—thaḥ) sole master or lord.

—nāyakaḥ N. of Śiva.

—niścaya a. come to the same conclusion or resolution, having the

same aim. (

—yaḥ) general agreement or conclusion, unanimity.

—niṣṭha a. 1. intently devoted or loyal (to one thing). —2. intently

fixed on one object.

—netraḥ N. of Śiva; (one-eyed).

—pakṣa a. 1. of the same side or party, an associate. —2. partial. (

—kṣaḥ) one side or party; -āśrayaviklavatvāt R. 14. 34; -kṣe in one

point of view, in one case.

—patika a. having the same husband.

—paṁcāśat f. fifty-one.

—patnī 1. a faithful wife (perfectly chaste); tāṁ cāvaśyaṁ

divasagaṇanātatpara mekapatnīṁ Me. 10. —2. the wife of a man who has

no other wives; Ms. 5. 158. —3. the wife of the same man; a co-wife;

sarvāsāmekapatnīnāmekā cetputriṇī bhavet Ms, 9. 183. -vrataṁ a vow of

perfect chastity; kāmekapatnīvrataduḥkhaśīlāṁ Ku. 3. 7.

—patrikā the plant Ocimum Gratissimum (gaṁdhapatrā). —pad, —

pād a. 1. one-footed, limping, lame. —2. incomplete. (

—pād) m. N. of Śiva or Viṣṇu. (

—padī) a foot-path (for a single man to walk on).

—pada a. 1. one-footed. —2. consisting of or named in one word. (

—daṁ) 1. a single step. —2. single or simple word. —3. the time

required to pronounce a single word.

(4) present time, same time. (—daḥ) 1. a man having one foot. —2. a

kind of coitus (ratibaṁdha). (—de) ind. suddenly, all at once, abruptly;

nihaṁtyarīnekapade ya udāttaḥ svarāniva Śi. 2. 95; R. 8. 48; K. 45; V. 4.

3. (—dā) a verse consisting of only one Pāda or quarter stanza. (—dī) 1. a

woman having one foot. —2. a Gāyatrī consisting of one Pāda. —para a.

Ved. an epithet of the dice in which one is decisive or of preeminent

importance. —pari ind. one over or under, (a term at dice; cf. akṣapari).

—parṇā 1. N. of a younger sister of Durgā. —2. N. of Durgā. —3. a plant

having one leaf only. —palāśaḥ a single Butea Frondosa. —pāṭalā N. of a

younger sister of Durgā. —pāṇaḥ a single wager. —pāta a. happening at

once, sudden. —pātin a. 1. sudden. —2. standing alone or solitary. (—nī) i.

e. ṛk a verse to be taken by itself or independently of the hymn to which it

belongs. —pāda a. 1. having only one foot. —2. using only one foot. (—

daḥ) 1. one or single foot. —2. one and the same Pāda. —3. N. of Viṣṇu

and Śiva. —pādikā a kind of posture of birds. —piṁgaḥ, —piṁgalaḥ N. of

Kubera, having a yellow mark in place of one eye; (his eye was so made

on account of a curse uttered by Pārvatī when he cast an evil eye at her).

—piṁḍa a. united by the offering of the funeral rice-ball; -tā, -tvaṁ

consanguinity. —putra a. having only one son. —puruṣaḥ 1. the Supreme

being; V. 1. 1. —2. the chief person. —puṣkalaḥ (raḥ) N. of a musical

instrument. —prakāra a. of the same kind. —prakhya a. singularly like. —

prabhutvaṁ sole sovereignty. —prayatnaḥ one effort (of the voice). —

prasthaḥ a measure. —prahārika a. killed by one blow. —prāṇayogaḥ union

in one breath. —buddhi a. having only one thought. —bhakta a. 1. serving

one master only. —2. worshipping one deity. —3. eating together. (—

ktaṁ) N. of a religious ceremony; eating but one meal (a day). -vrataṁ

eating but once a day as a religious observance. —bhakti a. 1. believing in

one deity. —2. firmly devoted. (—f.) eating but one meal a day. —bhāryā a

faithful or chaste wife. (—ryaḥ) one having one wife only. —bhāva a. of

the same or one nature. —2. sincerely devoted. —3. honest, sincerely

disposed. (—vaḥ) 1. one feeling, the same or unchanged devotion; Pt. 1.

285, 3. 65. —2. oneness, agreement. —bhūta a. 1. being one, undivided.

—2. concentrated, closely attentive. —bhūmaḥ a palace having one floor.

—bhojana, —bhukta a. 1. eating but one meal. —2. eating in common. —

mati a. 1. fixed on one object. —2. unanimous, thinking in the same way.

—manas a. 1. thinking with another, of one thought; Mu. 2. 13. —2. fixing

the mind upon one object, closely attentive; ekamanāḥ śrotumarhati

devaḥ M. 2. —mātra a. of one syllable. —mukha a. 2. having the face

directed towards one place or object. —2. having the same aim. —3.

having one chief or head. —4. having one door or entrance (as a

maṁḍapa). (—khaṁ) 1. gambling. —2. a kind of fruit (rudrākṣaphala). —

mūrdhan = -mukha q. v. —mūlā = atasī q. v. —yaṣṭiḥ, yaṣṭikā a single

string of pearls. —yoni a. 1. uterine. —2. of the same family or caste; Ms.

9. 148. —rajaḥ the plant bhṛṁgarāja. —rasa a. 1. finding pleasure only in

one thing, of one flavour; R. 10. 17. —2. of one feeling or sentiment only;

sāhasa- U. 5. 21 influenced only by rashness; vikrama- K. 7;

bhāvaikarasaṁ manaḥ Ku. 5. 82; M. 3. 10; Bv. 2. 155; Śi. 6. 26; V. 1. 9.

—3. of one tenor, stable, equable; Mal. 4. 7; U. 4, 15. —4. solely or

exclusively devoted (to one); abalaikarasāḥ R. 9. 43, 8. 65. (—saḥ) 1.

oneness of aim or feeling. —2. the only flavour or pleasure. (—saṁ) a

drama of one sentiment. —rāj,—rājaḥ m. an absolute king. —rātraḥ a

ceremony lasting one night. (—traṁ) one night. —rātrika a. lasting or

sufficient for one night only. —rāśiḥ 1. a heap, crowd. —2. a sign of the

zodiac. -bhūta a. collected or heaped together. —rikthin m. a coheir; Ms.

9. 162. —rūpa a. 1. of one form or kind, like, similar; Ki. 8. 2, 9. 55. —2.

uniform, one coloured. (—paṁ) one form or kind; -tā uniformity,

invariableness. —rūpya a. formed or arising from one. —liṁgaḥ 1. a word

having one gender only. —2. N. of Kubera. (—gaṁ) a place in which for

five krośas there is but one liṁga (Phallus); paṁcakrośāṁtare yatra na

liṁgāṁtaramīkṣyate . tadekaliṁgamākhyātaṁ tatra siddhiranuttamā ..

Śabdak. —vacanaṁ the singular number. —varṇa a. 1. of one colour. —2.

identical, same. —3. of one tribe or caste. —4. involving the use of one

letter (-samīkaraṇa). (—rṇaḥ) 1. one form. —2. a Brāhmaṇa. —3. a word

of one syllable. —4. a superior caste. (—rṇī) beating time, the instrument

(castanet); -samīkaraṇaṁ an equation involving one unknown quantity.

—varṇika a. 1. of one colour. —2. of one caste. —varṣikā a heifer one year

old. —vastra, —vasana a. having only one garment, in one dress. (—

straṁ) a single garment. —vākyaṁ one or unanimous opinion; ekavākyaṁ

vivavruḥ R. 6. 85 raised a unanimous cry; -tā consistency in meaning,

unanimity, reconciling different statements. —vādaḥ 1. a kind of drum or

tabor. —2. the unitarian doctrine, monotheism. —vāraṁ, —vāre ind. 1. only

once. —2. at once, suddenly. —3. at one time. —viṁśa a. twenty-first;

consisting of twenty-one. (—śaḥ) the Ekavimśastoma. —viṁśatiḥ f.

twenty-one. —vidha a. of one kind; simple. —vilocana a. one-eyed; see

ekadṛṣṭi. —viṣayin m. a rival (having a common object or end in view). —

vīraḥ a pre-eminent warrior or hero; dharma- Mv. 5. 48. —vṛkṣaḥ 1. one

tree. —2. a district in which but one tree is seen for 4 Krośas. —vṛt f.

heaven. —vṛṁdaṁ 1. a peculiar disease of the throat. —2. one heap or

collection. —vṛṣaḥ Ved. the chief bull. —veṇiḥ, —ṇī f. a single braid of hair

(worn by a woman as a mark of her separation from her husband &c.);

gaṁḍābhogātkaṭhinaviṣamāmekaveṇīṁ kareṇa Me. 92; -dharā S. 7;

dhṛta- S. 7. 21. —veśman n. a solitary house or room. —vyavasāyin a.

following the same profession. —śata a. 101st. (—taṁ) 101. —śapha a.

whole-hoofed. (—phaḥ) an animal whose hoof is not cloven (as a horse,

ass &c.). —śaṁraṇaṁ the sole recourse or refuge (especially applied to a

deity). —śarīra a. of one body or blood, consanguineous. -anvayaḥ

consanguineous descent. -avayavaḥ a descendant in a right line, blood-

kinsman. -āraṁbhaḥ commencement of consanguinity by the union of

father and mother. —śākha a. having one branch. (—khaḥ) a Brāhmaṇa of

the same branch or school. —śīrṣan = -mukha q. v. —śuṁga a. having one

sheath. (—gā) N. of a medicinal plant. —śṛṁga a. having only one horn.

(—gaḥ) 1. a unicorn; rhinocerous. —2. N. of Viṣṇu. —3. a class of Pitṛs. —4.

a mountain having one top. —śepaḥ a tree having one root. —śeṣaḥ ‘the

remainder of one’, a species of Dvandva compound in which one of two or

more words only is retained; e. g. pitarau father and mother, parents, (=

mātāpitarau); so śvaśurau, bhrātaraḥ &c. —śruta a. once heard. -dhara a.

keeping in mind what one has heard once. —śrutiḥ f. 1. monotony. —2.

the neutral accentless tone. (—ti) ind. in a monotonous man ner. —śruṣṭi

a. Ved. obedient to one command. —ṣaṣṭa a. sixty-first. —ṣaṣṭiḥ f. sixty-

one. -tama a. sixtyfirst. —saṁstha a. dwelling in one place; R. 6. 29. —

saptata, -titama a. seventyfirst. —saptatiḥ f. seventy-one. —sabhaṁ a

common place of meeting. —sarga a. closely attentive. (—rgaḥ)

concentration. —sahasraṁ 1001 or one thousand. —sākṣika a. witnessed

by one. —sārthaṁ ind. together, in one company. —sūtraṁ N. of a small

double drum played by a string and ball attached to the body of it. —

stomaḥ N. of a soma ceremony. —stha a. 1. being or centred in one

place; Ku. 1. 49; Me. 104 v. l. —2. close-standing, standing side by side;

Pt. 3. 53. —3. collected, combined. —sthānaṁ one or the same place;

ekasthāne prasūte vāk Pt. 4. 5. —haṁsaḥ the chief or highest Hamsa (an

allegorical designation of the soul). —hāyana a. one year old; Mal. 4. 8; U.

3. 28. (—nī) a heifer one year old. (—naṁ) the period of one year.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

eka Uṇ. 3, 43. gaṇa sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. VOP. 3, 9

(Pronominaldeclination). Kann mit seinem nom. compon. werden P. 2, 1,

49. erscheint im comp. und in Ableitungen nie im fem. 6, 3, 62. ekasyā

kṣīram = ekakṣīram, ekasyā āgatam = ekarūpyam Sch. Ableitungen von

compp. mit eka im ersten Gliede 5, 2, 118. 1) adj. num. f. ā «einer; einzig,

alleinig, einmalig; ein und derselbe» AK. 3, 2, 31. 4, 16. 130. H. 872. 873.

1457. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. ekaṁ santamakṛṇutā caturvayam ṚV. 1, 110,

3. 161, 2. śatamekaṁ ca meṣān 117, 18. 8, 49, 9. VS. 27, 33. ŚAT. BR.

14, 4, 3, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 3, 8. 5, 2, 12. M. 2, 43. 3, 29. ekaṁ sadviprā

bahudhā vadanti ṚV. 1, 164, 46. veṣīdeko yudhaye bhūyasaścit 5, 30, 4.

ya eko vasvo varuṇo na rājati 1, 143, 4. tatsaṁbhūya bhavatyekameva

AV. 10, 8, 11. 18, 4, 11. manurevaikaḥ pariśiśiṣe ŚAT. BR. 1, 8, 1, 6. 2, 5,

1, 1. 14, 4, 2, 22. tvameko hyasya sarvasya vidhānasya —

kāryatattvārthavit M. 1, 3. 86. 105. 2, 180. 4, 240. P. 1, 1, 21. R. 1, 1, 3.

6. PAÑCAT. I, 2. upavāsena caikena («einmalig») YĀJÑ. 3, 319. eka eva

R. 3, 28, 15. M. 1, 91. HIT. I, 59. puṇyaikakarman «bei dem die Tugend

die einzige That ist, nur Tugend übend» HIT. I, 80. dharmaikarakṣa R. 2,

73, 19. PAÑCAT. 204, 1. ŚĀK. 114. RAGH. 1, 29. KUMĀRAS. 5, 82.

KATHĀS. 6, 159. 21, 148. VID. 13. H. 859. auch adv. in comp. mit einem

adj. svargaikasaṁmukhī «einzig nur gen Himmel blickend» KATHĀS. 12,

171. madirārasaikasaktā 14, 90. 17, 56. ekānuvākyā bhavatyekā yājyā

«eine und dieselbe» ŚAT. BR. 5, 1, 3, 14. ubhayoreka utkaraḥ KĀTY. ŚR.

5, 3, 17. M. 8, 204. P. 1, 2, 64. R. 2, 33, 17. PAÑCAT. IV, 10. RAGH. 1, 36.

Manchmal in rednerischer Weise, wo nur ein scheinbarer Gegensatz

gegen eine Mehrheit vorhanden ist: viśvānyekaḥ śṛṇavadvacāṁsi me ṚV.

1, 145, 3. ya idaṁ dīrghaṁ prayataṁ sadhasthameko vimame

tribhiritpadebhiḥ 154, 3. subst. «Einheit» im comp. nach dem gezählten

Gegenstande: karapādaikahīnaka «einer Hand und eines Fusses beraubt»

YĀJÑ. 2, 274. Bei Zehnern, von denen Eins abzuziehen ist, tritt eka im

instr. oder acc. fem., im instr. oder abl. (P. 6, 3, 76) neutr. mit na «nicht»

davor: ekayā na triṁśat ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 3, 18. 15. ekāṁ na triṁśat 9, 2,

3, 47. 6, 2, 2, 37. ekāṁnaviṁśatidhā 10, 4, 3, 18. ekāṁnapañcāśadrātra

KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 2, 38. 3, 36. ekena na viṁśatiḥ, ekānnaviṁśati (compon.)

oder ekādbhaviṁśati P. 6, 3, 76, Sch. VOP. 6, 36. In nicht-accentuirtern

Texten (z. B. TAIT. UP. 3, 11 ekānnaviṁśatiḥ) muss es dahingestellt

bleiben, ob ekānna in ekāṁ na oder in ekāt + na zu zerlegen sei. Ueber

eine noch andere Bezeichnungsweise s. u. ūna. — 2) «einzig in seiner Art,

vorzüglich» AK. 3, 4, 16. H. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. amoghaṁ saṁdadhe

cāsmai dhanuṣyekadhanurdharaḥ. brāhmamastram RAGH. 12, 97. MEGH.

31. eko mantrī bhavānyena hantuṁ māṁ na kṛtā matiḥ KATHĀS. 5, 44.

adv. in comp. mit einem adj.: ekadṛśya KUMĀRAS. 7, 64. ekaprakhya

«vorzüglich —, ganz ähnlich» ad MEGH. 86. — 3) «einer unter zweien oder

mehreren» (vgl. ekatara, ekatama); in der Wiederholung (das erste verb.

fin. kann im Veda den Ton erhalten nach P. 8, 1, 65) oder wechselnd mit

anya, apara, itara, dvitīya «der eine, — der andere, einer — ein anderer», =

anya AK. 3, 2, 32. 4, 16. H. 1468. an. 2, 2. MED. k. 17. sa devatānāmeko

bhavati ŚAT. BR. 3, 2, 2, 22. 8, 1, 4, 9. 11, 5, 1, 12. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 13, 9.

13, 3, 5. 14, 3, 15. 26, 4, 3. CHĀND. UP. 3, 6, 3. tasmāttu

mithunādekamāgatyānupalakṣitaḥ. jaghāna R. 1, 2, 13. 18. vasūnāṁ vā

bhavāneko rudrāṇāmatha vā bhavān MBH. 3, 17421.

dharmārthakāmamokṣāṇāṁ yasyaiko ‘pi na vidyate HIT. Pr. 25. N. 1, 18.

5, 14. tadekamapi («irgend eines von diesen») dūṣaṇaṁ tvayi na lakṣyate

HIT. 25, 10. trīṇi jānā pari bhūṣantyasya samudra ekaṁ divyekamapsu

ṚV. 1, 95, 3. gomāyureko ajamāyurekaḥ pṛśnireko harita eka eṣām 7,

103, 6. 1, 161, 9. AV. 4, 37, 11. 5, 28, 6. calatyekena pādena

tiṣṭhatyekena buddhimān HIT. I, 97. eka — anya ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 5. HIT.

I, 60. MEGH. 76. SĀṁKHYAK. 66. eka — apara R. 1, 39, 8. AMAR. 16.

ŚUKAS. 39, 15. H. 1230. eka — dvitīya RAGH. 12, 6. KĀŚ. beim gaṇa

sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. eka — dvitīya — tṛtīya — caturtha R. 2, 61, 24. eka —

anya — eka — caturtha M. 4, 9. ekā prasūyate mātā dvitīyā vākprasūyate

«als erste — als zweite, zuerst — alsdann, sowohl — als auch» PAÑCAT. IV,

6. eke «einige, manche» (adj. und subst.) ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 24. 2, 2, 10. 3,

1, 26. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 3, 27. M. 9, 61. 11, 45. H. 619. eke — eke «Einige —

Andere» AV. 6, 122, 2. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 5, 12. eke — apare P. 7, 2, 45, Sch.

eke — anye — tathānye M. 10, 70. eke — eke — apare 4, 22 — 24. eke — anye

— eke — apare — apare 12, 123. Zwei auf einander folgende eka, welche

sich auf einen und denselben Begriff beziehen, also nicht in einem

Gegensatz zu einander stehen, bedeuten «je einer, einer um den andern»:

ekaikā kratuṁ pariyanti sadyaḥ ṚV. 1, 123, 8. ekamekam (ratnam) 20, 7.

sapta me sapta śākina ekamekā śatā daduḥ 5, 52, 17. snāpayanti sma —

apyekamekaṁ puruṣaṁ pramadāḥ sapta cāṣṭa ca R. 2, 91, 51. BHĀG. P.

5, 22, 9. Vgl. ekaika. — 4) zu einem blossen unbest. Art. sinkt eka erst in

später Zeit herab, doch finden sich Spuren davon schon im alten Epos:

ekaṁ kālaṁ («einstmals») jananyarthe himavantaṁ jagāma saḥ R. 4, 61,

24. strīsaṁsthānaṁ cāpsarastīrthamārādutkṣipyaināṁ jyotirekaṁ jagāma

ŚĀK. 126. navoṣasā bhinnamivaikapaṅkajam 175. viśrāntena bhavatā

mamāpyekasminkarmaṇi sahāyena bhavitavyam 22, 17. 83, 6, v. l.

ekasminpradeśe PAÑCAT. 20, 25. puruṣamekamapaśyat 242, 6. HIT. 10,

8. VET. 36, 4. KATHĀS. 7, 16. VID. 84. 235. ekasmiṁśca dine 221. subst.

«Jemand»: tatrādau bāhurekena cchinno me pauṇḍravardhane VID. 270.

— 5) über eka = mahant s. VP. 15, N. 22. — 6) N. pr. eines Sohnes von

Raja BHĀG. P. 9, 15, 2. — Vielleicht von demselben pronom. Stamme, der

in etad enthalten ist.

eka 1) paripūrṇānandaikacidātman WEBER, RĀMAT. 344. ekasyai na

pañcāśat TS. 7, 4, 3, 3. ekayā na triṁśat PAÑCAV. BR. 23, 25, 3. ekayā

na catvā- -riṁśat 24, 9, 2. 3. ekasmānnapañcāśa (Avagraha bei ekasmāt)

TS. 7, 4, 3, 3. viṁśatyā caikayā so v. a. ekaviṁśatyā ca WEBER, JYOT.

89. ekānnaviṁśatiḥ 70. ekāṁnatriṁśaduttaraṁ śatamekakam Ind. St. 3,

254. 8, 320. 362. Da die Formen ekānnaviṁśati (d. i. ekāt — na — vi-)

u.s.w. durch P. 6, 3, 76 sicher stehen, auch in Betreff der Betonung, so

könnte man geneigt sein in ekāṁnatriṁśat u. s. w. nur eine ungenaue

Schreibweise anzunehmen. KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 2, 37 (so ist st. 38 zu lesen)

hat auch die Ausg. ekānnapañcāśat. Sp. 1070, Z. 2 lies 10, 4, 2, 15 st. 10,

4, 3, 18; Z. 4. fgg. streiche ‘In nicht’ bis ‘zu zerlegen sei’. — 2) -sundarī

KATHĀS. 52, 316. -sakhya 74, 75. -caura 88, 24. — 7) f. ā Bein. der Durgā

ŚKDR. nach dem DEVĪ-P.

eka , seine verschiedenen Bedd. ebend. 5,58,b.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

eka e-ka (e, old loc. sing. of the pronom. base a, cf. idam and etat; ka cf.

kim), num., m., f. kā, and n.

I. sing.

1. One (cf. enad), Man. 2, 43; ekasmāt, At once, Rājat. 5, 407.

2. Alone, Man. 1, 3; Only, Hit. i. d. 81; puṇyaikakarman, i. e. puṇya-

eka-karman, adj. Practising only virtue.

3. Same, Man. 8, 204; Pañc. iv. d. 10.

4. Preeminent, chief, Megh. 31.

5. When immediately repeated, ‘one by one.’ Rām. 2, 91, 51.

6. A, an, Pañc. 242, 6, puruṣam ekam, ‘a man.’

7. Somebody, Kathās. 18, 330.

II. plur. Some, Man. 9, 61.

III. Former and latter part of compounds, e. g. eka-chara, adj. living

alone, Man. 5, 17. an-, adj. many, Man. 5, 159; several, Yājñ. 2, 120;

manifold, Yājñ. 3, 144. karapādaikahīnaka, i. e. kara-pāda-eka-hīna + ka,

adj. one who has had a hand and foot cut off, Yājñ. 2, 274. tad-eka, one

of these, Hit. 25, 10.

— Cf. Lat. aequus.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

eka a. one of (gen, abl., or —°); alone, sole, single, solitary; the same,

identical, common (esp. °—); in l. l. a certain or = the indef. article; with

na and mostly w. cana or api no one, none; pl. eke some. — eke—eke

(apare anye) some — some (others).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

eka e-ka, num. one; alone, only; single; one and the same, common; one

of (g., ab., or -°); unique; excellent; ascertain, some one, (sts. =

indefinite article) a, an; with na, none: pl. some, some folks: eka-eka or

anya, apara, dvitīya, the one — the other;

eke-eke, anye or apare, some — others; m. N. of a teacher;

ā, f. ep. of Durgāl; n. unit (-° = one).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

eka tri° iṇ—kan . 1 ekatvarūpaprathamasaṁkhyānvite, 2 kevale, 3mukhye,

4 anyārthe, 5 satye, 6 advitīye, 7 samāne, 8 alpe ca . prāyaśaḥ

saṁkhyāvācakasya saṁkhyāsaṁkhyeyobhayaparatve’pi ekaśabdasya

mūriśaḥ ekatvasaṁkhyānvitaparatvam . tena ekoghaṭaityādi na tu

ghaṭasyaikaḥ . kvacittu bhāvapradhānanirdeśaparatvena

saṁkhyāvācakatvamapi . dvyekayordvivacanaikavacane pā° . iha dvitvam

ekatvaṁ ca dvyekaśabdayorarthaḥ . atra dvivacanāntatvameva

tathārthatve liṅgam saṁkhyeyaparatvedvyekeṣāmiti syāt

dvandvārthānāṁ saṁkhyānvitānāṁ bahutvāt . tena ekadvivacanaśabdo’pi

ekatvadvitvārthakaḥ tatrārthe tayoḥparibhāṣitatvāt ataeva supāṁ

karmādayo’pyarthāḥ saṁkhyā caiva tathā tiṅām iti supāṁ tiṅāñca

saṁkhyāvācakatvamuktam . tathā anekamanyapadārthe pā° sūtre

anekapadasya ekavacanāntatayā prayogāt nāsti ekatvaṁ yatra iti

vigraheṇa ekatvaśūnyārthakatā . ekasaṁkhyānvitaparatve aneke iti syāt

patantyaneke jaladherivormaya ityādau bahuvacanāntatayaivāneka

śabdasya prayogāt . svārasikaprayoge tu na lakṣaṇā tena ghaṭasyaika

ityādi na prayogaḥ iti draṣṭavyam . itarasaṁkhyāsu ekatvasyānugamāt

dvitvādīnāmekatvabuddhyaiva jananācca iṇdhātvarthānugamāt tasya

anvarthanāmatā . saṁkhyā ca dravyasamaveto guṇabiśeṣaḥ guṇādau ca

saṁkhyānvayaḥ paramparayeti viśeṣaḥ . ekatvāderjātitvanirāsena

guṇatvavyavasthāpanaṁ kaṇā° sū° vṛttyoḥkṛtaṁ yathā

rūparasagandhasparśavyatirekādarthāntaramekatvam ka° sū°

rūparasagandhasparśeti saṁkhyādipañcakabhinnaguṇopalakṣaṇaṁ

vyatirekāditi vyabhicārāt . tadayamarthaḥ, ekoghaṭa iti

viśiṣṭapratītirviśeṣaṇajñānajanyā, tatra viśeṣaṇaṁ na rūpādi,

tadvyatirekeṇa jāyamānatvāt . na ca ghaṭatvādikameva nimittam, paṭe’pi

jāyamānatvāt, na caikatvaṁ sattāvat sāmānyam, sattayā

sahānyūnānatiriktāvṛttitvāt, na ca dravyamātre sāmānyaṁ tat,

dravyatvenānyūnānatiriktadeśatvāt, na cānyūnānatiriktadeśatve’pi

pratītibhedādbhedaḥ, pratītibhedasya svarūpakṛtatve sattā’pi bhidyeta,

viṣayabhedakṛtatve tu viṣayabhedānupapatteruktatvāt anyathā

ghaṭatvakalasatvayorapi bhedāpatteḥ . na ca svarūpābheda ekatvamiti

bhūṣaṇoktaṁ yuktam . ghaṭasvarūpabhedaścedekatvaṁ tadā

paṭādāvekatvapratyayo na syāt svarūpabhedodvitvādikamityapi

bhūṣaṇamatamanupapannaṁ svarūpabhedasya tricaturādisādhāraṇyena

vyavahāravaicitryānupapatteriti bhāvaḥ . vaiyā° sū°

saṅkhyānirūpaṇapūrvakaṁ tadvivakṣādinirūpaṇaṁ yathā

abhedaikatvasaṁkhyāyā vṛttau bhānamiti sthitiḥ . kapiñjalālambhavākye

tritvanyāyādyathocyate . uktañca vākyapadīye . yathauṣadhirasāḥ sarve

madhunyāhitaśaktayaḥ . avibhāgena vartante saṁkhyāṁ tāṁ tādṛśīṁ

viduriti . parityaktaviśeṣaṁ vā saṁkhyāsāmānyaṁ tat . uktañca

bhedānāṁ vā parityāgātsaṁkhyātmā sa tathāvidhaḥ .

vyāpārājjātibhāgasya bhedāpohena vartate . agṛhītaviśeṣeṇa yathā

rūpeṇa rūpavān . prakhyāyate na śuklādi bhedāpohastu gamyate iti .

asyāḥ vṛttau samāsādau bhānaṁ nyāyasiddhamiti śeṣaḥ . iti

matasthitirvaiyākaraṇānām . ayaṁ bhāvaḥ rājapuruṣa ityādau rājñorājñoḥ

rājñāṁ vāyaṁ puruṣa iti jijñāsā jāyate . viśeṣajijñāsāyāṁ sāmānyarūpeṇa

tatpratītiḥ śabdādābaśyakī atastasyāṁ śaktiriti . tasyā ekatvena pratītau

nyāyamāha kapiñcaleti . bahutvagaṇanāyāṁ tritvasyaiva

prathamopasthitatvāt tadrūpeṇaiva bhānavadekatvasya sarvataḥ

prathamoprasthitatvamastīti . vastutastu jijñāsaiva nānubhavasiddhā .

tathātve vā jñānecchayoḥ samānaprakārakatvena

hetuhetumadbhāvāttattadrū peṇaiva vācyatā syāditi dhyeyam . tathā ca

utsargāt sarvatra abhedaikatvasaṁkhyaiva vṛttau pratīyate na tu

viśeṣeṇa . ata eva saṁkhyā tu vyañjakābhāvādavyaktā prātarādivat .

yatra tu vyañjakaṁ kiñcit tatrasaṁkhyā pratīyate iti vākyapadīye uktam

tena rājapuruṣa ityādau na viśeṣasaṁkhyāpratītiḥ vyañjakābhāvāt

tvatputraḥ asmaddhanam ityādī tu viśeṣeṇa tatpratītiḥ

tvādeśatadabhāvayorvyañjakatvāt tvamāvekapacane iti pā° ekavacane

tvamādeśasya vidhānāt . tadabhāvādeva dvitvabahutvayorviśeṣeṇa

pratītiḥ . evaṁ dravyaikye ekadeśitatpuruṣavidhānāt ardhapippalītyādau

ekatvapratītiḥ dvitvādau vivakṣite tu pippalyardhamityādyeva syāditi tatra

viśeṣasaṁkhyāpratītiḥ . ekaḥ śabdaḥ suprayuktaḥ samyagjñātaḥ svarge

loke kāmadhugbhavati śrutiḥ ekamevādvitīyaṁ brahma śrutiḥ . 9

bhedatrayaśūnye parameśvare pu° . eko’nekaḥ savaḥ kaḥ kim viṣṇusa° .

paramārthataḥ sajātīyavijātīyasvagatabhedarāhityāt ekaḥ bhā° .

sajātīyabhedaḥ yathā vṛkṣe vṛkṣāntarāt bhedaḥ vijātīyabhedaḥ yathā

vṛkṣepaṭādbhedaḥ . svagatabhedaḥ yathā vṛkṣe śākhādibhyobheda

ityevaṁbhedatrayarāhityañca sarvasya brahmātmakatvāt

kāryakāraṇayorabhedāt tadariktaparamārthavastvantarābhāvācca .

tadeva ekamevādvitīyamiti śrutau padatrayeṇoktam iha tu

anyapadābhāvāt ekaśabdasyaiva tathā bhedatrayarāhityaparatvamiti

bodhyam . sāṁkhyamate tu eko’dvitīya iti vedavacāṁsi puṁsi vaidharmya

lakṣaṇabhidāvirahaṁ vadanti

ityuktavaidharmyarūpabhedarāhityamekatvamiti bodhyam . nyāyamate tu

ekatvamanupaśyataḥ iti śrutyantarāt ekatvena cintyatayā, prādhānyena

vā ekatvaṁ samarthanīyam . ekātapatrā pṛthivībhṛtāṅgarṇaḥ māghaḥ .

tvamekadṛśyaṁ nayanaiḥ pibantyaḥ mamātra bhāvaikarasaṁ manaḥ

sthitam kumā° tvamekohyasya sarvasya vidhānasya svayambhuvaḥ

manuḥ . ajāmekāṁ lohitaśuklakṛṣṇāṁ vahvīḥ prajāḥ sṛjamānāṁ sarūpāḥ .

ajohyekojuṣamāṇo’nuśete śrutiḥ . ekātapatraṁ jagataḥ prabhutvam

tvamekā kalyāṇī giriśaramaṇī kāli! satatam karpū° sta° hetorekāśraye

yeṣāṁ svasādhyavyabhicāritā bhāṣā° . viśeṣaṇayorekasya

viśeṣyatvavivakṣayā ka° sa° ekaśabda sya pūrvanipātaḥ ekadhanurdhara

ityādi amoghaṁ sandadhe śastraṁ dhanuṣyekadhanurdharaḥ raghuḥ .

vīraśabdena samāse tu ekavīraḥ vīraika iti rūpadvayaṁ bhavatīti bhedaḥ .

vastutastatra vīraikaḥ ityeva ekeṣu mukhyeṣu vīrayate iti

vīradhātorūpavīraśabdena saptamītatpuruṣe ekavora iti prauḍhama° .

ekaśabdasya saṁkhyāvācakatve’pi saṁkhyāpūrvo dviguḥ pā° na

dvigutvamiti . asya sarvanāmakāryam eke ekasmai ekasmāt ekeṣām

ekasmin . striyām ekasyai ekasyāḥ ekāsāmekasyāmityādi nañtatpuruṣe tu

. aneka ekabhinne dvi° ba° va° . tatra ekatva

saṁkhyānvayāsambhavānnaikavacanaprayogaḥ . tatra ca

sarvanāmakāryam aneke anekasmai ityādi aneke sevante

bhavadadhikagorvāṇanivahān karpū° sta° . ekatvārthakena tena

bahuvrīhau ekavacanaprayogo’pi anekamanyapadārthe pā° . ekasya

bhāvaḥ tva . ekatva na° tal . ekatā strī, ṣyañ aikya na°

ekatvasaṁkhyāyāṁ sāmye śreṣṭhatve abhede ca . tatra komohaḥ kaḥ

śoka ekatvamanupaśyataḥ śrutiḥ arthāntaramekatvam kaṇā° sū° .

ekatvaṁ sāgatā yasmāt smṛtiḥ . samālokyaikatāmevaṁ śaśino

bhāskarasya ca bhā° va° 223 . vrajatorapi praṇayapūrvamekatām

māghaḥ daikyaṁ so’nvaye mugdhabo° . dravyaikye si° kau° . ḍatara .

ekatara dvayormadhye jātiguṇakriyādibhirnirdhārye ekasmin tri° ekataro

brāhmaṇaḥ ekataraḥ kaṭhaḥ ekataronīlaḥ ekataraścala ityādi . astrāṇi vā

śarīraṁ vā brahmannekataraṁ vṛṇu bhā° ā° 166 a° . ekatarapakṣapātinī

yuktirvinigamanā nyāya° . sa ca śabdaḥ anyatarānyatamavat

avyutpannaṁ prātipādikamityanye ataeva adḍḍarādibhyaḥ pā°

ekataraśabdānna adḍ . ekataraṁ kulam . tena na sarvanāmakāryam

dvayorekatare buddhiḥ kriyatāmityādi, ekaśabdasya bhinnārthakatvona

ekataraśabdo’pi bhinnārthe amaraḥ . ḍatama . ekatama bahūnāṁ madhye

jātyādibhiḥ niddhārye ekasmin tri° yadi hyekatamohyoṣāṁ strīdhanaṁ

bhakṣayedbalāt kātyā° smṛ° . sarvanāmakāryam ekatame

ekatamasmādityādi klīve svamoḥ adḍ ekatamat . tasil . ekatas

ekasminnityarthe avya° ekatodataḥ manuḥ tāmekatastava bimarti

guruvitantro raghuḥ . tral . ekatra ekasminnityarthe avya° ekatra

sphaṭikataṭāṁśubhinnanīrāḥ māghaḥ . tathaikatra kare daśa manuḥ

antyajairgardabhairuṣṭraiḥ sahaikatrāvatiṣṭhate yā° . dāc . ekadā ekasmin

kāle avya° . sa sma bhuṅkte sahasrāṇāṁ bahūnāmannamekadā . ekadā

smālpakaṁ bhuṅkte bhā° anu° 159 a° . alpādyarthakāt

kārakārthevīpsārthe śas . ekaśas alpamalpamekamekaṁ vetyādyarthe

avya° paristīrya taṁ pūrvavat pātrāsādanamekaśaḥ kātyā° 4, 2, 4 .

evamekenaikena ekaikasmai ityādyarthe’pi . prakāre dhā . ekadhā

ekaprakāre ekadhā bahudhā caiva dṛśyate jalacandravat śrutiḥ . dhyamuñ

aikadhyam ekadhetyarthe avya° .

एकपिङ्ग — ekapiṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ekapiṅga «eka-piṅga» m. «having a yellow mark (in the place of one

eye)», N. of Kuvera &c.

ekapiṅga «eka-piṅga». ; «eka—piṅgalācala» m. «Kuvera’s mountain», N. of

the Himavat

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ekapiṅga (eka + piṅga) adj. als Beiw. von Kuvera R. 4, 44, 4. subst. ein

N. Kuvera’s AK. 1, 1, 1, 65. TRIK. 3, 3, 338. H. 189. DAŚAK. 118, 11.

Nach WILSON so genannt wegen «eines gelben Flecks» an einem seiner

Augen.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

ekapiṅga (EKAPIṄGALA). Another name of Vaiśravaṇa. Once Vaiśravaṇa

looked jealously at Pārvatī seated on the left side of Parameśvara and

instantly his one eye burst. When Pārvatī regained her peace of mind that

one eye of Vaiśravaṇa was changed into piṅgala colour. (See under

Kubera).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ekapiṅga pu° ekaṁ piṅgaṁ netramasya . kuvere . tasya krūradṛṣṭyā

pārvatīdarśane vāmanetrasya sphuṭane śivavākyena prasannāyāstasyā

vareṇa piṅgalaṁ vāmanetraṁ jātamiti tasya tathātvam tatkathā kāśī°

yathā

prasārya nayane pūrbamumāmeva vyalokayat . śambhoḥ samīpe kā

yoṣideṣā sarvāṅgasundarī . anayā kiṁ tapastaptaṁ? mamāpi

tapaṣo’dhikam . aho rūpamaho prema saubhāgya śrīraho bhṛśam .

krūradṛgvīkṣate yāvat punaḥ punaridaṁ vadan . tāvat prasphoṭitaṁ

netraṁ vāmaṁ vāmavilokanāt . atha devyabravīddevaṁ kimasau

duṣṭatāpasaḥ . asakṛdvīkṣya māṁ vakti nyakkurvanme tapaḥprabhām .

asakṛddakṣiṇenākṣṇā punarmāmeṣa paśyati . asūyamāno me rūpaṁ

premasaubhāgyasampadaḥ . iti devīgiraṁ śrutvā prahasya prāha tāṁ

prabhuḥ . ume! tvadīyaputro’yaṁ na ca krūreṇa cakṣuṣā . saṁpaśyate

tapolakṣmyāṁ tava kintvadhivarṇayan . iti devīṁ samābhāṣyatamīśaḥ

punarabravīt . varaṁ dadāmi te vatsa! tapasā’nena toṣitaḥ .

nidhīnāmadhināthastvaṁ guhyakānāṁ bhaveśvaraḥ . yakṣāṇāṁ

kinnarāṇāñca rājā rājñāñca suvrata! . patiḥpuṇyajanānāñca sarveṣāṁ

dhanadobhava . mayā sakhyañca te nityaṁ vatsyāmi ca tavāntike .

alakāṁ nikaṣā mitra! tava prītiṁ vivardhayan . āgaccha pādayorasyāḥ

pata te jananī tviyam . iti dattvā varān devaḥ punarāha śivaḥ śivām .

prasādaṁ kuru deveśi! tapasvinyaṅgaje tava . devyuvāca . vatsa! te

nirmalā bhaktirbhave bhavatu sarvadā . bhavaikapiṅgonetreṇa vāmena

sphuṭitena ca . devadattāstu ye tubhyaṁ varāssantu tathaiva te . kuvero

bhava nāmnā tvaṁ mama rūperṣyayā suta! ekapiṅgalo’pyatra .

ekapiṅgalavarṇanetrayuktatvāttasya tathātvam .

कंकुष्ठः — kaṁkuṣṭhaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

kaṁku(gu)ṣṭhaḥ —ṣṭham A kind of medicinal earth (described as of two

colours, one of a silvery and one of a gold colour, or one of a light and

one of a dark yellow).

कङ्कुष्ठ — kaṅkuṣṭha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kaṅkuṣṭha m. a medicinal earth (described as of two colours, one of

silvery and one of a gold colour, or one of a light and one of a dark

yellow)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kaṅkuṣṭha m. «eine» (in der Medicin gebrauchte) «best. Erdart» (sowohl

von der Farbe des Goldes als auch der des Silbers) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

SUŚR. 1, 103, 16. — Vgl. kālakuṣṭa.

kaṅkuṣṭha Z. 3 lies kālakuṣṭha.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kaṅku(ṅgu)ṣṭha na° kaṅkuḥ tṛṇabhedaḥ tatra tatsamīpe tiṣṭhati sthā—ka

ṣatvam . parvatīyamṛttikābhede . himavatpādaśikhare kaṅku

(ṅgu)ṣṭhaṁnāma jāyate . tatraikaṁ nalikākhyaṁsyāttadanyadreṇukaṁ

smṛtam . pītaprabhaṁ guru snigdhaṁ tatra śreṣṭhaṁ ca reṇukam .

kaṅku(ṅgu)ṣṭhaṁ recanaṁ tiktaṁ kaṭūṣṇaṁ varṇakārakam .

kṛmiśothodarādhmānagulmānāhakaphāpaham bhāvapra° atrapṛṣo° kasya

gaḥ kaṅguṣṭhamapi .

कर्बूर — karbūra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899karbūra m. a Rakshas

m. Curcuma Amhaldi or Zerumbet

karbūra n. gold

karbūra n. a yellow orpiment

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

karbū(rvū)ra a. Variegated. —raḥ

(1) A demon.

(2) N. of a plant.

(3) The variegated colour. —rā A leech. —raṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) Yellow orpiment.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

karbūra oder karbūra 1) m. a) «ein» Rakshas UṆĀDIK. im ŚKDR. AK. 1, 1,

1, 55, Sch. — b) «Curcuma Amhaldi» oder «Zerumbet Roxb.» AK. 2, 4, 5,

20. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. karbūrā «Blutegel» WILS. Diese Bed. ist

wohl aus SUŚR. 1, 40, 12, wo von einem «gesprenkelten» (karburā)

Blutegel die Rede ist, oder aus einer ähnlichen Stelle gefolgert worden. —

3) n. a) «Gold» ŚKDR. angeblich nach MED. — b) «Auripigment» TRIK. 2,

9, 35.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

karbū(rvū)ra pu° karva—gatau karba—darpe vā kharjūrā° ūra . 1 rākṣase

uṇā° . 2 śaṭhyāṁ ca amaraḥ 3 karcūre (kācā) haridrāyām śabdara° .

bhāvapra° karcūra ityeva pāṭhaḥ . 4 svarṇe 5 haritāle na° śabdaci°

vaijayantyām karcaramiti pāṭhaḥ karcūraśabde udā° . 6 citravarṇe pu° 7

tadvati tri° amaraṭīkā svārthe kaḥ . karbūrakastatrārtheṣu .

कषाय — kaṣāya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kaṣāya mfn. astringent

mfn. fragrant 31

mfn. red, dull red, yellowish red (as the garment of a Buddhist

Bhikshu)

kaṣāya mn. (g. «ardharcādi») an astringent flavour or taste

kaṣāya mn. a yellowish red colour on

kaṣāya mn. an astringent juice, extract of juice

kaṣāya mn. a decoction or infusion (the result of boiling down a mixture

consisting of one part of a drug and four or, according to some, eight or

sixteen parts of water until only one quarter is left

kaṣāya mn. any healing or medicinal potion

kaṣāya mn. exudation from a tree, juice, gum, resin

kaṣāya mn. ointment, smearing, anointing

kaṣāya mn. colouring or perfuming or anointing the person with

cosmetics

kaṣāya mn. dirt, filth

kaṣāya mn. stain or impurity or sin cleaving to the soul

kaṣāya mn. dulness, stupidity

kaṣāya mn. defect, decay, degeneracy (of which, according to Buddhists,

there are five marks, viz. «āyus-k-, dṛṣṭi-k-, kleśa-k-, sattva-k-, kalpa-k-«)

kaṣāya mn. attachment to worldly objects

kaṣāya m. red, redness

kaṣāya m. a kind of snake

kaṣāya m. emotion, passion («rāga», of which the Jainas reckon four

kinds

kaṣāya m. the Kali-yuga

kaṣāya m. the tree Bignonia Indica

kaṣāya m. N. of a teacher (v.l. «kaśāya») g. «śaunakādi»

kaṣāya m. («as, ā, am») mf. n. the tree Grislea tomentosa

kaṣāya n. a dull or yellowish red garment or robe (cf. «kāṣāya, paṇca-

kaṣāya; a-niṣkaṣāya», full of impure passions

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kaṣāya a.

(1) Astringent; S. 2.

(2) Fragrant; sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ Me. 31; U. 2. 21; Mv.

5. 41.

(3) Red, dark-red; cūtāṁkurāsvādakaṣāyakaṁṭhaḥ Ku. 3. 32.

(4) (Hence) Sweet-sounding; Māl. 7.

(5) Brown.

(6) Improper, dirty. —yaḥ, —yaṁ

(1) Astringent flavour or taste (one of the six rasas): see kaṭu; yo

vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ staṁbhayati kaṁṭhaṁ badhnāti hṛdayaṁ

kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ Suśr.

(2) The red colour.

(3) A decoction with one part of a drug mixed with four, eight, or

sixteen parts of water (the whole being boiled down until one quarter is

left); Ms. 11. 154.

(4) Plastering, smearing; Ku. 7. 17; anointing.

(5) Perfuming the body with unguents; Rs. 1. 4.

(6) Gum, resin, extract or exudation from a tree.

(7) Dirt, uncleanness.

(8) Dulness, stupidity.

(9) Attachment to worldly objects. (10) Decay, ruin. —yaḥ

(1) Passion, emotion.

(2) Kali yuga.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kaṣāya m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 249,a, ult. 1) adj. a)

«zusammenziehend», subst. «der zusammenziehende Geschmack» AK. 1,

1, 4, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 307. H. 1389. HĀR. 206. MBH. 14, 1280. 1411. SUŚR.

1,19, 15. yo vaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ badhnāti

hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ (rasaḥ) 155, 7. 156, 15. PAÑCAT.

61, 11. 254, 11. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 42. kaṣāyāṇi tiktāni kaṭukāni ca.

bhakṣayan R. 2, 12, 93. — b) «wohlriechend» TRIK. 3, 1, 19. 3, 107. H. an.

MED. sphuṭitakamalāmodamaitrīkaṣāyaḥ (vātaḥ) MEGH. 32. — c) «roth,

dunkelroth»; subst. «die rothe Farbe» H. an. MED. «gelbroth» SVĀMIN zu

AK. ŚKDR. kaṣāyavāsas YĀJÑ. 1, 272. SUŚR. 1, 7, 7. von der Farbe einer

Schlange 2, 265, 14. -daśana und -danta von einer Maus 278, 2. 279, 8.

kaśāyakaṇṭha (sic) DHŪRTAS. 67, 8. kaṣāyeṇa raktaṁ vastram P. 4, 2, 1,

Sch. kaṣāyarakta MBH. 14, 1263. teṣāṁ (tāpasānāṁ) mauṇḍyaṁ

kaṣāyaśca vāse rātriśca kāraṇam 13, 6527 (vgl. śukladantāñjitākṣāśca

muṇḍāḥ kāṣāyavāsasaḥ. śūdrā dharmaṁ cariṣyanti

śākyabuddhopajīvinaḥ.. HARIV. 11142. MBH. 12, 566).

kaṣāyavastraracanā MṚCCH. 114, 5. «ein gelbrothes Kleid»:

nirvedadhṛtakaṣāyaṁ bhikṣum 113, 3. BURN. Intr. 180, N. 1. Hierher

gehört wohlauch: kaṣāyaṁ sulabhaṁ paścānmunīnāṁ śamamicchatām

MBH. 2, 675. — 2) subst. m. n. a) «ausgekochter Saft»: parṇakaṣāya ŚAT.

BR. 6, 5, 1, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 3, 16. śuktāni ca kaṣāyāṁśca pītvā

medhyānyapi dvijaḥ. tāvadbhavatyaprayato yāvattanna vrajatyadhaḥ.. M.

11, 153. aṅgakaṣāya vom «menschlichen Samen» ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 8. In

der Med. «Decoct; diejenige Form der Medicin, bei deren Bereitung ein

Theil des Arzeneistoffes mit vier, nach Andern mit acht oder sechzehn

Theilen Wasser gemischt und die Mischung bis auf ein Viertel eingekocht

wird»: tatra kecidāhustvakpatramūlādīnāṁ

bhāgastaccaturguṇajalamāvāpya caturbhāgāvaśeṣaṁ

niḥkvāthyāpaharedityeṣa kaṣāyapākakalpaḥ SUŚR. 2, 175, 9. 21. 1, 15, 3.

16, 6. 18, 5. 38, 5. 159, 8. 14. 15. 17. 160, 11. 2, 48. 16. fgg. 116, 5.

kalkāṁścūrṇakaṣāyāṁśca R. 2, 91, 67. Accent eines auf kaṣāya ausgehn.

comp. P. 6, 2, 10. umāpuṣpakaṣāyam Sch. kaṣāya = niryāsa «Decoct»,

aber auch «jede vegetabilische Ausschwitzung wie Harz u.s.w.» AK. 3, 4,

24, 155. H. an. MED. — b) «Salbe, Schminke», = samālambhana TRIK. 2,

6, 40. = vilepana und rāgavastu H. an. = vilepana und aṅgarāga MED.

ghṛṣṭo vaṭakaṣāyena (sic) anuliptaḥ priyaṅgunā. kṣīreṇa ṣaṣṭikānbhuktvā

sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate.. MBH. 13, 5970. śiroruhaiḥ snānakaṣāyavāsitaiḥ

ṚT. 1, 1. — c) («Bodensatz) Schmutz»; übertragen «Unreinigkeit,

Verdummung, Versumpfung, Verfall» (vgl. kalka): karṇakaṣāya BHĀG. P.

2, 6, 45. tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya (ŚAṁK.: kaṣāyo rāgadveṣādidoṣaḥ)

CHĀND. UP. 7, 26, 2. avipakvakaṣāyāṇāṁ durdarśo ‘haṁ kuyoginām

BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 22. nirmathitāśeṣakaṣāyadhiṣaṇo ‘rjunaḥ 15, 29. vidhunoti

kāmaṁ kaṣāyaṁ malamantarātmanaḥ 4, 22, 20. kaṣāyasya lakṣaṇam

(viell. mit Anspielung auf die Kleiderfarbe der buddhistischen Geistlichen)

«ein Anzeichen des Verfalls» HARIV. 11182. fgg. kaṣāyopaplave kāle

11184. Die Buddhisten nehmen 5 kaṣāya an: āyuskaṣāya, dṛṣṭi-, kleśa-,

sattva-, kalpa- VYUTP. 66. BURN. Lot. de la b. l. 354. kaṣāya =

krodhādayaḥ H. an. In der Philos.: layavikṣepaṇābhāve (ŚKDR. —

vikṣepābhāve) ‘pi cittavṛtte (ŚKDR. cittasya) rāgādivāsanayā

stabdhībhāvādakhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ kaṣāyaḥ VEDĀNTAS. in

BENF. Chr. 218, 1. 217, 22. «attachment to wordly objects» WILS. — 3) m.

a) «Leidenschaft» (rāga) SVĀMIN zu AK. im ŚKDR. — b) «das» Kalijuga

SĀRAS. zu AK. im ŚKDR. Beide Bedeutungen gehen wohl in 2,c auf. — c)

Name eines Baumes, «Bignonia indica» (śyonāka), DHAR. im ŚKDR. — d)

N. pr. eines Lehrers gaṇa śaunakādi zu P. 4, 3, 106. — 4) m. f. n. Name

eines Baumes, «Grislea tomentosa Roxb.» (dhava), RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

5) f. kaṣāyā Name einer Pflanze (kṣudradurālabhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

Vgl. pañcakaṣāya und kāṣāya.

kaṣāya 1) c) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 66, 5. 68, 3. -danta «eine Mausart» Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 309,a,19. roṣakaṣāyadūṣita «Röthe» mit Anspielung auf 2) c)

BHĀG. P. 4, 2, 20. «ein rothes Gewand» Spr. 3615 (ed. Bomb. des MBH.

kāṣāya). MBH. 2, 675 hat die ed. Bomb. gleichfalls kā-, was der Schol.

durch gairikaraktaṁ vastram erklärt. — 2) a) te pibantaḥ kaṣāyāṁśca

sarpīṁṣi vividhāni ca Spr. 4138. — b) vaṭakaṣāyeṇa = vaṭajaṭākaṣāyeṇa

Schol. zu MBH. 13, 5970. — c) füge «Leidenschaft» (vgl. 3, «a») hinzu.

kaṣāyavarjitaṁ jñānam MBH. 12, 7873. sa- Ind. St. 3, 148. Z. 9 nach 354

hinzu- zufugen 360. Bei den Jaina vier kaṣāya WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 310.

SARVADARŚANAS. 37, 2. 10. 14. 19. 39, 18. mit Anspielung auf 2) a) 36,

20. 22. Etymologie 37, 2. sakaṣāyatva 12. — Vgl. niṣkaṣāya.

kaṣāya 2) c) bei den Jaina HEM. YOGAŚ. 4, 6. 77.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kaṣāya kaṣāya (probably vb. kṛṣ),

I. adj., f. yā.

1. Being of an astringent taste, MBh. 14, 1411.

2. Fragrant, Megh. 32.

3. Red, subst. m. and n., red colour, Yājñ. 1, 272; MBh. 14, 1263; of a

colour composed of red and yellow, Mṛcch. 113, 3.

II. m. and n.

1. An astringent juice, Man. 11, 153.

2. A decoction, Suśr. 2, 175, 9.

3. Ointment, MBh. 13, 5970.

4. Dirt, Bhāg. P. 2, 6, 45; impurity, 4, 22, 20.

5. Stupor, Vedāntas. in Chr. 218, 1.

— Comp. a-niṣkaṣāya, i. e. a-nis-, adj. full of impure passions, MBh. 12,

568.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kaṣāya a. astringent, sharp (of taste), fragrant, red, dark-red. m. red

colour, passion, emotion; decoct, extract, ointment (also n.); n. a

yellowish-red garment.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kaṣāya kaṣāya, a. astringent (taste); fragrant; red, yellowish red; m. red

colour; passion; m. n. astringent juice; decoction; medicinal potion;

ointment; dirt; taint; deterioration, moral decline; n. yellow garment;

-ya, den. P. dirty; molest;

i-ta, pp. coloured red; dirtied, stained; penetrated w., full of (-°).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kaṣāya puṁna° kaṣati kaṇṭham, kaṣa—āya—ardharcādi . (kaṣā) 1

rasabhede 2 tadvati tri° . tasya kāraṇaguṇādi suśrute uktaṁ yathā—tatra

śaityaraukṣalāghavavaiśadyavaiṣṭambhyaguṇalakṣaṇovāyustasya

samānayoniḥ kaṣāyo rasaḥ so’sya śaityāt śaityaṁ vardhayati, raukṣyāt

raukṣyaṁ, lāghavāt lāghavaṁ, vaiśadyāt vaiśadyaṁ, vaiṣṭambhyāt

vaiṣṭambhyamiti yovaktraṁ pariśoṣayati jihvāṁ stambhayati kaṇṭhaṁ

badhnāti hṛdayaṁ kaṣati pīḍayati ca sa kaṣāyaḥ . kaṣāyaḥ

saṁgrāhakoropaṇaḥ stambhanaḥ śodhanālekhanaḥ śoṣaṇaḥ pīḍanaḥ

kledīpaśoṣaṇaśceti . sa evaṁguṇo’tyekaevātyarthamupasevyamānaḥ

pīḍāsyaśoṣodarādhmānavākyagrahamanyāstambhagātrasphuraṇacumucu

māyanākuñcanakṣepaṇaprabhṛtīn janayati iti ca . kaṣāyavargaśca .

nyagrodhādirambaṣṭhādiḥ

priyaṅgvādīrodhrādistriphalāśallakījambvāmrabakulatindukaphalinīkatakaś

ākapāṣāṇabhedakavanaspatiphalāni sālasārādiśca prāyaśaḥ

kuravakakovidārakajīvantīcillīpālaṅkyasu niṣaṇṇakaprabhṛtīni

nīvārakādayomudgādayaśca samāsena kaṣāyovargaḥ suśru° .

asyotpattikāraṇamapi tatroktaṁ yathātasmādāpyorasaḥ

parasparasaṁsargāt parasparānugrahāt parasparānupraveśācca sarvesu

sarveṣāṁ sānnidhyamastyutkarṣāpakarṣāttu grahaṇam . sa

khalvāpyorasaḥ śeṣabhūtasaṁsargādvidagdhāḥ ṣoḍhā vibhajyate

ityupakramya . pṛthivyanilaguṇabāhulyāt kaṣāyaḥ iti . tatra tasya ca

pittakaphaghnatvamapi tatraivoktam maghurātaktakaṣāyāḥ pittaghnāḥ

kaṭutiktakaṣāyāḥ śleṣmaghnāḥ iti . kecidāhuragnīṣomīyatvājjagato rasāḥ

dvividhāḥ saumyā āgneyāśca, tatra madhuratiktakaṣāyāḥ saumyāḥ,

kaṭvamlalavaṇā āgneyāḥ madhurāmlalavaṇāḥ snigdhāḥ guravaśca

kaṭutiktakaṣāyā rūkṣā laghavaśca . saumyāḥ śītā āgneyāścīṣṇāḥ iti

suśrute anyamatenoktvā tacca dūṣayitvā pūrvadarśitamatamādṛtam

bhāvapra° tadetadvivṛtam yathākaṣāyo ropaṇo grāhī stambhanaḥ

śodhanastathā . lekhanaḥ pīḍanaḥ saumyaḥ śoṣaṇo vātakopanaḥ .

kaphaśoṇitapittaghno rūkṣaḥ śīto laghurmataḥ . tvakprasādanamālasya

stambhano viṣado mataḥ . jihvāyā jāḍyakṛt kaṇṭhasrotasāñca vibandhakṛt

. ropaṇaḥ vraṇasya, stambhano gātrāṇāṁ, śodhano vraṇasya, lekhano

vraṇādyutsannamāṁsasya, śoṣaṇovraṇamajjādīnām . pīḍano hṛdayasya

vātakāritvāt, saumyaḥ somādutpannaḥ . athātiyuktasya kaṣāyasya

guṇāstatroktāḥ so’ticayukto gudādhmānahṛtpīḍākṣepaṇādikṛt .

abhayāyāmatra viśeṣaḥ . prāyaśaḥ stambhanaṁ proktaṁ

kaṣāyamabhayāṁ vinā . 3 rāgadveṣādidoṣe . āhāraśuddhau satvaśuddhiḥ

satvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ, smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṁ

vipramokṣastasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya tamasaḥ pāraṁ darśayati chā° u° .

tasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya vārkṣārādiriva kaṣāyo rāgadbeṣādidoṣaḥ,

satvasya rañjanarūpatvāt jñānavairāgyābhyāsarūprakṣāreṇa kṣālitomṛdito

vināśito yasya nāradasya tasmai bhā° . kaṣāye karmabhiḥ pakve tato

jñānaṁ prajāyate vedā° pa° karmaṇāṁ

rāgadveṣādidoṣarūpakaṣāyanāśakatvamuktam . layavikṣepābhāve’pi

cittavṛtteḥ rāgādivāsanayā stakībhāvāt akhaṇḍavastvanavalambanaṁ

kaṣāyaḥ iti vedāntasāroktalakṣaṇe 4 nirvikalpakasamādhivighnabhede

sakaṣāyaṁ vijānīyāt śamaprāptaṁ na cālayet . sakaṣāyaṁ kaluṣitaṁ me

cittamiti, vijñāya śame’dvitī yātmani niveśayet vidvanma° . 5 rakte

anurāgānvite 6 surabhau 7 apaṭau ca keśavaḥ . cūtāṅkurāsvādakaṣāya

kaṇṭhaḥ kumā° . kaṣāyaḥ raktaḥ malli° . nidrākaṣāyitavipāṭalalocaneṣu

māghaḥ kaṣāyitānyapaṭūkṛtāni malli° . 8 rāge 9 kvāthabhede 10 niryāse

ca rāge kvāthe kaṣāyo’strī niryāse saurabhe rase vaija° . kaṣāyaḥ jāto’sya

tāra° itac, tatkarotīti ṇickarmaṇi ktavā . kaṣāyita jātakaṣāye kaṣāyīkṛte ca

tri° amunaiva kaṣāyitastanī kumā° kaṣāyitaḥ rañjitaḥ malli° . 11 vilepane

13 aṅgarāge ca viśvaḥ . karṇārpitolodhrakaṣāyarūkṣe kumā° kaṣāyeṇa

vilepanena malli° . kvaṣāyaśca sarasādikaḥ pañcavidhaḥ bhāvapra°

darśito yathā . sarasaśca tathā kalkaḥ kvāthaśca himaphāṇṭakau . jñeyāḥ

kaṣāyāḥ pañcaite laghavaḥ syuryathottaram teṣāṁ pañcānāṁ lakṣaṇāni

tu tattacchabde dṛśyāni . 13 śyonākavṛkṣe pu° jaṭāgharaḥ . 14 kaliyuge

amaraṭīkā rāgadīṣahetutvāttasya tathātvam 15 lohitavarṇayukte tri°

medi° 16 raktapītamiśritavarṇe amaraṭīkā . 17 dhavavṛkṣe pu° rājani° 18

kṣudradurālabhāyāṁ strī rājani° . deśe gamye asmāt pānaśabdasya

ṇatvam . kaṣāyapāṇodeśabhedaḥ .

काल — kāla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāla mf («ī» ) n. (fr. 3. «kal»?), black, of a dark colour, dark-blue &c.

kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour

kāla m. the black part of the eye

kāla m. the Indian cuckoo

kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= «kālasarpa»)

kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora

kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago

kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta

kāla m. the planet Saturn

kāla m. N. of śiva

kāla m. of Rudra

kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189

kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana

kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit

kāla m. of a future Buddha

kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha)

kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja

kāla m. of a Rakshas

kāla m. of an enemy of śiva

kāla m. of a mountain

kāla m. of one of the nine treasures

kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter «m»

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ā») f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper

longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia

Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens

kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. «harītaky-ādi»

kāla m. N. of a «śakti»

kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or

Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras)

kāla m. N. of Durgā

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. black colour, ink or blacking

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. abuse, censure, defamation

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a row or succession of black clouds

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. night

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous

fermentation of milk (= «kṣīra-kīṭa» or «kṣāra-kīṭa»)

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. the plant Kālāṇjanī

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. Ipomoea Turpethum

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a kind of clay

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. Bignonia suaveolens

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a form of Durgā

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the

Kālakeyas) 11552

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother

of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra-

vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of

Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. (with or without «gaṅgā») N. of a river

kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum

kāla n. a kind of perfume («kakkolaka»)

kāla n. iron

kāla m. (3. «kal», «to calculate or enumerate»), [ifc. f. «ā» , a fixed or

right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c.

m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot.

with «yad» e.g. «kālaḥ prasthānasya» or «-nāya» or «-ne», time for

departure; «kriyā-kāla», time for action ; «nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum», this is

not the time to delay ; «kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān», it is time for you to

eat &c.

m. occasion, circumstance

m. season &c.

m. meal-time (twice a day, hence «ubhau kālau», «in the morning and

in the evening» ; «ṣaṣṭhe kāle», «in the evening of the third day» ;

«ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla», «one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who

passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the

third day» ; or without «anna» e.g. «caturtha-kālam», «at the fourth meal-

time i.e. at the evening of the second day»

m. hour (hence «ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ», «at the sixth hour of the day, i.e.

at noon»

m. a period of time, time of the world (= «yuga»)

m. measure of time, prosody

m. a section, part

m. the end

m. death by age

m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible

to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c.

m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often

personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the

dead, or even identified with him: hence «kālam-i» or «kālaṁ-kṛ», «to die»

&c.; «kāla» in this sense is frequently connected with «antaka, mṛtyu» e.g.

«abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ», «e attacked the people like Time

the destroyer» ; cf. «kālāntaka; kāla» personified is also a Devarshi in

Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva

kāla m. («am») acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. «mahāntaṁ kālam», for a

long time

kāla m. «nitya-k-«, constantly, always

kāla m. «dīrgha-k-«, during a long time

kāla m. («ena») instr. ind. in the course of time &c.

m. with «gacchatā» id.

kāla m. «dīrgheṇa kālena», during a long time

m. after a long time

kāla m. «kālena mahatā» or «bahunā» id.

kāla m. («āt») abl. ind. in the course of time

kāla m. «kālasya dīrghasya» or «mahataḥ» id. &c.

kāla m. «kasya-cit kālasya», after some time

kāla m. («e») loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. «a-kāle»)

kāla m. «kāle gacchati», in the course of time

kāla m. «kāle yāte», after some time

kāla m. «kāle kāle», always in time

kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, «death and

everything terrible.»])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāla a. (lī f.)

(1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour.

(2) Injuring, hurting. —laḥ

(1) The black or dark-blue colour.

(2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ

R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatāṁ H. 1.

(1) the wise pass their time &c.

(3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion;

(with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī

Mk. 10. 60.

(4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day);

ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153.

(5) The weather.

(6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas.

(7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe,

being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(8)

(a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt.

1. 146.

(b) Death, time of death.

(9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye.

(11) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(12) The planet Saturn.

(13) N. of Śiva.

(14) A measure of time (in music or prosody).

(15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor.

(16) A section, or part

(17) A red kind of plumbago.

(18) Resin, pitch

(19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine

treasures.

(21) A mystical name for the letter m. —lā

(1) N. of several plants.

(2) N. of a daughter of Daksha.

(3) An epithet of Durgā. —lī

(1) Blackness.

(2) Ink, black ink.

(3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife.

(4) A row of black clouds.

(5) A woman with a dark complexion.

(6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

(7) Night.

(8) Censure, blame.

(9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā;

kālītanayaḥ a buffalo.

(11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers.

(12) N. of a wife of Bhīma.

(13) A sister of Yama.

(14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā).

(15) A small shrub used as a purgative. —laṁ

(1) Iron.

(2) A kind of perfume.

— Comp.

—ayasaṁ iron.

—akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher.

—agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4.

81. (—n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5.

—agniḥ, —analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. —2.

an epithet of Rudra. —3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). —aṁga a. having a

dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge).

—ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope.

—aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. (

—nī) a small shrub used as a purgative.

—aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

—atikramaḥ —maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154.

—atipātaḥ, —atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2.

—atīta a. elapsed, passed by.

—atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. —2. loss by lapse of time.

—adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. —2. the

Supreme soul.

—anunādin m. 1. a bee. —2. a sparrow. —3. the Chātaka bird.

—anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. —2. yellow sandal.

—anusāriḥ, —anusārin, —anusārivā, —anusāryaḥ, —ryakaḥ benzoin.

—aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer

of every thing.

—aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. —2. a period of time. —3. another time or

opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a.

able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin

Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat.

—abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud.

—avadhiḥ appointed time.

—avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11.

—aśuddhiḥ f.,

—aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the

birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. —ākṛṣṭa a.

1. led to death. —2. produced or brought by time.

—ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny.

—ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

—āyasaṁ iron.

—upta a. sown in due season.

—kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus.

—kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. —2. a sparrow. —3. a wagtail. —4. a

gallinule. —5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6.

—kaṁṭhakaḥ —kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule.

—kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake.

—karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time.

—karṇikā, —karṇī misfortune.

—karman n. death.

—kalāyaḥ dark pulse.

—kalpa a. fatal, deadly.

—kālaḥ Supreme being.

—kīlaḥ noise.

—kuṁṭhaḥ Yama.

—kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh.

—kūṭaḥ, —ṭaṁ

(a) a deadly poison; S. 6.

(b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi

nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. —kṛt m. 1. the sun. —2. a

peacock. —3. Supreme spirit. —kṛta 1. produced by time. —2. fixed,

appointed. —3. lent or deposited. —4. done for a long time. (—taḥ) the

sun. —kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or

process of time; Ku. 1. 19. —kriyā 1. fixing a time. —2. death. —kṣepaḥ 1.

delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. —2.

passing the time. —khaṁjaṁ, —khaṁjanaṁ, —khaṁḍaṁ the liver. —

gaṁgā the river Yamunā. —grāṁthiḥ a year. —ghātin a. killing by degrees

or slowly (as a poison) —cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being

represented as a wheel always moving). —2. a cycle. —3. (hence fig.) the

wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (—kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. —

cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the

angel of death. —jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. —jña a.

knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi

nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (—jñaḥ) 1. an

astrologer. —2. a cock. —jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. —trayaṁ the three

times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. —daṁḍaḥ

death. —damanī an epithet of Durgā. —dharmaḥ, —dharman m. 1. the line

of conduct suitable to any particular time. —2. the law or rule of time. —3.

effects proper to the time. —4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ

kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. —dhāraṇā

prolongation of time. —naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. —

nāthaḥ, —nidhiḥ Śiva. —niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena

khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. —nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time,

chronology. —nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. —2. N. of a demon,

uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. —3. N. of a demon with

100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa.

—pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49.

—parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. —pāśaḥ the noose

of Yama or death. —pāśikaḥ a hangman. —pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of

antelope. —2. a heron. (—kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. —2. a

bow in general. —prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following

the rainy season considered as the best time). —bhakṣaḥ an epithet of

Śiva. —bhṛt m. the sun. —bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —mānaṁ a

measure of time. —mukhaḥ a species of ape. —meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha

plant. —yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible

foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the

field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was

sleeping who burnt him down. —yāpaḥ, —yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay,

putting off. —yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of

the time; Pt. 1. 184. —yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. —rātriḥ, —rātrī f. 1. a

dark night. —2. a sister of Yama. —3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are

lighted (in the Divālī holidays). —4. the night of destruction at the end of

the world (identified with Durgā). —5. a particular night in the life of man,

on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. —lohaṁ —lauhaṁ steel.

—viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. —vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest

(payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. —velā the

time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day)

at which any religious act is improper. —saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old

personating Durga at a festival. —saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long

time; Ms. 8. 143. —2. lapse of a long period of time. —sadṛśa a.

opportune, timely. —saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. —sarpaḥ the

black and most poisonous variety of the snake. —sāraḥ the black

antelope. (—raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. —sūtraṁ, —sūtrakaṁ 1.

thread of time or death. —2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88.

—skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. —svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in

form). —haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. —haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U.

5; Mv. 4. 41. —hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. «blauschwarz, schwarz»; als m. «die

blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397.

an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ

kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni

bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R.

3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20.

kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ — dīrdhaveṇī —

dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī

pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2,

114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) «das Schwarze im Auge» SUŚR. 2,

336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) «der indische Kuckuck» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) «Cassia Sophora Lin.» (s. kāsamarda). — e)

«eine Art Plumbago» (raktacitraka). — f) «das Harz der Shorea robusta»

(rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) «der Planet Saturn» (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ

im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha,

mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines

Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3,

10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen

Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R.

6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges

R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m)

myst. Bez. des «Buchstabens m» Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: «Indigofera tinctoria Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an.

MED.; «Piper longum Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der «Ipomoea Turpethum»

nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. «Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.» AK. 2, 4, 3,

27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; «Nigella indica

Roxb.» AK. 2, 9, 37; «Rubia Munjista» (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) «Roxb.» H.

an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; «Ruellia longifolia» (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.;

«Physalis flexuosa Lin.» (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; «Bignonia

suaveolens Roxb.» (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa

harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch «die Frucht der» Kālā. — b) N. pr.

einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1,

2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19.

Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f.

kālī a) = kālikā «schwarze Farbe, Tinte» H. an. MED. — b)

«Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede» H. an. — c) «Nacht» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

d) «eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse» H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) «ein

best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen», = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa

(sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) «Cajanus

indicus Spreng.» (tuvarī); g) «Ipomoea Turpethum» (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.; d) «Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.» AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer

der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4.

GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203.

H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27.

itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als

Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff «der Schwärze» wohl auch den

«der Alles zerstörenden Zeit» vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287.

mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED.

— k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV.

11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī,

der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10.

LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter

Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder

Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin

Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder

ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a)

«eine dunkle Art Sandelholz» (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) «ein

best. Parfum» (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «Eisen» (vgl. kālāyasa)

VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR.

kāla m. 1) «ein bestimmter» oder «richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit» überh. AK. 1,

1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im

ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī

vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht

und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der «Weltordnung» oder

des «Schicksals» streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird

das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ

kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti

2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2.

ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1,

77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151.

RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4,

93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38.

kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10.

PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11

(vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45.

kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ

gacchati «er gelangt zum Endpunkt» (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1.

«die zu Etwas bestimmte —, geeignete Zeit»; die Ergänz. im gen., dat.,

loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168):

saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ

«dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen» VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya

kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ

PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti

vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ

kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5,

13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo

vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān

P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya «in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände»:

kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293.

skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247.

kālamāsādya kaṁcana «nach einer Weile»: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca

sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana..

R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ

kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ

cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51.

kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14.

151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M.

9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu

kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1.

tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau «der rechte Ort und die

rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort» M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe

ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar «eine Zeit

festsetzen»: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29.

Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña

R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau

kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan «bei Sonnenauf — und Niedergang» 1, 4623.

ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ «zur 6ten Stunde am Tage» d. i. «um Mittagszeit» VIKR.

20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla «der nur die sechste Esszeit hat» d. i. «der 5

Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine

Mahlzeit hält»; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200.

Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna «Speise»: caturthakālam «zur

vierten Esszeit» d. i. «am Abend des zweiten Tages» 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle «am

Abend des dritten Tages» MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665.

kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca

phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. «der erst

am Abend des zweiten» und «vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält» M. 6, 19.

ṛtukāla «die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung» NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3,

13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14.

pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla «die Kinderjahre»

PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ «wie viel Zeit ist

verflossen, seitdem du stehst?» 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ

sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā

kālena «im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit» 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle

gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ

yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ

kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate «die Zeit, welche er auf das

Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin» 174, 9.

tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya

pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān — sadaiva

bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ

nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT.

37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ

vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam «stets» M. 2, 58. 73.

dīrghakālam «eine lange Zeit hindurch» 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1.

mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1,

8. «nach langer Zeit» R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10.

kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena «nach einiger Zeit»

VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena «im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit» M. 9, 246. MBH. 3,

8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21.

VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya «nach langer Zeit» N. 18, 1. M. 8,

216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12.

kasyacitkālasya «nach einiger Zeit» ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya

MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt «im Verlauf der Zeit, mit

der Zeit» M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren

Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der

«Zeit» geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen «der thätig gedachten Zeit»

aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in

denen der Begriff der «Zeit» an den der «Weltordnung» oder des

«Schicksals» streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ.

svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1,

18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante

hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6,

12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ

rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3,

31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) «die

Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod», sowohl der, welcher nur

das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt

Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 «der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s

Alter kommt»: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ

(mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit

diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3,

3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān «er starb» BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2.

kālaṁ kar «sterben» MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und

kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta «gestorben» 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā

yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ

kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ.

varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi

vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo

‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ)

sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ

kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu — yuyudhe saha

kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3,

12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3,

55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1,

289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237.

śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18.

saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya

kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42.

mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146.

khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum.

rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13.

29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163,

7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra

11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19.

MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham

74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl.

kālāntaka) und mṛtyu «Tod»: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ

HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9.

mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā

mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und

mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden

auch als Personif. der «Zeit» oder des «Schicksals» aufgefasst werden) als

Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, «des

Polarsterns»: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben

HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge

des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) «Zeitalter, Weltalter» (= yuga):

tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) «Zeit» so v. a. «Zeitmaass; Prosodie»:

ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle

ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV.

PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) «Abtheilung, Abschnitt» VS. PRĀT. 3,

4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam.

kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35.

45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht «Cajanus indicus», sondern «eine best.

Lehmart.» — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H.

39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246.

kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate «mit der Zeit,

allmählich» Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ «Zeit» so v. a. «Gelegenheit» 3012.

brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe

durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. —

5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti

mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in

den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV.

PRĀT. 4, 123. fg.

kāla 1) kālena «von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann» (Gegens. pade pade)

Spr. (II) 6900. «zu spät» 6007.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=»red»>* The god of Death.

When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end

Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of

Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the

abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell.

kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14,

refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly.

kāla See under the word Kālamāna.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāla 1. kāla, m.

1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246.

2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long

run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time,

Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15.

3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla,

The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām.

3, 31, 47.

4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73.

5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2.

6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with

the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43,

etc.

— Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably,

Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1.

seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse,

Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of

action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-,

I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184.

II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m,

adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day,

Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i.

e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future,

and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh.

13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām.

2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv.

continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon.

prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a-

prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla

+ m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes,

early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day.

kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka),

I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57.

II. m.

1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13.

2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20.

3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12.

4. A proper name, Hariv. 189.

5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21.

III. f. lā.

1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc.

2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520.

3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552.

IV. f. lī.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195.

2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1.

— Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus.

mahā-,

I. m. a name of Śiva.

II. f. lī, Durgā.

— Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva;

N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc.

kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or

—°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day,

hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of

the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. —paraḥ kālaḥ

high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of

time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā,

or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time.

kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in

course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time.

kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle

on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva.

kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., —

°); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day);

half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of

death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually;

paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.);

kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.);

kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season;

in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time;

dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time;

kenacit-, after some time;

tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time;

kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya,

after a long time;

kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time,

opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come;

-gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time;

-kaśmiṁś cit-, one day;

kāle kāle, always at the right time;

ṣaṣṭhe —, at the end of the third day: —‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the

day, i. e. at noon;

pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days;

ubhau kālau, morning and evening.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ—paraṁ—

sakaṁ—seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti

kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka°

seṭ . kālayati te avakālat—ta, kalayām—babhūva—āsa—cakāra—cakre .

kālayiṣyati—te

kāla pu° īṣadalati ala—ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu

īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° .

3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole

na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° .

tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani°

tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka

samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi°

kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala—ac

kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12

mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ

kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī

parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ

sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4

dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā

aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° .

itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate

tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ

kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena

parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ—

bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā

‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca

rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau

paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya

pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya

vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt

tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca

dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya

tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu

śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena

saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ

ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya

svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena

mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt .

kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi

rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva

tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā .

yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi—

pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin

sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo

viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ

tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad

dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ .

nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha .

dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° .

yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca

nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° .

tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha .

tattvambhāvena ka° sū° .

vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ

sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt

sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ .

nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva

tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna

bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva

sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika

eva kālaḥ

sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca

bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ

kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ

pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam .

kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu

tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi

trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt

yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ

yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ

yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ

tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ!

idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha .

nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo

hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe—sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha

nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ

ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta

ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu

yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla

ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya

sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ

haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° .

bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā

janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ .

parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā .

kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha

jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi

viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca

saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate

itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati

parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva

paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ

kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau

kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti

kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu

svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma,

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā

uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ

kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye

kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ .

dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī .

tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca

padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā

vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam .

raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya

padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā

dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ

ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca

tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ

ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi

bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt,

tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ

bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi

ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva

tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau

svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ

sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ .

ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ,

vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt

bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ

kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge

svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ,

vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā

tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ

kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere .

tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti .

sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ

tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam

khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° .

dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° .

nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato

dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya

diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau

tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ

ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba

khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena

vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° .

atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena

kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate

na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya

vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt

upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva

upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam .

ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena

śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi

nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta

tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni

nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca

mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu

vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva

tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam

tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni

. satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā

malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ

prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava

abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni

pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca

ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ

puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ

sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ

tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau

bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya

trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti

nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata

evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ

kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati

. tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate

santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti

sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti .

athocyeta—bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi

bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ

kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ

yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu

caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata

padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā

kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ

mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na

kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ

nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki

kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā

sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3

āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā

tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt

śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā

praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā

jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas

trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana

vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi

sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt

saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ

samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca

ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato

vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi

kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta

. taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire

vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ .

ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva

śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo

vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ

adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ

vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino

vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti

badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat

saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam .

atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda

labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved

syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya

prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti

tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam .

śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat

kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ

saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni

śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi

nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ

kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca

vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni

sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha

nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi

bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ

vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha

māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt

acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya

siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti .

cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha

pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati

uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate

tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na

vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā .

pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na

saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo

brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu

padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya

saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt

prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ

smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ .

pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo

brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti

durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha

tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe

bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya

mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya

pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa

proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ

sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan

parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ

bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo

mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ

kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā .

sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ

sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat

prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu

bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika

grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya

tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni

śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti

smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai

sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ

manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ,

yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā .

aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ .

anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ

śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ .

bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca

śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam,

etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ .

nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu

kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya

sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt,

kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca

maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā

tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte

sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti

tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ

sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ

marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ

parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati

pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti

sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne

vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā

ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi

saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ

pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram

pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi,

ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau

bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi

mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ

aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ

sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām

anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau

ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti .

purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca

paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ

kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca

samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle

pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi

prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat

sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke

kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate .

gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ .

śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt

sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ

pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani

mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ

kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam .

nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu

kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva

kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena

prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa

ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti

. tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti .

sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa

viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ

pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca

kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt

svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye

nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ .

brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena

punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ

. kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ

sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo

rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ

. karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .

sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān

parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ

kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka

tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca .

yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti

kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra

nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu

anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti .

sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ .

sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ .

yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ

yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa

jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī

nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu

nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ

kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ

saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo

janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi

dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ

pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve

vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam .

bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe

kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam—

agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ

svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān

bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ

cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha

vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte

indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne

śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ

śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti

paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya

vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ .

ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ .

māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā

vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim .

kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā

vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā

. mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me

tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā

nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! .

bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā

hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā

mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya

bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva

bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati .

tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā

yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān

hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi

tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede

samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa

ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām

(pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ

vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti

vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata

ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ,

rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti

devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ

yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci,

yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ

yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro

rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam .

evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ

kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva

mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni .

loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā

pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi

rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma

dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ

karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham .

atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ

pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt .

pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ .

nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān

kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi .

atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha

satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi

tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha

manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā

vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ

triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya

saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska

ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati .

tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye

kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti

māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate,

yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya

kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena

janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya

cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ

kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ

sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa

viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo

bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra

jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ

viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ

viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam .

yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ .

kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca

saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ .

tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā

syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ

nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca

mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ

sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ

kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ

prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā

bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ

svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā

pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ

samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ .

tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo,

yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ

saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ .

mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra

praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate

pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim .

dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca

saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ

sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ

mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam .

tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ

sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata

dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta

āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva

vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra

saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ

karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ

yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo

manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ .

śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne

manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau

pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ

nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ

sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra

saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt .

ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na

saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ

saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca

kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ

tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt,

prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate

ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ .

pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti .

tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena

saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa

ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ

pradarśitaḥ

lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā

sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ

kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ

jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi

kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt

kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam .

antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt .

ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ

granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako

jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ

kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi

mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ—iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ .

amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa

mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla

ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan

prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha

raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ .

ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° .

prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo

daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ

kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva

prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya

mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya

bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena

pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ

palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati

palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha

raṅga° .

nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā

bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā .

aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate .

māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate .

surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360

divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca .

taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā

dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 .

sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ

vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo

bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ

sandhayaḥ svakāḥ .

yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya

1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ .

sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ

kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ .

ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ

proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī .

paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ

tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde

uktāḥ .

si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ

tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ

vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi

pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva

lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa .

so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti

pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya

sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā°

anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ

deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ

svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate

tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya

kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani

suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā

guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe

raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca

deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ,

ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle

tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena

sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu

gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam

nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca

pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya

piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva

yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ

kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ

prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na

muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri°

samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ

tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena

tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi

bhūriprayogāt . si° kau°

samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva

udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu

kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte

kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi

kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu

ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika

kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra

tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ

ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt

prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ

puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla—kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle

pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya

tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau

tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke

havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle

lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām

prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° .

ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16

divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ

pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo°

ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye

vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ

prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava

tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0

yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya

siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā

megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya

vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam

upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt

pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ,

grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā

vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā

anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu

kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ .

kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ

tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya

hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu

kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati

dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya

sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti .

varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī

kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram .

18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ .

kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau

śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi°

sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe

gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena

saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1

kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ .

varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī,

tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ

provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21

tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca

aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam .

śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā

aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ°

darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ

śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° .

candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca .

sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā

dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10

stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ

jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° .

candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ .

budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ .

atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā .

ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila

dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā

ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne

tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ

bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ .

ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt

nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya

sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0

yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca .

astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° .

iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina

āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā

yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi

prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca

pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ .

yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ .

idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° .

dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° .

dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā

bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° .

uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt .

ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ .

khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ

kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā

avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ

muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° .

evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā

grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam .

ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā

grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha

proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800

rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ .

phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena

bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye

vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau

kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati .

atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ

kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā

nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste

bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā

proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye

vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ

prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ

karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha

yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā

tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā

grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi

kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam .

bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga

eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma

sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0

prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca .

prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā

yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve

jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0

yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho

nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca

yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā

prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā

āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ

kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ

.

atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ

san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san

dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ

prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya

iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva

proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ

raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti

. ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ

kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti

yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke

pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati

. ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti

viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre

vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe

samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate

kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva

hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ

kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña°

sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva

kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ .

samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate

saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo

bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde

udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede

. sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre

sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe

saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some

vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām,

śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some

vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve

ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge

kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya

tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ .

yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca

vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa

ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° .

vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli°

dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo

lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° .

गव्य — gavya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gavya Nom. P. «-vyati», to desire cattle or cows ; see «gavyat».

gavya (or less common «gavya» six times xiii) mfn. ( 5-1, 2 and 39; iv,

3, 160) consisting of cattle or cows, coming from or belonging to a cow

(as milk, curds, &c.; cf. «paṇcag-«) &c.; proper or fit for cattle ; sacred to

the cow, worshipping the cow 9 ; m. pl. N. of a people (living to the

north of Madhya-deśa) ; l. («ā») f. a cow-herd ; the measure commonly

called Gav-yūti (q.v.) ; see also «gavyā»; fn. a bow-string ; = «gavya-

dṛḍha» ; n. cattle, cow-herd («gavya»); ix, 62, 23; pasture land ; cow-

milk

gavya &c.,

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gavya a. [gave hitaṁ yat]

(1) Consisting of cattle or cows.

(2) Coming or got from a cow (as milk, curds &c.).

(3) Proper or fit for cattle.

(4) Sacred to the cow, worshipping the cow. —vyaṁ

(1) Cattle, a herd of cows.

(2) Pasture-land.

(3) The milk of a cow.

(4) A bow-string.

(5) Colouring substance, yellow pigment. —vyā

(1) A herd of cows.

(2) A measure of distance equal to two Krośas.

(3) A bow-string.

(4) A colouring substance, yellow pigment.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

gavya (von go) 1) adj. «aus Rindern, Kühen bestehend; aus Milch

bestehend» P. 5, 1, 2. 39. ūrva ṚV. 1, 72, 8. 3, 32, 16. paśu 5, 61, 5. vraja

1, 131, 3. rādhas 5, 52, 17. 6, 44, 12. maghāni 7, 67, 9. gavyānyaśvyā

sahasrā 8, 34, 14. 62, 15. āji 4, 58, 10. vastrāṇi 9, 8, 6. havis MBH. 13,

3321. «von der Kuh (dem Rinde) kommend» P. 4, 3, 160. AK. 2, 9, 50.

TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. 1273. an. 2, 354. MED. j. 16. ghṛta VS. 35, 17. 23, 8.

ajina PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 4. kośa MBH. 4, 1337. viṣāṇakoṣa 1, 5370. payas 13,

707. M. 3, 271. SUŚR. 1, 174, 20. dadhi 178, 3. sarpis 180, 15. māṁsa

204, 2. MBH. 8, 2050. 13, 4247. fg. peyūṣa M. 5, 6. pañcagavya n. «die

fünf von der Kuh kommenden Dinge; Milch, gekäste Milch, Butter, Urin,

Dünger» M. 11, 165. PAÑCAT. III, 119. — «für die Kuh geeignet» TRIK. 3,

3, 309. H. an. MED. «der Kuh geheiligt, die Kuh verehrend» P. 4, 1, 85,

Vārtt. 9, Sch. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Volkes im Norden von Madhyadeśa

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 28. — 3) n. a) «Rindvieh»: ṣaṣṭiḥ sahasramanu

gavyamāgāt ṚV. 1, 126, 3. udīṁ gavyaṁ sṛjate satvabhirdhuniḥ

«Kuhheerde» 5, 34, 8. — b) «Weideplatz»: gavyaṁ mīmāṁsamānāḥ

pṛcchanti santi tatroṣā3 iti AIT. BR. 4, 28. yatra gavyamabhayaṁ syāt

(vgl. urvīṁ gavyūtimabhayaṁ ca naskṛdhi ṚV. öfters) LĀṬY. 10, 17, 4. —

c) «Kuhmilch» TRIK. 2, 9, 16. H. ś. 98. KUMĀRAS. 7, 72. — d)

«Bogensehne» TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. an. MED. Nach H. 776 auch gavyā f. —

c) «eine Art Färbestoff» (vgl. gavyā unter 2. gavya). H. an. MED. — Vgl.

sugavya.

gavya (wie eben) 1) adj. «zum Rindergeschlecht gehörig, aus Rindern»

oder «Kühen bestehend, vom Rinde» oder «von der Kuh kommend»:

caturviṁśatiṁ tvevaitāngavyānālabheta (sc. paśūn) ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 3, 11.

naite sarve paśavo yadajāvayaścāraṇyāścaite vai sarve paśavo yadgavyā

iti gavyā («weibliche Thiere») uttame ‘hannālabhate 3, 2, 3. ekādaśa

prātargavyāḥ paśava ālabhyante TS. 5, 6, 22, 1. vastrā ṚV. 8, 1, 17.

rādhāṁsyaśvyā gavyā 5, 79, 7. ete somā abhi gavyā sahasrā (asṛgran) 9,

87, 5. ati śritī tiraścatā gavyā jigātyaṇvyā 14, 6. — 2) f. ā a) «Kuhheerde»

P. 4, 2, 50. AK. 2, 9, 60. TRIK. 3, 3, 309. H. 1421. an. 2, 354. MED. j. 16.

— b) «ein best. Längenmaass», = gavyūti oder 2 Krośa H. 888. H. an. — c)

«Bogensehne» H. 776. — d) «ein best. Färbestoff» (s. gorocanā) RĀJAN.

im ŚKDR. gavyadṛḍha dass. VYUTP. 137. — Die erste Bed. vom f. gehört

dem Accente nach hierher, ob es auch mit den andern der Fall sei,

können wir nicht bestimmen. Da uns der Accent nicht überall leiten

konnte, haben wir zur leichteren Uebersicht bei diesem Artikel alle Bedd.

des f., bei dem vorhergehenden alle des n. zusammengestellt und diesem

auch das m. beigefügt, da gavya nach den Grammatikern einen weitern

Umfang hat. Das auf gavy zurückgehende gavyā s. besonders.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

gavya gavya, i. e. go + ya,

I. adj., f. yā,

1. Produced by a cow.

2. Consisting of milk.

II. n. Milk.

— Comp. pañcagavya, i. e. pañcan-, n. the five pure things produced by

the cow, Man. 11, 165.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

gavya a. consisting of, belonging to, coming from cows or cattle; f. gavyā

desire for cows or milk, ardour of battle; n. gavya cattle, milk, pasture-

ground.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

gavya 1. gav-ya, den. desire cattle: only pr. pt. gavyat: desiring cattle;

ardently desirous; eager for battle.

gavya 2. gav-ya (or -ya), consisting of or relating to cattle; produced by a

cow; n. herd of cows; pasture; cow’s milk.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

gavya (ātmano gāmicchati kyac vānto yi pratyaye pā° av)

ātmasambandhitvena goricchāyām aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . gavyati

agavyīt—agavīt gavyā (vā)m cakāra gaurasi vīra! gavyate ṛ° 6 . 45 . 8 . 26

.

gavya tri° gorvikāraḥ gavi bhavaṁ, gorhitaṁ, goridaṁ, vā sarvatra yat

yādau av . 1 gosambandhini, gavyasatrake jai° adhikara° bhā° . 2

saratnamarghyaṁ madhumacca gavyam kumā° saṁvatsaraṁ tu gavyena

payasā pāyasena vā . śeluṁ gavyañca peyūṣaṁ prayatnena vivarjayet

manuḥ . 2 gorhitādau ca . gavi iṣau netre vā sādhu yat . 3 jyāyāṁ 4

rāgadravye ca na° medi° . jyāyāḥ śarakṣepaṇasādhanatvān

rāgadravyasya ca netrarāgajanakatvāttathātvam . gervikāre 5

gorocanādravye strī rājani° . tasya gorvikāratvāttathātvam tatra jyāyām

śravaṇopāntikanīyamānagavyam māghaḥ . samūhe pāśā° yat . 6

gosamūhe, 7 gavyūtau krośayuge ca strī hemaca° .

गो — go Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go «gaus» (acc. «gām» instr. «gavā» dat. «gave», gen. abl. «gos» loc.

«gavi»; du. «gāvā» [Ved.], «gāvau»; pl. nom. «gāvas» acc. «gās» [rarely

«gāvas» ii] instr. «gobhis» dat. abl. «gobhyas», gen. «gavām» [once at the

end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. «gonām» loc. «goṣu») m. an ox

f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf.

«gav, gava», qq. vv.; cf. also «gavām, gavi, gāṁ» ss.vv.; «gavāṁ vrata» N.

of a Sāman; «gavāṁ tīrtha» see «go t-; goṣu-gam», to set out for a battle

[to conquer cows] ; «anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow»,

milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; «fat» ( x, 27, 22 ; = «go-ṣṭoma» (q.v.)

(see also «go-āyus»); (pl.) «the herds of the sky», the stars ; (m. [also f.

rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with

Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. «-putra») ; the

moon ; a kind of medicinal plant («ṛṣabha») ; a singer, praiser (fr. «gai») ;

«a goer», horse (fr. 1. «gā») on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr.

āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to

be the «balādhyakṣa» of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f.

(?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of

sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs

of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= «dhenu» q.v.) ; a

region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.;

(hence) the number «nine» ; = «go-vīthī» on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11)

speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. «gai») ; N. of

Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the

manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of

Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’;

Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod.

Germ. ‘Gau’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.]

(1) Cattle, kine (pl.).

(2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c.

(3) The stars.

(4) The sky.

(5) The thunder-bolt of Indra.

(6) A ray of light.

(7) A diamond.

(8) Heaven.

(9) An arrow. —f.

(1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ

Mk. 10. 60.

(2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ

raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3.

2; Me. 30.

(3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki.

4. 20.

(4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī.

(5) A mother.

(6) A quarter of the compass.

(7) Water (pl.).

(8) The eye.

(9) A region of the sky. —m.

(1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K.

P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava.

(2) The hair of the body.

(3) An organ of sense.

(4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac.

(5) The sun.

(6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.).

(7) The moon.

(8) A singer.

(9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice.

(11) A house.

— Comp.

—kaṁṭakaḥ, —kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and

thus made impassable. —2. the cow’s hoof. —3. the print of a cow’s hoof.

—karṇa a. having cow’s ears. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. —2. a mule. —3. a snake. —4. a span (from

the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). —5. N. of a place of

pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8.

33. —6. a kind of deer. —7. a kind of arrow.

—kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird.

—kilaḥ, —kīlaḥ 1. a plough. —2. a pestle.

—kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya

govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. —2. a cow-house. —3. N. of

a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up).

—kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. —2.

squint-eyed.

—kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā.

—kṛtaṁ cow-dung.

—kṣīraṁ cow’s milk.

—kṣuraṁ —rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof.

—khā a nail.

—gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf.

—goyugaṁ a pair of oxen.

—goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed.

—graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. —2. a cow-house.

—grahaḥ capture of cattle.

—grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow

when performing an expiatory rite.

—ghātaḥ, —ghātakaḥ, —ghātin m. a cow-killer.

—ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. —2. clarified butter coming from a cow.

—ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. —2. one who has killed a cow. —

3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest.

—caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood.

—cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. —2. frequenting, dwelling,

resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. —3. within the scope,

power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-,

śravaṇa- &c. —4. moving on earth. —5. accessible to, attainable. —6.

circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. (

—raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ

paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. —2.

(a) a district, department, province, sphere.

(b) an abode, dwelling-place. —3. range of the organs of sense, an

object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ

yā to become visible. —4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ

Bh. 2. 16. —5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na

gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24;

api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. —6. horizon.

—7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ

to place within the range (of sight), make current.). —carman n. 1. a

cow’s hide. —2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha:

—daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān

dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —cārakaḥ

cowherd. —cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. —ja a. born in the

earth (rice &c). —jaraḥ an old ox or bull. —jalaṁ the urine of a bull or

cow. —jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (—kaḥ) a preparer of food,

baker. —jāta a born in the heaven (gods). —tallajaḥ an excellent bull or

cow. —tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. —traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a

cowpen. —2. a stable in general. —3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa

māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9.

141. —4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30;

S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ

geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. —5. a multitude. —6. increase. —7. a forest.

—8. a field. —9. a road. —10. possessions, wealth. —11. an umbrella, a

parasol. —12. knowledge of futurity. —13. a genus, class, species. —14. a

caste, tribe, caste according to families. (—traḥ) a mountain. (—trā) 1. a

multitude of cows. —2. the earth. -kartṛ, —kārin m. the founder of a

family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation;

Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest

member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato

gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ

blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong

name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku.

4. 8. —da a. giving cows. (—daḥ) brain. (—dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. —

datra a. Ved. giving cows. (—traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (—traṁ) a crown

(protecting the head). —daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (—taṁ) 1.

yellow orpiment. —2. a white fossil substance. —dānaṁ 1. the gift of a

cow. —2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya

godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the

word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently).

—3. the part of the head close to the right ear. —dāya a. intending to give

cows. —dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. —2. a spade, hoe. —dāvarī N. of a river in

the south. —duh m., —duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. —dohaḥ 1. the

milking of cows. —2. the milk of cows. —3. the time of milking cows. —

dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. —2. the milking of cows. —dohanī a

milk-pail. —dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. —dhanaṁ 1. a herd or

multitude of cows, cattle. —2. possession of cows. (—naḥ) a broadpointed

arrow. —dharaḥ a mountain. —dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to

cattle. —dhuptaḥ, —dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. —2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat-

flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. —dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of

sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally

return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on

the earth). —dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. —dhraḥ a mountain. —

naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. —naṁdī the female of the Sārasa

bird. —nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. —2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like

a bull). —3. N. of a country. —nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of

the Mahābhāṣya. —nasaḥ, —nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. —2. a kind of gem.

—nasā the mouth of a cow. —nāthaḥ 1. a bull. —2. an owner of land. —3. a

herdsman. —4. an owner of kine. —nāyaḥ a cowherd. —nāsā the

projecting snout of a cow or ox. —nāsaṁ a kind of gem. —niṣyaṁdaḥ

cow’s urine. —paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed

tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. —2. the chief of a cowpen. —3. the

superintendent of a village. —4. a king. —5. a protector, guardian. -anasī

the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a

cowherd. —2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief

of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the

fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife.

-vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd;

gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (—pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of

a district. —2. myrrh. (—pikā) 1. a cowherdess. —2. protectress. (—pī) a

cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the

companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). —2. a milk-maid. —3. a

protectress. —4. Nature, elementary nature. —patiḥ 1. an owner of cows.

—2. a bull. —3. a leader, chief. —4. the sun. —5. Indra. —6. N. of Kṛṣṇa —7.

N. of Śiva. —8. N. of Varuṇa. —9. a king. —paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. —pāḥ

m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. —2. protector, or guardian. 1. —pānasī a curved

beam which supports a thatch. —pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an

epithet of Śiva. —4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, —

pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa.

—pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. —pālikā, —pālī the wife of a cowherd. —pittaṁ

bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is

prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). —pītaḥ a species of wagtail. —pīthaḥ protec tion.

(—thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. —pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (—

cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. —2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or

four or thirty-four strings. —puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull —putraḥ 1. a

young bull. —2. an epithet of Karṇa. —puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. —

2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. —3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. —

purīṣaṁ cowdung. —prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. —pracāraḥ

pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. —prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford

for cattle. —2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. —praveśaḥ the time

when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. —phaṇā 1. a

bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. —2. a sling. —bālaḥ

the hair of cows. —bhuj m. a king. —bhṛt m. a mountain. —makṣikā a

gadfly. —magha a. granting cattle or cows. —maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. —2.

a multitude of cows. —mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. —matallikā a tractable cow,

an excellent cow. —mathaḥ a cowherd. —mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs

attending on kārtikeya. —māṁsaṁ beef. —māyu 1. a kind of frog. —2. a

jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25.

—3. bile of a cow. —4. N. of a Gandharva. —mukhaḥ, —mukhaṁ

[gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13.

(—khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. —2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall

made by thieves. (—khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. —2. spreading

unguents, smearing. (—khaṁ, —khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon

containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust

inside. (—khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the

Ganges flows. —mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. —mūtraṁ cow’s urine. —

mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the

syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: —vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ

yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ ..

see Śi. 19. 46). —2. a form of calculation. —mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya).

—medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of

four different colours: —white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. —medakaḥ

1. see gomeda. —2. a kind of poison (kākola). —3. smearing the body with

unguents. —medhaḥ, —yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. —yānaṁ a carriage drawn

by oxen. —yukta a. drawn by oxen. —yutaṁ a cattle-station. —rakṣaḥ 1. a

cowherd. —2. keeping or tending cattle. —3. the orange. —4. an epithet of

Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. —raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. —2. a prisoner. —3. a

naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. —4. a chanter.

—ravaṁ saffron. —rasaḥ cow’s milk. —2. curds. —3. buttermilk. —4. the

flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. —rājaḥ

an excellent bull. —rāṭikā, —rāṭī the Sārikā bird. —rutaṁ a measure of

distance equal to two Krośas. —rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (—paḥ) N. of

Śiva. —rocaṁ yellow orpiment. —rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared

from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. —lavaṇaṁ

a measure of salt given to a cow. —lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with

a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. —lokaḥ a

part of heaven, cowworld. —lomī a prostitute. —vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a

wolf. —vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about

Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger

for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra

to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. —vaśā a

barren cow. —vāṭaṁ, —vāsaḥ a cow-pen. —vāsana a. covered with an

ox-hide. —vikartaḥ, —vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. —2. a husbandman.

—vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. —viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a

chief herdsman. —2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. —3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day

in the light half of the month of phalguna. —viṣ f., —viṣṭhā cowdung. —

visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). —vīthiḥ

f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms

bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and

svātī. —vīryaṁ the price received for milk. —vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. —

vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. —vṛṣaḥ, —vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull.

-dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. —vrajaḥ 1. a cow-

pen. —2. a herd of cows. —3. a place where cattle graze. —vrata, —vratin

a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. —śakṛt n. cowdung. —śataṁ a

present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. —śālaṁ, —lā a cow-stall. —

śīrṣaḥ, —rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. —ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. —ṣan, —ṣā

a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. —ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. —2.

giving cattle. —ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. —saṁkhyaḥ a

cowherd. —sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). —sargaḥ the time at which

cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. —savaḥ a kind of

cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). —sahasraṁ a kind of

present (mahādāna). (—srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the

dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. —sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends

having separate halters for each ox or cow. —stanaḥ 1. the udder of a

cow. —2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. —3. a pearl-necklace of four

strings. —stanā, —nī a bunch of grapes. —sthānaṁ, —kaṁ a cow-pen. —

svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. —2. a religious mendicant. —3. an

honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). —hatyā

cow-slaughter. —hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. —hita a.

cherishing or protecting kine. (—taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau;

gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4,

2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām

(dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda-

Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten

des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines

comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) «Rind, Stier, Kuh»; pl. «Rinder,

Kühe, Rinderheerden» (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26.

25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ.

2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate

yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16,

4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu

gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1,

32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ

ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1,

9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā

varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā

gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23.

gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg.

«Kühe und Gold» MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. «eine Kuh und ein

Brahman» 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79.

hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177.

7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana

und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378.

gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3,

1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go

verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das «Rind» oder, die

«Kuh» bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B.

gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā,

gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. «das

Sternbild des Stiers» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4.

17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) «was vom Rinde» oder «von der Kuh

kommt» (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) «Milch», meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta

matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8.

33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) «Fleisch»: agnervarma pari

gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) «Haut, Rindsleder, daraus

geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.»: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94,

9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5.

asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8.

tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam «du schleudertest aus dem

Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss» 1, 121. 9. — d) «Sehne»: vṛkṣe

vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt

für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti

trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3.

goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7,

1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei

einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. «die Heerde

am Himmel, die Gestirne»: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo

bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ «mit ihren

Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht» 7, 36, 1. — 6) «Himmel»

NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga

st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst

nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ

pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) «die Sonne»

NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl.

goputra. — 8) m. «der Mond» VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. «die Lichtstrahlen

(die Rinderheerde des Himmels», um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft)

NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK.

MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH.

3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1,

8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito

‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4,

16, 14. sg. «der Strahl» Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) «Donnerkeil» AK. H. an.

SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11)

«Weltgegend» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) «die milchende

Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde» NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK.

MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172.

khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ

tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH.

1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam

13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31.

(rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl.

payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und

kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko

vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. — 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch

dhenu. — 13) «Wasser» AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n.

(also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36.

— 14) «Pfeil» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) «Auge» AK.

H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) «das Haar auf dem Körper»,

m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. «Mutter»

EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. «eine best. Arzeneipflanze» (ṛṣabha)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) «Rede, die Göttin der Rede» (Sarasvatī) NAIGH.

1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch.

janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72.

tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro

ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati

bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi

gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge

der Herleitung von gā «singen» angenommen. — 20) «Lobsänger» NAIGH.

3, 16. — 21) «Gänger, Ross» (von gam oder gā «gehen») SĀY. zu ṚV. 1,

121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) «Billion»: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha

gaurbhavati (akṣita = «100,000 Millionen») PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N.

pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215.

(vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca

MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen

Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer

Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601.

go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich

«Kuh»). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr.

2842. «Sinnesorgan» überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich

«Kuh»). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7.

gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem

Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel

Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. «der Zahl neun»

WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382.

go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen «der neun Erden.»

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her.

The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana

Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

go go,

I. m.

1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72.

2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1.

II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18.

III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36.

IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12.

V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149.

VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381.

VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25.

— Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek]

Goth. gavi, gauja.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays

of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). —f.

cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the

goddess of speech.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven,

stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama—karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte

paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā

svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya

tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā

vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt

gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti

yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya

kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ

apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra

karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi

gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame

yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle

tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ

gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt

cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā

cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4

hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5

svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre

viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe

bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā

ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā°

u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya

gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya

cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya

śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle

gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam .

ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca

strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18

lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām

gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ

navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ

gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ .

padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya

uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ

ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte

padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe

gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na°

gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ

pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ

pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya

godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ

viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ

vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru .

jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ°

vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa

svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt

pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam

tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ

varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ

vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā

gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ

śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ

param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ

pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru

sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ

kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ

pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit .

kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ

śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān

gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara

krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca

mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ

gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham .

śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca

pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi°

191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta°

viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli°

preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu

gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām .

nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ .

gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena

gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte

gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ

acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva

ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam .

गौर — gaura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gaura mf («ī») n. (in comp. or ifc. g. «kaḍārādi») white, yellowish,

reddish, pale red v &c.

mf («ī») n. shining, brilliant, clean, beautiful

gaura m. white, yellowish (the colour)

gaura m. a kind of buffalo (Bos Gaurus, often classed with the Gavaya)

&c.

gaura m. white mustard (the seed of which is used as a weight, = 3

Rāja-sarshapas)

gaura m. Grislea tomentosa («dhava»)

gaura m. a species of rice

gaura m. the moon

gaura m. the planet Jupiter

gaura m. N. of the Nāga śeṣa

gaura m. of Caitanya (cf. «-candra»)

gaura m. of a Yoga teacher (son of śuka and Pīvarī) 981

gaura pl. N. of a family (cf. «-rātreya»)

gaura n. white mustard

gaura n. N. of a potherb

gaura n. saffron (cf. «kanaka-«)

gaura n. the filament of a lotus

gaura n. gold

gaura n. orpiment

gaura mf («ī») n. («ā») f. = «rī» (cf. «gaulā»)

gaura mf («ī») n. («ī») f. the female of the Bos Gaurus («Vāc or voice of

the middle region of the air», i, 164, 41 according to

gaura n. = «gaurikā»

gaura n. the earth

gaura n. red chalk

gaura n. a yellow pigment or dye («go-rocanā», «orpiment»

gaura n. turmeric («rajanī»)

gaura n. N. of several other plants («priyaṁgu, maṇjiṣṭhā, śveta-dūrvā,

mallikā, tulasī, suvarṇa-kadalī, ākāśa-māṁsī»)

gaura n. N. of several metres (one of 4 x 12 syllables; another of 4 x 13

syllables; another of 4 x 26 long syllables)

gaura n. (in music) a kind of measure

gaura n. () N. of a Rāgiṇī

gaura n. «brilliant Goddess», śiva’s wife Pārvatī Pariś.

gaura n. N. of Varuṇa’s wife

gaura n. of a Vidyā-devī, iii, 231, 48

gaura n. of śākya-muni’s mother

gaura n. of the wife of Vi-rajas and mother of Su-dhāman

gaura n. of several other women

gaura n. of several rivers (one originally the wife of Prasena-jit or

Yuvanāśva, changed by his curse into the river Bāhu-dā ([cf. Lat.

‘gilvus’?])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

gaura a. (rā or rī f.)

(1) White; kailāsagauraṁ vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ R. 2. 35;

dviradadaśanacchedagaurasya tasya Me. 59, 52; Rs. 1. 6.

(2) Yellowish, pale-red; gorocanākṣepanitāṁtagaure Ku. 7. 17; R. 6.

65; gaurāṁgi garvaṁ na kadāpi kuryāḥ R. G.

(3) Reddish.

(4) Shining, brilliant.

(5) Pure, clean, beautiful. —raḥ 1 The white colour.

(2) The yellowish colour.

(3) The reddish colour.

(4) White mustard.

(5) The moon.

(6) A kind of buffalo.

(7) A kind of deer.

(8) The planet Jupiter.

(9) N. of Chaitanya. —raṁ

(1) The filament of a lotus.

(2) Saffron.

(3) Gold.

— Comp.

—aṁgaḥ N. of

(1) Viṣṇu.

(2) Kṛṣṇa. —āsyaḥ a kind of black monkey, with a white face. —kharaḥ

a wild monkey. —sarṣapaḥ white mustard (considered as a kind of

weight).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

gaura ved., gaura klass. Uṇ. 2, 29. ŚĀNT. 1, 4. 1) adj. f. ī (auch klass.) P.

4, 1, 41. «weisslich, gelblich, röthlich» (als m. «die weissliche Farbe

u.s.w.») NIR. 11, 39. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 24. 3, 4, 25, 191. H. 1393. 1394. an.

2, 413. MED. r. 27. kann im comp. seinem subst. vorgehen oder

nachfolgen gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. gaurasya yaḥ payasaḥ

pītimānaśe ṚV. 10, 100, 2. gauralalāma TS. 5, 6, 16, 1. mṛṇāla- VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 4, 31. 58, 36. SUŚR. 1, 106, 17. bhūmi 135, 1. sirā 356, 1.

(acalam) gauraṁ tuṣāraiḥ MEGH. 53. 60. tuṣāragaura ṚT. l, 6.

kailāśagauraṁ vṛṣam RAGH. 2, 35. MBH. 6, 445. -dukūla GĪT. 11, 26.

gaurīṁ kanakavarṇābhāmiṣṭāmantaḥpureśvarīm R. 5, 14, 30.

jāmbūnadaśuddhagaura DRAUP. 7, 7. MBH. 4, 2301. fg. nārī 8, 2050. —

payodhara BHARTṚ. 1, 9. taruṇādityasadṛśaiḥ śaṇagauraiśca vānaraiḥ

MBH. 3, 16350. taruṇādityagauraiḥ śaragauraiśca vānaraiḥ R. 4, 39, 14.

11. raśmayo yasya (candrasya) gaurāḥ MṚCCH. 26, 1. rocanā- RAGH. 6,

65. GĪT. 11, 12. CAURAP. 1. «glänzend, rein, schön», = ujjvala TRIK. 3, 3,

346. = viśuddha H. an. MED. = viśada H. an. -kānti CAURAP. 1 (nach

dem Sch.: = manohara). — 2) m. a) «eine Büffelart, Bos Gaurus», häufig

neben dem gavaya genannt. AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 3, 9. ṚV. 4,

21, 8. gauro na tṛṣitaḥ piva 1, 16, 5. 4, 58, 2. 5, 78, 2. 7, 69, 6. 98, 1. 8,

4, 3. 45, 24. 76, 1. 10, 51, 6. gauramāraṇyamanu te diśāmi VS. 13, 48.

24, 28. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 16, 3, 14. BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 21. 8, 2, 20. Vgl.

gauramṛga. — b) «weisser Senf» MED. n. nach H. an. m. «das Korn», als

«Gewicht» = 3 rājasarṣapa YĀJÑ. 1, 362. Hier eig. adj. mit Ergänzung von

sarṣapa aus dem vorhergehenden rājasarṣaya; vgl. gaurasarṣapa. — c)

«Grislea tomentosa Roxb.» (dhava) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) «der Mond» H.

an. MED.; vgl. Ind. St. 2, 262. 286. — e) «der Planet Jupiter» H. ś. 13; vgl.

Ind. St. 2, 287. — f) N. pr. eines Joga- Lehrers, eines Sohnes des Śuka von

der Pīvarī, HARIV. 981. — g) Bein. des Heiligen Caitanya

ANANTASAṁHITĀ im ŚKDR. — 3) f. gaurā = gaurī f. DVIRŪPAK. im

ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī «die Kuh des Bos Gaurus»: somo gaurī adhi śritaḥ (P. 1, 1,

19, Sch.) ṚV. 9, 12, 3. madhvaḥ pibanti gauryaḥ. yā indreṇa

sayāvarīrvṛṣṇā madanti 1, 84, 10. yathā ha tyadvasavo gauryaṁ citpadi

ṣitāmamuñcata 4, 12, 6. gaurīrmimāya (AV.: gaurinmimāya) salilāni

takṣatī 1, 164, 41. Auf der letzten Stelle beruht die Deutung des Wortes

als Vāc «des mittleren Gebietes» NAIGH. 1, 11. NIR. 11, 40. — b)

«Gelbwurz», = rajanī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 2, 39,

11. 101, 8. = piṅgā (wofür ŚKDR. dāruharidrā substituirt) MED. Auch N.

einer Menge anderer Pflanzen: = priyaṁgu H. an. MED. = mañjiṣṭhā,

śvetadūrvā, mallikā. tulasī, suvarṇakadalī, ākāsamāṁsī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— c) «ein best. gelbes Pigment» (s. gorocanā) H. an. MED. — d) «ein noch

nicht menstruirtes (achtjähriges) Mädchen» AK. 2, 6, 1, 8. TRIK. 3, 3,

346. H. 510. H. an. MED. GṚHYASAṁGR. 2, 28. 29. — e) «die Erde» H. an.

MED. — f) N. pr. der Tocher des Himālaya u. Gemahlin Śiva’s AK. 1, 1, 1,

32. TRIK. H. 203. H. an. MED. MEGH. 51. 61. gaurī yatra vitastātvaṁ yātā

(vgl. u. «k») RĀJA-TAR. 1, 29. — g) N. pr. der Gemahlin Varuṇa’s H. an.

MED. MBH. 5, 3968. 13, 6751. 7637. — h) N. pr. der Mutter Śākyamuni’s

(s. māyā) TRIK. 1, 1, 14. — i) N. pr. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 240. — k)

N. pr. der Gemahlin Prasenajit’s (oder Yuvanāśva’s), welche durch einen

Fluch ihres Gatten in den Fluss Bāhudā (vgl. u. f) verwandelt wurde,

HARIV. 710. 1716. VP. 362, N. 18. 448, N. 9. — N. pr. der Gemahlin des

Virajas und der Mutter Sudhāman’s 82, N. 2. — l) N. pr. eines Flusses

(vgl. u. «f») und k) H. an. MED. MBH. 6, 333. VP. 183. LIA. I, Anh.

XXXVIII. Vgl. gaurīgaṅgā ebend. 55. — m) N. pr. einer Rāgiṇī, der

Gemahlin des Rāga Mālava (vgl. gauḍa 2, «a»): ārāmamadhyato kumārikā

(zwei Kürzen fehlen) śāradendumukhalakṣmīḥ. rāḍīdāḍimavījaṁ (rāḍī!)

dadhatī kīrānane gaurī.. SAṁGĪTADĀM. im ŚKDR. Hierher viell. zu ziehen:

gaurī vidyātha gāndhārī keśinī mitrasāhvayā. sāvitryā saha sarvāstāḥ

pārvatyā yānti pṛṣṭhataḥ.. MBH. 3, 14562. HARIV. 12036. 12041. Vgl.

auch u. gāndhāra. — n) N. verschiedener Metra: a) metrical

sequenceCOLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 160 (VII, 10). — b) metrical sequence

ebend. 161 (VIII, 4). — g) 4 Mal 26 Längen ebend. 164 (XXI, 3). — 5) n.

a) «weisser Senf» H. an. m. nach MED. — b) «die Staubfäden der

Lotusblume» H. an. MED. — c) «Safran» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Diese Bed. hat

nach VIŚVA beim Sch. zu CAURAP. 10 kanakagaura n.:

kanakagaurakṛtāṅgarāga KAURAP. 10. — d) «Gold» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

gaura 1) ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. ŚIŚ. 11, 14. — 4) Z. 1 füge a)

nach ī hinzu. — b) VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 66. «Nacht»

AUFRECHT. — d) vgl. Spr. 282. — f) Ind. St.5,194.9,58. 106. 108. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 25,a,34. 58,a,10. 71,b,30. 77,b,37. auch mit der Sarasvatī

identificirt WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 190. — k) N. pr. verschiedener Frauen

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,a,21. 321,b, No. 763. 364,b, No. 68. — n) d) metrical

sequenceInd. St. 8, 385. — Vgl. mahāgaurī.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

gaura(m) A mountain in the Kuśa island. (Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 12,

Verse 4).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

gaura gaura,

I. adj., f. rī, White, yellow, pale red, Megh. 53; Rām. 5, 14, 30.

II. m.

1. A kind of buffalo, Bos gaurus, Bhāg. P. 3, 10. 21.

2. White mustard, as a measure, Yājñ. 1, 362.

III. f. rī,

1. Turmeric, Suśr. 1, 59, 11.

2. A young girl prior to menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213.

3. The wife of Śiva, Megh. 51.

4. The wife of Varuṇa, MBh. 5, 3968.

5. The name of a river, MBh. 6, 333.

IV. n. Saffron, Caur. 10.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

gaura f. ī white, yellowish, reddish; brilliant, beautiful. m. = gauramṛga or

= gaurasarṣapa, N. of a teacher; f. ī a female buffalo, a young girl before

puberty, E. of the wife of Śiva, N. of sev. women.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

gaura gaura, a. (ī) whitish, yellowish, reddish; m. kind of buffalo; white

mustard (a grain of it = a measure);

-mukha, m. N.;

-mṛga, m. kind of buffalo.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

gaura pu° guṅ—gatau ra ni° vṛddhiḥ gura—ghañ prajñādyaṇ vā . 1 candre

2 śvetasarṣape medi° 3 dhavavṛkṣe rājani° 4 pītavarṇe 5 śvetavarṇe 6

aruṇavarṇe ca pu° 7 tadviśiṣṭe tri° striyāṁ gaurā° ṅīṣ . 8 śrīcaitanyadeve

mahāprabhau anantamahitā . 9 padmakeśare na° medi° 10 svarṇe 11

kuṅkume ca na° rājani° . tatra śvetavarṇayukte kailāsagauraṁ

vṛṣamārurukṣoḥ raghuḥ pītavarṇādye gorocanopanitānta gaure kumā°

aruṇavarṇādye kīrṇaiḥ piṣṭātakoghaiḥ kṛta divasamukhaiḥ

kuṅkumakṣodagauraḥ ratnāva° taruṇādityagauraiśca śaragauraiśca

vānaraiḥ rāmā° ki° 301 sa° . nitāntagauryo hṛtakuṅkameṣvalam kirā° 12

parimāṇamede yathoktaṁ yājña° jālasūryamarīcisthaṁ trasareṇurajaḥ

smṛtam . te ‘ṣṭau likṣā ca tāstisro rājasarṣapa ucyate . gaurastu te trayaḥ

ṣaṭ ca yavomadhyastu te trayaḥ iti . 13 mṛgabhede pu° strī gaurajo

mahiṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ śūkaro gavayo ruruḥ . dviśaphāḥ paśavaśceme

aviruṣṭraśca sattama! . kharo’śvo’śvataro gauraḥ śarabhaścamarī tathā .

ete caikaśaphāḥ kṣattaḥ! bhāga° 3 . 10 . 22 . a° . mahoragāśca bhayato

vidravanti sagaurakṛṣṇāḥ śarabhāścamaryaḥ bhāga° 8 . 2 . 16 a° . 14

viśuddhe tri° medi° . kaḍārā° karmadhāraye’sya vā pūrvanipātaḥ

gaurapaṭaḥ paṭagauraḥ .

चित्र — citra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citra mf («ā») n. conspicuous, excellent, distinguished

mf («ā») n. bright, clear, bright-coloured

mf («ā») n. clear (a sound)

mf («ā») n. variegated, spotted, speckled (with instr. or in comp.)

mf («ā») n. agitated (as the sea, opposed to «sama»)

mf («ā») n. various, different, manifold &c.

citra mf («ā») n. (execution) having different varieties (of tortures)

mf («ā») n. strange, wonderful

mf («ā») n. containing the word «citra»

citra mf («ā») n. («am») ind. so as to be bright

mf («ā») n. in different ways

citra mf («ā») n. (to execute) with different tortures

citra mf («ā») n. («as») m. variety of colour

mf («ā») n. Plumbago zeylanica

mf («ā») n. Ricinus communis

mf («ā») n. Jonesia Aśoka

mf («ā») n. a form of Yama

mf («ā») n. N. of a king («citra»)

mf («ā») n. of a Jābāla-gṛihapati (with the patr. Gauśrāyaṇi),

mf («ā») n. of a king (with the patr. Gāṅgyāyani)

mf («ā») n. of a son of Dhritarāṣṭra

mf («ā») n. of a Draviḍa king, Padma P.v, 20, 1 (v.l. «-trākṣa»)

mf («ā») n. of a Gandharva

citra f. pl. the asterism Citrā

citra mf («ā») n. («am») n. anything bright or coloured which strikes the

eyes

citra f. a brilliant ornament, ornament

citra f. a bright or extraordinary appearance, wonder, ii &c.

citra f. (with «yadi» [ iii, 9/10] or «yad» [ 9062 fut. [ 3-3, 150 f. ])

strange, curious (e.g. «citraṁ badhiro vyākaraṇam adhyeṣyate» «it would

be strange if a deaf man should learn grammar»

citra f. strange! 15652

citra f. the ether, sky

citra f. a spot

citra f. a sectarial mark on the forehead

citra f. = «kuṣṭha»

citra f. a picture, sketch, delineation 4532 («sa-» mfn. = «-ga») &c. (ifc.

f. «ā» 64)

citra f. variety of colour

citra f. a forest («vana» for «dhana»?) of variegated appearance on

citra f. various modes of writing or arranging verses in the shape of

mathematical or other fanciful figures (syllables which occur repeatedly

being left out or words being represented in a shortened form)

citra f. punning in the form of question and answer, facetious

conversation, riddle, iv, 14/v

citra f. cf. a- and, «su-citra, dānu-, vi-»

citra f. «caitra».

citra «-traka, -traṭa», &c. see 4. «cit».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

citra a. [citr-bhāve ac; ci-ṣṭran vā Uṇ. 4. 163]

(1) Bright, clear.

(2) Variegated, spotted, diversified.

(3) Amusing, interesting, agreeable; Māl. 1. 4.

(4) Various, different, manifold; Pt. 1. 136; Ms. 9. 248; Y. 1. 288.

(5) Surprising, wonderful, strange; kimatra citraṁ R. 5. 33; S. 2. 15.

(6) Perceptible, visible.

(7) Conspicuous, excellent, dstinguished.

(8) Rough, agitated (as the sea, opp. sama).

(9) Clear, loud, perceptible (as a sound). —traḥ

(1) The variegated colour.

(2) A form of Yama.

(3) The Aśoka tree.

(4) = citragupta q. v. below. —traṁ

(1) A picture, painting, delineation; citre niveśya parikalpitasattvayogā

S. 2. 9; punarapi citrīkṛtā kāṁtā S. 6. 20, 13, 21 &c.

(2) A brilliant ornament or ornament.

(3) An extraordinary appearance, wonder.

(4) A sectarial mark on the forehead.

(5) Heaven, sky.

(6) A spot.

(7) The white or spotted leprosy.

(8) (In Rhet.) The last of the three main divisions of Kavya (poetry).

(It is of two kinds śabdacitra and artha-vācyacitra, and the poetical

charm lies mainly in the use of figures of speech dependent on the sound

or sense of words. Mammaṭa thus defines it: —śabdacitraṁ

vācyacitramavyaṁgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtaṁ K. P. 1. As an instance of

śabdacitra may be cited the following verse from R. G.

mitrātriputranetrāya trayīśātravaśatrave . gotrārigotrajaitrāya gotrātre te

namo namaḥ …

(9) Anything bright which strikes the eye. (10) Playing upon words,

punning, using conundrums, riddles &c. —traṁ ind. Oh!, how strange!,

what a wonder! citraṁ badhiro nāma vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate Sk.

— Comp.

—akṣī, —netrā, —locanā a kind of bird commonly called Sārikā.

—aṁga a. striped, having a spotted body. (

—gaḥ) 1. a kind of snake. —2. N. of Arjuna. (

—gaṁ) 1. vermilion. —2. yellow orpiment.

—aṁgada a. decked with brilliant bracelets. (

—dā) N. of a wife of Arjuna and mother of Babhruvāhana.

—aṁgadasūḥ f. an epithet of Satvavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

—annaṁ rice dressed with coloured condiments; Y. 1. 304.

—apūpaḥ a kind of cake.

—arpita a. committed to a picture, painted. -āraṁbha a. painted;

R. 2. 31; Ku. 3. 42.

—ākṛtiḥ f. a painted resemblance, portrait.

—āyasaṁ steel.

—āraṁbhaḥ a painted scene, outline of a picture; V. 1. 4. v. l.

—uktiḥ f. 1. agreeable or eloquent discourse; jayaṁti te

paṁcamanādamitracitroktisaṁdarbhavibhūṣaṇeṣu Vikr. 1. 10. —2. a voice

from heaven. —3. a surprising tale.

—odanaḥ boiled rice coloured with turmeric &c.

—kaṁṭhaḥ a pigeon.

—kathālāpaḥ telling agreeable or charming stories.

—kaṁbalaḥ 1. painted cloth used as an elephant’s housing. —2. a

variegated carpet.

—kara. 1. a painter. —2. an actor.

—karman n. 1. an extraordinary act. —2. ornamenting, decorating.

—3. a picture; Mu. 2. 4. —4. magic. (—m.). 1. a magician, one who works

wonders. —2. a painter. -vid m. 1. a painter. —2. a magician.

—kāyaḥ 1. a tiger in general. —2. a leopard or panther.

—kāraḥ 1. a painter. —2. N. of a mixed tribe; (sthapaterapi

gāṁdhikyāṁ citrakāro vyajāyata Parāśara).

—kūṭaḥ N. of a hill and district near Prayāga; R. 12. 15, 13. 47, U.

1.

—kṛt a. astonishing, surprising. (—m) a painter.

—kolaḥ a kind of lizard.

—kriyā painting.

—kṣatra a. Ved. having manifold power, or one whose wealth is

visible.

—ga, —gata a. 1. painted, drawn in a picture. —2. coloured,

variegated.

—gaṁdhaṁ yellow orpiment.

—guptaḥ one of the beings in Yama’s world recording the vices and

virtues of mankind; Mu. 1. 20.

—gṛhaṁ a painted room.

—jalpaḥ a random or incoherent talk, talk on various subjects.

—taṁḍuṁla a medicinal plant said to possess anthelmintic virtues.

—tvac m. the Bhūrja tree.

—daṁḍakaḥ the cotton-plant.

—nyasta a. painted, drawn in a picture; Ku. 2. 24.

—pakṣaḥ the francoline partridge.

—paṭaḥ, —ṭṭaḥ 1. a painting, a picture. —2. a coloured or chequered

cloth.

—pada a. 1. divided into various parts. —2. full of graceful

expressions.

—pādā the bird called Sārikā.

—picchakaḥ a peacock.

—puṁkhaḥ a kind of arrow.

—pṛṣṭhaḥ a sparrow.

—pratikṛtiḥ f. representation in colours, a painting, picture.

—phalakaṁ a tablet for painting, a pictureboard.

—barhaḥ a peacock.

—bhānu a. of a variegated colour, shining with light. (

—nuḥ) 1. fire. —2. the sun; (citrabhānurvibhātīti dine ravau rātrau

vahnau K. P. 2 given as an instance of one of the modes of aṁjana). —3.

N. of Bhairava. —4. the Arka plant. —5. Śiva. —6. an epithet of the Aśvins.

—7. the first year of the first cycle of Jupiter.

—bhūta a. painted.

—maṁḍalaḥ a kind of snake.

—mṛgaḥ the spotted antelope.

—mekhalaḥ a peacock.

—yodhin a. fighting in a wonderful manner. (—m.) an epithet of

Arjuna.

—rathaḥ 1. the sun. —2. N. of a king of the Gandharvas, one of the

sixteen sons of Kaśyapa by his wife Muni; atra

munestanayaścitrasenādīnāṁ paṁcadaśānāṁ bhrātṝṇāmadhiko guṇaiḥ

ṣoḍaśaścitraratho nāma samutpannaḥ K. 136; V. 1.

—likhanaṁ painting.

—likhita a. 1. painted. —2. dumb, motionless (as in a picture).

—lekha a. of beautiful outlines, highly arched; rucistava kalāvatī

ruciracitralekhe bhruvau Gīt. 10. (

—khā) 1. a portrait, picture. —2. N. of a friend and companion of

Uṣā, daughter of Bāṇa. [When Uṣā related to her her dream, she

suggested the idea of taking the portraits of all young princes in the

neighbourhood; and on Uṣā’s recognising Aniruddha, Chitralekha, by

means of her magical power, conveyed him to her palace].

—lekhakaḥ a painter.

—lekhanikā a painter’s brush.

—vadālaḥ the sheat-fish.

—vanaṁ N. of a forest near the Gaṇḍakī.

—vājaḥ a cock.

—vicitra a. 1. variously coloured, variegated. —2. multiform.

—vidyā the art of painting.

—śālā a painter’s studio.

—śikhaṁḍin m. an epithet of the seven sages: marīci, aṁgiras,

atri, pulastya, pulaha, kratu and vasiṣṭha. -jaḥ an epithet of Bṛhaspati.

—śiras m.,

—śīrṣakaḥ a kind of venomous insect.

—śrīḥ great or wonderful beauty.

—saṁstha a. painted.

—hastaḥ a particular position of the hands in fighting.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

citra (von 4. cit) Uṇ. 4, 165. 1) adj. f. ā a) «augenfällig; sichtbar,

ausgezeichnet»: ūti ṚV. 2, 17, 8. 4, 32, 5. 5, 40, 3. abhiṣṭi 1, 119, 8. 8, 3,

2. sa ciketa sahīyasāgniścitreṇa karmaṇā 39, 5. varūtha 56, 3. grābha 70,

1. vakṣatha 10, 115, 1. vasu 9, 19, 1. rādhas 1, 22, 7. 44, 1 u.s.w. draviṇa

2, 23, 15. 10, 36, 13. uṣo vājaṁ hi vaṁsva yaścitro mānuṣe jane 1, 48,

11. 4, 22, 10. 36, 9. sa citra citraṁ citayantamasme citrakṣatra

citratamaṁ vayodhām. candraṁ rayiṁ gṛṇate yuvasva 6, 6, 7. citraṁ

ketuṁ kṛṇute cekitānā 1, 93, 15. 94, 5. 113, 1. ā citra citriṇīṣvā. citraṁ

kṛṇoṣyūtaye 4, 32, 2. — b) «hell, licht; hellfarbig»: uṣasaḥ ṚV. 7, 75, 3. 6,

60, 2. agni 1, 71, 1. 4, 7, 1. jyotis 5, 63, 4. sūro na citraḥ 9, 86, 34. sa

citreṇa cikite bhāsā 2, 3, 5. ā yaḥ svārṇa bhānunā citro vibhātyarciṣā 8, 4.

raśmi 9, 100, 8. nakṣatra TBR. 3, 1, 2, 1. Indra ṚV. 1, 142, 4. 2, 13, 13

u.s.w. die Marut 1, 165, 13. 8, 7, 7. abhra 5, 63, 3. ratha 3, 2, 15. aśvā 1,

30, 21. 10, 75, 7. vastra 1, 134, 4. rūpa 5, 52, 11. — c)

«verschiedenfarbig, bunt, scheckig» AK. 1, 1, 4, 26. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H.

1398. an. 2, 418. MED. r. 34. srajaḥ N. 4, 8. puṣpavatīṁ citrāṁ

vanamālām R. 5, 4, 2. MṚCCH. 92, 7. In Verb. mit einem instr. oder nach

einem im instr. zu fassenden Worte im comp.: sauvarṇastvaṁ mṛgo

bhūtvā citro rajatavindubhiḥ R. 3, 44, 16. kāñcanacitrakārmuka 8, 25.

vaidūryamaṇicitre — aṅgade 6, 112, 88. ratnacitra (ratha) VARĀH. BṚH. S.

42 (43), 6. mukuṭāṅgadacitrāṅgī R. 1, 45, 41. — d) «bewegt» (vom

Meere), Gegens. sama R. 3, 39, 12. — e) «hell, vernehmlich» (von Tönen):

vācaṁ parjanyaścitrāṁ vadati tviṣīmatīm ṚV. 5, 63, 6. arka 6, 66, 9. 10,

112, 9. pavamāno ajījanaddivaścitraṁ na tanyatum 9, 61, 16. — f)

«mannichfaltig, verschieden, allerlei»: vanarājayaḥ R. 6, 15, 6. kathāḥ

MBH. 1, 3. R. 1, 3, 10. -bhāṣya MBH. 5, 1240. vadhopāyaiḥ M. 9, 248.

YĀJÑ. 1, 287. ARJ. 7, 14. SUŚR. 1, 237, 17. 241, 14. 2, 93, 6. PAÑCAT. I,

196. 429. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 12. 13. 3, 19, 6. adv.: citraṁ saṁkrīḍamānāstāḥ

krīḍanairvividhaiḥ R. 1, 9, 14. vajracitrapariṣkṛte (aṅgade) R. 6, 112, 88.

— g) «wunderbar» MED.; vgl. 4,b. — h) «das Wort» citra «enthaltend»:

citre gāyati ŚAT. BR. 7, 4, 1, 24. KĀTY. ŚR.17, 4, 4. — 2) m. a) «Buntheit»

BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — b) N. verschied. Pflanzen: a) «Plumbago zeylanica

Lin.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. MED. l. 11. — b) «Ricinus communis.» — g)

«Jonesia Asoka» (aśoka) «Roxb.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «eine Form des»

Jama TITHYĀDIT. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Königs (parox.) ṚV. 8, 21,

18. eines Gāñgyāyani Ind. St. 1, 395. Gauśrāyaṇi ebend. eines Sohnes des

Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 2730. 4543. 7, 5594. eines Königs von Draviḍa

PADMA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 457. — 3) f. ā a) «Spica virginis», in der

alten Reihe das 12te, in der neuen das 14te Mondhaus, COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. II, 337. 425. 463. 481. Ind. St. 1, 99. TRIK. 3, 3, 347. H. 112. H. an.

MED. AV. 19, 7, 3. TS. 2, 4, 6, 1. citrā nakṣatraṁ mitro devatā 4, 4, 10, 2.

TBR. 1, 1, 2, 5. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 13. 17. KAUŚ. 75. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 7, 4.

MBH. 5, 4842. 6, 79. 13, 3268. 4261. HARIV. 4257. R. 3, 23, 11. 5, 18, 14.

RAGH. 1, 46. LALIT. 117. pl. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 58. citrāsvātī gaṇa

rājadantādi zu P. 2, 2, 31. — b) «eine Schlangenart» H. an. MED. — c) N.

verschied. Pflanzen: a) «Anthericum tuberosum Roxb.» oder «Salvinia

cucullata Roxb.» = mūṣikaparṇī AK. 2, 4, 3, 6. = ākhuparṇī H. an. MED. —

b) «Cucumis maderaspatanus» AK. 2, 4, 5, 22. H. an. MED. «Koloquinthe»

RATNAM. 15. — g) = dantī H. an. MED. RATNAM. 34. — d) «Ricinus

communis» RATNAM. 3. — e) «Myrobalanenbaum» (āmalakī) RATNAM.

90. — z) = mṛgervāru. — h) gaṇḍadūrvā. — J) «Rubia Munjista»

(mañjiṣṭhā) «Roxb.» RĀJAN. — SUŚR. 1, 144, 14. 2, 21, 15. 23, 2,

wahrscheinlich in der Bed. greek — d) N. verschiedener Metra: a) «eine

Art» Mātrāsamaka («4 Mal 16 Moren») COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 155 (2, 4).

86. — b) metrical sequence ebend. 161 (X, 11). — g) metrical sequence

ebend. 162 (XI, 3); hier bei COLEBR. citra. — e) «Schein, Täuschung»

(māyā) MED. — f) N. pr. = citrāyāṁ jātā P. 4, 3, 34, Vārtt. 1. a) einer

Apsaras H. an. — b) einer Schwester Kṛṣṇa’s und Gemahlin Arjuna’s, =

subhadrā TRIK. H. an. MED. HARIV. 1952. — g) einer Tochter Gada’s (v.

l. Kṛṣṇa’s) HARIV. 9194. — d) eines Flusses MED. — 4) n.

SIDDH.K.249,b,2. a) «eine helle, glänzende» oder «farbige Erscheinung;

ein in die Augen fallender Gegenstand», daher auch «funkelndes

Geschmeide, Schmuck»: ā revatī rodasī citramasthāt ṚV. 3, 61, 6.

kadasya citraṁ cikite 4, 23, 2. sarvāṇi hi citrāṇyagniḥ (hierher oder zu b)

ŚAT. BR.6,1,3,20.7,4,1,24. na yāsu citraṁ dadṛśe na yakṣam ṚV. 7, 61, 5.

ā vaścitramā vo vratamā vo ‘haṁ samitiṁ dade 10, 166, 4.

nakṣatravihitāsau (der Himmel) citravihiteyam (die Erde) TS. 2, 5, 2, 5.

citrāṇyaṅgairnakṣatrāṇi rūpeṇa (prīṇāmi) VS. 25, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9.

dakṣiṇāvatāmidimāni citrā dakṣiṇāvatāṁ divi sūryāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 125, 6.

uṣastaccitramā bharāsmabhyam. yena tokaṁ ca tanayaṁ ca dhāmahe

«bring uns den Schmuck, dass wir Kind und Enkel besitzen» 92, 13. sā

hīyaṁ (rātriḥ) saṁgṛhyeva citrāṇi vasati die «Sterne» als «Edelsteine»

gedacht ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 4, 22. citraṁ paścātsyātprajā vai citraṁ citraṁ

hyasya prajā bhavati 13, 8, 1, 13; nach dem Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 21, 3, 23

und ṢAḌV. BR. 2, 10 soll es hier = anekaprakāraṁ vanam

«verschiedenfarbiges» oder — «gestaltetes Gehölz» sein. — b) «eine

ungewöhnliche Erscheinung, Wunder» AK. 1, 1, 7, 19. 3, 4, 25, 180. H.

303. H. an. MED. citraṁ vā abhūma ya iyataḥ sapatnānabadhiṣma ŚAT.

BR. 2, 1, 2, 17. taccitramiva me pratibhāti ŚĀK. 110, 17. BHARTṚ. 3, 39.

PAÑCAT. 256, 12. ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 36. vākyamapratirūpaṁ

hi na citraṁ strīṣu R. 3,51, 32. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 20. kimatra citraṁ yadi…

ŚĀK. 35, 21. naitaccitraṁ yadayam .. 48. KATHĀS. 18, 359. fg.

naitaccitraṁ — tvayi — yat HARIV. 9062. citraṁ badhiro nāma

vyākaraṇamadhyeṣyate «es wäre ein Wunder, wenn» P. 3, 3, 151, Sch.

citraṁ drakṣyati nāmāndhaḥ kṛṣṇaṁ paśyedyadīśvaram VOP. 25, 15; vgl.

14 und P. 3, 3, 150. fg. yādavā iti citraṁ naḥ śaktāḥ sthātuṁ raṇe «es

wäre ein Wunder, wenn die J. vermöchten» HARIV. 15652. kṣipto ‘pi

nāpataccitram «o Wunder!» KATHĀS. 5, 86. citraṁ kathaṁ tvayā jñātā sā

saṁjñā 7, 73. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 85 (mitten in den Satz eingeschoben). 4,

586. — c) «Luftraum, Himmel» H. an. — d) «Fleck»: yathaiva sadṛśo rūpe

mātāpitrorhi jāyate. vyāghraścitraiḥ MBH. 13, 2605. — e) «Sectenzeichen

auf der Stirn» TRIK. H. 653. H. an. MED. lalitavanitāḥ — sacitrāḥ MEGH.

65. — f) «weisser Aussatz» H. 466, falsche Lesart für śvitra; vgl. übrigens

carmacitraka. — g) «Bild, Gemälde; Malerei» AK. 3, 4, 25, 180. H. 922. H.

an. MED. paṭe citramivārpitam MBH. 13, 7692. citre ‘pi cālikhatyaśvān

SĀV. 2, 13. citre niveśya ŚĀK. 42. 141. 89, 2. citrairivārpitam (vgl.

citrārpita) «gemalt» MBH. 13, 2660. citraṁ yathāśrayamṛte SĀṁKHYAK.

41. ye ca citraṁ bhajanti vai «und die sich mit der Malerei abgeben» R.

GORR. 2, 90, 23. sacitra «bemalt» HARIV. 4532. — h) «Buntheit» AK. 1, 1,

4, 26. TRIK. H. 1398. H. an. MED. — i) Bez. «verschiedener Arten,

künstliche Verse u.s.w. in Form von allerlei Figuren durch

Nichtwiederholung wiederkehrender Silben oder Wörter in abgekürzter

Weise künstlich für das Auge darzustellen»: padmādyākārahetutve

varṇānāṁ citramucyate SĀH. D. 645; vgl. HAEB. Anth. 291. fgg., wo

verschiedene solcher Figuren mitgetheilt werden. — k) «ein Wortspiel in

Form von Frage und Antwort»: praśnottarāntarābhinnamuttaraṁ

citramucyate KUVALAJ. 145, «b», mit dem Beispiele: ke dārapoṣaṇaratāḥ

(dāra = kṣetra, als Antwort gilt kedāra-) ke kheṭāḥ (khe’ṭāḥ) kiṁ calaṁ

vayaḥ («Vögel» und «Alter»). — Vgl. acitra, dānu-, vi-, su-, caitra.

citra 1) f) -ratāni Verz. d. Oxf. H. 215,b,29. citrā yogāḥ unter den 64 Kalā

217,a,4. 216,a,11. -vadha «eine qualificirte Todesstrafe» DAŚAK. in BENF.

Chr. 193, 4. citramenaṁ ghātayiṣyasi «unter verschiedenen Martern» 198,

3. — g) namo ‘stu citraprabhāvāya dhanāya tasmai Spr. 4777. — 2) d)

Gārgyāyaṇi Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,30. — 3) a) TS. 7, 4, 8, 2. PAÑCAV. BR.

5, 9, 1. SŪRYAS. 8, 21. 9, 12. — d) vgl. Ind. St. 8, 315. fg. — f) e) eines

Felsens BHĀG. P. 12, 8, 17. — 4) f) vgl. citrakuṣṭha. — g) (tām) citre

likhitvā KATHĀS. 51, 126. -rodanāntardhāna Verz. d. Oxf. H. 322,b,4. fg.

— i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 208,a,5 v. u. — k) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 211,b,9. — i) k)

«Wort- und Lautspiel»: keciccitrākhyaṁ tṛtīyaṁ kāvyabhedamicchanti

tadāhuḥ. śabdacitraṁ vācyacitramavyaṅgyaṁ tvavaraṁ smṛtam SĀH. D.

116, 19. fg. śabdacitra, arthacitra, ubhayacitra PRATĀPAR. 12,b. 13,a.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

citra 1 I A son of Dhṛtarāṣṭra killed in war by Bhīmasona. (M.B. Droṇa

Parva, Chapter 136, Verse 20).

citra 2 II A gajarāja (king elephant) with whom Subrahmaṇya, as a child,

used to play. (M.B. Vana Parva, Chapter 225, Verse 23).

citra 3 III A hero who fought on the Kaurava side against the Pāṇḍavas.

He was killed by Prativindhya. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 14, Verse 32).

citra 4 IV A hero from the Cedi Kingdom who fought on the Pāṇḍava side

against the Kauravas. Karṇa killed him. (M.B. Karṇa Parva, Chapter 56,

Verse 46).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

citra 1. cit + ra,

I. adj.

1. Visible (ved.).

2. Clear, shining, Chr. 293, 2 = Rigv. i. 88, 2.

3. Variegated, Chr. 2, 21.

4. Spotted, Rām. 3, 48, 12.

5. Various, Man. 9, 248.

6. Fluctuating, Rām. 3, 52, 15.

7. Wonderful, Rām. 3, 35, 4.

8. Surprised, Rājat. 5, 2.

9. Uncommon, rigorous, Daśak. in Chr. 193, 4; adv. in a rigorous

manner, ib. 198, 3.

II. f. trā, The name of a lunar mansion, Spica virginis, Rām. 3, 23, 11.

III. n.

1. A surprising appearance, Śāk. 110, 17; wonder, Rām. 3, 51, 26.

2. A spot, MBh. 13, 2605.

3. A picture, MBh. 13, 7692.

4. Painting, Rām. 2, 90, 23 Gorr.

— Comp. vi-,

I. adj. 1. variegated, spotted. 2. painted. 3. handsome. 4. surprising.

II. n. 1. variegated (the colour). 2. surprise. 3. speech implying

apparently the reverse of the intended object. sa-, adj. 1. painted, Hariv.

4532. 2. containing pictures, Megh. 65.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

citra a. conspicuous, visible, bright, clear, loud, variegated, manifold,

various, excellent, extraordinary, strange, wonderful. f. ā N. of a lunar

mansion. n. anything bright or shining, esp. jewel, ornament, picture;

extraordinary appearance, wonder (often as exclamation).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

citra cit-ra, a. manifest, visible, distinguished, clear, bright; distinct,

audible (sound); variegated, speckled, dappled; various, manifold;

qualified with torture (punishment); wonderful; n. bright-coloured object,

glittering ornament; jewel; picture; surpring phenomenon, wonder.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

citra t ka kṣaṇikekṣaṇe . lekhye’dbhute . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ ..

(adantacurāṁ-paraṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .) kṣaṇikekṣaṇaṁ kadāciddarśanam .

citrayati citrāpayati rāhuṁ lokaḥ kadācit paśyatītyarthaḥ . citrayati

pratimāṁ lokaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

citra kṣaṇike—lekhye adbhute ca ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . citrayati te

acicitrat ta . citritaḥ citraḥ .

citra na° citra—bhāve ac ci—ṣṭran vā . 1 tilake . 2 ālekhye 3 adbhute 4

karvūravarṇe 5 tadyukte tri° medi° . 6 ākāśe 7 kuṣṭhabhede hema° . 8

yamabhede pu° vṛkodarāya citrāya yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 9

eraṇḍaṁvṛkṣe 10 aśokavṛkṣe 11 citrakavṛkṣe rājani° 12 citragupte

citraguptaśabde dṛśyam 13 śabdālaṅkārabhede na° alaṅkāraśabde 390

pṛ° dṛśyam . citrasaṁjñamīritaṁ pramāṇikāpadadvayam vṛ° ra° ukte 15

ṣoḍaśākṣarapādake chandobhede . nisargacitrojjvalasūkṣmapakṣmaṇā

citraṁ cakāra padamardhapulāyitena ruciracitratanūruhaśālibhiḥ iti ca

māghaḥ .

चित्राङ्ग — citrāṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899citrāṅga mfn. having a variegated body

citrāṅga m. a kind of snake

citrāṅga m. Plumbago rosea

citrāṅga m. N. of a son of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra

citrāṅga m. of an antelope

citrāṅga m. of a dog

citrāṅga n. vermilion

citrāṅga n. yellow orpiment

citrāṅga n. Rubia munjista

citrāṅga n. N. of a courtesan cxxii, 68

citrāṅga n. «-sadana» m. «Citrāṅga-killer», Arjuna

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

citrāṅga (citra + aṅga) 1) adj. «einen bunten, gesprenkelten Körper

habend, gesprenkelt» VYUTP. 204. — 2) m. a) «eine Schlangenart.» — b)

«Plumbago zeylanica Lin.» — c) N. einer anderen Pflanze (raktacitraka)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 4545.

Bein. Arjuna’s H. ś. 137. — e) N. pr. einer Antilope HIT. 18, 1. PAÑCAT.

140, 23. eines Hundes 232, 25. — 3) f. ī a) «Ohrwurm, Julus.» — b) N.

einer Pflanze, «Rubia Munjista» (mañjiṣṭhā) «Roxb.», RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

4) n. a) «Zinnober.» — b) «Auripigment» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

citrāṅga 2) d) -vadha Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,15. — e) KATHĀS. 61, 122. —

3) c) N. pr. einer Hetäre KATHĀS. 122, 68.

citrāṅga 2) d) Bein. Arjuna’s H. ś. 137 zu streichen, da hier

citrāṅgasādana zu lesen ist, wie schon das Metrum zeigt.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

citrāṅga 1 I (CITRĀṄGADA, ŚRUTĀNTAKA). One of the hundred sons of

Dhṛtarāṣṭra. In the great battle Bhīmasena killed him. (Śloka 11, Chapter

26, Śalya Parva).

citrāṅga 2 II A warrior. In the Aśvamedhayajña performed by Śrī Rāma

Śatrughna followed the sacrificial horse and Citrāṅga blocked them on

their way. Śatrughna killed him. (Chapter 27, Pātāla Kāṇḍa, Padma

Purāṇa).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

citrāṅga m. N. of an antilope (lit. having a spotted body).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

citrāṅga citra+aṅga, m. Dapple-body, N. of a deer and of a dog;

ī, f. N. of a courtesan;

-aṅgada, a. adorned with brilliant bracelets; m. N. of a fairy, of a

Gandharva, and of a recorder of human actions in Yama’s realm;

-anna, n. rice coloured by the addition of ingredients; (a) -magha, a.

having splendid gifts;

-ārambha, a. painted;

-arpita, pp. id.: -ārambha, a. id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

citrāṅga pu° 1 dhṛtarāṣṭraputrabhede . ayobāhurmahāvāhuścitrāṅga

ścitrakuṇḍalaḥ bhā° 117 a° tatputroktau . 2 citrāṅgayuktamātre tri° . 3

raktacitrake 4 sarpabhede 5 citrake (cite) rājani° . citramaṅgaṁ yasmāt .

6 haritāle 7 mañjiṣṭhāyāṁ 8 hiṅgule ca na° rājani° .

जरठ — jaraṭha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899jaraṭha mfn. old (śāntiś. iv, 17)

mfn. bent, drooping

mfn. for «jaṭhara», hard, solid

mfn. harsh, cruel

mfn. strong, violent xi f.

mfn. yellowish (old leaves’ colour)

jaraṭha m. old age

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

jaraṭha a. [jṝ bā -aṭha]

(1) Hard, solid.

(2) Old, aged; ayamatijaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ

pariṇatadikkarikāstaṭīrbibharti Śi. 4. 29 (where jaraṭha means ‘hard’

also).

(3) Decayed, decrepit, infirm.

(4) Bent, bowed down, drooping.

(5) Pale, yellowish-white.

(6) Full-grown, ripe, matured; jaraṭhakamala Śi. 11. 14.

(7) Hard-hearted, cruel. —ṭhaḥ

(1) N. of Paṇdu, father of the five Pāṇḍavas.

(2) Old age.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

jaraṭha (wie eben) Uṇ. 1, 100, Sch. 1) adj. a) «hinfällig, alt, bejahrt» H.

an. 3, 175. BHĀG. P. 6, 1, 25. 9, 6, 41. RĀJA-TAR. 2, 170. ati- SĀY. zu

ṚV. 1, 125, 1. — b) «hart» H. 1387. H. an. = karkaśa und kaṭhina MED. ṭh.

13. — c) «gelblich» (die Farbe der «alten» Blätter) MED. — 2) m. «Alter»

VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — Vgl. jaṭhara.

jaraṭha 1) a) Spr. 808. BHĀG. P. 11, 23, 25. — b) fehlerhaft für jaṭhara

SĀH. D. 103, 22. Spr. 814, v. l. (Th. 2, S. 330). VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu

UṆĀDIS. 1, 102. — c) VIŚVA a. a. O.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

jaraṭha jaraṭha (vb. jṛ10), adj. Old, Bhāg. P. 6, 1, 25.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

jaraṭha a. old, aged; hard, solid, strong.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

jaraṭha tri° jṝ—bā° aṭha . 1 karkaśe kaṭhine 2 pāṇḍunṛpe pu° medi° . 3

jīrṇe tri° hema° 4 jarāyāṁ viśvaḥ . nīrandhrāstanumālikhantu

jaraṭhacchedānalagranthayaḥ sā° da° . ayamati jaraṭhāḥ prakāmagurvīḥ

māghaḥ . 5 pariṇate ca . jaraṭhakamalakandacchedagaurairmayūkhaiḥ

māghaḥ .

तालकम् — tālakam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

tālakam

(1) Yellow orpiment.

(2) A fragrant earth.

(3) A bolt, latch. —kī The vinous exudation of the palm, toddy.

— Comp.

—ābha a. green. (

—bhaḥ) the green colour.

पत्रम् — patram Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

patram [pat-ṣṭran]

(1) A leaf (of a tree); dhatte bharaṁ kusumapatraphalāvalīnāṁ Bv. 1.

94.

(2) The leaf of a flower, lotus &c.; nīlotpalapatradhārayā S. 1. 18.

(3) A leaf for writing upon, a paper, a leaf written upon; patramāropya

dīyatāṁ S. 6 ‘commit to writing;’ V. 2. 14.

(4) A letter, document; Pt. 1. 403.

(5) Any thin leaf or plate of metal, a gold-leaf.

(6) The wing of a bird, a pinion, feather of an arrow; R. 2. 31; Ku. 3.

27.

(8) A vehicle in general (car, horse, camel &c.); diśaḥ papāta patreṇa

veganiṣkaṁpaketunā R. 15. 84; N. 3. 16.

(9) Painting the person (particularly the face) with musk, sandal-juice

or other fragrant substances; racaya kucayoḥ patraṁ citraṁ kuruṣva

kapolayoḥ Gīt. 12; R. 13. 55. (10) The blade of a sword, knife &c.

(11) A knife, dagger.

— Comp.

—aṁgaṁ 1. the Bhūrja tree. —2. red sanders.

—aṁguliḥ drawing lines of painting with the finger on the person

(throat, forehead &c.) with coloured sandal, saffron, or any other fragrant

substance.

—aṁjanaṁ 1. ink. —2. blacking.

—āḍhyaṁ the root of long pepper.

—āvaliḥ f. 1. red chalk. —2. a row of leaves. —3. the lines of

painting drawn on the body with cosmetics as a decoration.

—āvalī 1. a row of leaves. —2. = -āvali

(3). —3. mixture of young Aśvattha leaves with barley and honey. —

āhāraḥ feeding on leaves. —ūrṇaṁ wove-silk, a silk-garment;

snānīyavastrakriyayā patrorṇaṁ vopayujyate M. 5. 12. —ullāsaḥ the bud

or eye of a plant. —kāhalā the noise or sound made by the flapping of

wings or rustling of leaves. —kṛcchraṁ a sort of penance, drinking the

infusion of leaves of various plants. —ghanā a plant with full leaves

(sātala). —jhaṁkāraḥ the current of a river. —dārakaḥ a saw. —nāḍikā the

fibre of a leaf. —paraśuḥ a file. —pālaḥ a long dagger, large knife. (—lī) 1.

the feathered part of an arrow. —2. a pair of scissors. —pāśyā an

ornament (a gold-leaf) on the forehead. —puṭaṁ a vessel of leaves; R. 2.

65. —puṣpā the holy basil. —baṁdhaḥ adorning with flowers. —bā (vā) laḥ

an oar. —bhaṁgaḥ —bhāṁgiḥ —gī f. drawing lines or figures of painting on

the face and person with fragrant and coloured substances, such as

musk, saffron, sandal-juice, yellow pigment &c., as a mark of decoration;

kastūrīvarapatrabhaṁganikaro mṛṣṭo na gaṁḍasthale S. Til. 7 (used

frequently in K.). —yauvanaṁ a young leaf or sprout. —raṁjanaṁ

embellishing a page. —rathaḥ a bird; vyarthīkṛtaṁ patrarathena tena N. 3.

6. -iṁdraḥ N. of Garuḍa. -iṁdraketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu; R. 18. 13. —latā a long

knife or poniard. —re (le) khā, —vallarī, —valliḥ, —vallī f. see patrabhaṁga

above; R. 6. 72, 16. 67; Rs. 6. 7; Śi. 8. 56, 59. —vāja a. furnished with

feathers (as an arrow). —vāhaḥ 1. a bird; Śi. 18. 73. —2. an arrow. —3. a

letter-carrier. —viśeṣakaḥ lines of painting &c.; see patrabhaṁga; Ku. 3.

33; R. 3. 55, 9. 29. —veṣṭaḥ a kind of ear-ring; R. 16. 67. —śākaḥ a

vegetable consisting chiefly of leaves. —śirā the vein or fibre of a leaf. —

śreṣṭhaḥ the Bilva tree. —sūciḥ f. a thorn. —himaṁ wintry or snowy

weather.

पांडु — pāṁḍu Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pāṁḍu a. Pale-white, whitish, pale, yellowish; vikalakaraṇaḥ

pāṁḍucchāyaḥ śucā paridurbalaḥ U. 3. 22. —ḍuḥ

(1) The pale-white or yellowish-white colour.

(2) Jaundice.

(3) A white elephant.

(4) N. of the father of the Pāṇḍavas. [He was begotten by Vyāsa on

Ambālika, one of the widows of Vichitravīrya. He was called Pāṇḍu,

because he was born pale (pāṁḍu) by reason of his mother having

become quite pale with fear when in private with the sage Vyāsa;

(yasmātpāṁḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya mamiha . tasmādeva sutaste

vai pāṁḍureva bhaviṣyati Mb.). He was prevented by a curse from having

progeny himself; so he allowed his first wife Kuntī to make use of a

charm she had acquired from Durvāsas for the birth of sons. She gave

birth to Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhīma and Arjuna; and Mādri, his other wife, by the

use of the same charm, gave birth to Nakula and Sahadeva. One day

Pandu forgot the curse under which he was labouring, and made bold to

embrace Mādri, but he fell immediately dead in her arms.]

— Comp.

—āmayaḥ jaundice.

—kaṁbalaḥ 1. a white blanket. —2. a warm upper garment. —3. the

housing of a royal elephant.

—kaṁbalin m. 1. a carriage covered with a woollen blanket. —2.

the housings of a royal elephant.

—putraḥ a son of Pāṇḍu, any one of the five Pāṇḍavas.

—pṛṣṭha a. ‘white-backed’, having no auspicious marks on the

body, one from whom nothing great is to be expected.

—bhūmaḥ a region full of chalky soil.

—mṛttikā 1. white or pale soil. —2. the opal.

—mṛd f. chalk.

—rāgaḥ whiteness, pallor.

—rogaḥ jaundice.

—lekhaḥ a sketch made with chalk; a rough draft or sketch made

on the ground, board &c.: pāṁḍulekhena phalake bhumau vā prathamaṁ

likhaṁt . nyūnādhikaṁ tu saṁśodhya paścātpatre niveśayet .. Vyāsa.

—śarkarā light-coloured gravel (pramehabheda) —śarmilā an

epithet of Draupadī.

—sopākaḥ N. of a mixed tribe;

cāṁḍālātpāṁḍusopākastvaksāravyavahāravān Ms. 10. 37.

पांडुकः — pāṁḍukaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pāṁḍukaḥ

(1) The yellowish-white colour.

(2) Jaundice.

(3) N. of Paṇḍu.

पाण्डु — pāṇḍu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍu mfn. («paṇḍ»?) yellowish white, white, pale &c.

mfn. jaundiced

pāṇḍu m. jaundice

pāṇḍu m. pale or yellowish white colour

pāṇḍu m. a white elephant

pāṇḍu m. Trichosanthes Dioeca

pāṇḍu m. a species of shrub

pāṇḍu m. N. of a son of Vyāsa by the wife of Vicitra-vīrya and brother of

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Vidura (he was father of the five Pāṇḍavas) &c.

pāṇḍu m. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra

pāṇḍu m. of a son of Dhātri by āyatī (v.l. «prāṇa»)

pāṇḍu m. of an attendant of śiva

pāṇḍu m. of a Nāgarāja

pāṇḍu pl. of a people in Madhya-deśa (v.l. «pāṇḍya» and «-ḍva»)

pāṇḍu f. Glycine Debilis

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍu UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1, 38. 1) adj. (f. gleichfalls pāṇḍu P. 4, 1, 44,

Vārtt., Sch. VOP. 4, 16) «weisslich gelb, weiss, bleich» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3,

4, 13, 53. TRIK. 3, 3, 113. H. 1393. an. 2, 122. MED. ḍ. 18. HALĀY. 4, 47.

yathā pāṇḍvāvikam ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 3, 10. kṛśā pāṇḍuśca lakṣyase MBH.

4, 519. SUŚR. 1, 61, 10. 85, 20. 121, 11. 12. -vṛkṣapraroha 135, 8. 158,

13. -gātratā 263, 17. pāṇḍvavabhāsa 2, 2, 8. śaśāṅkaḥ

kāminīgaṇḍapāṇḍuḥ MṚCCH. 25, 24. kṣaumam — indupāṇḍu ŚĀK. 80.

pāṇḍudukūla LALIT. ed. Calc. 332, 13 u.s.w. pattra ŚĀK. 18. 110. -varṇā

(damayantī) N. 2, 3. mukhena rodhrapāṇḍunā RAGH. 3, 2. -mukhī

KATHĀS. 28, 2. bhasma- 25, 81. jarā- 31, 40. -sikata ŚĀK. 56. MEGH. 18.

24. 30. āpāṇḍupītikā mṛt VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 20.

āpāṇḍubhasmoṣṭrakharānurūpā (śilā) 111. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. Vgl. pāṇḍara,

pāṇḍura. — 2) m. a) «Gelbsucht» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. Verz. d. B. H. 278;

vgl. pāṇḍuroga. — b) N. zweier Pflanzen: «Trichosanthes dioeca Roxb.»

(paṭola) und = pāṇḍuraphalī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «ein weisser

Elephant» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des

Vyāsa von der Frau des Vicitravīrya und Bruders des Dhṛtarāṣṭra und des

Vidura, TRIK. 2, 8, 13. 3, 3, 113. H. an. MED. AV. PARIŚ. in Verz. d. B. H.

91. MBH. 1, 95. 2213. 2441. 2721. 3808. 4291 (Ursprung des Namens).

15, 851. HARIV. 1932. 3010. 4055. KATHĀS. 21, 20. fgg. VP. 437. 459.

BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 24. — e) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Janamejaya und Bruders

des Dhṛtarāṣṭra MBH. 1, 3745. LIA. I, Anh. XXIV. — f) N. pr. eines Sohnes

des Dhātar von der Āyati VP. 82, N. 1; nach anderen Autoritäten heisst

dieser Sohn Prāṇa. — g) N. pr. eines Dieners des Śiva VYĀḌI zu H. 210. —

h) N. pr. eines Nāgarāga VYUTP. 85. — i) N. pr. eines Volkes in

Madhyadeśa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 3 (v. l. pāṇḍya und pāṇḍva). — 3) f. =

māṣaparṇī «Glycine debilis Ait.» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pari-.

pāṇḍu 2) i) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 338,b,33. 339,b,46.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pāṇḍu 1 I Father of the Pāṇḍavas.

pāṇḍu 2 II The second son of. Janamejaya. (Chapter 94, Ādi Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍu pāṇḍu,

I. adj. Pale, white, yellowish white, Śāk. d. 80.

II. m. The name of a sovereign, father of Yudhiṣṭhira, and the other four

Pāṇḍavas.

— Comp. puṣpa-, m. a kind of snake. vi-, adj. pale, Śic. 9, 3.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṇḍu a. whitish yellow, white, pale (abstr. -tā f., -tva n.), N. of an

ancient king.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṇḍu pāṇḍ-u, a. (f. id.) yellowish white, whitish, pale; m. N. of a

sovereign of ancient Delhi, a son of Vyāsa and brother of Dhṛtarāṣṭra;

-cchāya, a. white-coloured;

-tā, f. yellowish white colour, paleness;

-nanda-na, m. son of Pāṇḍu;

-pattra, n. yellow (= withered) leaf;

-putra, m. son of Pāṇḍu;

-bhūma, m. pale-coloured (chalky) soil.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pāṇḍu raḥ puṁ, (pāṇḍurasyāstīti . pāṇḍu + nagapāṁśupāṇḍubhyaśca . 5 .

2 . 107 . ityasya sūtrasya vārtikoktyā raḥ .) śvetapītamiśritavarṇaḥ .

tadbati, tri . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 17 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 8 . 8 . 3 .

tata uccaiḥśravā nāma hayo’bhūccandrapāṇḍuraḥ .

tasmin baliḥ spṛhāñcakrenendra īśvaraśikṣayā ..) kāmalārogaḥ . iti

śabdaratnāvalī .. śvitraroge, klī . iti halāyudhaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pāṇḍu pu° paḍi—ku ni° dīrghaḥ . sitapītasamāyuktaḥ pāṇḍuvarvaṇaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ 1 subhūtyukte pāṇḍustu pītabhāgārdhaḥ ketakīdhūlisannibhaḥ

ityukte ca 2 varṇamede 3 tadvati tri° . striyāmudantaguṇavacanatve’pi na

ṅīp pāṇḍuśabdaparyudāsāt . 4 sitavarṇe śabdaratnā° 5 tadvati tri°

sāntanuputravicitravīryasya kṣetre vyāsenotpādite 6 nṛpabhede 7

nāgabhede 8 śvetagaje 9 rogabhede ca śabdara° . 10 pāṇḍuraphalīkṣupe

11 paṭole ca rājani° . 12 deśabhede pu° pāṇḍunṛpotpattikathā bhā° ā°

106 a° tannāmatākāraṇañca uktaṁ yathā tatastenaiva vidhinā

maharṣistāmavindata . ambālikāmathābhyāgādṛṣiṁ dṛṣṭvā ca sāpi tam .

vivarṇā pāṇḍusaṅkāśā samapadyata mārata! ityupakrame yasmāt

pāṇḍutvamāpannā virūpaṁ prekṣya māmiha . taṇādeṣa sutaste vai

pāṇḍureva bhaviṣyati . nāma tasya tadeveha bhaviṣyadi śubhānane .

tasya digvijayādikathā taduttarādhyāyeṣu dṛśyā . pāṇḍurogabhede

nidānādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā pāṇḍurogāḥ smṛtāḥ pañca

vātapittakaphaistrayaḥ . caturthaḥ sannipātena pañcamo

bhakṣaṇānmṛdaḥ pañcamo bhakṣaṇāt mṛda iti nanu mṛttikāpi

dūṣitavātādidoṣadvāreṇaiva pāṇḍurogaṁ janayatoti mṛdbhakṣaṇajaḥ

pāṇḍurogodoṣajādabhinna eva kathaṁ pañcama iti ucyate

aparakāraṇakupitā vātādayo’nyānapi rogān karvanti . mṛttikābhakṣṇāt

kupitāstu vātādayo viśeṣataḥ pāṇḍurogameva janayantyeveti viśeṣāt

cikitsāviśeṣācca pañcamaḥ carakeṇoktaḥ .

taccikitsāparakāraṇakupitadoṣajanitapāṇḍurogacikitsā bhavatīti suśrutena

mṛttikājaḥ pṛthak na paṭhitaḥ . atha viprakṛṣṭanidānapūrvikāṁ

samprāptimāha vyavāyamamlaṁ lavaṇāni madyaṁ mṛdaṁ

divāsvapnamatīva tīkṣṇam . niṣevamāṇasya vidūṣya raktaṁ doṣāstvacaṁ

pāṇḍuratāṁ nayanti tīkṣṇaṁ rājikādi . atha pūrvarūpamāha

tvaksphoṭaniṣṭhīvanagātrasādamṛdbhakṣaṇaprekṣaṇakūṭaśothāḥ .

viṇmūtraṣītatvamathāvipāko bhaviṣyatastasya puraḥsarāṇi

prekṣaṇakūṭaśothaḥ iti akṣigolakaśothaḥ . atha vātikasya pāṇḍurogasya

lakṣaṇamāha tvaṅmūtranayanādīnāṁ rūkṣakṛṣṇāruṇāmatā .

vātapāṇḍvāmaye kampastodāmāhabhramādayaḥ . kṛṣṇāruṇāmatā

pāṇḍutvaṁ nātikrāmati . ataeva suśrute sarveṣu caiteṣvapi pāṇḍubhāvo

yato’dhiko’taḥ khalu pāṇḍurogaḥ iti . bhramādaya ityādiśabdāt

medaśūlādayaḥ . atha ṣaittikasya lakṣaṇamāha

pītatvaṅnakhaviṇbhūtradāhatṛṣṇājvarānvitaḥ . bhinnaviṭko’tipītābhaḥ

pittapāṇḍvāmaye naraḥ . bhinnaviṭkaḥ sadravamalaḥ . atha ślaiṣmikasya

lakṣaṇamāha kaphaprasekaḥ śvayathuḥ tandrālasyātigauravaiḥ .

pāṇḍurogī kaphāt śuklaistvaṅmūtranayanānanaiḥ . atropalakṣaṇe tṛtīyā .

sānnipātikasya lakṣaṇamāha sarvānnasevinaḥ sarve duṣṭā

doṣāstridoṣajam . tridoṣaliṅgaṁ kurvanti pāṇḍurogaṁ suduḥsaham . atha

mṛjjasya samprāptimāha mṛttikādanaśīlasya kupyatyanyatamo malaḥ .

kamāyā mārutaṁ, pitta mūṣarā, madhurā kapham .

kopayenmṛdrasādīṁśca raukṣyādbhuktañca rūkṣayet .

pūrayatyavipakvaiśca srotāṁsi niruṇaddhyapi . indriyāṇāṁ balaṁ hatvā

tejo vīryaujasī tathā . pāṇḍurogaṁ karotyāśu samavarṇāgnināśanam .

srotāṁsi śirāmukhāni . tejo dīptiḥ ojaḥ sarvadhāturasaḥ . atha mṛjjasya

lakṣaṇamāha mṛdbhakṣaṇādbhavetpāṇḍu standrālasyanipīḍitaḥ .

sakāsaśvāsaśūlārtaḥ sadā’ruci samanvitaḥ . śūnākṣikūṭagaṇḍabhrūḥ

śūnapānnābhimehanaḥ . kṛmikoṣṭho’tisāryeta malaṁ sāsṛkkaphānvitam .

krimikoṣṭhaḥ udarābhyantarasthakṛmirbhavedityanena sambadhyate

atisāryeta malamiti karmakartṛ tatkarmavat mantavyam . tasmin

karmaṇyarthe’tra yakpratyayaḥ . athāsādhyasya lakṣaṇamāha

jvarārocakahṛllāsaccharditṛṣṇāklamānvitaḥ . pāṇḍurogī

tribhirdoṣaistyājyaḥ kṣīṇo hatendriyaḥ . pāṇḍurogaścirotpannaḥ

kharībhūto na sidhyati . kālaprakarṣāt śūnāṅgo yo vā pītāni paśyati

kharībhūtaḥ atirūkṣitaḥ sarvadhātuḥ baddhālpaviṭ saharitaṁ sakaphaṁ

yo’tisāryate . pītasvedātidigdhāṅgaḥ chardimūrchātṛṣānvitaḥ .

pāṇḍudantanakho yastu pāṇḍunetraśca yo bhavet . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśī

ca pāṇḍurogī vinaśyati . pāṇḍusaṅghātadarśīṁ pībavarṇasya rāśiṁ

paśyati . anteṣu śūnaṁ parihīnamadhyaṁ mlānaṁ tathānteṣu ca

madhyaśūnam . gude mukhe śephasi muṣkayośca śūnaṁ

pratāmyantamasaṁjñakalpam . urabhre nihate caiva pāṇḍurogaḥ

prajāyate śātā° meṣabadhakarmaṇobipāka stadroga uktaḥ . 1 3

māṣaparṇyām (māṣāṇī) strī rājani° . pāṇḍorapatyam orañ pā° añ .

pāṇḍava pāṇḍorapatye yudhiṣṭhirādau . pāṇḍoḥ janapadabhedasya rājā

pāṇḍorḍyan vārti° ḍyan . pāṇḍudeśanṛpe raghu4 . 9 2 . svārthe ka

pāṇḍuka tatrārthe tataḥ astyarthe ini pāṇḍukin tadrogayute tri° .

saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pāṇḍuka dhānābhede suśrutaḥ . tatra pṛṣo°

dīrghamadhyaḥ pāṇḍūka tatrārthe paṅgukaśabde 2 49 2 pṛ°

suśrutavākyaṁ dṛśyam . pāṇḍukasya vṛddhiḥ kṣīrikāvṛddhyā

bhavatotyuktaṁ vṛṁ° sa° 29 a° .

पाण्डुक — pāṇḍuka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍuka mfn. = «pāṇḍu»

pāṇḍuka m. a pale or yellowish-white colour

pāṇḍuka m. jaundice

pāṇḍuka m. a species of rice (cf. «-ḍūka»)

pāṇḍuka m. (with Jainas) N. of one of the 9 treasures

pāṇḍuka m. N. of a son of Janam-ejaya and brother of Dhṛita-rāṣṭra

pāṇḍuka n. N. of a forest

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍuka (von pāṇḍu) 1) adj. = pāṇḍu HALĀY. 4, 47, v. l. — 2) m. a)

«Gelbsucht» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.; vgl. pāṇḍukin. — b) «eine best.

Reisgattung» SUŚR. 1, 73, 4. 195, 6; vgl. pāṇḍūka. — c) N. pr. = pāṇḍu

2,d. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193,

Sch. — 3) n. N. pr. eines Waldes ŚATR. 8, 34.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍuka pāṇḍu + ka, m. The jaundice.

पाण्डुत्व — pāṇḍutva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍutva «pāṇḍu-tva» n. whitish-yellow colour, paleness

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍutva (von pāṇḍu) n. = pāṇḍutā MBH. 1, 4290. SUŚR. 1, 263, 21.

पाण्डुर — pāṇḍura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pāṇḍura mf («ā») n. whitish, white, pale, yellow &c.

pāṇḍura m. a form of jaundice

pāṇḍura m. Anogeissus Latifolia

pāṇḍura m. an Andropogon with white flowers

pāṇḍura m. N. of one of the attendants of Skanda

pāṇḍura mf («ā») n. («ā») f. Glycine Debilis

pāṇḍura m. of a Buddhist deity (cf. «pāṇḍarā»)

pāṇḍura n. the white leprosy, vitiligo

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pāṇḍura (von pāṇḍu) KĀŚ. und SIDDH. K. zu P. 5, 2, 107. 1) adj. f. ā

«weisslich, weiss, bleich» AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. 23. H. 1393. an. 3, 577. MED. r.

183. HALĀY. 4, 47. 52. SUŚR. 1, 286, 9. 2, 168, 17. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 33,

2. 53, 7. -nakha 67, 3. kaca H. 571. HALĀY. 2, 377. candra- BHĀG. P. 8, 8,

3. mukhena śarapāṇḍunā RAGH. 14, 26. kṛśa- KATHĀS. 27, 34. 32, 155.

ātapatra, chattra R. 2, 2, 5. 98, 26. gṛha 57, 22. Spr. 91.

pāṇḍurāruṇavarṇāni srotāṁsi DAŚ. 1, 18. chavi ŚĀK. 58. ā- VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 35, 4. 53, 106. kapota 87, 13. āpāṇḍurībhūtamukhacchavi KUMĀRAS. 3,

33. Vgl. pāṇḍara. — 2) m. a) «eine Form der Gelbsucht» (kāmalāroga)

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) «eine best. Pflanze», = maruvaka H. an. MED. —

c) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Skanda MBH. 9, 2575. — 3) f. ā =

māṣaparṇī «Glycine debilis Ait.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) n. «der weisse

Aussatz» H. 466. HALĀY. 2, 449.

pāṇḍura 1) KATHĀS. 71, 2. — 5) f. ā N. pr. einer buddh. Göttin, = tārā

WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 36. pāṇḍarā (sic) Gattin Amitābha’s (während

Tārā die Gattin Amoghasiddha’s genannt wird) 12.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pāṇḍura A soldier of Subrahmaṇya. (Śloka 73, Chapter 45, Śalya Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pāṇḍura pāṇḍu + ra,

I. adj., f. rā, Of a yellowish white colour, white, pale, Bhāg. P. 8, 8, 8.

II. m. a proper name.

— Comp. ā-, adj. a little pale, Amar. 89. vi-, adj. pale.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pāṇḍura a. whitish, pale.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pāṇḍura pāṇḍu-ra, a. whitish, white, pale: -tā, f. white colour;

-ya, den. P. colour whitish yellow;

i-ta, pp. coloured yellowish white;

i-man, m. pale colour;

ī-kṛ, colour yellowish white.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pāṇḍura pu° pāṇḍurvarṇo’syāsti ra . 1 śvetapītamiśrite varṇe amaraḥ 2

tadvati tri° . paḍi—ura pṛṣo° vṛddhiḥ . 3 śvetavarṇe 4 tadvati ca halā° . 5

kāmalākhye roge 6 śvitraroge na° śabdaratnā° . 7 māṣaparṇyāṁ strī ṭāp

rājani° .

पिंग — piṁga Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

piṁga a. [piṁj-varṇe aṁc nyaṁkva- kutvam] Reddish-brown, tawny,

yellow-red. aṁtarniviṣṭāmalapiṁgatāraṁ (vilocanaṁ) Ku. 7. 33. —gaḥ

(1) The tawny colour.

(2) A buffalo.

(2) A rat. —gā

(1) Turmeric.

(2) Saffron.

(3) A kind of yellow pigment.

(4) An epithet of Durgā.

(5) A bow-string. —gaṁ A young animal.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. having reddish-brown eyes, redeyed. (

—kṣaḥ) 1. an ape. —2. an epithet of Śiva.

—īkṣaṇaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—īśaḥ an epithet of fire.

—kapiśā a species of cock-roach.

—cakṣus m. a crab.

—jaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—sāraḥ yellow orpiment.

—sphaṭikaḥ ‘yellow crystal’, a kind of gem (gomeda).

पिंगल — piṁgala Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

piṁgala a. [piṁga-sidhmā- lac, piṁgaṁ lāti, lā-ka vā Tv.] Reddish-brown,

yellowish, brown, tawny; R. 12. 71; Ms. 3. 8. —laḥ

(1) The tawny colour.

(2) Fire.

(3) A monkey.

(4) An ichneumon.

(5) A small owl.

(6) A kind of snake.

(7) N. of an attendant on the sun.

(8) N. of one of Kubera’s treasures.

(9) N. of a reputed sage, the father of Sanskrit prosody, his work

being known as pigalacchaṁdaḥśāstra; chaṁdojñānānaṁdhiṁ jaghāna

makaro velātaṭe piṁgalaṁ Pt. 2. 33. —laṁ

(1) Brass.

(2) Yellow orpiment. —lā

(1) A kind of owl.

(2) The Śiśu tree (śiṁśapā).

(3) A kind of metal.

(4) A particular vessel of the body.

(5) The female elephant of the south

(6) N. of a courtezan who became remarkable for her piety and

virtuous life; (the Bhāgavata mentions how she and Ajamīla were

delivered from the trammels of the world).

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—lauhaṁ brass.

पिंजर — piṁjara Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

piṁjara a. [piṁj-arac] Reddishyellow, tawny, gold-coloured; śikhā

pradīpasya suvarṇapiṁjarā Mk. 3. 17; R. 18. 40. —raḥ

(1) The reddish-yellow or tawny-brown colour.

(2) The yellow colour. —raṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) Yellow orpiment.

(3) A skeleton.

(4) A cage (for paṁjara).

(5) The ribs or the cavity formed by them, the thorax.

पिंजरित — piṁjarita Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

piṁjarita a. Coloured yellow, tinged brown.

पिङ्ग — piṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅga «piṅgara, piṅgala» see under «piṇj», col.3.

piṅga mf («ā») n. yellow, reddish-brown, tawny &c. (cf. g. «kaḍārādi»)

piṅga m. yellow (the colour)

piṅga m. a buffalo a mouse

piṅga m. N. of one of the sun’s attendants

piṅga m. of a man (cf. «paiṅgi, -gin»)

piṅga m. («piṅga», in one place «pinga»), N. of a kind of divine being (?)

piṅga mf («ā») n. («pingā») f. a bow-string (; cf. «piṅgala-jya»)

piṅga m. a kind of yellow pigment (cf. «go-rocanā»)

piṅga m. the stalk of Ferula Asa Foetida

piṅga m. turmeric, Indian saffron

piṅga m. bamboo manna

piṅga m. N. of a woman

piṅga m. of Durgā

piṅga m. a tubular vessel of the human body which according to the

Yoga system is the channel of respiration and circulation for one side

piṅga mf («ā») n. («ī») f. Mimosa Suma

piṅga n. orpiment

piṅga n. a young animal

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

piṅga 1) adj. f. ā; geht im comp. bald voran, bald hinterdrein, gaṇa

kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. «röthlich braun» AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. 1397. an. 2,

36. MED. g. 9. HALĀY. 4, 51. vipra MBH. 1, 8081. nārī 7, 2066. madhu- 3,

17002. anantapiṅgalānpiṅgān R. 4, 43, 23, v. l. atipiṅga (nayana) 3, 74,

16. vilocanam — antarniviṣṭāmalapiṅgatāram KUMĀRAS. 7, 33. kṣitireṇu

MĀRK. P. 8, 190. haripiṅgojjvalaśmaśru MBH. 1, 8080. -jaṭājūṭa KATHĀS.

50, 192. 1, 18. suhutahutavahapiṅgaśmaśrukeśaśarīra PAÑCAT. 182, 18.

Ind. St. 2, 258. SUŚR. 1, 41, 2. -bhāsa 2, 289, 17. -deha Beiw. Śiva’s ŚIV.

— 2) m. a) oxyt. wohl N. «eines Krautes» AV. 8, 6, 6. 18. 19. 21. 24. 25. —

b) «Büffel» H. ś. 182. — c) «Maus» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. eines

Mannes ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12; vgl. paiṅgi, paiṅgin. — e) N. pr. eines Wesens im

Gefolge des Sonnengottes H. 103, Sch. — 3) f. ā a) parox. nach SĀY.

«Bogensehne»: ava svarāti gargaro godhā pari saniṣvaṇat. piṅgā pari

caniṣkadadindrāya brahmodyatam ṚV. 8, 58, 9; vgl. piṅgalajyena —

ājagavena MBH. 7, 6148. — b) «ein best. gelbes Pigment» (s. gorocanā).

— c) «der Stengel der Ferula Asa foetida», = hiṅgunālī, -nālikā H. an.

MED. Nach ŚKDR. und WILS. sind zwei Bedeutungen gemeint, wogegen

H. an. entschieden spricht. — d) «Bambusmanna» (vaṁśarocanā)

RĀJAN.im ŚKDR. — e) «Gelbwurz» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — f) ein Bein. der

Durgā H. an. MED. Statt piṅgāyāñcāśrame MBH. 13, 1741 ist wohl

piṅgāyāścāśrame zu lesen, wobei es aber doch zweifelhaft bleibt, ob

Durgā oder eine best. fromme Büsserin gemeint sei; vgl. piṅgatīrtha und

piṅgalā als N. pr. einer frommen Buhldirne. — 4) f. ī «eine best. Mimosa»

(s. śamī) H. an. MED. — 5) n. = bālaka H. an. MED. «das Junge eines

Thiers» WILS.

piṅga 1) -jaṭākalāpa VIKR. 157. — 2) a) vielleicht darunter ein göttliches

Wesen zu verstehen.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

piṅga piṅga, i. e. piñj + a, adj., f. gā.

1. Of a tawny colour, Pañc. 182, 18.

2. Yellow, Vikr. d. 157.

3. Red, Hiḍ. 2, 2 (cf. piṅgākṣa).

— Comp. eka-, m. a name of Kuvera. śveta-, m. a lion.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piṅga a. reddish brown, tawny; m. a man’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

piṅga piṅg-a, a. [piñj] reddish brown, tawny: -danta, m. N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

piṅga pu° piji—varṇe—ac nyaṅkā° kutvam . 1 mūṣike medi° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2

dīpaśikhābhe varṇe pu° piṅgo dīpaśikhāmaḥ syāt piṅgalaḥ padmadhūlibat

. 3 tadvati tri° amaraḥ gaurā° pāṭhāt striyāṁ ṅīp . kaḍārā° pāṭhāt asya

pūrvanipātaḥ . 4 ṛṣibhede pu° tena proktaḥ kalpaḥ ṇini paiṅgin tatprokte

kalpe . piṅga + astryardhe sidhmā° vā lac . priṅgala tadvarṇayute tri°

pakṣe matup masya vaḥ . piṅgavat tatrārthe tri° striyāṁ ṅīp .

पिङ्गल — piṅgala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgala mf («ā» and «ī») n. (cf. g. «gaurādi» and «kaḍārādi»), reddish-

brown, tawny, yellow, gold-coloured &c. &c,

piṅgala mf («ā» and «ī») n. (in alg. also as N. of the 10th unknown

quantity)

mf («ā» and «ī») n. having reddish-brown eyes

piṅgala m. yellow colour

piṅgala m. fire.

piṅgala m. an ape

piṅgala m. an ichneumon

piṅgala m. a small kind of owl

piṅgala m. a small kind of lizard

piṅgala m. a species of snake

piṅgala m. a partic. vegetable poison

piṅgala m. (with Jainas) N. of a treasure

piṅgala m. the 51st (or 25th) year in a 60 years’ cycle of Jupiter

piṅgala m. N. of śiva or a kindred being &c.

piṅgala m. of an attendant of śiva

piṅgala m. of an attendant of the Sun

piṅgala m. of a Rudra

piṅgala m. of a Yaksha

piṅgala m. of a Dānava

piṅgala m. of a Nāga or serpent-demon (the supposed author of the

Chandas or treatise on metre regarded as one of the Vedāṅgas, identified

by some with Pataṇjali, author of the Mahā-bhāṣya)

piṅgala m. of sev. ancient sages &c.

piṅgala m. pl. N. of a people

piṅgala mf («ā» and «ī») n. («ā») f. a species of bird

mf («ā» and «ī») n. a kind of owl

mf («ā» and «ī») n. Dalbergia Sissoo

piṅgala mf («ā» and «ī») n. = «karṇikā»

mf («ā» and «ī») n. a kind of brass

mf («ā» and «ī») n. a partic. vessel of the body (the right of 3 tubular

vessels which according to the Yoga philosophy are the chief passages of

breath and air; cf.

mf («ā» and «ī») n. a kind of yellow pigment (= «go-rocanā»)

mf («ā» and «ī») n. N. of Lakṣmī

mf («ā» and «ī») n. of a courtezan who became remarkable for her

piety

mf («ā» and «ī») n. of the female elephant of the South quarter

mf («ā» and «ī») n. of an astrological house or period

mf («ā» and «ī») n. heart-pea

piṅgala n. a partic. metal

piṅgala n. yellow orpiment

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

piṅgala (von piṅga) gaṇa sidhmādi zu P. 5, 2, 97. UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 1,

108. 1) adj. f. ā (ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41); geht im comp. voran oder

hinterdrein, gaṇa kaḍārādi zu P. 2, 2, 38. Accent eines auf piṅgala (v. l.

pigalī) ausgehenden comp. gaṇa ghoṣādi zu 6, 2, 85. «röthlich braun» AK.

1, 1, 4, 25. 3, 4, 25, 172. H. 1396. an. 3, 667. MED. l. 112. fg. HALĀY. 4,

50. 50. UJJVAL. sa snāto babhruḥ piṅgalaḥ pṛthivyāṁ bahu rocate AV. 11,

5, 26. babhruḥ piṅgalo dakṣiṇā KĀṬH. 15, 1. anaḍvān ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 6.

rohiṇī piṅgalaikahāyanī TS. 7, 1, 6, 2. NIR. 3, 18. putro me kapilaḥ piṅgalo

jāyeta ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 4. śukla, nīla, piṅgala, harita, lohita

«röthlichbraune Flüssigkeit» 7, 1, 20. 2, 12. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. piṅgala,

piṅgalā (= piṅgākṣa, piṅgākṣī Schol.) KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 6, 14. 20, 8, 16.

nodvahetkapilāṁ (= kapilakeśāṁ KULL.) kanyām — na piṅgalām (=

piṅgalākṣīm KULL.) M. 3, 8. MBH. 13, 5088. MĀRK. P. 34, 76. tapasvin

MBH. 3, 1499. jalāyukā SUŚR. 1, 40, 20. 41, 2. 85, 20. vānara RAGH. 12,

71. kukkurī VARĀH. BṚH. S. 61, 2. netre 68, 19. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. 2, 17.

piṅgalākṣa (Śiva) ŚIV. -roman (piśāca) HARIV. 14577. vāpīḥ

kamalapiṅgalāḥ R. 3, 61, 17. -jya (ājagava) MBH. 7, 6148.

vidyutsaṁpāta- 3, 11145. hema- R. 1, 1, 66. 4, 3, 27. madhu- MBH. 3,

11151. 13, 832. R. 5, 74, 10. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 64. BṚH. 2, 8. sindūra-

VID. 54. babhru- MBH. 10, 38. kṛṣṇa- R. 2, 69, 14 (71, 14 GORR.). vāto

bhasmāṅgārābhipiṅgalaḥ (-rātipi-?) HARIV. 5533. — 2) m. a) «Feuer.» —

b) «Affe» TRIK. 3, 3, 400. H. an. MED. — c) «Ichneumon» H. 1302. — d)

«eine kleine Eulenart» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) «eine Schlangenart» SUŚR.

2, 265, 13; vgl. «n.» — f) «ein best. vegetabilisches Gift» H. 1199. — g) N.

eines Schatzes H. an. MED. bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — h) N. pr. eines

Trabanten des Sonnengottes AK.1,1,2,33. VYĀḌI beim Schol. zu H. 103.

H. an. MED. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 70,a, N. 1. Bei WILSON sind daraus zwei

Bedeutungen entstanden: die angegebene und «die Sonne.» — i) Bein. des

Śiva oder eines verwandten Dämons ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 4, 16. N. pr. eines

Rudra H. an. MED. MATSYA-P. in VP. 121, N. 17. Bei WILSON Śiva. — k)

N. pr. eines Jaksha MBH.3,14565. MATSYA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 42,a,

Kap. 167. — l) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge des Śiva KATHĀS. 45, 352.

— m) N. pr. eines Dānava KATHĀS. 47, 12. — n) N. pr. eines Nāga MED.

VYUTP. 87. 85 (Nāgarāja). MBH. 1, 1554. angeblicher Verfasser des

Chandas COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,63. fgg. 97. MÜLLER, SL. 147. fgg. 244.

Verz. d. B. H. No. 380. fgg. 1353. fg. Verz. d. Oxf. H. No. 457. fgg. S.

113,a. Ind. St.1,17. 59. chandojñānanidhiṁ jaghāna makaro velātaṭe

piṅgalam PAÑCAT. II, 34. -vṛtti f. «Commentar» zur Metrik des Piñgala

COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 65. -prakāśa ebend. und 91. 92. 102. -sāravikāśinī

Verz. d. Oxf. H. No. 457. — o) N. pr. verschiedener alter Weisen H. an.

MBH. 1, 2046. 2047. R. 2, 32, 28. mit dem Bein. vatsājīva N. eines

Bettlers BURN. Intr. 360. — p) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 45.

Vgl. anantapiṅgalānpiṅgān R. 4, 43, 23, v. l. und daṇḍapiṅgalaka. — q)

Bez. «des 51ten (25ten) Jahres im 60jährigen Jupitercyclus» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 8, 48. Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 180. — 3) f. ā a) «ein best.

Vogel» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. «eine Eulenart» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 85, 21. 37. 87,

2. 38. -ruta Verz. d. B. H. No. 897. — b) = karṇikā H. an. — c) «Dalbergia

Sissoo Roxb.» (śiṁśapā) RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — d) «ein best. Metall»

(rājarīti) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) «eine best. Arterie» H. an. Ind. St.2,172.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 104,b,40. No. 167; vgl. CHĀND. UP.8,6,1. — f) N. pr. des

Weibchens des Elephanten Vāmana AK. 1, 1, 2, 6. Kumuda H. an. MED.

HĀR. 147. — g) N. pr. einer später fromm gewordenen Buhldirne H. an.

MED. HĀR. 263. MBH. 12,6513. fgg. 6646. KAP.4,11. SKANDA2-P. in Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 74,b, Kap. 22. MADHUS. in Ind. St.1,22. — 4) n. a) «ein best.

Metall» (rīti) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) «Auripigment» (vgl. piṅgasāra) WILS.

nach ders. Aut. — Vgl. kṛṣṇa-, nīla-

piṅgala 1) agnyārādhana- KATHĀS. 106, 73; vgl. piṅgalita. — 2) h) R. 7,

23, 2, 9. — n) -cchandogranthaṭīkā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 197,b, No. 461. — q)

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 332,a,5. — 3) e) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 236,a,2 v. u.b,4. 337,b,1.

— g) KAP. 4, 11. BHĀG. P. 11, 8, 22. fgg.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

piṅgala 1 I A deva who is an attendant of the Sungod. Sūrya (Sun-god)

rides in a one-wheeled chariot drawn by seven horses and he bears in his

hands two lotuses. On his right side stands the attendant Daṇḍī with an

ink-pot and a writing stick and on his left side stands the attendant

Piṅgala with a stick. Both these are demi god attendants of Sūrya.

(Chapter 51, Agni Purāṇa).

piṅgala 2 II A prominent serpent born to the sage Kaśyapa of his wife

Kadrū. (Śloka 9, Chapter 35, Ādi Parva).

piṅgala 3 III A sage. He was a Yajvā (priest) in the Sarpasatra of

Janamejaya. (Śloka 6, Chapter 53, Ādi Parva).

piṅgala 4 IV A King of the Yakṣas. He is a friend of Śiva. He acts as

body-guard to Śiva who spends his time in cremation grounds. This Yakṣa

gives happiness to all in the world. (Śloka 51, Chapter 23, Vana Parva).

piṅgala 5 V A lion, who is a character in the book Pañcatantra. (See

under Pañcatantra).

piṅgala 6 VI A brahmin of very bad manners. This brahmin was killed by

his own wife who was a prostitute. In their next birth Piṅgala became a

vulture and the prostitute, a parrot. Both had memories of their previous

birth and the vulture (Piṅgala) with vengeance killed the parrot. After that

Piṅgala was eaten one day by a tiger A brahmin residing on the shores of

Gaṅgā read to their souls the fifth chapter of Gītā and they got salvation

and entered Pitṛloka (world of the Manes). (Chapter 40, Sṛṣṭi Khaṇḍa,

Padma Purāṇa).

piṅgala 7 VII A rākṣasa (demon). Once when this demon was going

through a forest he met a forester. The latter got afraid and climbed up a

Śamī tree. Then a branch broke and it fell on the head of Gaṇeśa sitting

beneath that tree. It was an act of worship and because of that both the

forester and the demon were elevated. (Gaṇeśa Purāṇa).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

piṅgala piṅga + la,

I. adj., f. lā.

1. Of a tawny colour, brown, Ragh. 12, 71; yellowish.

2. Red-eyed, Man. 3, 8 (Kull.).

II. m. A proper name.

III. f. lā, A proper name.

— Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj., f. lā, of a fuscous colour.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piṅgala a. = prec. a.; m. a man’s name, esp. N. of an author on Chandas

or metrics, E. of sev. gods & demons; f. piṅgalā a. kind of leech, a

woman’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

piṅgala piṅga-la, a. tawny-eyed or redyed; m. ep. of Śiva and of a

Dānava; N., esp. of a writer on metre: ā, f. kind of leech;

a-ka, m. Tawny, N. of a lion;

i-kā, f. N.; (a) -gāndhāra, m. N. of a fairy.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

piṅgala pu° piṅga + sidhmā° lac piṅgaṁ lāti—ka vā . 1

nīlapītamiśritavarṇe 3 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . asmin pare ghoṣā°

pūrvapūrvapadamādyudāttam . prākṛtabhāṣayācchandogranthakārake 3

nāgabhede 4 rudre 5 sūryapāripārśvikabhede 6 nidhibhede 7 vānare

nakule 8 sthāvaraviṣabhede ca hemaca° . 9 kṣudrolūke rājani°

deśabhaṅgo’tha durbhikṣaṁ samāsāt kathayāmyaham . piṅgale

cārupadmākṣi! durbhikṣaṁ narmadātaṭe iti jyo° ta° ukte

prabhavādibarṣamadhye 10 varṣabhede ca . 11 nāgarājabhede bhā° ā° 35

a° . 12 yakṣabhede bhā° va° 230 a° . 13 rītau pittale 14 śiṁśapāyāṁ ca

strī rājani° . 15 vāmanadiggajasya striyāṁ kumudasya 16 kariṇyāṁ medi°

. 17 karṇikāyāṁ tantrokte 18 nāḍībhede hemaca° . iḍāśabde dṛśyam

पिङ्गलत्व — piṅgalatva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgalatva «piṅgala-tva» n. a tawny or yellow colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

piṅgalatva n. «die rothbraune Farbe» R. 7, 13, 24.

पिङ्गलिमन् — piṅgaliman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgaliman «piṅgaliman» m. tawny or yellow colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

piṅgaliman m. nom. abstr. von piṅgala adj. VĀMANA 5, 2, 20.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piṅgaliman m. a reddish-brown colour.

पिङ्गिमन् — piṅgiman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṅgiman m. tawny or yellow colour
पिण्जर — piṇjara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjara mf («ā») n. reddish-yellow, yellow or tawny, of a golden colour

&c.

piṇjara m. a tawny-brown colour (also «-tā» f. ; «-tva» n.

piṇjara m. a horse (prob. bay or chestnut)

piṇjara m. N. of a mountain

piṇjara n. (only gold

piṇjara n. yellow orpiment

piṇjara n. the flower of Mesua Roxburghii

piṇjara w.r. for «paṇjara» («skeleton» or «cage»).

पिण्जरय — piṇjaraya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjaraya «piṇjaraya» Nom. P. «-yati», to dye reddish-yellow, ; «-rita» mfn.

coloured reddish-yellow

पिण्जरिक — piṇjarika Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piṇjarika «piṇjarika» n. a kind of musical instrument «-riman» m. a

reddish-yellow colour

पिञ्जर — piñjara Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuchpiñjara UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 131. 1) adj. f. ā «röthlich gelb, goldfarben»

H. 1396. an. 3, 578. MED. r. 186. HALĀY. 4, 52. (keśarī)

kiraṇakeśarabhāsurapiñjaraḥ MBH. 7, 8409. śikhā pradīpasya

suvarṇapiñjarā MṚCCH. 48, 11. cāmīkara- RAGH. 18, 39. kuṅkumarāga-

(payodhara) ṚT. 5, 9. BHĀG. P. 4, 6. 26. BHAṬṬ. 22, 13.

kṛṣṇāñjanābhamākāśaṁ tārolkāpātapiñjaram VARĀH. BṚH. S. 45, 94.

KATHĀS. 35, 20. Vgl. ā-, pari-. — 2) m. a) «ein goldfarbenes Pferd» H. an.

MED. — b) N. pr. eines Berges MĀRK. P. 55, 9. — 3) n. a) «Gold» H. an.

MED. — b) «Auripigment» AK. 2, 9, 104. H. 1058. — c) «die Blüthe von

Mesua Roxburghii Wight.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) «Käfig.» — e) «Skelet»

RĀMĀŚRAYA zu AK. ŚKDR. — In den beiden letzten Bedeutungen

fehlerhafte Variante für pañjara; vgl. AK. 3, 6, 3, 31.

piñjara 1) KATHĀS. 72, 38. — Fehlerhaft für pañjara Spr. 2782. 3467.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

piñjara piñj + ara,

I. adj., f. rā, Yellow or tawny, reddish-yellow, Mṛcch. 48, 11.

II. n. Gold.

— Comp. ā-, adj., f. rā, reddish, Ragh. 16, 51. pari-, adj. brown-red, Kām.

Nītis, 13, 14.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piñjara a. reddish yellow, gold-coloured, hoary.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

piñjara piñja-ra, a. reddish yellow, tawny; bleached (of hair in old age): —

tva, n. golden colour; bleached colour (of hair in old age).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

piñjara na° piji—arac . 1 haritāle amaraḥ 2 svarṇe medi° 3 nāgakeśare

rājani° 4 vihagādibandhanasthāne 5 dehāsthivṛnde ca rāmāśramaḥ . 6

aśvabhede pu° 7 pītaraktavarṇe 8 pītavarṇe ca pu° hemaca° . 9 tadvati

tri° 10 sarpabhede pu° bhā° ā° 35 a° . svārthe ka . piñjaraka tatrārthe

na° .

पिञ्जरय् — piñjaray Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piñjaray piñjarayati* v pp. piñjarita to colour reddish yellow.

पिञ्जरय — piñjaraya Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893piñjaraya piñjara-ya, den. P. colour reddish yellow (Pr.): pp. ita, coloured

tawny.

पिशङ्ग — piśaṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899piśaṅga mf («ī») n. reddish, reddish-brown or -yellow, tawny &c. &c.

piśaṅga m. a reddish or tawny colour

piśaṅga m. N. of a serpent-demon

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

piśaṅga 1) adj. f. piśaṅgī KĀŚ. zu P. 4, 1, 39. Accent eines auf pi-

ausgehenden comp. gaṇa ghoṣādi zu P. 6, 2, 85. «röthlich, röthlich braun»

AK. 1, 1, 4, 25. H. 1396. HALĀY. 4, 51. te ‘ruṇebhirvaramā piśaṅgaiḥ

śubhe kaṁ yānti rathatūrbhiraśvaiḥ ṚV. 1, 88, 2. piśaṅgaṁ drāpiṁ prati

muñcate kaviḥ (savitā) 4, 53, 2. 9, 21, 5. rayi (etwa von der Farbe des

Goldes zu verstehen) 72, 8. 107, 21. munayo vātaraśanāḥ piśaṅgā vasate

malā 10, 136, 2. AV. 3, 9, 3. 14, 2, 48. VS. 24, 11. 29, 59. paṣṭhauhī TS.

1, 8, 19, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 21, 14, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 9, 13. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8.

KAUŚ. 39. turaga MBH. 6, 4530. 7, 983. saṁdhyāpiśaṅgapūrvādriśṛṅga

KATHĀS. 1, 18. analajvālāpiśaṅgaiḥ kacaiḥ PRAB. 65, 11. KATHĀS. 23, 4.

kadambakiñjalkapiśaṅgavāsas BHĀG. P. 2, 2, 9. 1, 11, 28. 4, 25, 23. 8, 18,

1. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. aruṇapiśaṅgo ‘śvaḥ TBR. 6, 6, 11, 6. — 2) m. N.

pr. eines Schlangendämons PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 15, 3. MBH. 1, 2158. — Das

Wort ist wohl auf 1. piś zurückzuführen; vgl. russian «Schönheit», russian

«schmücken», russian «schön», russ. russian «schön» und «roth.»

piśaṅga 1) Ind. St. 8, 273. 275. fg. puṣpareṇu- KATHĀS. 71, 198.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

piśaṅga A serpent born of the family of Dhṛtarāṣṭra. This serpent was

burnt to death at the Sarpasatra of JanameJaya. (Śloka 17, Chapter 57,

Ādi Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

piśaṅga piśaṅga (vb. piś), adj., f. gī and gā, Of a tawny, or brown, or

reddish colour, Kathās. 1, 18.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

piśaṅga f. ī reddish brown.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

piśaṅga piś-aṅ-ga, a. (ī) [moving brilliantly, glittering], reddish, tawny: —

jaṭa, m. N. of an ascetic (having a reddish top-knot);

-tā, f., -tva, n. reddish or tawny colour: i-ta, pp. orange-coloured;

ī-kṛ, colour reddish.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

piśaṅga pu° piśa—aṅgac kicca . padmadhūlitulye 1 piṅgalavarṇe 2 tadvati

tri° amaraḥ .

पीत — pīta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pīta mfn. (1. «pā») drunk, sucked, sipped, quaffed, imbibed &c. &c.

pīta ifc. having drunk, soaked, steeped, saturated, filled with (also with

instr.) (cf. g. «āhitāgny-ādi»)

pīta n. drinking

pīta mf («ā») n. (possibly fr. 2. «pi» or «pyai», the colour of butter ind oil

being yellowish) yellow (the colour of the Vaiśyas, white being that of the

Brāhmans, red that of the Kshatriyas, and black that of the śūdras) &c.

pīta m. yellow colour

pīta m. a yellow gem, topaz

pīta m. a yellow pigment prepared from the urine of kine

pīta m. N. of sev. plants (Alangium Hexapetalum, Carthamus Tinctorius,

Trophis Aspera)

pīta m. of the Vaiśyas in śālmala-dvipa

pīta mf («ā») n. («ā») f. N. of sev. plants (Curcuma Longa and Aromatica,

a species of Dalbergia Sissoo, a species of Musa, Aconitum Ferox,

Panicuni Italicum = «mahā-jyotihmatī»)

pīta m. a kind of yellow pigment (= «go-rocanā»)

pīta m. a mystical N. of the letter «ṣ»

pīta n. a yellow substance

pīta n. gold

pīta n. yellow orpiment

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pīta a. [pā-karmaṇi kta]

(1) Drunk, quaffed; vanāya pītapratibaddhavatsāṁ (gāṁ musoca) R.

2. 1.

(2) Steeped, soaked in, filled or saturated with

(3) Absorbed, drunk up, evaporated; Ku. 4. 44.

(4) Watered, sprinkled with water; pātuṁ na prayama vyavasyati

jalaṁ yaṣma svapīteṣu yā S. 4 8

(5) Yellow; vidyutprabhāracitapītapaṭottarīyaḥ Mk. 5. 2. —taḥ

(1) Yellow colour.

(2) Topaz.

(3) Safflower.

(4) A yellow pigment prepared from cow’s urine. —taṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) Yellow orpiment.

— Comp.

—abdhiḥ an epithet of Agastya.

—aṁbaraḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu; iti nigaditaḥ prītaḥ pītāṁbaropi

tathākarot Gīt. 12. —2. an actor. —3 a religious mendicant wearing yellow

garments.

—aruṇa a. yellowish-red. (

—ṇaḥ) the middle of day-break.

—aśman m. topaz.

—kadalī a species of banana (svarṇakadalī). —kaṁdaṁ the carrot.

—kāveraṁ 1. saffron. —2. brass.

—kāṣṭhaṁ yellow sanders.

—gadhaṁ yellow sandal.

—caṁdanaṁ 1. a species of sandal-wood. —2. saffron. —3.

turmeric.

—caṁpakaḥ a lamp.

—tuṁḍaḥ a Kāraṇḍava bird.

—dāru n. a kind of pine or Sarala tree.

—dugdhā 1. a milch cow. —2. a cow whose milk has been pledged.

—3. a cow tied up to be milked.

—druḥ the Sarala tree.

—nīla a. green. (

—laḥ) the green colour.

—pādā a kind of bird (Mar. mainā). —puṣpaḥ N. of several plants,

caṁpaka, karṇikāra &c.

—maṇiḥ a topaz.

—mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance

—mūlakaṁ the carrot.

—yūthī yellow jasmine.

—rakta a. yellowish-red, orange-coloured. (

—ktaṁ) a kind of yellow gem, the topaz.

—rāgaḥ 1. the yellow colour. —2. wax. —3. the fibres of a lotus.

—lohaṁ brass.

—vālukā turmeric.

—vāsas m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa.

—sāraḥ 1. the topaz. —2. the sandal tree. (

—raṁ) yellow sandal-wood.

—sāri n. antimony.

—skaṁdhaḥ a hog.

—sphaṭikaḥ the topaz.

—harita a. yellowishgreen.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pīta (partic. praet. pass. von 1. pā) «getrunken»: jīvapītasarga adj.

«dessen Strahlen (Güsse) von Lebendigen getrunken sind» ṚV. 7, 149, 2.

Belege aus der späteren Literatur für diese und andere Bedd. s. u. pā.

pīta 1) adj. f. ā «gelb» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1394. an. 2, 178. MED. t. 34.

HALĀY. 4, 50. BALA beim Schol. zu NAIṢ 8, 98. VYUTP. 48. ĀŚV. GṚHY.

2, 8. CHĀND. UP. 8, 6, 1. SUŚR. 1, 45, 3. 61, 9. pītāvabhāsa 84, 6. 259, 6.

262, 15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 21. 29, 22. Die Farbe der Vaiśya, wie weiss

die der Brahmanen, roth die der Krieger und schwarz die der Śūdra, 3, 19;

vgl. MBH. 12, 6934. MUIR, Sanskrit Texts I, 191. — AK. 2, 4, 2, 52. 56.

HALĀY. 2, 50. MĀRK. P. 109, 65. -kauṣeya Citat beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 6, 5.

-cchavivarṇa VYUTP. 205. -māñjiṣṭha R. 2, 94, 5. āpītasūryaṁ nabhaḥ

MṚCCH. 84, 8. — 2) m. a) «Topas» RATNAM. bei WILS. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

— b) «ein gelbes aus Kuhurin verfertigtes Pigment» RATNAM. bei WILS. —

c) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: «Alangium hexapetalum» (aṅkoṭha);

«Safflor, Carthamus tinctorius; Trophis aspera» (śākhoṭa) RĀJAN. — 3) f.

ā a) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: «Gelbwurz», = haridrā AK. 2, 9, 41. H.

418. H. an. MED. RATNAM. 58. = dāruharidrā, mahājyotiṣmatī,

kapilaśiṁśapā, priyaṅgu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = ativiṣā ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. —

b) «eine Art gelbes Pigment» (gorocanā) RĀJAN. — c) mystische Bez.

«des Buchstabens» ṣa Ind. St. 2, 316. — 4) n. a) «Gold» BALA a. a. O.

NAIṢ 8, 98. — b) «Auripigment» RĀJAN.

pīta Z. 2 lies 1, 149, 2.

pīta s. u. 2. pī.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pīta pīta, adj., f. tā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 2, 94, 5.

— Comp. ā-, adj. yellowish, Rām. 2, 76, 4.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pīta [1] -> pā2.

pīta [2] a. yellow; abstr. tā f.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pīta 2. pīta, a. yellow: -tā, f. yellowness; yellow colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pīta tri° pā—karmaṇi kta . 1 pānakarmaṇi bhāve kta . 2 pāne na° pivati

varṇāntaraṁ pā—ūṇā° kartari kta . 3 varṇabhede pu° 4 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . 5 haritāle na° medi° . pītaṁ pānamastyasya ac . 6 pānakartari

tri° vanāya pīta pratibaddhavatsām raghuḥ . kāvye

varṇanīyapītavarṇadravyāṇi kavikalpalatāyāmuktāni yathā pītāni brahma 1

jīve 2 ndra 3 garuḍe 4 śvaradṛ 5 gjaṭāḥ 6 . gaurī 7 dvāpara 8 gomūtra 9

madhu 10 vīrarasā 11 rajaḥ 12 . haridrā 13 rocanā 14 rīti 15 gandhake 16

dīpa 17 campake 18 . kiñjalka 19 valkale 20 śāli 21 haritāla 22 manaḥśilāḥ

23 . karṇikāvaṁ 24 cakravāka 25 vānarau 26 śārikāmukham 27 .

keśavāṁśuka 28 maṇḍūka 29 sarāga 30 kanakādayaḥ 31 .

पीतक — pītaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītaka mf («ikā») n. yellow (also applied to the 4th unknown quantity m.

yellow amaranth

mf («ikā») n. Odina Pennata

pītaka mf («ikā») n. («ikā») f. saffron

mf («ikā») n. turmeric

mf («ikā») n. yellow jasmine

pītaka n. (only orpiment

pītaka n. brass

pītaka n. honey

pītaka n. saffron

pītaka n. yellow sanders

pītaka n. aloe wood

pītaka n. Curcuma Aromatica

pītaka n. Terminalia Tomentosa, a species of śyonāka.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pītaka a. Yellow. —kaḥ The Aśoka tree. —kaṁ

(1) Yellow orpiment.

(2) Brass.

(3) Saffron.

(4) Honey.

(5) Aloe-wood.

(6) Sandal-wood

(7) Yellow sandal.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītaka (von 2. pīta) 1) adj. f. pītikā «gelb» P. 4, 2, 2, Vārtt. 3. 4. gaṇa

yāvādi zu P. 5, 4, 29. MBH. 5, 2472. 12, 6934 (die Farbe der Vaiśya). R. 6,

82, 60. SUŚR. 1, 199, 7. 40, 14. 114, 14. 286, 6. AK. 2, 4, 4, 5. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 34, 4. 53, 20. 32. 85, 78. — 2) f. pītikā a) «Saffran» SUŚR. 1, 359,

20. — b) «Gelbwurz» RATNAM. 58 (pītakā unsere Hdschr., pītikā ŚKDR.

und WILS. nach ders. Aut.). — c) «gelber Jasmin» (svarṇayūthī) JAṬĀDH.

im ŚKDR. — 3) n. a) «Auripigment» AK. 2, 9, 104. — b) «Messing.» — c)

«Honig.» — d) «Saffran.» — e) «gelber Sandel» (ŚKDR. u. pītacandana). —

f) «Amyris Agallocha u.s.w.» (aguru). — g) = padmakāṣṭha, kiṁkirāta (in

dieser Bed. m. WILS.). — h) = haridru. — i) «eine Art» Śyonāka RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — k) = nandīvṛkṣa (in dieser Bed. m. WILS. nach RĀJAN.). — l) =

pītaśāla RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. taruṇapītikā.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pītaka pīta + ka,

I. adj., f. tikā, Of a yellow colour, Rām. 6, 82, 60.

II. f. tikā, Saffron.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pītaka f. -tikā = prec.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pītaka tri° pīta + svārthe ka . 1 pītaśabdārthe saṁjñāyāṁ kan . 2 haritāle

amaraḥ 3 kusumbheṁ jaṭāgharaḥ . 4 asurabhede 5 padmakāṣṭhe 6 rītau

pittale 7 mākṣike 8 pītacandane na° rājani° 9 nandīvṛkṣe 10 pītaśāle ca

pu° ratnamālā . 11 śyonākabhede 12 haridruvṛkṣe 13 aśokavṛkṣe ca pu°

rājani° . pītena haritālena raktaṁ tena raktaṁ rāgāt sā° ityadhikāre pītāt

kan vārti° kan . 14 haritālena rakte tri° . 15 avyaktarāśaiḥ saṁjñābhede

vījagaṇitam . avyaktaśabde dṛśyam .

पीतता — pītatā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītatā «pīta-tā» f. yellowness

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītatā (von 2. pīta) f. «das Gelbsein, die gelbe Farbe» MBH. 3, 11251.

BHĀṢĀP. 127.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pītatā pīta + tā, f. Yellowness, yellow (the colour), Bhāṣāp. 127.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pītatā strī, (pīta + tal + ṭāp .) haridrābhatā . pītatvam . pītaśabdāt

bhāvārthe tapratyayaniṣpannā . iti vyākaraṇam .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 3

. 149 . 26 .

dvāpare’pi yuge dharmo dvibhāgo naḥ pravartate .

viṣṇu rvai pītatāṁ yāti caturdhā veda eva ca ..

पीतरक्त — pītarakta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītarakta «pīta-rakta» mfn. yellowish-red, orange («-cchāya» mfn.

orange-coloured)

pītarakta «pīta-rakta» m. = next

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītarakta (2. pīta + rakta) 1) adj. «gelbroth, orangefarbig» H. 1396.

HALĀY. 4, 52. -cchāya H. 1241. — 2) «Topas», n. ŚKDR. u. WILS. nach

RĀJAN., aber unter puṣparāga im ŚKDR. nach derselben Aut. masc.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pītarakta na° varṇo varṇena pā° karma° . 1 raktayarṇe athaca potavarṇe

ca pītena raktaṁ kṛtarāgam . 2 putparāgamaṇau na° rājani° .

पीतराग — pītarāga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītarāga «pīta-rāga» mfn. of a yellow colour

pītarāga «pīta-rāga» m. yellowness

pītarāga «pīta-rāga» m. or n. the fibres of the lotus &c.

pītarāga «pīta-rāga» n. wax

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītarāga (2. pīta + rāga) 1) adj. «von gelber Farbe.» — 2) n. a)

«Staubfaden» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; m. WILS. — b) «Wachs» RĀJAN.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pītarāga na° pīto rāgo varṇo yasya . 1 kiñjalke 2 sikthe ca karma° . 3

pītavarṇe pu° 4 tadvati tri° .

पीतल — pītala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītala mfn. yellow

pītala m. yellow colour

pītala n. brass

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pītala a. Yellow. —laḥ The yellow colour. —laṁ Brass.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītala (von 2. pīta) adj. «gelb» H. 1394.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pītala pu° pītaṁ varṇāntaraṁ lāti lā—ka . 1 pītavarṇe 2 tadyute tri° .

पीतवर्ण — pītavarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītavarṇa «pīta-varṇa» m. «yellow-coloured», a species of parrot
पीतहरितच्छाय — pītaharitacchāya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītaharitacchāya «pīta-harita-cchāya» mfn. of a yellow-green colour
पीतिमन् — pītiman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pītiman m. a yellow colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pītiman m. nom. abstr. von pīta «gelb» VĀMANA 5, 2, 20.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pītiman m. a yellow colour.

ब्रध्न — bradhna Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bradhna mfn. (of doubtful origin pale red, ruddy, yellowish, bay (esp. as

the colour of a horse, but also applied to Soma and the Puroḍāśa)

mfn. great, mighty

bradhna m. the sun (cf. «viṣṭap»)

bradhna m. the world of the sun ()

bradhna m. a horse

bradhna m. the point or some other part of an arrow (in «śata-b-» q.v.)

bradhna m. a partic. disease (cf. «bradhma» and «budhna-roga»)

bradhna m. N. of a son of Manu Bhautya

bradhna n. lead (often w.r. for «budhṇa» and «budhnya»). -cakra, n. the

zodiac

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bradhna UṆĀDIS. 3, 5. 1) adj. «röthlichgelb» oder «falb», als Farbe des

Pferdes insbes.; daher NAIGH. 1, 14 unter den Bezz. für dieses. yuñjanti

bradhnamaruṣaṁ carantaṁ pari tasthuṣaḥ ṚV. 1, 6, 1. jānanti vṛṣṇo

aruṣasya śevamuta bradhnasya śāsane raṇanti 3, 7, 5. bradhnaṁ

māṁścatorvaruṇasya babhrum 7, 44, 3. kṛṣṇaḥ śveto ‘ruṣo yārmo asya

bradhna ṛjra uta śoṇo yaśasvān 10, 20, 9. des Soma, welcher sonst

babhru heisst, SV. I, 5, 2, 3, 2 (= AV. 7, 22, 2). ṚV. 8, 4, 13. 14. 9, 97,

52. des Puroḍāśa TS. 1, 6, 3, 3. TBR. 3, 7, 5, 7. der Sonne, in der

Verbindung bradhnasya viṣṭap (s. u. d. W.). Daher m. «Sonne» AK. 1, 1, 2,

30. 3, 4. 1, 5. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. 96. HALĀY. 5, 51. UJJVAL. Unsicher ist

die Stelle niṣkā ime yajamānasya bradhne TBR. 3, 7, 5, 13 schon darum,

weil AV. 7, 99, 1 dafür -sya loke gelesen wird. Nach NAIGH. 3, 3 auch

Bez. fur «gross.» — 2) subst. «Spitze» (oder «ein anderer Theil) des Pfeils»

in dem comp. śatabradhna (SĀY. śatāgra): śatabradhna iṣustava

sahasraparṇa eka it ṚV. 8, 66, 7. — 3) subst. «Blei» BHĀVAPR. in NIGH.

PR. Nach ŚKDR. = gomedaṁ patraṁ mit folgendem Citat aus

DHANVANTARI’S NIGHAṆṬU in BHĀVAPR.: patraṁ dalāhvayaṁ rāmaṁ

gomedaṁ rasanāhvayamiti. — 4) m. «eine best. Krankheit»:

atyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ. karoti granthivacchothaṁ

doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasaṁdhiṣu.. jvaraśūlāṅgasādāḍhyaṁ taṁ bradhnamiti

nirdiśet. MĀDHAVAK. im ŚKDR. — 5) m. N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa kuñjādi

zu P. 4, 1, 98. eines Sohnes des Manu Bhautja MĀRK. P. 100, 32; vgl.

brādhnāyana. — Bisweilen fehlerhaft für budhna und budhnya; s. u. d.

Ww.

bradhna 1) «Sonne»: bradhnasya piṣṭapam (vgl. u. viṣṭap) M. 4, 231.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bradhna bradhna, perhaps vṛdh + na, m.

1. The root of a tree.

2. A son.

3. The body.

4. The sun, Man. 4, 231.

5. Śiva, Brahman.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bradhna a. reddish-yellow; m. the sun.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bradhna bradh-na, a. ruddy; m. sun; N.; n. lead: -bimba, n. disc of the

sun;

-maṇḍala, n. id.; (a) -loka, m. world of the sun (AV.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bradhna pu° bandha—nak bradhādeśaḥ . 1 sūrye 2 arkavṛkṣe amaraḥ . 3

śive hemaca° . 4 dine 5 aśve nighaṇṭuḥ 6 ṛṣibhede tasya gotrāpatyam

kuñjā° ckañ . brāndhāyana tadgotrāpatye puṁstrī° . 7 bhautyamanoḥ

putrabhede mārkapu° 100 a° . 8 rīgabhede

abhyabhiṣyandigurvāmasevanānnicayaṁ gataḥ . karoti

granthivacchothaṁ doṣo vaṅkṣaṇasandhiṣu . jvaraśūlāṅgasādādyaṁ taṁ

vradhnamiti nirdiśet mādhavani0

मण्जरीपिण्जरित — maṇjarīpiṇjarita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899maṇjarīpiṇjarita «maṇjarī-piṇjarita» mfn. «having pearls and gold» or

«yellowish coloured with clusters of flowers»

मलीमस — malīmasa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899malīmasa mf («ā») n. dirty, impure, soiled (lit. and fig.)

mf («ā») n. of a dark or dirty gray colour &c.

malīmasa m. (!) iron

malīmasa m. (!) or n. yellowish vitriol of iron

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

malīmasa a. [mala-īmasac]

(1) Dirty foul, impure, unclean, stained, soiled; mā te

malīmasavikāraghanā matirbhūt Māl. 1. 32; R. 2. 53.

(2) Dark, black. of a black colour; paṇitā na janāravairavaidapi

kūjaṁtamaliṁ malīmasaṁ N. 2. 92; mahāmanomohamalīmasāṁdhayā K.

5; visāritāmajihata kokilāvalīmalīmasā jaladamadāṁburājayaḥ Śi. 17. 57,

1. 38; Māl. 10. 4.

(3) Wicked, sinful, wrong, unrighteous; malīmasāmādadate na

paddhatiṁ R. 3. 46. —saḥ

(1) Iron.

(2) Green vitriol.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

malīmasa P. 5, 2, 114. 1) adj. f. ā «schmutzig, unrein» (eig. und übertr.),

«von schmutzig grauer Farbe» AK. 3, 2, 4. H. 1435. an. 4, 330. MED. s.

58. HALĀY. 4, 42. ŚĀK. 61, v. l. citraṁ nṛpadvipāḥ pūtamūrtayaḥ

kīrtinirjharaiḥ. bhavanti vyasanāsaktipāṁsusnānamalīmasāḥ.. Spr. 4050.

kṣālayituṁ kṣameta kaḥ kṣapātamaskāṇḍamalīmasaṁ nabhaḥ ŚIŚ. 1, 38.

prājyacitādhūma- KATHĀS. 25, 180. añjana Spr. 619.

dhūmādgāḍhamalīmasāt 4267. ali NAIṢ 2, 92. kiṁ

prāṇairupakrośamalīmasaiḥ RAGH. 2, 53. pathaḥ śucerdarśayitāra īśvarā

malīmasāmādadate na paddhatim 3, 46. akīrti- KATHĀS. 49, 55. asāre

saṁsāre sarvaduḥkhamalīmase Verz. d. Oxf. H. 90,b,22. — 2) m. a)

«Eisen.» — b) «schwarzer Eisenvitriol» H. an. MED. — Vgl. mala und masi.

malīmasa 1) ghoraniviḍadhvāntavrāta- (śmaśāna) KATHĀS. 75, 42.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

malīmasa malīmasa (cf. mala), adj.

1. Dirty, Hit. ii. d. 148; stained, Ragh. 2, 33.

2. Wicked.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

malīmasa a. = malina a.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

malīmasa mal-ī-mas-a, a. dirty, foul, stained; unclean, impure (also fig.);

dirty-coloured, dark grey.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

malīmasa tri° mala—īmasac . 1 maline amaraḥ . 2 lauhe 3 puṣpakāsīse ca

medi° .

मांश्चतु — māṁścatu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899māṁścatu mfn. (prob.) light yellow, dun-coloured ( and «maṁścatu»)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

māṁścatu (maṁścatu Padap. und ṚV. PRĀT. 4, 35) adj. scheint eine

Farbe zu sein, etwa «falb», als Bez. Mitra’s oder der Sonne, sowie des

Rosses: bradhnaṁ māṁścatorvaruṇasya babhrum ṚV. 7, 44, 3. pl. f.

māṁścatvaḥ NAIGH. 1, 14 unter den Namen des «Pferdes.»

राज्णी — rājṇī Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rājṇī f. (see 1. «rājan») a queen, princess, the wife of a king &c. &c.

f. N. of the western quarter or that which contains the Soul of the

Universe

f. deep-coloured or yellowish-red brass (consisting of three parts of

copper to one of zinc or tin)

rājṇī «rājya» &c. see col.1.

रुचिः — ruciḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

ruciḥ(cī) f. [ruc-ki vā ṅīp]

(1) Light, lustre, splendour, brightness; rucimiṁdudale karotyajaḥ

paripūrṇaṁdurucirmahīpatiḥ Śi. 16. 71; R. 5. 67; Me. 15.

(2) A ray of light; as in rucibhartṛ q. v.

(3) Appearance, colour, beauty (usually at the end of comp.); paṭalaṁ

bahirbahalapaṁkaruci Śi. 9. 19.

(4) Taste, relish; as in rucikara.

(5) Zest, hunger, appetite.

(6) Wish, desire, pleasure; svarucyā ‘at will or pleasure.

(7) Liking, taste; vimārgagāyāśca ruciḥ svakāṁte Bv. 1. 125 ‘liking or

love’; na sa kṣitīśo rucaye babhūva; bhinnarucirhi lokaḥ R. 6. 30; nāṭyaṁ

bhinnarucerjanasya bahudhāpyekaṁ samārādhanaṁ M. 1. 4; oft. in comp.

in the sense of ‘indulging in’, ‘devoted or addicted to’; hiṁsāruceḥ Māl. 5.

29.

(8) Passion, close application to any object

(9) A kind of yellow pigment (gorocanā).

— Comp.

—kara a. 1. tasteful, savoury, palatable. —2. exciting desire. —3.

stomachic, tonic.

—dhāman m. the sun.

—bhartṛ m. 1. the sun; Śi. 9. 17. —2. a husband.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

ruciḥ strī, (rucyate iti . ruc + igupadhāt kit . uṇā° 4 . 119 . iti in . saca kit

.) abhiṣvaṅgaḥ . anurāgaḥ . āśaktirvā . spṛhā . (yathā, kirāte . 10 . 62 .

rucikaramapi nārthavadbabhūva stimitasamādhiśucau pṛthātanūje ..

amlo rucikaro hṛdyaḥ prīṇano vahnidīpanaḥ .. iti vaidyakarājavallabhe

dravyaguṇavyākhyāyām ..) abhilāṣaḥ . gabhastiḥ . kiraṇaḥ .

ityamarabharatau .. śobhā . iti medinī .. (yathā, raghuḥ . 5 . 67 .

lakṣmīrvinodayati yena digantalambī so’yi tvadānanaruciṁ vijahāti

candraḥ ..) bubhukṣā . iti hemacandraḥ .. gorocanā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

āliṅganaviśeṣaḥ . tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā . nāyikāyā nāyakasya saṁmukhe

jānvoruparyupaviśya vakṣasi vakṣo dattvā yadavasthānam . iti

kāmaśāstram ..

ruciḥ puṁ, (rocate śobhate iti . ruc + in . saca kit .) prajāpativiśeṣaḥ . sa

ca raucyamanupitā . yathā — mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

ruciḥ prajāpatiḥ pūrvaṁ nirmamo nirahaṅkṛtiḥ .

yatrāstamitaśāyī ca cacāra pṛthivīmimām ..

anagnimaniketantamekāhāvasathāśrayam .

vimuktasaṅgaṁ taṁ dṛṣṭvā procuḥ svapitaro munim ..

pitara ūcuḥ .

vatsa kasmāt tvayā puṇyo na kṛto dārasaṁgrahaḥ .

svargāpavargahetutvādbandhastenāniśaṁ vinā ..

gṛhī samastadevānāṁ pitṝṇāñca tathārhaṇām .

ṛṣīṇāmatithīnāñca kurban lokānupāśnute ..

svāhoccāraṇato devān svadhoccāraṇataḥ pitṝn .

vibhajannannadānena bhūtādyānatithīnapi ..

sa tvaṁ daivādṛṇādbandhaṁ bandhamasmadṛṇādapi .

āvāpnoṣi manuṣyarṣibhūtebhyaśca dine dine ..

anutpādya sutān devānasantarpya pitṝṁstathā .

bhūtādīṁśca kathaṁ mauḍhyāt sugatiṁ gantumicchasi ..

ruciruvāca .

parigraho’tiduḥkhāya pāpāyādhogatestathā .

bhavatyato mayā pūrbaṁ na kṛto dārasaṁgrahaḥ ..

prakṣālyate’nudivasaṁ yadātmā niṣparigrahaiḥ .

mamatvapaṅkadigdho’pi cintāmbhobhirvaraṁ hi tat .. ityādi .. pitara

ūcuḥ .

yuktaṁ prakṣālanaṁ kartumātmano niyatendriyaiḥ .

kintu lepāya mārgo’yaṁ yatra tvaṁ puttra vartase .. ityādi .. * ..

mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

sa tena pitṛvākyena bhṛśamudbignamānasaḥ .

kanyābhilāṣī viprarṣiḥ paribabhrāma medinīm ..

kanyāmalabhamāno’sau pitṛvākyāgnidīpitaḥ .

cintāmavāpa mahatīmatīvodvignamānasaḥ ..

kiṁ karomi kva gacchāmi kathaṁ me dārasaṁgrahaḥ .

kṣipraṁ bhavet pitṝṇāṁ yo mamābhyudayakārakaḥ ..

iti cintayatastasya matirjātā mahātmanaḥ .

tapasārādhayāmyenaṁ brahmāṇaṁ kamalodbhavam ..

tato varṣaśataṁ divyaṁ tapastepe sa vaidhasam .

didṛkṣuḥ suciraṁ kālaṁ rucirniyamamāsthitaḥ ..

tataḥ svandarśayāmāsa brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ .

uvāca ca prasanno’smītyucyatāmabhivāñchitam ..

tato’sau praṇipatyāha brahmāṇaṁ jagataḥ patim .

pitṝṇāṁ vacanāttena yat kartumabhivāñchitam ..

brahmā cāha ruciṁ vipraṁ śrutvā tasyābhivāñchitam .

prajāpatistvaṁ bhavitā saṣṭavyā bhavatā prajāḥ ..

sṛṣṭvā prajāḥ sutān vipra samutpādya kriyāstathā .

kṛtvā hṛtādhikārastvaṁ tataḥ siddhimavāpsyasi ..

sa tvaṁ yathoktaṁ pitṛbhiḥ kuru dāraparigraham .

kāmañcemamabhidhyāya kriyatāṁ pitṛpūjanam ..

ta eva tuṣṭāḥ pitaraḥ pradāsyanti tavepsitam .

patnīṁ sutāṁśca santuṣṭāḥ kiṁ na dadyuḥ pitāmahāḥ ..

mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

ityṛṣirvacanaṁ śrutvā brahmaṇo’vyaktajanmanaḥ .

nadyā vivikte puline cakāra pitṛtarpaṇam ..

tuṣṭāva ca pitṝn vipraḥ stavairebhirathādṛtaḥ .

ekāgraḥ prayato bhūtvā bhaktinamrātmako ruciḥ .. rucikṛtapitṛstotraṁ

yathā — ruciruvāca .

namasye’haṁ pitṝn bhaktyā ye vasantyadhidevatam .

devairapi hi tarpyante ye śrāddheṣu svadhottaraiḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn svarge ye tarpyante maharṣibhiḥ .

śrāddhairmanomayairbhaktyā bhuktimuktimabhīpsubhiḥ .

namasye’haṁ pitṝn svarge siddhāḥ santarpayanti yān .

śrāddheṣu divyaiḥ sakalairupahārairanuttamaiḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn bhaktyā ye’rcyante guhyakairdivi .

tanmayatvena vāñchadbhirṛddhimātyantikīṁ parām ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn martyairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā .

śrāddheṣu śraddhayābhīṣṭalokapuṣṭipradāyinaḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā .

vāñchitābhīṣṭalābhāya prājāpatyapradāyinaḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairarcyanta’raṇyavāsibhiḥ .

vanyaiḥ śrāddhaiyatāhāraistaponirdhūtakalmaṣaiḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn viprairnaiṣṭhikavratadhāribhiḥ .

ye saṁyatātsabhirnityaṁ santarpyante samādhibhiḥ .

namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddherājanyāstarpayanti yān .

kavyairaśeṣairvidhivallokadvayaphalapradān ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn vaiśyairarcyante bhuvi ye sadā .

svakarmābhiratairnityaṁ puṣpadhūpānnavāribhiḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe ye śūdrairapi bhaktitaḥ .

santarpyante jagatyasmin nāmnā khyātāḥ sukālinaḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe pātāle ye mahāsuraiḥ .

santarpyante svadhāhārāstyaktadambhamadaiḥ sadā ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhairarcyante ye rasātale .

bhogairaśeṣairvivi dhairnāgaiḥ kāmānabhīpsubhiḥ ..

namasye’haṁ pitṝn śrāddhe sarpaiḥ santarpitān sadā tatraiva

vividhairmantrairbhogasampatsamanvitaiḥ ..

pitṝnnamasye nivasanti sākṣād ye devaloke’tha mahītale vā .

tathāntarīkṣe ca surādipūjyāste saṁpratīcchantu mayopanītam ..

pitṝnnamasye paramāṇubhūtā ye vai vimāne nivasantyamūrtāḥ .

yajanti yānastamalā manobhiryogīśvarāḥ kleśavimuktihetūn ..

pitṝnnamasye divi ye ca mūrtāḥ svadhāmujaḥ kābhyaphalābhisandhau

.

pradānaśaktāḥ sakalepsitānāṁ vimuktidā ye’nabhisaṁhiteṣu ..

tṛpyantu te’smin pitaraḥ samastā icchāvatāṁ ye pradiśanti kāmān .

suratvamindratvamato’dhikaṁ vā vasvātmajān kṣmāmavalāṁ gṛhāṇi ..

sūryasya ye raśmiṣu candravimbe śukle vimāne ca sadā vasanti .

tṛpyantu te’smin pitaro’nnatoyairgandhādinā puṣṭimato vrajantu ..

yeṣāṁ hute’gnau haviṣā ca tṛptirye bhuñjate vipra śarīrasaṁsthāḥ .

ye piṇḍadānena mudaṁ prayānti tṛpyantu te’smin pitaro’nnatoyaiḥ ..

ye khaḍgamāṁsena surairabhīṣṭaiḥ kṛṣṇaistilairdaityamahoragaiśca .

kālena śākeba maharṣivaryaiḥ saṁprīṇitāste mudamatra yāntu ..

kavyānyaśeṣāṇi ca yānyabhīṣṭānyatīva yeṣāmamarārcitānām .

teṣāntu sānnidhyamihāstu puṣpagandhādibhojyeṣu mayāhṛteṣu ..

dine dine ye pratigṛhṇate’rcāṁ māsāntapūjyā bhuvi ye’ṣṭakāsu .

ye vatsarānte’bhyudaye ca pūjyāḥ prayāntu te me pitaro’tra tuṣṭim ..

pūjyā dbijānāṁ kumudendubhāso ye kṣattriyāṇāñca navārkavarṇāḥ .

tathā viśāṁ ye kanakāvadātā nīlīnibhāḥ śūdrajanasya ye ca ..

te’smin samastā mama puṣpagandhadhūpānnatoyādinivedanena .

tathāgnihomena ca yāntu tṛptiṁ sadā pitṛbhyaḥ praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ ..

ye devapūrvāṇyatitṛptihetoraśnanti kavyāni śubhāhṛtāni .

tṛptāśca ye bhūtisṛjo bhavanti tṛpyantu te’smin praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ ..

rakṣāṁsi bhūtānyasurāṁstathogrān vināśayantastvaśivaṁ prajānām .

ādyāḥ surāṇāmamareśapūjyāstṛpyantu te’smin praṇato’smi tebhyaḥ ..

agniṣvāttā barhiṣada ājyapāḥ somapāstathā .

vrajantu tṛptiṁ śrāddhe’smin pitarastarpitā mayā ..

agniṣvāttāḥ pitṛgaṇāḥ prācīṁ rakṣantu me diśam .

tathā bahiṣadaḥ pāntu yāmyāṁ ye pitaraḥsthitāḥ ..

pratīcīmājyapāstadbadudīcīmapi somapāḥ .

ūrdhvatastvaryamā rakṣet kavyavālo’nalo’pyadhaḥ ..

rakṣobhūtapiśācebhyastathaivāsuradoṣataḥ .

sarvataścādhipasteṣāṁ yamo rakṣāṁ karotu me ..

viśvo viśvabhugārādhyo dhanyo dharmaḥ sanātanaḥ .

bhūtido bhūtikṛdbhūtiḥ pitṝṇāṁ ye gaṇā nava ..

kalyāṇaḥ kalyadaḥ kartā kalyaḥ kalyatarāśrayaḥ .

kalyatāheturanaghaḥ ṣaḍityete gaṇāḥ smṛtāḥ ..

varo vareṇyo varadastuṣṭidaḥ puṣṭidastathā .

viśvapātā tathā dhātā sapta caite gaṇāḥ smṛtāḥ ..

mahānmahātmā mahito mahimāvānmahābalaḥ .

gaṇāḥ pañca tathaivaite pitṝṇāṁ pāpanāśanāḥ ..

sukhado dhanadaścānyo dharmado’nyo vibhūtidaḥ .

pitṝṇāṁ kathyate caitattathā gaṇacatuṣṭayam ..

ekatriṁśat pitṛgaṇā yairvyāptamakhilaṁ jagat .

te me’tra tṛptāstuṣyantu yacchantu ca samīhitam .. iti

mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe raucye manvantare pitṛstavaḥ .. mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

evantu stuvatastasya tejaso rāśirucchikhaḥ .

prādurbabhūva sahasā gaganavyāptikārakaḥ ..

taddṛṣṭvā sumahattejaḥ samācchādya sthitaṁ jagat .

jānubhyāmavaniṁ gatvā ruciḥ stotramidaṁ jagau ..

amūrtānāñca mūrtānāṁ pitṝṇāṁ dīptatejasām .

namasyāmi sadā teṣāṁ dhyānināṁ divyacakṣuṣām ..

indrādīnāñca netāro dakṣamārīcayostathā .

saptarṣīṇāntathānyeṣāṁ tān namasyāmi kāmadān ..

manvādīnācca netāraḥ sūryācandramasostathā .

tānnamasyāmyahaṁ sarvān pitṝnapsvarṇabeṣu ca ..

nakṣatrāṇāṁ grahāṇāñca vāyvagninabhasāṁ tathā .

dyāvāpṛthivyośca tathā namasyāmi kṛtāñjaliḥ ..

prajāpateḥ kaśyapāya somāya varuṇāya ca .

yogeśvarebhyaśca tathā namasyāmi kṛtāñjaliḥ ..

namo gaṇebhyaḥ saptabhyastathā lokeṣu saptasu .

svayambhuve namasyāmi brahmaṇe yogacakṣuṣe ..

somādhārāḥ pitṛgaṇā yogamūrtidhārā hi te .

namasyāmi tataḥ somaṁ pitaraṁ jagatāmaham ..

agnirūpāṁstathaivānyānnamasyāmi pitṝnaham .

agnīṣomamayaṁ viśvaṁ yata etadaśeṣataḥ ..

ye tu tejasi ye vāyau somasūryāgnimūrtayaḥ .

jagatsvarūpiṇaścaiva tathā brahmasvarūpiṇaḥ ..

tebhyo’khilebhyo yogibhyaḥ pitṛbhyo yatamānasaḥ .

namo namo namaste me prasīdantu svadhābhujaḥ ..

śrīmārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

evaṁ stutāstatastena tejaso munisattamāḥ .

niścakramuste pitaro bhāsayanto diśo daśa ..

niveditantu yattena puṣpagandhānulepanam .

tadbhūṣitānatha sa tān dadṛśe purataḥ sthitān ..

praṇiṣatya rucirbhaktyā punareva kṛtāñjaliḥ .

namastubhyaṁ namastubhyamityāha pṛthagādṛtaḥ ..

tataḥ prasannāḥ pitarastamūcurmunisattamam .

varaṁ vṛṇīṣveti sa tānuvācānatakandharaḥ ..

sāmprataṁ sargakartṛtvamādiṣṭaṁ brahmaṇā mama .

so’haṁ patnīmabhīpsāmi dhanyāṁ divyāṁ prajāvatīm ..

pitara ūcuḥ .

adyaiva sadyaḥ patnī te bhaviṣyati manoramā .

tasyāñca puttro bhavitā bhavato munisattama ! ..

manvantarādhipo dhīmān tvannāmnaivopalakṣitaḥ .

ruce raucya iti khyātiṁ prayāsyati jagattraye ..

tasyāpi bahavaḥ puttrā mahābalaprarākramāḥ .

bhaviṣyanti mahātmānaḥ pṛthivīparipālakāḥ ..

tvañca prajāpatirbhūtvā prajāḥ sṛṣṭvā caturvidhāḥ .

kṣīṇādhikāro dharmajñastataḥ siddhimavāpsyasi ..

stotreṇānena ca naro yo’smāṁstoṣyati bhaktitaḥ .

tasya tuṣṭā vayaṁ bhogān dāsyāmo jñānamuttamam ..

śarīrārogyamaiśvaryaṁ puttrapauttrādisantatim .

pradāsyāmo na sandeho yaccānyadabhivāñchitam ..

tasmāt puṇyaphalaṁ loke vāñchadbhiḥ satataṁ naraiḥ .

pitṝṇāñcākṣayāṁ tṛptiṁ stavyāḥ stotreṇa mānavaiḥ ..

śrāddhe ca ya imaṁ bhaktyā asmatprītikaraṁ stavam .

paṭhiṣyanti dbijāgryāṇāṁ bhuñjatāṁ purataḥ sthitāḥ ..

stotraśravaṇasaṁprītyā sannidhāne pare kṛte .

asmābhirakṣayaṁ śrāddhaṁ tadbhaviṣyatyasaṁśayam ..

yadyapyaśrotriyaṁ śrārdhaṁ yadyapyupahataṁ bhavet .

anyāyopāttavittena yadi vā kṛtamanyathā ..

aśrāddhārhairupahatairupahāraistathā kṛtam .

akāle’pyathavā deśe vidhihīnamathāpi vā ..

aśraddhayā vā puruṣairdambhamāśritya vā kṛtam .

asmākaṁ prītaye śrāddhaṁ tathāpya tadudīraṇāt ..

yatraitat paṭhyate śrāddhe stotramasmatsukhāvaham .

asmākaṁ jāyate tṛptistatra dvādaśavārṣikī ..

hemante dbādaśābdāni tṛptimetat prayacchati .

śiśire dbiguṇābdāni tṛptiṁ stītramidaṁ śrutam ..

vasante ṣoḍaśasamāstṛptaye śrāddhakarmaṇi .

grīṣme ca ṣoḍaśaivaitat paṭhitaṁ tṛptikārakam ..

vikāle ca kṛte śrāddhe stotreṇānena sādhite .

varṣāsu tṛptirasmākamakṣayā jāyate ruce ..

śaratkāle’pi paṭhitaṁ śrāddhakāle prayacchati .

asmākametat puruṣaistṛptiṁ pañcadaśābdikīm ..

yasmin gṛhe’pi likhitametattiṣṭhati nityadā .

sannidhātaṁ kṛte śrāddhe tatrāsmākaṁ bhaviṣyati ..

tasmādetattvayā śrāddhe viprāṇāṁ bhuñjatāṁ puraḥ .

śrāvaṇīyaṁ mahābhāga asmākaṁ tuṣṭikārakam .. iti

mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe raucye manvantare pitṛstave .. * mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

tatastasmānnadīmadhyāt samuttasthau manoramā .

pramlocā nāma tanvaṅgī tatsamīpe varāpsarāḥ ..

sā covāca mahātmānaṁ ruciṁ sumadhurākṣaram ..

praśrayāvanatā subhrūḥ pramlocā vai varāpsarāḥ ..

atīvarūpiṇī kanyā matsutā tapatāṁvara .

jātā varuṇaputtreṇa puṣkareṇa mahātmanā ..

tāṁ gṛhāṇa mayā dattāṁ bhāryārthe varavarṇinīm .

manurmahāmatistasyāṁ samutpasyati te sutaḥ ..

mārkaṇḍeya uvāca .

tathati tena cāpyuktā tasmāttoyādvapuṣmatīm .

ujjahāra tataḥ kabhyāṁ mālinīṁ nāma nāmataḥ ..

nadyāśca puline tasmin sa munirmunisattama ! .

jagrāha pāṇiṁ vidhivat samānāyya mahāmunīn ..

tasyāṁ tasya suto jajñe mahāvīryo mahāmatiḥ .

raucyo’bhavat piturnāmnā khyāto’tra vasudhātale ..

tasya manvantare devāstathā saptarṣayaśca ye .

tanayāśca nṛpāścaiva te samyak kathitāstava ..

dharmavṛddhistathārogyaṁ dhanadhānyasutodbhavaḥ .

nṛṇāṁ bhavatyasandigdhamasmin manvantare śrute ..

pitṛstavaṁ tathā śrutvā pitṝṇāñca tathā gaṇān .

sarvān kāmānavāpnoti tatprasādānnaro mune .. iti mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe

raucyemanvantaraṁ samāptam .. gāruḍe 89 . 90 adhyāye’pyevamasti ..

रोहित — rohita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rohita mf («ā» or «iṇī» q.v.) n. (cf. «lohita») red, reddish &c. &c.

rohita m. a red or chestnut horse (applied to the Sun pl. N. of these

hymns)

rohita m. a kind of deer

rohita m. a kind of fish, Cyprinus Rohitaka &c.

rohita m. a kind of tree, Andersonia Rohitaka

rohita m. a sort of ornament made of precious stones

rohita m. a partic. form of rainbow (cf. n.)

rohita m. N. of a son of Hari-ścandra

rohita m. of a Manu

rohita m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa (v.l. «rauhita»)

rohita m. of a son of Vapush-mat (king of śālmala)

rohita m. of a river

rohita m. pl. N. of a class of Gandharvas

mf («ā» or «iṇī» q.v.) n. of a class of gods under the 12th Manu

rohita n. a kind of metre

rohita n. a kind of rainbow appearing in a straight form, Indra’s bow

unbent and invisible to mortals (cf. «rohitendra-dhanus»)

rohita n. blood

rohita n. saffron

rohita n. N. of the Varsha ruled by Rohita (son of Vapush-mat)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

rohita a. (rohitā or rohiṇī f.) Red, red-coloured. —taḥ

(1) Red colour.

(2) A fox.

(3) A kind of deer.

(4) A red horse.

(5) N. of Hariśchandra’s son.

(6) A kind of fish. —taṁ

(1) Blood.

(2) Saffron.

(3) A straingt rain-bow.

— Comp.

—aśvaḥ fire.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rohita UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. rohitā (nicht zu belegen) und rohiṇī «roth,

röthlich» P. 4, 1, 39. VOP. 4, 27. AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 136. fg. H.

1395. an. 3, 221. fg. MED. ṇ. 74. praṣṭi ṚV. 1, 39, 6. 8, 7, 28. atya 4, 2, 3.

go AV. 1, 22, 1. 3. varṇa 2. 5, 23, 4. 6, 83, 2. 12, 1, 11. 18, 4, 24. carman

14, 2, 23. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 8, 3. VS. 16, 19. 19, 83. 24, 2. 5. rohitarūpaṁ

paśavo bhūyiṣṭhāḥ KĀṬH. 24, 2. AIT. BR. 3, 34. pipīlikāḥ KAUŚ. 116.

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR.4, 14, 13. CHĀND. UP. 3, 1, 4. 6, 4, 1. CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9,

15. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 44. So wird auch ein Metrum genannt: rohitaṁ

vai nāmaitacchando yatpārucchepam AIT. BR. 5, 10. sarva- ŚAT. BR. 3,

5, 4, 23. — 2) m. a) «ein rothes Ross, Fuchs»: Agni’s NAIGH. 1, 15. ŚAT.

BR. 6, 6, 3, 4. rohitena tvagnirdevatāṁ gamayatu TS. 1, 6, 4, 3. ṚV. 1,

94, 1, 10. 134, 9. 2, 10, 2. 3, 6, 6. 4, 6, 9. 5, 61, 9. 8, 3, 22. PAÑCAV. BR.

14, 3, 12. Bildlich von «der Sonne» in den Liedern AV. 13, 1, 1. fgg.; vgl.

KAUŚ. 24. Daher auch Bez. «dieser Lieder» AV. 19, 23, 23. KAUŚ. 99. — b)

«eine best. Hirschart» AK. 2, 5, 10. H. 1294. an. 3, 289. MED. t. 146.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 26. UTTARAR. 91, 1 (117, 4). lebt am Wasser SUŚR.

1, 204, 10. — c) «ein best. Fisch, Cyprinus Rohita Ham.» AK. 1, 2, 3, 19.

TRIK. 1, 2, 16. H. 1346. H. an. MED. HĀR. 188. HALĀY. 3, 37. M. 5, 16.

YĀJÑ. 1, 177. adadadrohitānmatsyānbrāhmaṇebhyaḥ (NĪLAK.: rohitān

lohitabhūpradeśān padmarāgakhanimato vā matsyān deśaviśeṣān) MBH.

7, 2284 = 12, 984. R. 3, 76, 9. SUŚR. 1, 206, 5. 11. VĀGBH. 6, 68.

agādhajalasaṁcārī na garvaṁ yāti rohitaḥ Spr. 19. -matsya VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 54, 15. — d) «ein best. Baum, Andersonia Rohitaka Roxb.» H. an. MED.

SUŚR. 2, 342, 2. -vṛkṣa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 72. — e) «ein bes.

Perlenschmuck» (hārabheda) H. an. — f) «eine best. unvollkommene Form

eines Regenbogens» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 16. rohitendradhanūṁṣi M. 1,

38. MĀRK. P. 48, 35; vgl. 4) «a).» — g) N. pr. a) eines Sohnes des

Hariścandra AIT. BR. 7, 14. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 18, 8. HARIV. 756. BHĀG. P.

9, 7, 8. fgg. -gaṇāḥ PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 61, 3; vgl. rohitāśva.

— b) eines Manu HARIV. 469. — g) eines Sohnes des Kṛṣṇa HARIV. 9184.

rauhita ed. Calc. — d) eines Sohnes des Vapushmant, Fürsten von

Śālmala, MĀRK. P. 53, 27. — e) pl. Bez. einer Klasse von Gandharva R. 4,

41, 60. — z) pl. Bez. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu

MĀRK. P. 94, 23. — h) eines Flusses SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 237 (7). — 3)

f. rohiṇī a) proparox. «eine röthliche Kuh» (im Veda vielleicht auch «eine

röthliche Stute») ṚV. 8, 82, 13. 90, 13 (wo wir rohiṇyāḥ vermuthen). AV.

13,1,22. fg. ŚAT. BR.2,1,2,6.4,5,8,2. TS.6,1,6,2. KĀTY. ŚR. 13,4,15.

MBH.3,13260. 13,3669. 3705. 3716. 3720. 4919.\ «Kuh» überh. AK.2,9,67.

TRIK.2,9,16. H. 1265. an.3,221. MED. ṇ. 74. HALĀY.2,113. In der

Mythologie eine Tochter der Surabhi und Mutter des «Rindes» MBH. 1,

2631. fg. R. 3, 20, 28. fg. VĀYU-P. in VP. 150, N. 19. Mutter der

Kāmadhenu KĀLIKĀ-P. im ŚKDR. — b) proparox. im AV., sonst oxyt. N.

eines Nakshatra (und «des damit verbundenen lunaren Tages»); personif.

eine Tochter Daksha’s und die bevorzugte Gattin des Mondes, gaṇa

gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41. TRIK. 3, 3, 136. fg. H. 109. die «Rothe» benannt

nach der Farbe des Hauptsternes, des Aldebaran, Journ. of the Am. Or. S.

6, 329. AV. 19, 7, 2. ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2, 6. 7. 11, 1, 1, 7. TS. 2, 3, 5, 1. TBR.

1, 1, 2, 2. 10, 6. 2, 7, 9, 4. AIT. BR. 3, 33. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 1, 10. GṚHY. 2, 10,

3. WEBER, Nax. passim; MBH. 1, 5767. 2, 2019. 3, 2676. 16171. 4, 258.

9, 2015. fgg. 13, 3257. HARIV. 3284. 7734. 7955. 12454. 12483. R. 1, 1,

27. 2, 114, 3 (125, 3 GORR.). 3, 3, 11. 55, 22. 4, 19, 30. 5, 17, 36. 21, 9.

31, 5. 6, 72, 43. 59. ŚĀK. 181. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 9. 10. 10, 4. 11, 54. 12,

21. 15, 2. 24, 12. 28. 31. 36. 26, 12. 47, 6. 100, 1. 102, 1. 105, 1. MĀRK.

P. 33, 9. 58, 10. VET. in LA. (III) 13, 11. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 225. pl.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 19. 26, 11. 54, 123. 98, 6. In der Figur des Sternbildes

sieht der Inder einen «Karren» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 331. rohiṇyāḥ

śakaṭam Spr. 2367. SŪRYAS. 8, 13. rohiṇīśakaṭa Spr. 2649. VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 24,30. PAÑCAT. 50,20. KUVALAJ. 169,b. einen «Tempel» Journ. of the

Am. Or. S. 6, 329. einen «Fisch» (śakula) KĀLIDĀSA im

RĀTRILAGNANIRŪPAṆA nach ŚKDR. — c) «Blitz» MED. — d) «ein junges

Mädchen, das eben die Regeln bekommen hat», Spr. 282. GṚHYASAṁGR.

2, 28. «ein neunjähriges Mädchen» 29. — e) «Halsentzündung in

verschiedenen Formen» H. 467. H. an. MED. WISE 310. SUŚR. 1, 32, 1.

92, 13. 306, 14. 20. 2, 130, 14. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 79. — f) Bez.

verschiedener Pflanzen: «eine best. Gemüsepflanze» SUŚR. 1, 74, 8. 141,

14. 157, 16. 2, 11, 21. = kaṭurohiṇī H. an. = kaṭuṁbharā (?) MED. vulgo

kāṇṭāśirīṣa RATNAM. 162. = somavalka H. an. MED. = kāśmarī, harītakī

und mañjiṣṭhā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = kapilavarṇā vartulākārā virecane

praśastā harītakī RĀJAV. ebend. rohiṇītaru KATHĀS. 59, 37. Könnte in

dieser Bed. auch als f. von rohin gefasst werden; vgl. aśoka-, kaṭu-,

kaṭuka-, kanda-, pīta-, bhadra-, māṁsa-. — g) N. pr. a) einer Gattin

Vasudeva’s und Mütter Balarāma’s MBH. 1, 7308. HARIV. 1947. 1952.

3165. 3305. fgg. 3371. fgg. VP. 498. BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 44. fg. WEBER,

KṚṢṆAJ. 281. 283. fgg. 289. fgg. — b) einer Gattin Kṛṣṇa’s HARIV. 6701.

VP. 578. — g) der Gattin Mahādeva’s VP. 59. MĀRK. P. 52, 10. — d) einer

Tochter Hiraṇyakaśipu’s MBH. 3, 14194. — e) einer der 16 Vidyādevī H.

239. — h) adj. oxyt. «unter dem» Nakshatra Rohiṇī «geboren» P. 4, 3, 34,

Vārtt. 1. — 4) n. a) «eine best. unvollkommene Form eines Regenbogens»

AK. 1, 1, 2, 12. H. 179. an. 3, 289. MED. t. 146. HALĀY. 1, 57. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 47, 20; vgl. (2) «f)» — b) «Blut.» — c) «Saffran» MED. — Vgl.

karkandhu-, dhūmra-, lohita, rudhira und rauhita.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

rohita (ROHITĀŚVA). The son of Hariścandra. This son, who was born by

the blessing of Varuṇa, was wanted to be sacrificed by Varuṇa himself. In

connection with this Hariścandra had to bear much sorrow and misery.

(For details see under Hariścandra).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rohita rohita, akin to rudhira, h for dh,

I. adj., f. tā and iṇī.

1. Red.

2. Coloured, Man. 1, 38.

II. m.

1. Red, the colour.

2. A (kind of) deer, Utt. Rāmac. 117, 4.

3. A fish, Cyprinas rohita, Man. 5, 16.

III. f. iṇī, also rohiṇi rohiṇi.

1. The fourth lunar asterism, Vikr. 38, 12 (ṇī).

2. The mother of bala-rāma.

IV. f. iṇī.

1. Lightning.

2. A girl at the commencement of the menstruation, Pañc. iii. d. 213.

3. A woman stained with red pigments.

4. Inflammatory affection of the throat.

5. A cow.

6. Yellow myrobalan.

7. Bengal madder.

V. n.

1. Blood.

2. Safflower.

3. The rainbow appearing in a straight form.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rohita f. rohiṇī red, reddish. — m. a red horse, a kind of deer or fish, a

cert. form of rainbow, a man’s name. f. rohiṇī a red cow or mare; (also

rohiṇī) a cert. lunar mansion (personif. as a daughter of Dakṣa and the

favourite wife of the Moon), N. of sev. myth. women.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rohita 1. roh-ita, pp. of cs. of 2. ruh.

rohita 2. roh-ita, pp. [1. ruh = rudh] red, reddish; m. red or chestnut

horse (V.); kind of deer; kind of fish; kind of imperfect rainbow; N. of a

son of Hariscandra; n. a metre; kind of imperfect rainbow: -aśva, m. N. of

a son of Hariscandra.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rohita pu° ruha—iti . 1 sūrye medi° 2 varṇabhede ca 3 matsya bhede pu°

ujjvala° . 4 latābhede 5 mṛgyāñca strī ṅīp medi° .

rohita na° ruha itac . 1 rudhire 2 kuṅkume 3 ṛjau indracāpe medi° . 4

rohitakavṛkṣe pu° svanāmakhyāte 5 matsyabhede puṁstrī° striyāṁ ṅīṣ

medi° . raktodaro raktamukho raktākṣo raktapakṣatiḥ . kṛśapakṣo

jhasaśreṣṭho rohitaḥ kathito budhaiḥ . rohitaḥ sarvamatsyānāṁ varo

vṛṣyo’rditārtijit . kaṣāyānurasaḥ svādurvātaghno nātipitta° kṛt .

ūrdhvajatrugatān rogān hanyādrohitamuṇḍakam bhāvapra° . 6 raktavarṇe

pu° 7 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . striyāṁ ṅīṣ tasya natve ṇatvam . 8 agnivāhane

mṛgabhede nidhaṇṭuḥ . svārthe ka . rohitaka uktārthe 9 vṛkṣabhede

amaraḥ .

रौचनिक — raucanika Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899raucanika mf («ī») n. (fr. «rocanā») coloured with or like (the pigment)

Rocanā, yellowish

raucanika n. the tartar of the teeth

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

raucanika a. (kī f.) Yellowish. —kaṁ The tartar of the teeth.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

raucanika adj. (f. ī) «mit» Rocanā «gefärbt, die Farbe der» R. «habend»

P.4, 2, 2. ruc KIR. 5, 45.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

raucanika raucanika, i. e. rocanā + ika, adj., f. kī, Yellowish, Kir. 5, 45 (cf.

also Pāṇ. 4, 2, 2 Sch.).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

raucanika raucan-ika, a. (ī) having the colour of rocanā, yellowish.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

raucanika tri° rocanayā raktaḥ aṇa . rocanayā rakte .

वर्णः — varṇaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

varṇaḥ [varṇ-ac]

(1) A colour, hue; aṁtaḥśuddhastvamapi bhavitā varṇamātreṇa

kṛṣṇaḥ Me. 49.

(2) A paint, dye, paintcolour; see varṇ

(1).

(3) Colour, complexion, beauty; tvayyādātuṁ jalamavanate śārṅgiṇo

varṇacaure Me. 46; R. 8. 42.

(5) A class of men, tribe, caste (especially applied to the four principal

castes, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya, and śūdra); varṇānāmānupūrvyeṇa

Vārt; na kaścidvarṇānāmapathamapakṛṣṭo’pi bhajate S. 5. 10; R. 5. 19.

(6) A class, race, tribe, kind, species; as in savarṇaṁ akṣaraṁ.

(7)

(a) A letter, character, sound; na me varṇavicārakṣamā dṛṣṭiḥ V.

5.

(b) A word, syllable; S. D. 9.

(8) Fame, glory, celebrity, renown; rājā prajāraṁjanalabdhavarṇaḥ R.

6. 21.

(9) A good quality, merit, virtue. (10) Praise.

(11) Dress, decoration.

(12) Outward appearance. form, figure.

(13) A cloak, mantle.

(14) A covering, lid.

(15) The order or arrangement of a subject in a song (gītakrama);

upāttavarṇe carite pinākinaḥ Ku. 5. 56 ‘celebrated in song, made the

subject of a song.’

(16) The housings of an elephant.

(17) A quality, property.

(18) A religious observance.

(19) An unknown quantity. (20) The number ‘one.’

(21) Application of perfumed unguents to the body.

(22) Gold.

(23) A musical mode. —rṇaṁ

(1) Saffron.

(2) A coloured unguent or perfume.

— Comp.

—aṁkā a pen.

—adhipaḥ a planet presiding over a caste or class.

—apasadaḥ an outcast.

—apeta a. devoid of any caste, outcast, degraded.

—arhaḥ a kind of bean.

—āgamaḥ the addition of a letter; bhavedvarṇāgamāddhaṁsaḥ Sk.

—ātman m. a word.

—āśramāḥ the (four) castes and stages of life; R. 5. 19.

—udakaṁ coloured water; R. 16. 70.

—kūpikā an ink-stand.

—kramaḥ 1. the order of castes or colours. —2. alphabetical order

or arrangement.

—gata a. 1. coloured. —2. algebraical.

—cārakaḥ a painter.

—jyeṣṭhaḥ a Brāhmaṇa.

—tūliḥ, —tūlikā, —tūlī f. a pencil, paint-brush.

—da a. colouring. (

—daṁ) a kind of fragrant yellow wood.

—dātrī turmeric.

—dūtaḥ a letter.

—dūṣaka a. violating the distinctions of castes.

—dharmaḥ the peculiar duties of a caste.

—pātaḥ the omission of a letter.

—pātraṁ a paint-box.

—puṣpaṁ the flower of the globe-amaranth.

—puṣpakaḥ the globe-amaranth.

—prakarṣaḥ excellence of colour.

—prasādanaṁ aloe-wood.

—mātṛ f. a pen, pencil.

—mātṛkā N. of Sarasvatī.

—mālā, —rāśiḥ the alphabet.

—re (le) khā chalk.

—vartiḥ, —vartikā f. a paint-brush, pencil.

—vādin m. a panegyrist.

—viparyayaḥ the substitution or change of letters; (bhavet) siṁho

varṇaviparyayāt Sk.

—vilāsinī turmeric.

—viloḍakaḥ 1. a house-breaker. —2 a plagiarist (lit. word-stealer).

—vṛttaṁ a metre regulated by the number of syllables it contains

(opp. mātrāvṛtta). —vyavasthitiḥ f. the institution of caste.

—śikṣā instruction in letters.

—śreṣṭhaḥ a Brāhmaṇa.

—saṁyogaḥ marriage between persons of the same caste.

—saṁsargaḥ confusion of castes.

—saṁkaraḥ 1. confusion of castes through intermarriage. —2.

mixture or blending of colours; citreṣu varṇasaṁkaraḥ K. (where both

senses are intended); Śi. 14. 37.

—saṁghātaḥ, —samāmnāyaḥ the alphabet.

—sthānaṁ an organ of utterance.

—hīna a. outcast.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

varṇaḥ puṁ, (vriyate iti . vṛ + kṝvṛjṝṣidrugupanyanisvapibhyo nit . uṇā° 3 .

10 . iti naḥ . sa ca nit .) jātiḥ . sā ca brāhmaṇaḥ kṣattriyo vaiśyaḥ

śūdraśca . eṣāmutpattyādiryathā . yadā bhagavān puruṣarūpeṇa sṛṣṭiṁ

kṛtavān tadāsya śarīrāt catvāro varṇā utpannāḥ . mukhato brāhmaṇāḥ

bāhutaḥ kṣattriyāḥ ūruto vaiśyāḥ pādataḥ śūdrā jātāḥ . eteṣāṁ varṇānāṁ

dharmāḥ śāstreṣu nirūpitāḥ santi . tatra brāhmaṇadharmā ucyante .

adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ dānañceti . jīvikāstrayaḥ adhyāpanaṁ yājanaṁ

pratigrahaśceti . 1 . kṣattriyasya trayo dharmāḥ . adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ

dānañca . prajānāṁ rakṣaṇaṁ jīvikā . 2 . vaiśyasya trayo dharmāḥ .

adhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ dānañca . catasro jīvikāḥ . kṛṣiḥ gorakṣaṇaṁ

bāṇijyaṁ kuśīdañceti . 3 . śūdrasya tu brahmakṣattraviśāṁ śuśrūṣā

dharmo jīvikā ca . 4 . brāhmaṇā āśramacatuṣṭayavanto bhavanti .

brahmacārī gṛhasthaḥ vānaprasthaḥ sannyāsī ca . tatra

upanayanānantaraṁ niyamaṁ kṛtvā yo guroḥ sannidhau sthitvā

sāṅgavedādhyayanaṁ karoti sa brahmacārītyucyate . 1 .

sāṅgavedādhyayanaṁ samāpya yo dāraparigrahaṁ kṛtvā

svadharmācaraṇaṁ karoti sa gṛhastha ucyate . 2 . puttramutpādya yo

vanavāsaṁ kṛtvā akṛṣṭapacyaphalādi bhakṣayitvā īśvarārādhanaṁ karoti

sa vānaprastha ucyate . 3 . yaḥ sarvaṁ gṛhādikaṁ tyaktvā muṇḍitamuṇḍo

gairikakaupīnācchādanaṁ daṇḍaṁ kamaṇḍaluñca vibhrat

bhikṣāvṛttirnirjane tīrthe vā sthitvā kevalamīśvarārādhanaṁ karoti sa

sannyāsītyucyate .. 4 .. kṣattriyavaiśyayostu prathamāśramatrayaṁ

vihitam . śūdrasyaika eva gṛhāśramaḥ . īśvarārādhanantu sarveṣāṁ

varṇānāmāśramāṇāñca sādhāraṇo dharmaḥ . tanmadhye yastu

viṣṇūpāsakaḥ sa vaiṣṇava ucyate . śivopāsakaḥ śaivaḥ .

durgādiśaktyupāsakaḥ śāktaḥ . sūryopāsakaḥ sauraḥ . gaṇeśopāsako

gāṇapatya ucyate . iti purāṇārthaprakāśaḥ .. * .. api ca . brahmovāca .

sargādikṛddhariścaiva pūjyaḥ svāyambhuvādibhiḥ .

viprādyaiḥ svena dharmeṇa taddharmaṁ vyāsa vai śṛṇu ..

yajanaṁ yājanaṁ dānaṁ brāhmaṇasya pratigrahaḥ .

adhyāpanaṁ cādhyayanaṁ ṣaṭ karmāṇi dvijottame ..

dānamadhyayanaṁ yajño dharmaḥ kṣattriyavaiśyayoḥ .

daṇḍastathā kṣattriyasya kṛṣirvaiśyasya śasyate ..

śuśrūṣaiva dvijātīnāṁ śūdrāṇāṁ dharmasādhanam .

kārukarmastathājīvaḥ pākayajño’pi dharmataḥ ..

bhikṣācaryātha śuśrūṣā guroḥ svādhyāya eva ca .

sandhyākarmāgnikāryañca dharmo’yaṁ brahmacāriṇaḥ ..

sarveṣāmāśramāṇāntu dbaividhyantu caturvidham .

brahmacāryupakurvāṇo naiṣṭiko brahmatatparaḥ ..

yo’dhītya vidhivadvedān gṛhasthāśramamāvrajet .

upakurvāṇako jñeyo naiṣṭiko maraṇāntikaḥ ..

agnayo’tithiśuśrūṣā yajño dānaṁ surārcanam .

gṛhasthasya samāsena dharmo’yaṁ dbijasattamāḥ ..

udāsīnaḥ sādhakaśca gṛhastho dvividho bhavet .

kuṭumbabharaṇe yuktaḥ sādhako’sau gṛhī bhavet ..

ṛṇāni trīṇyupākṛtya tyaktvā bhāryādhanādikam .

ekākī yastu vicaret udāsīnaḥ sa maukṣikaḥ ..

bhūmau mūlaphalāśitvaṁ svādhyāyastapa eva ca .

saṁvibhāgo yathānyāyaṁ dharmo’yaṁ vanavāsinaḥ ..

tapastapyati yo’raṇye yajeddevān juhoti ca .

svādhyāye caiva nirato vanasthastāpaso mataḥ ..

tapasākarṣito’tyarthaṁ yastu dhyānaparo bhavet .

sannyāsīha sa vijñeyo vānaprasthāśrame sthitaḥ ..

yogābhyāsarato nityamārurukṣurjitendriyaḥ .

jñānāya vartate bhikṣuḥ procyate pārameṣṭhikaḥ ..

yastvātmaratireva syānnityatṛpto mahāmuniḥ .

samyak ca damasampannaḥ sa yogī bhikṣurucyate ..

bhaikṣaṁ śrutañca maunitvaṁ tapodhyāne viśeṣataḥ .

samyak ca jñānaṣairāgyaṁ dharmo’yaṁ bhikṣuke mataḥ ..

jñānasannyāsinaḥ kecit vedasannyāsino’pare .

dharmasannyāsinaḥ kecittrividhaḥ pārameṣṭhikaḥ ..

yogī ca trividhye jñeyo bhautiko mokṣa eva ca .

tṛtīyo’ntyāśramī prokto yogamūrtisamāśritaḥ ..

prayamā bhāvanā pūrbe mokṣe tvakṣarabhāvanā .

tṛtīye cāntimā proktā bhāvanā pārameśvarī ..

dharmāt saṁjāyate mokṣaḥ arthāt kāmo’bhijāyate .

pravṛttañca nivṛttañca dvividhaṁ karma vaidikam ..

jñānapūrbaṁ nivṛttaṁ syāt pravṛttañcāgnidevakṛt .

kṣamā damo dayā dānamalobho’bhyāsa eva ca ..

ārjavañcānasūyā ca tīrthānusaraṇaṁ tathā .

satyaṁ santoṣa āstikyaṁ tathā cendriyanigrahaḥ ..

devatābhyarcanaṁ pūjā brāhmaṇānāṁ viśeṣataḥ .

ahiṁsā priyavāditvamapaiśunyamarūkṣatā ..

eta āśramikā dharmāścāturvarṇyaṁ bravīmyataḥ .

prājāpatyaṁ brāhmaṇānāṁ smṛtaṁ sthānaṁ kriyāvatām ..

sthānamaindraṁ kṣattriyāṇāṁ saṁgrāmeṣvapalāyinām .

vaiśyānāṁ mārutaṁ sthānaṁ svadharmamanuvartatām .

gāndharva śūdrajātīnāṁ paricāre ca vartatām .. iti gāruḍe 49

adhyāyaḥ .. * .. anyacca .

brāhmaṇasya tu vakṣyāmi śṛṇu karma vasundhare ! .

yāni karmāṇi kurvīta mama bhaktiparāyaṇaḥ ..

ṣaṭkarmanirato bhūtvā ahaṅkāravivarjitaḥ .

lābhālābhaṁ parityajya bhikṣāhāro jitendriyaḥ ..

mama karmasamāyuktaḥ paiśunyena vivajjitaḥ .

śāstrānusārī madhyamtho na vṛddhaḥ śiśucetanaḥ ..

etadavai brāhmaṇaḥ karma ekacitto jitendriyaḥ .

iṣṭāpūrtañca kurute sa māmeti vasundhare ! ..

kṣattriyāṇāṁ pravakṣyāmi mama karmasu niṣṭhatām .

yāni karmāṇi kurvanti kṣattriyā madhyasaṁsthitāḥ ..

dānaśūraśca karmajño yajñeṣu kuśalaḥ śuciḥ .

mama karmasu medhāvī ahaṅkāravivarjitaḥ ..

alpabhāṣī guṇajñaśca nityaṁ bhāgavatapriyaḥ .

guruvidyānasūyātmā guhyakarmeṣvatandritaḥ ..

abhyutthānādikuśalaḥ paiśunyena vivarjitaḥ .

etairguṇaiḥ samāyukto yo māṁ vrajati kṣattriyaḥ ..

bhajate mama yo nityaṁ mama lokāya gacchati .

vaiśyānāntu pravakṣyāmi mama karmasu niṣṭhatām ..

yāni karmāṇi kurute mama bhaktipathe sthitaḥ .

etairguṇaiḥ svadharmeṇa lābhālābhavivarjitaḥ ..

ṛtukālābhigāmī ca śāntātmā mohavarjitaḥ .

śucirdakṣo nirāhāro mama karmarataḥ sadā ..

gurusaṁpūjako nityaṁ yukto bhaktyānuvatsalaḥ .

vaiśyastvevantu saṁyukto yo nu karmāṇi kārayet .

tasyāhaṁ na praṇaśyāmi sa ca me na praṇaśyati ..

atha śūdrasya vakṣyāmi karmāṇi śṛṇu mādhavi ! .

yāni karmāṇi kṛtvā tu śūdro mahyaṁ vyavasthitaḥ ..

dampatī mama bhaktau yau mama karmaparāyaṇau .

ubhau bhāgavatau bhaktau matparau karmaniṣṭhitau ..

deśakālau ca jānāti rajasā tamasojjhitaḥ nirahaṅkārayuktātmā

ātitheyo vinītavān ..

śraddadhāno’tipūtātmā lobhamohavivarjitaḥ .

namaskārapriyo nityaṁ mama cintāvyavasthitaḥ ..

śūdrakarmāṇi me devi ! ya evaṁ sa samācaret .

tyaktvā ṛṣisahasrāṇi śūdrameva bhajāmyaham .. iti vārāhe

vidhikarmotpattināmādhyāyaḥ .. aparañca . sukeśiruvāca .

viprāṇāṁ cāturāśramyaṁ vistarānme tapodhanāḥ ācakṣadhvaṁ na se

tṛptiḥ śṛṇvataḥ pratividyate ..

ṛṣaya ūcuḥ .

kṛtopanayanaḥ samyak brahmacārī gurau vasan .

tatra dharmo’sya yastañca kathyamānaṁ niśāmaya ..

svādhyāyo’rtho’gniśuśrūṣā snānaṁ bhikṣāṭanantathā .

gurau nivedya taccādyamanujñātena nityaśaḥ ..

dharmārthakāmamokṣāṇāṁ samyak pratyupapādanam .

tenāhūtaḥ paṭheccaiva tatparībhūya nityaśaḥ ..

avāpya sakalān vedān śāstraṁ prāpya gurormukhāt .

tato varānmudā dadyādgurave dakṣiṇāntataḥ ..

gārhasthāśramakāmastu gārhasthyāśramamāśrayet .

vānaprasthāśramañcāpi caturthaṁ svecchayā vaset ..

tathaiva ca gurorgehe dvijo niṣṭhāmavāpnuyāt .

gurorabhāve tatputtraṁ tadbadeva niṣevayet ..

evaṁ jayati mṛtyuṁ sa dvijaḥ śālaṅkaṭaṅkaṭa ! .

upāvṛtastatastasmāt gṛhasthāśramakāmyayā .

asamānakulāṁ kanyāmudvaheta niśācara ! ..

svakarmaṇā dhanaṁ labdhvā pitṛdevātithīnapi .

samyak saṁprīṇayedbhaktyā sadācārarato dvijaḥ ..

gārhasthyaṁ brahmacaryañca vānaprasthaṁ trayāśramāḥ .

kṣattriyasyāpi gaditā ya ācārā dbijasya hi ..

vaikhānasatvaṁ gārhasthyamāśramadbitayaṁ viśaḥ .

gārhasthyamuttamaṁ tvekaṁ śūdrasya kṣaṇadācara ! ..

svāni varṇāśramoktāni karmāṇīha na hāpayet yo hāpayati tasyāsau

parikupyati bhāskariḥ .. iti vāmanapurāṇe 14 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. punaśca .

śrīurva uvāca .

brāhmaṇakṣattriyaviśāṁ śūdrāṇāñca yathākramam .

tvamekāgramanā bhūtvā śṛṇu dharmān mayoditān ..

dānaṁ dadyādyajeddevān yajñaiḥ svādhyāyatatparaḥ .

nityodakī bhavedvipraḥ kuryāccāgniparigraham ..

vṛttyarthaṁ yājayeccānyānanyānadhyāpayettathā .

kuryāt pratigrahādānaṁ śuktārthānnyāyato dbijaḥ .. śuklārthāt śuklaḥ

śuddho nyāyopārjito’rtho yasya tasmāt . iti taṭṭīkā . sarvalokahitaṁ

kuryānnāhitaṁ kasyaciddvijaḥ . maitrī samastasattveṣu

brāhmaṇasyottamaṁ dhanam .. grāvṇi ratne ca pārakye

samabuddhirbhavet dbijaḥ . ṛtāvabhigamaḥ patnyāṁ śasyate cāsya

pārthiva ! .. 1 dānāni dadyādicchāto dvijebhyaḥ kṣattriyo’pi hi . yajecca

vividhairyajñairadhīyīta ca pārthiva .. śastrājīvo mahīrakṣāpravarā tasya

jīvikā . tasyāpi prathame kalpe pṛthivīparipālanam .. dharitrīpālanenaiva

kṛtakṛtyo narādhipaḥ . bhavanti nṛpateraṁśā yato yajñādikarmaṇām ..

duṣṭānāṁ śāsabādrājā śiṣṭānāṁ paripālanāt . prāpnotyabhimatāllokān

varṇasaṁskārako nṛpaḥ .. 2 .. pāśupālyaṁ bāṇijyañca kṛṣiñca

manujeśvara . vaiśyāya jīvikāṁ brahmā dadau lokapitāmahaḥ ..

tasyāpyadhyayanaṁ yajño dānadharmaśca śasyate .

nityanaimittikādīnāmanuṣṭhānañca karmaṇām .. 3 .. dbijātisaṁśrayaṁ

karma tādarthyaṁ tena poṣaṇam . krayavikrayajairvāpi dhanaiḥ

kārūdbhavena vā .. dānañca dadyāt śūdro’pi pākayajñairyajedapi .

pitrādikañca sarvaṁ vai śūdraḥ kurvīta tena ca .. 4 ..

bhṛtyādibharaṇārthāya sarveṣāñca parigrahaḥ . ṛtukālābhigamanaṁ

svadāreṣu mahīpate .. dayā samastabhūteṣu titikṣā nābhimānitā . satyaṁ

śaucamanāyāso maṅgalaṁ priyavāditā .. maitryaspṛhā tathā

tadvadakārpaṇyaṁ nareśvara . anasūyā ca sāmānyā varṇānāṁ kathitā

guṇāḥ .. āśramāṇāñca sarveṣāmete sāmānyalakṣaṇāḥ .

guṇāstathāpaddharmāṁśca viprādīnāmimān śṛṇu .. kṣāttraṁ karma

dvijasyoktaṁ vai śyakarma tathāpadi . rājanyasya ca vaiśyoktaṁ śaudraṁ

karma na caitayoḥ .. sāmarthye sati tattyājyamubhābhyāmapi pārthiva .

tadevāpadi kartavyaṁ na kuryāt karma saṅkaram .. ityete kathitā rājan

varṇadharmā mayā tava . dharmamāśramiṇāṁ samyagbruvato me

niśāmaya .. * .. śrīurva uvāca . bālaḥ kṛtopanayano vedāharaṇatatparaḥ .

gurugehe vasedbhūpa brahmacārī samāhitaḥ .. śaucācāravatā tatra

kāryaṁ śuśrūṣaṇaṁ guroḥ . vratāni caratā grāhyā vedāśca kṛtabuddhinā

.. ubhe sandhye raviṁ bhūpa tathaivāgniṁ samāhitaḥ . upatiṣṭhettathā

kuryādgurorapyabhivādanam .. sthite tiṣṭhedvrajedyāti nīcairāsīta cāsati .

śiṣyo gurau nṛpaśreṣṭha pratikūlaṁ na saṁbhajet .. tenaivoktaḥ

paṭhedbedaṁ nānyacittaḥ purasthitaḥ . anujñātaśca

bhikṣānnamaśnīyādguruṇā tataḥ .. avagāhedapaḥ

pūrbamācāryeṇāvagāhitāḥ . samijjalādikaṁ cāsya kalyaṁ

kalyamupānayet .. gṛhītagrāhyavedaśca tato’nujñāmavāpya vai .

gārhasthyamāvaset prājño niṣpannaguruniṣkṛtiḥ .. 1 .. vidhinā

cāptadārastu dhanaṁ prāpya svakarmaṇā . gṛhasthakāryamakhilaṁ

kuryādbhūpāla ! śaktitaḥ .. nirvāpeṇa pitṝnarcedyajñairdevāṁstathātithīn .

annairmunīṁśca svādhyāyairapatyena prajāpatim .. balikarmaṇā ca

bhūtāni vātsalyenākhilaṁ jagat . prāpnoti lokān puruṣo

nijakarmasamarjitān .. bhikṣābhujaśca ye kecit parivrāṭ brahmacāriṇaḥ .

te’pyatraiva pratiṣṭhante gārhasthyaṁ tena vai param ..

vedāharaṇakāryeṇa tīrthasnānāya ca prabho ! . aṭanti vasudhāṁ viprāḥ

pṛthivīdarśanāya ca .. aniketā hyanāhārā yatra sāyaṁ gṛhāstu ye . teṣāṁ

gṛhasthaḥ sarveṣāṁ pratiṣṭhā yonireva ca .. teṣāṁ svāgatadānādi

vaktavyaṁ madhuraṁ vacaḥ . gṛhāgatānāṁ dadyācca

śayanāsanabhojanam .. atithiryasya bhagnāśo gṛhātpratinivartate . sa

dattvā duṣkṛtaṁ tasmai puṇyamādāya gacchati .. avajñānamahaṅkāro

dambhaścaiva gṛhe sataḥ . paritāpopaghātau ca pāruṣyañca na śasyate ..

yastu samyak karotyevaṁ gṛhasthaḥ paramaṁ vidhim .

sarvabandhavinirmukto lokānāpnotyanuttamān .. vayaḥpariṇatau rājan

kṛtakṛtyo gṛhāśramī . puttreṣa bhāryāṁ nikṣipya vanaṁ gacchet sahaiva

vā .. 2 .. parṇamūlaphalāhāraḥ keśaśmaśrujaṭādharaḥ . bhūmīśāyī

mavettatra muniḥ sarvātithirnṛpa .. carmakāśakuśaiḥ kuryāt

paridhānottarīyake . tadvattriṣavaṇaṁ snānaṁ śastamasya nareśvara ..

devatābhyarcanaṁ homaḥ sarvābhyāgatapūjanam . bhikṣā

balipradānañca śastamasya nareśvara .. vanyasnehena

gātrāṇāmabhyaṅgaścāsya śasyate . tapasyataśca rājendra

śītoṣṇādisahiṣṇutā .. yastvetāṁ niyataścaryāṁ vānaprasthaścarenmuniḥ .

sa dahatyagnivaddoṣān jayellokāṁśca śāśvatān .. 3 .. caturthaścāśramo

bhikṣoḥ procyate yo manīṣibhiḥ . tasya svarūpaṁ gadato mama śrotuṁ

nṛpārhasi .. puttradravyakalatreṣu tyaktasneho narādhipa .

caturthamāśramasthānaṁ gacchennirdhūtamatsaraḥ .

traivarṇikāṁstyajet sarvānārambhānavanīpate . mitrādiṣu samo maitraḥ

samasteṣveva jantuṣu .. jarāyujāṇḍajādīnāṁ vāṅmanaḥkarmabhiḥ kvacit .

yuktaḥ kurvīta na drohaṁ sarvasaṅgāṁśca varjayet ..

ekarātrasthitirgrāme pañcarātrasthitiḥ pure . tathā tiṣṭhedyathā

prītirdbeṣo vā nāsya jāyate .. prāṇayātrānimittañca vyaṅgāre

bhuktavajjane . kāle praśastavarṇānāṁ bhikṣārthe paryaṭedgṛhān ..

kāmaḥ krodhastathā darpamohalobhādayaśca ye . tāṁstu doṣān

parityajya parivrāṭ nirmamo bhavet .. abhayaṁ sarvasattvebhyo dattvā

yaścarate muniḥ . na tasya sarvabhūtebhyo bhayamutpadyate kvacit ..

kṛtvāgnihotraṁ svaśarīrasaṁsthaṁ śārīramagniñca mukhe juhoti .

viprastu bhekṣopagaterhavirbhiścitāgnināṁ sa vrajatisma lokān ..

citāgnīnāṁ agnicitāmityarthaḥ . citāgninā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā ..

mokṣāśramaṁ yaścarate yathoktaṁ śuciḥ susaṅkalpitabuddhiyuktaḥ .

anindhanaṁ jyotiriva praśāntaṁ sa brahmalokaṁ śrayati dvijātiḥ .. 4 ..

iti viṣṇupurāṇe 3 aṁśe 8 . 9 adhyāyau .. * .. prakārāntareṇa

teṣāmādisṛṣṭiryathā —

tatastejomayaṁ divyaṁ padmaṁ sṛṣṭaṁ svayambhuvā .

tasmāt padmāt samabhavadbrahmā vedamayo vidhiḥ ..

prajāvisargaṁ vividhaṁ mānaso manasāsṛjat .

asṛjadbrāhmaṇāneva pūrbaṁ brahmā prajāpatiḥ ..

ātmatejobhinirvṛttān bhāskarāgnisamaprabhān .

tataḥ satyañca dharmañca tapo brahma ca śāśvatam ..

ācā ñcaiva śaucañca svargāya vidadhe vibhuḥ .

devadānavagandharvā daityāsuramahoragāḥ ..

yakṣarākṣasanāgāśca piśācā manujāstathā .

brāhmaṇāḥ kṣattriyā vaiśyāḥ śūdrāśca nṛpasattama ! ..

ye cānyabhūtasaṁghānāṁ varṇāstāṁśca vinirmame .

brāhmaṇānāṁ sito varṇaḥ kṣattriyāṇāñca lohitaḥ ..

vaiśyasya pītako varṇaḥ śūdrāṇāmasitastathā ..

māndhātovāca .

cāturvarṇasya varṇena yadi varṇo vibhajyate .

sarveṣāṁ khalu varṇānāṁ dṛśyate varṇasaṅkaraḥ ..

kāmaḥ krodho bhayaṁ lobhaḥ śokaścintā kṣudhā śramaḥ .

sarveṣāṁ na prabhavati kasmādvarṇo vibhajyate ..

svedamūtrapurīṣāṇi śleṣmāpittaṁ saśoṇitam .

tanuḥ kṣarati sarveṣāṁ kasmāvarṇo vibhajyate ..

jaṅgamānāmasaṁ khyeyāḥ sthāvarāṇāñca jātayaḥ .

teṣāṁ vividhavarṇānāṁ kuto varṇaviniścayaḥ ..

nārada uvāca .

na viśeṣo’sti varṇānāṁ sarvaṁ brahmamayaṁ jagat .

brahmaṇā pūrbasṛṣṭaṁ hṛi karmabhirvarṇatāṁ gatam ..

kāmabhogapriyāstīkṣṇāḥ krodhanāḥ priyasāhasāḥ .

tyaktasvadharmā raktāṅgāste dvijāḥ kṣattratāṁ gatāḥ ..

gobhyo vṛttiṁ samāsthāya pītāḥ kṛṣyanujīvinaḥ .

svadharmānnānutiṣṭhanti te dbijā vaiśyatāṁ gatāḥ ..

hiṁsānṛtapriyā lubdhāḥ sarvakarmopajīvinaḥ .

kṛṣṇāḥ śaucaparibhraṣṭāste dbijāḥ śūdratāṁ gatāḥ ..

ityetaiḥ karmabhirvyastā dbijā varṇāntaraṁ gatāḥ .

ityete caturo varṇā yeṣāṁ brāhmī sarasvatī ..

vihitā brahmaṇā pūrbaṁ lobhādajñānatāṁ gatāḥ .

brāhmaṇā dharmatantrasthāstatasteṣāṁ na naśyati ..

brahma dhārayatāṁ nityaṁ vratāni niyamāṁstathā .

brahma caiva paraṁ sṛṣṭaṁ yena jānanti tadvidaḥ ..

ṛṣibhiḥ svena tapasā sṛjyante cāpare paraiḥ .

ādidevasamudbhū tā brahmamūlākṣatāvyayāḥ .

sā sṛṣṭirmānasī nāma dharmatantraparāyaṇāḥ ..

māndhātovāca .

brāhmaṇaḥ kena bhavati kṣattriyo vā dvijottama ! .

vaiśyaḥ śūdraśca devarṣe tadbrūhi vadatāṁvara ..

nārada uvāca .

jātakarmādibhiryastu taṁskāraiḥ saṁskṛtaḥ śuciḥ .

vedādhyayanasampannaḥ ṣaṭsu karmasvavasthitaḥ ..

śaucācāraparo nityaṁ vighasāśī gurupriyaḥ .

nityavratī satyarataḥ sa vai brāhmaṇa ucyate ..

satyaṁ dānamatho’droha ānṛśaṁsyaṁ kṛpā ghṛṇā .

tapaśca dṛśyate yatra sa brāhmaṇa iti smṛtaḥ ..

kṣattrajaṁ sevate karma vedādhyayanasaṁyutaḥ .

dānādānavahiryastu sa vai kṣattriya ucyate ..

viśatyāśu paśubhyaśca kṛṣyādānaruciḥ śuciḥ .

vedādhyayanasampannaḥ sa vaiśya iti saṁjñitaḥ ..

sarvabhakṣmaratirnityaṁ sarvakarmakaro’śuciḥ .

tyaktavedastvanācāraḥ sa vai śūdra iti smṛtaḥ ..

śūdre caiva bhavellakṣaṁ dvije caiva na vidyate .

na vai śūdro bhavecchūdro brāhmaṇo na ca brāhmaṇaḥ māndhātovāca

.

ke dharmāḥ sarvavarṇānāṁ cāturvarṇasya ke pṛthak .

cāturvarṇyāśramāṇāñca rājadharmāśca ke matāḥ ..

nārada uvāca .

akrodhaḥ satyavacanaṁ saṁvibhāgaḥ kṣamā tathā .

prajanaḥ sveṣu dāreṣu śaucamadroha eva ca ..

ārjavaṁ bhṛtyabharaṇaṁ na vai te sārvavarṇikāḥ .

brāhmaṇasya tu yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi kevalam ..

damameva mahārāja dharmamāhuḥ purātanam .

svādhyāyābhyasanañcaiva tatra karma samāpyate ..

taṁ cedvittamupāgacchedvattamānaṁ svakarmaṇi .

akurvāṇaṁ vikarmāṇi śrāntaṁ prajñānatarpitam ..

kurvītopetya santānamatha dadyādyajeta ca .

saṁvibhajyāpi bhoktavyaṁ dhanaṁ sadbhiritīṣyate ..

pariniṣṭhitakāryastu svādhyāyenaiva brāhmaṇaḥ .

kuryādanyanna vā kuryānmaitro brāhmaṇa ucyate .. * ..

kṣattriyasyāpi yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi pārthiva .

dadyādrājā na yāceta yajeta na ca yājayet ..

nādhyāpayedadhīyīta prajāśca paripālayet .

nityodyukto dasyuvadhe raṇe kuryāt parākramam ..

ye tu kratubhirījānāḥ śrutavantaśca pārthivāḥ .

ye tu yuddhe vijetāraste tu lokajito nṛpāḥ ..

avikṣataśarīro hi saṁgarādyo nivartate .

kṣattriyasya tu tat karma nobhayatra yaśaḥpradam ..

kṣattriyāṇāmayaṁ dharmo nirṇīto munibhiḥ paraḥ .

nāsya kṛtyatamaṁ kiñcidrājño dasyuvinigrahāt ..

dānamadhyayanaṁ yajño rājñāṁ kṣemo’bhidhīyate .

tasmādrājñā mahārāja yoddhavyaṁ dharmaśīlinā ..

prajāḥ sveṣu ca dharmeṣu sthāpayeta mahīpatiḥ .

dharmyāṇyeva hi karmāṇi kārayet satataṁ prajāḥ ..

paramāṁ siddhimāpnoti nṛpatiḥ paripālanāt .

kuryādanyanna vā kuryānmaitro rājanya ucyate .. * ..

vaiśyasya ca pravakṣyāmi yo dharmo vedasammataḥ ..

dānamadhyayanaṁ śaucaṁ yajñaśca dhanasañcayaḥ .

pālayecca paśūn vaiśyaḥ pitṛvaddharmamarjayan ..

vikarma tadbhavedanyat karma yat sa samācaret .

rakṣayā sa hi teṣāṁ vai mahat sukhamavāpnuyāt ..

prajāpatirhi vaiśyāya sṛṣṭvā paridade prajāḥ .

brāhmaṇebhyaśca rājñe ca sarvāḥ paridade prajāḥ ..

tasya vṛttiṁ pravakṣyāmi yacca tasyopajīvanam .

ṣaṇṇāmekāṁ pibeddhenuṁ śatācca mithuna bhavet ..

labdhācca saptamaṁ bhāgaṁ tathā śṛṅgaikalakṣure .

śasyānāṁ sarvabījāni eṣā sāṁvatsarī bhṛtiḥ ..

na ca vaiśyasya kāmaḥ syānna rakṣeyaṁ paśūniti .

vaiśye rakṣati nānyena rakṣitavyāḥ kathañcana .. * ..

śūdrasyāpi hi yo dharmastaṁ te vakṣyāmi bhūpate .

prajāpatirhi varṇānāṁ dāsaṁ śūdramakalpayat ..

tasmācchūdrasya varṇānāṁ paricaryā vidhīyate .

taṣāṁ śuśrūṣaṇañcaiva mahat sukhamavāpnuyāt ..

śūdra etān paricaret trīn varṇānanupūrvaśaḥ .

mañcayāṁśca na kurvīta yātu śūdraḥ kathañcana ..

pāpīyān hi dhanaṁ labdhvā vaśe kuryādgarīyasaḥ .

gājñā vā mamanujñātaḥ kāmaṁ kurvīta dhārmikaḥ ..

tasya vattiṁ pravakṣyāmi yacca tasyopajīvanam .

avaśyaṁ bharaṇīyo hi varṇānāṁ śūdra ucyate ..

chattraṁ veṣṭanamauśīramupānadvyajanāni ca .

yātayāmāni deyāni śūdrāya paricāriṇe ..

adhāryāṇi viśīrṇāni vasanāni dvijātibhiḥ .

śūdrāyaiva pradeyāni tasya dharmadhanaṁ hi tat ..

yaśca kaściddvijātīnāṁ śūdraḥ śuśrūṣurāvrajet .

kalpante’sya tu tenāhurvṛttiṁ dharmavido janāḥ ..

deyaḥ piṇḍo’napatyāya bhartavyo vṛddhadurbalau .

śūdreṇa ca na hātavyo bhartā kasyāñcidāpadi ..

atirekena bhartavyo bhartā dravyaparikṣaye .

na hi svamasti śūdrasya bhartṛhāryadhano hi saḥ ..

uktastrayāṇāṁ varṇānāṁ yajñastasya ca pārthiva .

svāhākāravaṣaṭkārau mantraḥ śūdre na vidyate ..

tasmācchūdraḥ pākayajñairyājayeta naca svayam .

pūrṇapātramayīmāhuḥ pākayajñasya dakṣiṇām .. * ..

śrīnārada uvāca .

idānīmāśramāṇāñca dharmaṁ vakṣyāmi bhūmipa .

brahmacaryāśramaṁ tāvat śṛṇu sarvādhivāsana ..

gatvā gurugṛhaṁ śiṣyo namaskṛtya guruṁ śuciḥ .

brūyādadhyetumāyātaḥ śiṣyo’haṁ tava māriṣa .

tatastasyājñayā nityamadhyetavyaṁ narādhipa ..

sadā vicāraḥ śāstrasya gurupādābhivādanam .

tadājñāpālanañcāpi dhyānaṁ daivatabhāvanā ..

lābhena yena kenāpi tuṣṭiḥ sadbhiḥ samāgamaḥ .

samāptavidyo gurave dakṣiṇāṁ pratipādya ca .. * ..

gṛhāśramaṁ tato gacchedgurorājñāmadhivrajan .

udbahet kulajāṁ kanyāṁ suśīlāṁ gharmacāriṇīm ..

anahaṁvādinīṁ saumyāṁ sucaritrāṁ priyaṁvadām .

gṛhiṇāṁ prathamo dharmo’tithipūjaiva pārthiva ..

aprāpya pūjāmatithiryasya gehānnivartate .

sa yāti narakaṁ ghoraṁ puṇyaṁ tasmai pradāya ca ..

prathamaṁ svāgataṁ pṛcchedāsanañcāpi saṁdiśet .

pādyañca madhuparkañca dadyāt praṇatipūrvakam ..

saṁvādañca priyālāpaṁ kuryāttena sahāntataḥ .

bhojanañca yathāśakti kārayedatithiṁ nṛpa ..

devāśca pitaraścāpi prīyante’tithipūjane .

ātithyasadṛśaṁ karma gṛhasthānāṁ na vidyate ..

yasya nityaṁ sthitirnāsti so’tithiḥparikīrtitaḥ .

sarvāśramāṇāmadhiko gṛhāśrama udāhṛtaḥ ..

yasmāttasmin samāyānti bhikṣārthamāśramāstrayaḥ .

pitṛdevārcanaṁ kāryaṁ gṛhiṇā sukhamicchatā .. * ..

vānaprasthāśramaṁ vakṣye tṛtīyaṁ jagatīpate .

vānaprasthāśramaṁ gacchet kṛtakṛtyo gṛhāśramāt ..

tadāraṇyakaśāstrāṇi yamadhītya sa dharmavit .

ūrdhvaretāḥ pravrajitvā gacchatyakṣarasātsatām ..

sute bhāryāṁ parinyasya vanaṁ gacchet sahaiva vā .

śāntaḥ śuddhāntarātmā ca sarvabhūtahite rataḥ ..

caritabrahmacaryasya brāhmaṇasya viśāmpate .

kartavyāṇīha rājendra kathyante munipuṅgavaiḥ ..

bhaikṣyacaryāsvadhīkāraḥ praśasta iha mokṣiṇaḥ .

yatrāstamitaśāyī syānniragniraniketanaḥ ..

yathopalabdhajīvī syānmunirdānto jitendriyaḥ .

nirāśīḥ syāt nnarvasamo niryogo nirvikāravān ..

vivekī dhanapūttrādau vitṛṣṇaḥ karuṇaḥ sadā .

saṁsāraṁ svapnavadbīkṣya kṣāntaḥ santuṣṭamānasaḥ ..

patramūlaphalāhārī jalāśī vāyubhojanaḥ .

nirāhāro’thavā śuddho’harniśaṁ tapa ācaret .

evaṁ kurvan mahābhāga brāhmaṇaḥ siddhimāpnuyāt ..

caturthamāśramaṁ vakṣye muktisopānameva hi .

guroḥ purodhamāsāsya bhikṣuḥ sannyāsadharmavit ..

vicaret sakalāṁ pṛthvīṁ labdhāśī śānta utsukaḥ .

yogābhyāsarato nityaṁ dharmasañcayatatparaḥ .

dharmādharmavihīno vā bhikṣukaḥ siddhimāpnuyāt .. iti pādme

svargakhaṇḍe 25 . 26 . 27 adhyāyāḥ .. * .. anyat nārasiṁhapurāṇe 59

adhyāye mārkaṇḍeyapurāṇe madālasopākhyāne kūrmapūrāṇe 2 . 3

adhyāye ca draṣṭavyam .. * .. * .. gajacitrakambalaḥ . hātīra jhul iti bhāṣā

. tatparyāyaḥ . praveṇī 2 āstaraṇam 3 paristomaḥ 4 kuthaḥ 5 kuthā 6 .

ityamaraḥ .. praveṇiḥ 7 pariṣṭomaḥ 8 kutham 9 . iti bharataḥ .. śuklādiḥ .

raṅ iti khyātaḥ . sa ca bahuvidho yathā . śvetaḥ 1 pāṇḍuḥ 2 dhūsaraḥ 3

kṛṣṇaḥ 4 pītaḥ 5 haritaḥ 6 raktaḥ 7 śoṇaḥ 8 aruṇaḥ 9 pāṭalaḥ 10 śyāvaḥ

11 dhūmraḥ 12 piṅgalaḥ 13 karvuraḥ 14 . iti cāmaraḥ ..

garbhasthabālakasya ṣaṣṭhe māsi varṇo bhavati . iti sukhabodhaḥ ..

yaśaḥ . guṇaḥ . stutiḥ . iti medinī . ṇe, 26 .. svarṇam . vratam . rūpam .

akṣaram . bhedaḥ . gītakramaḥ . citram . tālaviśeṣaḥ . aṅgarāgaḥ . iti

hemacandraḥ ..

varṇaḥ puṁ, klī, (varṇyate bhidyate iti . varṇa + ghañ .) bhedaḥ .

(varṇyate dīpyate’neneti .) varṇa + ghañ .) rūpam . (varṇayati . varṇa +

ac .) akṣaram . (varṇyate rajyate iti . varṇa + ghañ .) vilepanam . iti

medinī . ṇe, 26 .. * .. varṇaśca dvividhaḥ . dhvanyātmakaḥ

akṣarātmakaśca . asyotpattiprakāro yathā —

avnaiṣadyānmukhaśrotramārgasyāviṣadākṣaram .

apyavyaktaṁ pralapati yadā sā kuṇḍalī tadā .

mūlādhāre viṣvaṇati suṣumnāṁ veṣṭate muhuḥ .. iti prapañcasāraḥ ..

asyārthaḥ . mukhaśrotramārgasyāvaiṣadyāt anairmalyāddhetoryadā sā

kuṇḍalī aviṣadākṣaraṁ aviṣpaṣṭamakṣaraṁ yatrāvyakte dhvanau taṁ

pralapati arthāt kalabhāṣaṇādikaṁ karoti tadā mūlādhāre viṣvaṇati

śabdāyate suṣumnāñca muhurveṣṭate . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. asya

kuṇḍalīsvarūpatvaṁ yathā —

kuṇḍalībhūtasarpāṇāmaṅgaśriyamupeyuṣī .

tridhāmajananī devī śabdabrahmasvarūpiṇī ..

dvicatvāriṁśadvarṇātmā pañcāśadvarṇarūpiṇī .

guṇitā sarvagātreṇa kuṇḍalī paradevatā ..

viśvātmanāpabuddhā sā sūte mantramayaṁ jagat .

ekadhā guṇitā śaktiḥ sarvaviśvapravartinī ..

tripuṣkaraṁ svarān devī brahmādīnāṁ trayaṁ trayam .. iti

sāradātilakaḥ .. asyārthaḥ . tridhāmeti candrasūryāgnirūpā .

dbicatvāriṁśaditi bhūtalipimantramayī . pañcāśaditi mātṛkāmayītyarthaḥ .

sarvagātreṇa sarvavarṇena guṇitā parasparamilitā satī mantramayaṁ

jagat sūte prakāśayati ityarthaḥ . mūlādhāre sarpavat kuṇḍalībhūtā nāḍī

vartate tanmadhyasthāyitvādiyaṁ kuṇḍalī . sarvaviśvetyubhayopādānāt

śabdārtharūpobhayapratipādiketi sūcitam . tripuṣkaramiti

jyeṣṭhamadhyamakaniṣṭhatvena tīrthatrayam . svarāniti

udāttānudāttasamāhārān . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. api ca .

dbicatvāriṁśatā mūle guṇitā viśvanāyikā .

sā prasūte kuṇḍalinī śabdabrahmamayī tibhuḥ ..

śaktiṁ tato dhvanistasmānnādastasmānnivodhikā .

tato’rdhendustato vindustasmādāsīt parā tataḥ .. iti

sāradāyāmācāryāḥ .. mūle mūlādhāre dvicatvāriṁśatā guṇitā viśvanāyikā

kuṇḍalinī anena krameṇa akārādisakārāntāṁ dvicatvāriṁśadātmikāṁ

bhūtalipimantrātmikāṁ varṇamālikāṁ sūte ityanvayaḥ . kramamāha

śaktimiti sā kuṇḍalinī śaktiṁ sūte tataḥ śakterdhvanirāsīditi yojanā . tato

dhvanerityādi jñeyam . ayañca kramaḥ sarvākṣarotpattau jñeyaḥ . tatra

sattvapraviṣṭā cicchaktiśabdavācyā . punarākāśasthā saiva sattvapraviṣṭā

rajo’nuviddhā satī dhvaniśabdavācyā . akṣarāvasthā saiva tamo’nuviddhā

nādaśabdavācyā . avyaktāvasthā saiva

tamaḥprācuryānnibodhikāśabdavācyā . saiva

tadubhayaprācuryādardhenduśabdavācyā . uktañca padārthādarśe .

icchāśaktibalodghuṣṭo jñānaśaktipradīpakaḥ .

puṁrūpiṇī ca sā śaktiḥ kriyākhyā sṛjati prabhuḥ .. asāveva binduḥ

sthānāntaragataḥ parādyākhyo bhavati . paśyantī madhyamā vācī vaikharī

śabdajanmabhūḥ . tatra parā mūle paśyantī svādhiṣṭhāne madhyamā

hṛdaye vaikharī mukhe . taduktaṁ padārthādarśe .

sūkṣmā kuṇḍalinī madhye jyotirmātrāsvarūpiṇī .

aśrotraviṣayā tasmādudgacchatyūrdhagāminī ..

svayaṁ prakāśā paśyantī suṣumnāmāśritā bhavet .

saiva hṛtpaṅkajaṁ prāpya madhyamā nādrarūpiṇī ..

tataḥ saṁjalpamātrā syādavibhaktordhagāminī .

saivoraḥkaṇṭhatālusthā śiroghrāṇaradrasthitā ..

jihvāmūlauṣṭhanirdhū tasarvavarṇaparigrahā .

śabdaprapañcajananī śrotragrāhyā tu vaikharī ..

icchājñānakriyātsāsau tejorūpā guṇātmikā .

krameṇānena sṛjati kuṇḍalī varṇamālikām ..

akārādisakārāntāṁ dbicatvāriṁśadātmikām .

pañcāśadbāraguṇitā pañcāśadbarṇamālikām ..

sūte tadvarṇato bhinnāḥ kalā rudrādikān kramāt .. iti taṭṭīkā ..

aṣṭau sthānāni varṇānāmuraḥ kaṇṭhaḥ śirastathā .

jihvāmūlañca dantāśca nāsikoṣṭhau ca tālukā .. iti śikṣāsūtram .. * ..

kiñca .

yathā bhavanti dehāntaramī pañcāśadakṣarāḥ .

bhedā yena prakāreṇa tathā vakṣyāmi tattvataḥ ..

samīritāḥ samīreṇa suṣumnārandhranirgatāḥ .

vyaktiṁ prayānti vadane kaṇṭhādisthānaghaṭṭitaḥ ..

uccairunmārgaṇo vāyurudāttaṁ kurute svaram .

nīcairgato’nudāttañca svaritaṁ tiryagāgataḥ ..

ardhaikadvitrisaṁkhyābhirmātrābhirlipayaḥ kramāt .

savyañjanahrasvadīrghaplutasaṁjñā bhavanti tāḥ ..

akārekārayoryogādekāro varṇa iṣyate .

tasyaivaikārayogena syādaikārākṣaraṁ tathā ..

ukārayogāttasyaiva syādokārāhvayaḥ svaraḥ .

tasyaivaikārayogena syādaukārāhvayaḥ svaraḥ ..

sandhyakṣarāḥ syuścatvāro mantrāḥ sarvārthasādhakāḥ .

ḷvarṇarvarṇayorvyaktirna vai samvak pradarśyate ..

bindusargātmanorvyaktimanasorajapā vadet .

kaṇṭhāttu niḥsaran sargaḥ prāyo’cātmakataḥparaḥ ..

naśvaraḥ sarga eva syāt socchvāsaḥ prāṇakastu haḥ .

sa sargaḥ śleṣitaḥ kaṇṭe vāyunā kādimīrayet ..

vargasparśanamātreṇa kaṁ svarasparśanāttu kham .

stokagambhīrasaṁ sparśāt gaghau ṅañca vahirgatam ..

visargastālugaḥ soṣmā śaṁ cavargañca yaṁ tathā .

ṛṭurephasakārañca mūrdhago dantagastathā ..

ḷtavargalasānoṣṭhyānupūpadhmānasaṁjñakān .

dantauṣṭhābhyāṁ vañca tattatsthānago’rṇān samīrayet .. iti

prapañcasāre 3 paṭalaḥ .. sargo visarga eva naśvaro vikṛtaḥ socchvāsaḥ

sakārarūpaḥ ucchvāso’ntaḥpraveśaśālī vāyuḥ syādityanvayaḥ . evaṁ

prāṇako vahirnirgamanaśālī vāyurhaḥ syāt sa eva ucchvāsaḥ socchvāsaḥ .

prāṇaścāsau ko vāyuśceti prāṇakaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā .. * ..

avarṇakavargahavisarjanīyāḥ kaṇṭhyāḥ . 1 . ivarṇacavargayaśāstālavyāḥ .

2 . ṛvarṇaṭavargaraṣā mūrdhanyāḥ . 3 . ḷvarṇatavargalasā dantyāḥ . 4 .

uvarṇapavargopadhmānīyā oṣṭhyāḥ . 5 . vo dantyauṣṭhyaḥ . 6 . e ai

kaṇṭhyatālavyau . 7 . o au kaṇṭhyauṣṭhyau . 8 . iti śikṣāsūtram .. * .. api

ca .

yadguhyaṁ sarvatantreṣu varṇoccāravidhiṁ śive ! .

tava snehānmaheśāni ! tadadya kathayāmi te ..

pañcāśanmātṛkāvarṇoccāraṇaṁ guruto’bhyaset .

a ku cu ṭu tu pu yu śu aṣṭau vargāḥ prakīrtitāḥ ..

a ku hāḥ kaṇṭhato jñeyā 1 stālutaścuyaśāḥ smṛtāḥ . 2 .

ṛ ṭu raṣāstu mūddhanyāḥ 3 dantyā ḷ tu la sā matāḥ .. 4 ..

upavaścoṣṭhasaṁbhūtāḥ 5 sthānāni kathitāni te .

viśeṣaṁ kathayāmyadya proccāryaḥ kaṇṭhataḥ svarāḥ ..

ṛdbayaṁ jihvayā mūrdhnā ḷdvayaṁ jihvadantajam .

mukhasthānāddhalo vācyāḥ kṣakāraḥ kaṇṭaghātajaḥ ..

vyañjanadvayasaṁyoge bhavet pūrbasvaro guruḥ .

padāntādimavarṇasya saṁyogeṣu śrutirdvayoḥ ..

apadāntādisaṁyoge yvoranyatra tatheṣyate .

yvoḥ śrutistu tirobhūya svaravat śrutitāṁ vrajet ..

śriyā bīje śakārasya chaśrutiḥ parameśvari ! .

chaśrutiśca rādibhṛgau tathādisthe tu caśrutiḥ ..

sahasra ityādau namastasyai āsthā ityādau ca .

rephādike tadante vā hakāre samavācyatā ..

varhaḥ hrada ityādau .

kintu vaijātyamāśritya sphuṭaṁ nātrāsya vācyatā ..

cu tūryadhvanimāpnoti yādisthe parameśvari ! .

vāhya ityādau .

pu caturthavvaniṁ yāti vādisthe tu viśeṣataḥ ..

āhvānamityādau .

lādisthe’pyatha nādisthe vaijātyaṁ svalpavācyatā .

prahlāda ahrāya ityādau .

mādisthe bhe ca masyāpi nāsikāmūlavācyatā ..

u ṅa ṇa na mā bindurnāsikāmūlajāḥ smṛtāḥ .

yakāraścu tṛtīyatvaṁ padādau sarvadā vrajet ..

keyūrādāvapi tathā anyatra kaṇṭhamātragaḥ .

nādisthaśasayośchatvaṁ svarayogāntavargake ..

praśnaḥ snāna ityādau .

varṇottareṣu ḍaḍhayorvakrajihvādivācyatā .

vaijātyamapi tatrāsti guroreva samabhyaset .

ādirephastu saṁprokto dṛśeranyo vrajedṛtām .

evaṁ jñātvā maheśāni ! paṭhet stotraṁ japenmanum ..

kavacañca maheśāni nānyathā phalamāpnuyāt .. iti prapañcasāre 3

paṭalaḥ .. * .. api ca .

hrasvaḥ svareṣu pūrboktaḥ paro dīrghaḥ kramādime .

śivaśaktimayāste syurbindusargāvasānakāḥ ..

binduḥ pumān raviḥ proktaḥ sargaḥ śaktirniśākaraḥ .

svarāṇāṁ madhyagaṁ yattu taccatuṣkaṁ napuṁsakam ..

vinā svaraistu nānyeṣāṁ jāyate vyaktirañjasā .

śivaśaktimayān prāhustasmādvarṇān manīṣiṇaḥ ..

kāraṇāt pañcabhūtānāmudbhūtā mātṛkā yataḥ .

tato bhūtātmakā varṇāḥ pañca pañca vibhāgataḥ ..

vāyvagnibhūjalākāśāḥ pañcāśallipayaḥ kramāt .

pañca hrasvāḥ pañca dīrghāḥ vindvantāḥ sandhisambhavāḥ .

pañcaśaḥ kādayaḥ ṣa kṣa la sa hāntāḥ samīritāḥ .. iti sāradā .. * ..

akṣarasṛṣṭikāraṇaṁ yathā —

sāṇmāsike’pi samaye bhrāntiḥ saṁjāyate yatā .

dhātrākṣarāṇi sṛṣṭāni patrārūḍhānyataḥ purā .. iti jyotistattve

bṛhaspatiḥ .. varṇalekhanaprakārastu tattadvarṇe draṣṭavyaḥ .. * ..

varṇanāmāni yathā — tantrasaṅketabodhārthamāhṛtya tantraśāstrataḥ .

varṇanāmāni katicit vakṣyāmi viduṣāṁ mude .. oṁkāro vartulastāro

vāmaśca haṁsakāraṇam . mantrādyaḥ praṇavaḥ satyaṁ

binduśaktistridaivatam .. sarvajīvotpādakaśca pañcadevo dhruvastrikaḥ .

sāvitrī triśikho brahma triguṇo guṇajīvakaḥ .. ādibījaṁ vedasāro

vedabījamataḥ param . pañcarasmistrikūṭe ca tribhave bhavanāśanaḥ ..

gāyattrībījapañcāṁśau mantravidyāprasūḥ prabhuḥ . akṣaraṁ

mātṛkāsūścānādiradbaitamokṣadau .. oṁ .. aḥ śrīkaṇṭhaḥ sureśaśca

lalāṭañcaikamātrikaḥ . pūrṇodarī sṛṣṭimedhau sārasvataḥ priyaṁvadaḥ ..

mahābrāhmī vāsudevo dhaneśaḥ keśavo’mṛtam . kīrtirnivṛttirvāgīśo

narakārirharo marut .. brahmā vāmādyajo hrasvaḥ karasūḥ

praṇavādyakaḥ . brahmāṇī kāmarūpaśca kāmeśī vāśinī viyat .. viśveśaḥ

śrīviṣṇukaṇṭhau pratipattithiraṁśinī . arkamaṇḍalavarṇādyau brāhmaṇaḥ

kāmakarṣiṇī .. aḥ .. ākāro vijayānanto dīrghacchāyo vināyakaḥ .

kṣīrodadhiḥ payodaśca pāśo dīrghāsyavṛttakau .. pracaṇḍa ekajo rudro

nārāyaṇa ibheśvaraḥ . pratiṣṭhā mānadā kānto viśvāntakagajāntakaḥ ..

pitāmaho dviṭhānto’bhūḥ kriyā kāntiśca sambhavaḥ . dvitīyā mānadā

kāśīvighnarājaḥ kujo viyat . svarāntakaśca hṛdayamaṅguṣṭho bhagamālinī

.. āḥ .. iḥ sūkṣmā śālmalī vidyā candraḥ pūṣā suguhyakaḥ . sumitraṁ

sundaro vīraḥ koṭaraḥ kāṭaraḥ payaḥ .. bhrūmadhyo

mādhavastuṣṭirdakṣanetrañca nāsikā . śāntaḥ kāntaḥ kāminī ca kāmo

vighnavināyakaḥ . nepālo bharaṇī rudro nityā klinnā ca pāvakaḥ .. .. iḥ ..

īstribhūrtirmahāmāyā lolākṣī vāmalocanam . govindaḥ śekharaḥ puṣṭiḥ

subhadrā ratnasaṁjñakaḥ .. viṣṇurlakṣmīḥ prahāsaśva vāgviśuddhaḥ

parāparaḥ . kalottarīyo bheruṇḍā ratiśca pauṇḍravardhanaḥ .. śivottamaḥ

śivā tuṣṭiścaturthī bindumālinī . vaiṣṇavī vaindavī jihvā kāmakalā

sanādakā .. pāvakaḥ koṭaraḥ kīrtirmohinī kālakārikā . kucadvandvaṁ

tarjanī va śāntistripurasundarī .. īḥ .. uḥ śaṅkaro vartulākṣī

bhūtaḥkalyāṇavācakaḥ . amareśo dakṣakarṇaḥ ṣaḍvaktro mohanaḥ śivaḥ

.. ugraḥ pramurdhṛtirviṣṇurviśvakarmā maheśvaraḥ . śatrughnaśceṭikā

puṣṭiḥ pañcamī vahrivāsinī .. ceṭikāsyāne cekṣikā iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

kāmaghnaḥ kāmanā ceśo mohinī vighnahṛnmahī . ḍaṭasūḥ kuṭilā śrotraṁ

pāradbīpo vṛṣo haraḥ .. ḍaṭhasū iti kutracit pāṭhaḥ . uḥ .. ūḥ kaṇṭako ratiḥ

śāntiḥ krodhano madhusūdanaḥ . kāmarājaḥ kujeśaśca maheśo

vāmakarṇakaḥ .. kaṇṭhakasthāne kaṇṭaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . arghīśo

bhairavaḥ sūkṣmo dīrghaghoṇā sarasvatī . vilāsinī vighnakartā lakṣmaṇo

rūpakarṣiṇī . mahāvidyeśvarī ṣaṣṭhā ṣaṇḍo bhūḥ kānyakubjakaḥ .. .. ūḥ ..

ṛḥ pūrdīrghamukhī rudro devamātā trivikramaḥ . bhāvabhūtiḥ kriyā krūrā

recikā nāsikā dhṛtaḥ .. ekapādaśiro mālā maṇḍalā śāntinī jalam . karṇaḥ

kamalabhā medho nivṛttirgaṇanāyakaḥ . rohiṇī śivadūtī ca pūrṇagiriśca

saptamī .. medhaḥ sthāne meṣa iti ca pāṭhaḥ .. ṛḥ .. ṝḥ krodho’tithiśo vāṇī

vāmano’go’tha śrīrdhṛtiḥ . ūrdhamukhī niśānāthaḥ padmamālā vinaṣṭadhīḥ

.. śaśinī mocikā śreṣṭhā daityamātā pratiṣṭhitā . ekadantāhvayo mātā

haritā mithunodayā .. mātā sthāne māyā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . komalaḥ śyāmalā

medhī pratiṣṭhā patiraṣṭamī . brahmaṇyamiva kīlāle pāvako gandhakarṣiṇī

.. mivasthāne maveti vā pāṭhaḥ . ṛḥ .. ḷḥ sthāṇuḥ śrīdharaḥ śuddho medhā

dhūmro vako viyat . devayonirdakṣagaṇḍo vaheśaḥ kauntarudrakau .

vaheśasthāne vāhaga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . viśveśvaro dīrghajihvā mahendro

lāṅgaliḥ parā . candrikā pārthivo dhūmrā dvidantaḥ kāmavardhanaḥ ..

śucismitā ca navamī kāntirāṣātakeśvaraḥ . cittākarṣiṇī kāśaśca

tṛtīyakulasundarī .. cittākarṣiṇīsthāne cintākarṣiṇī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . ḷḥ ..

ḹkāraḥ kamalā harṣā hṛṣīkeśo madhuvrataḥ . sūkṣmā kāntirvāmagaṇḍo

rudraḥ kāmodarī surā .. śāntikṛt svastikā śakro māyāvī lolupo viyat .

kuśamī susthiro mātā nīlapīto gajānanaḥ .. kāminī viśvaṣā kālo nityā

śuddhaḥ śuciḥ kṛtī .. viśvaṣāsthāne vismayā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sūryo

dhairyākarṣaṇī ca ekākī danujaprasūḥ .. ḹḥ .. ekāro vāstavaḥ

śaktirjhiṇṭīśoṣṭhau bhagaṁ marut . sūkṣmā bhūto’rdhakeśī ca jyotsnā

śraddhā pramardanaḥ .. bhūtasthāne śṛta iti vā pāṭhaḥ . bhayaṁ jñānaṁ

kṛṣā dhīrā jaṅghā sarvamamudbhavaḥ . vahniviṣṇurbhagavatī kuṇḍalī

mohinī vasaḥ .. yoṣidādhāraśaktiśca trikoṇā īśasaṁ jñakaḥ .

sandhirekādaśī bhadrā padmanābhaḥ kulācalaḥ .. eḥ .. airlajjā bhautikaḥ

kāntā vāyavī mohinī vibhuḥ . dakṣā dāmodaraḥ prajño’dharo

vikṛtamukhyapi .. kṣamātmako jagadyoniḥ paraḥ paranibodhakṛt .

jñānāmṛtā kapardī śrīḥ pīṭheśāgniḥ samātṛkaḥ .. tripurā lohitā rājñī

vāgbhavo bhautikāsanaḥ . maheśvaro dvādaśī ca vimalaśca sarasvatī .

kāmakoṭo vāmajānuraṁśumān vijayā jaṭā .. .. aiḥ .. okāraḥ satyapīyūṣau

paścimāsyaḥ śrutiḥsthirā . sadyojāto vāsudevo gāyattrī dīrghajaṅghakaḥ

.. āpyāyanī cordhvadanto lakṣmīrvāṇī mukhī dbijaḥ .

uddeśyadarśakastīvraḥ kailāso vasudhākṣaraḥ .. praṇavāṁśo

brahmasūtramajeśaḥ sarvamaṅgalā . trayodaśī dīrghanāsā ratinātho

digambarā .. trailokyavijayā prakṣā prītirbījādikarṣiṇī .. .. oḥ .. aukāraḥ

śaktiko nāśastejaso vāmajaṅghakaḥ . manubaddhagraheśaśca

śaṅkukarṇaḥ sadāśivaḥ .. adhodantaśca kaṇṭhoṣṭhau saṅkarṣaṇaḥ

sarasvatī . ājñā cordhvamukhī śānto vyāpinī prakṛtaḥ payaḥ .. anantā

jvālinī vyomā caturdaśī ratipriyaḥ . netramātmākarṣiṇī ca jvālāmālinikā

bhṛguḥ .. vyomāsthāne romā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . auḥ .. aṅkāraścakṣuṣo danto

vaṭikā samaguhyakaḥ . pradyumnaḥ śrīmukhī prītirbījayonirvṛṣadhvajaḥ ..

dantasthāne dambha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . paraṁ śaśī pramāṇīśaḥ somabinduḥ

kalānidhiḥ . akrūraścetanā nāgapūrṇā duḥkhaharaḥ śivaḥ .. śiraḥ

śambhurnareśaśca sukhaduḥkhapravartakaḥ . pūrṇimā revatī śuddhaḥ

kanyā caraviyadraviḥ .. amṛtākarṣiṇī śūnyaṁ vicitrā vyomarūpiṇī . kedāro

rātrināśaśca kubjikā caiva budvudaḥ .. .. aṁ .. aḥ kaṇṭhako mahāsenaḥ

kalā pūrṇāmṛtā hariḥ icchā bhadrā gaṇeśaśca ratirvidyāmukhī sukham

dbibindurasanā somo’niruddho duḥkhasūcakaḥ . dbijihvaḥ kuṇḍalaṁ

vaktraḥ sargaḥ śaktirniśākaraḥ .. sundarī suyaśānantā gaṇanātho

maheśvaraḥ .. aḥ .. kaḥ krodhīśo mahākālī kāmadevaḥ prakāśakaḥ . kapālī

tejasaḥ śāntirvāsudevo jayānalaḥ .. cakrī prajāpatiḥ sṛṣṭirdakṣaskandho

viśāmpatiḥ . anantaḥ pārthivo bindustāpinī paramātmakaḥ ..

dakṣaskandhasthāne dakṣakakṣau iti vā pāṭhaḥ . vargādyaśca mukhī

brahmā sakhādyo’mbhaḥ śivo jalam . māheśvarī tulā puṣpā

maṅgalaścaraṇaṁ karaḥ .. nityā kāmeśvarī mukhyaḥ kāmarūpo

gajendrakaḥ . śrīpuraṁ ramaṇo raṅgaḥ kusumā paramātmakaḥ .. kaḥ ..

khaḥ pracaṇḍaḥ kāmarūpī ṛddhirvahriḥ sarasvarta ākāśamindriyaṁ durgā

caṇḍīśastāpinī guruḥ .. śikhaṇḍī dantajātīśaḥ kaphoṇirgaruto yadi .

śūnyaṁ kapālī kalyāṇī sūrpakarṇo’jarāmaraḥ .. śubhrāgneryā caṇḍaliṅgo

janāvyāṅgārakhaḍgakau .. .. khaḥ .. go gaurī gauravo gaṅgā gaṇeśo

gokuleśvaraḥ . śārṅgī pañcāntako gāthā gandharvaḥ sarvagaḥ smṛtiḥ ..

sarvasiddhiḥ prabhā dhūmrā dvijākhyaḥ śivadarśanaḥ . viśvātmā gauḥ

pṛthagrūpā bālabaddhastrilocanaḥ .. gītaṁ sarasvatī vidyā bhoginī

nandano dharā . bhogavatī ca hṛdayaṁ jñānaṁ jālandharo lavaḥ ..

lavasthāne nara iti vā pāṭhaḥ . gaḥ .. ghaḥ khaḍgī ghurghuro ghaṇṭī

ghaṇṭīśastripurāntakaḥ . vāyuḥ śivottamaḥ satyā kiṅkiṇī ghoranāyakaḥ ..

marīcirvaruṇo medhā kālarūpī ca dāmbhikaḥ . lambodarā jvālamūlaṁ

nandeśo hananaṁ dhvaniḥ . trailokyavidyā saṁhartā

kāmākhyamanaghāmayaḥ .. dhaḥ .. ṅaḥ śaṅkhī bhairavaścaṇḍo

vindūttaṁsaḥ śiśupriyaḥ . ekarudro dakṣanakhaḥ kharparo viṣayaspṛhā ..

kāntiḥ śvetāhvayo dhīro dbijātmā jbālinī viyat . mantraśaktiśca madano

vighneśī cātmanāyakaḥ .. ekanetro mahānando durdharaścandramā yatiḥ

. śivayoṣā nīlakaṇṭhaḥ kāmeśī ca mayāṁśukau .. .. ṅaḥ .. caḥ puṣkaro halī

vāṇī cātmaśaktiḥ sudarśanaḥ . carmamuṇḍadharo bhūtvā

mahiṣācārasambinī .. bhūtvāsthāne bhauma iti ca pāṭhaḥ . ekarūpo ruciḥ

kūrmaścāmuṇḍā dīrghavālukaḥ . vāmabāhurmalamāyā

caturmūrtisvarūpiṇī .. dayitaśca dvinetraśca lakṣmīstritayalocanaḥ .

candanaṁ candramā davaśce tano vṛściko budhaḥ .. devī

keṭamukhecchātmā kaumārapūrvaphalgunī . anaṅgamekhalā vāyurmedinī

ca mūlāvatī .. caḥ .. chaśchandanaṁ suṣumnā ca pa puḥ paśupatirmṛtiḥ .

nirmalaṁ taralaṁ vahnirbhūtamātrā vilāsinī .. ekanetraśca vṛṣalī dbiśirā

vāmakurparaḥ . gokarṇā lāṅgalī vāmakāmamattā sadāśivaḥ .. mātā

niśācaraḥ pāyurvikṣataḥ sthitiśabdakaḥ .. .. chaḥ .. jaḥ śavo vānaraḥ śūlī

bhogadā vijayā sthirā . laladevo jayo jetā dhātakī sumukhī vibhuḥ ..

lambodarī smṛtiḥ śākhā suprabhā kartṛkā dharā . dīrghabāhū rucirhaṁso

nandī tejāḥ surādhipaḥ .. javano vegito vāmo mānavākṣaḥ sadātmakaḥ .

hṛnmāruteśvaro vegī cāmodā madavihvalaḥ .. jaḥ .. jho jhaṅkārī guho

jhaṣjhāvāyuḥ satyaḥ ṣaḍunnataḥ . ajeśo drāviṇī nādaḥ pāśī jihvā jalaṁ

sthitiḥ .. virājendro dhanurhastaḥ karkaśo nādajaḥ kujaḥ . dīrghabāhubalo

rūpamākanditaḥ sucañcalaḥ .. durmukho naṣṭa ātmā vān vikaṭā

kucamaṇḍalaḥ . kalahaṁsapriyā vāmā aṅgulīmadhyaparvakaḥ .

dakṣahāsāṭṭahāsaśca pāthātmā vyañjanaḥ svaraḥ .. .. jhaḥ .. ñakāro

vodhanī viśvā kaṇḍalī makhado viyat . kaumārī nāgavijñānī

savyāṅgulanakharo vakaḥ .. kaṇḍalīsthāne kuṇḍalī makhadasthāne

sukhada iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sarveśacūrṇitā buddhiḥ svargātmā

ghargharadhvaniḥ . dharmaikapādau sumukhau virajā candaneśvarī ..

buddhisthāne siddhiḥ svargasthāne sarga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . gāyanaḥ

puṣpadhanvā ca rāgātmā ca varākṣiṇī .. ñaḥ .. ṭaṣṭaṅkāraḥ kapālī ca

somavāḥ khecarī dhvaniḥ . mukundo vinadā pṛthvī vaiṣṇavī vāruṇī navaḥ ..

somavā sthāne someśa iti kvacit pāṭhaḥ . dakṣāṅgakārdhacandraśca jarā

bhūtiḥ punarbhavaḥ . bṛhaspatirdhanuścitrā pramodā vimalā kaṭiḥ . rājā

girirmahādhanurghnānātmā sumukho marut .. ṭaḥ .. ṭhaḥ śūnyo mañjarī

bījaḥ pāṇinī lāṅgalī kṣayā . vanajo nandano jihvā sunañjaghūrṇakaḥ sudhā

.. vartulaḥ kuṇḍalo vahriramṛtaṁ candramaṇḍalaḥ . dakṣajānūrubhāvaśca

devabhakṣyo bṛhaddhaniḥ .. ekapādo vibhūtiśca lalāṭaṁ sarvamitrakaḥ .

vṛṣaghno nalinī viṣṇurmaheśo grāmaṇīḥ śaśī .. ṭhaḥ .. ḍaḥ smṛtirdāruko

nandirūpiṇī yoginī priyaḥ . kāmārī śaṅkarastrāśastrivakro nadako dhvaniḥ

.. durūho jaṭilī bhīmā dvijihvaḥ pṛthivī satī . koragiriḥ kṣamā kāntirnābhiḥ

svātī ca locanam .. jaṭilīsthāne jaṭila iti kāntisthāne śāntiriti vā pāṭhaḥ ..

ḍaḥ .. ḍho ḍhakkā nirṇayaḥ pūrvo yajñeśādanadeśvaraḥ .

ardhanārīśvarastoyamīśvarī triśikhī navaḥ .. yajñeśādanadeśvara ityatra

yajñeśo dhanadeśvara ityapi pāṭhaḥ . dakṣapādāṅgulermūlaṁ

siddhidaṇḍo vināyakaḥ . prahāsā triverā ṛddhinirguṇo nidhano dhvaniḥ ..

prahāsā sthāne prahāsa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . vighneśaḥ pālinī tvakkadhāriṇī

kroḍapucchakaḥ . elāpuraṁ tvagātmā ca viśākhā śrīrmano ratiḥ ..

takkasthāne tvakca iti vā pāṭhaḥ .. ḍhaḥ .. ṇo nirguṇaṁ ratirjñānaṁ

jambhanaḥ pakṣivāhanaḥ . jayā śambho narakajit niṣkalā yoginīpriyaḥ ..

dvimukhaṁ koṭavī śrotraṁ samṛddhirbodhano matā . trinetro mānuṣī

vyomadakṣapādāṅgulermukham .. mādhavaḥ śaṅkhinī vīro nārāyaṇaśca

nirṇayaḥ .. mukhasthāne nakhaṁ iti vā pāṭhaḥ .. ṇaḥ .. taḥ pūtanā hariḥ

śuddhiḥ śaktī śaktirjaṭī dhvajā . vāmasphikvāmakaṭyau ca kāminī

madhyakarṇakaḥ .. haristhāne haviḥ iti vā pāṭhaḥ . āṣāḍhī taṇḍatusnaśca

kāmikā pṛṣṭhapucchakaḥ . ratnakaśca śyāmamukhī vārāhī makaro’ruṇā ..

āṣāḍhītaṇḍatusnaścasthāne āṣāntaḍhāntakṣudraśca iti ratnakaścasthāne

ratnakaṇṭha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sugato’rdhamukhā buddhajānuśca

kroḍapucchakaḥ . gandho viśvāmarucchatraścānurādhā ca saurakaḥ ..

buddhasthāne vṛddha iti saurakasthāne saivika iti vā pāṭhaḥ . jayanti

pulako bhrāntiranaṅgamadanāturā .. taḥ .. thaḥ sthirāmī

mahāgranthirgranthigrāho bhayānakaḥ . śilī śirasijo daṇḍī bhadrakālī

śiloccayaḥ .. kṛṣṇo buddhirvikarmā ca dakṣanāśādhipo’maraḥ . varadā

bhogadā keśo vāmajānū raso’nalaḥ .. kṛṣṇo buddhirvikarmā sthāne kṛpto

vahrirvikarṇā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . lolaujajjayinī guhyaḥ śaraccandro vidārakaḥ ..

lolau ityādisthāne lolojjayinīpūrguhyaśaraccandradivākarau iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

thaḥ .. do’drīśo dhātakirdhātā dātā dalaṁ kalatrakam . dīnaṁ jñānañca

dānañca bhaktirāhavanī dharā .. dātā dalaṁ sthāne dānādanu iti vā

pāṭhaḥ . suṣumnā yoginī sadyaḥ kuṇḍalo vāmagulphakaḥ . kātyāyanī śivā

durgā laṅghanā nātri kaṇḍakī .. laṅghanāsthāne saṅghanā kaṇḍakīsthāne

kaṇṭakī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . svastikaḥ kuṭilā rūpaḥ kṛṣṇaścomājitendriyaḥ .

dharmahṛdvāmadevaśca bhramā bahusucañcalā .. dharmahṛtsthāne

gharmakṛt bahusthāne vaha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . haridrā puramatrau ca

dakṣapāṇistrirekhakaḥ .. daḥ .. dho dhanārtho ruciḥ sthāṇuḥ śāśvato

yoginīpriyaḥ . mīneśaḥ śaṅkhinī toyaṁ nāgeśo viśvapāvanī ..

dhanārthasthāne dhanākhya iti vā pāṭhaḥ . dhiṣaṇā dharaṇā cintā

netrayugmaṁ priyo matiḥ . pītavāsā trivarṇā ca dhātā

dharmaplavaṅgamaḥ .. dharaṇācintāsthāne dharaṇī citrā iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

sandarśo mohano lajjā vajratuṇḍā dharaṁ dharā . vāmapādāṅgulermūlaṁ

jyeṣṭhā surapuraṁ bhavaḥ . sparśātmā dīrghajaṅghā ca dhaneśo

dhanasañcayaḥ .. dhaḥ .. no garjinī kṣamā saurirvāruṇī viśvapāvanī .

meṣaśca savitā netraṁ danturo nārado’ñjanaḥ .. vāruṇīsthāne varuṇā iti

vā pāṭhaḥ . ūrdhvacāmī dviraṇḍaśca vāmapādāṅgulermukham .

vainateyastutirvartma taraṇirbālirāgamaḥ .. vāmano jvālinī dīrgho nirīhaḥ

sugatirviyat . śabdātmā dīrghaghoṇā ca hastināpuramecakau .

girināyakanīlau ca śivo nādirmahāmatiḥ .. naḥ .. paḥ pūrapriyatā tīkṣṇā

lohitaḥ pañcamo ramā . guhyakartā nidhiḥ śeṣaḥ kālarātriḥ suvāhitā ..

tapanaḥ pālanaḥ pātā padmareṇurnirañjanaḥ .. sāvitrī pātinī pānaṁ

vīratattvo dhanurdharaḥ .. pālanasthāne pāvana iti tattvasthāne tantra iti

vā pāṭhaḥ . dakṣapārśvaśca senānī marīciḥ pavanaḥ śaniḥ . uḍḍīśaṁ

jayanī kumbho’lasaṁ rekhā ca mohakaḥ .. kumbhasyāne kāntā iti

rekhāsthāne reṣā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . mūlā dbitīyamindrāṇī lokākṣī mana

ātmanaḥ .. ātmanaḥ sthāne ātmaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . paḥ .. phaḥ sakhī

durgiṇī dhūmrā vāmapārśvo janārdanaḥ . jayā pādaḥ śikhā raudrī

phetkāraḥ śākhinī priyaḥ .. umā vihaṅgamaḥ kālakubjinīpriyapāvakau .

pralayāgnirnīlapādo’kṣaraḥ paśupatiḥ śaśī .. phutkāro yāminī vyaktā

pāvano mohavardhanaḥ . niṣphalavāgahaṅkāraḥ prayāgo grāmaṇīḥ

phalam .. vyaktāsthāte jhañjhā iti prayāgasthāne prayāṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

phaḥ .. bo vanī bhūdharo mārgo ghargharī locanapriyaḥ . pracetāḥ

kalasaḥ pakṣī sthalagaṇḍaḥ kapardinī .. pṛṣṭhavaṁśo bhayā mātuḥ

śikhivāho yugandharaḥ . sukhabindurbalī ghaṇṭā yoddhā trilocanapriyaḥ ..

sukhabindusthāne mukhabinduriti vā pāṭhaḥ . kledinī tāpitā bhūmiḥ

supanindravalipriyaḥ . surabhirmukhaviṣṇuśca saṁhāro vasudhādhipaḥ ..

supanindrasthāne sugandhiśceti vā pāṭhaḥ . ṣaṣṭhī purañca peṭā ca

modako gaganaṁ prati . pūrbāṣāḍhāmadhyaliṅgau śaniḥ kumbhatṛtīyakau

.. baḥ .. bhaḥ klinnā bhramaro bhīmo viśvamūrtirniśātavam . dviraṇḍo

bhūṣaṇo mūlaṁ yajñasūtrasya vācakaḥ .. niśātavasthāne niśābhayaṁ iti

vā pāṭhaḥ . nakṣatraṁ bhramaṇā dīptirvayo bhūmiḥ payo nabhaḥ .

nābhibhadraṁ bhahābāhurviśvamūrtirvitāṇḍakaḥ .. vayaḥsthāne bhaya iti

vitāṇḍakasthāne vimūrtaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . prāṇātmā tāpinī vajrā viśvarūpī

ca candrikā . bhīmasenaḥ sudhāmenaḥ sukho māyāpuraṁ haraḥ ..

vajrasthāne rudrā iti sukhasthāne mukha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . bhaḥ .. maḥ kālī

kleśitaḥ kālo mahākālo mahāntakaḥ . vaikuṇṭho vasudhā candrī raviḥ

puruṣarājakaḥ .. vasudhāsyāne vastudā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . kālabhadro jayā

medhā viśvadā dīptasaṁjñakaḥ . jaṭharañca bhramānānaṁ

lakṣmīmātograbandhanau .. dīptasthāne dīpra iti vā pāṭhaḥ . viṣiṁ śivo

mahāvīraḥ śaśiprabhāṁ janeśvaraḥ . pramattaḥ priyasū rudraḥ sarvāṅgo

vahnimaṇḍalam .. bhātaṅgamālino binduḥ śravaṇābharatho viyat ..

rathasthāne makha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . maḥ .. yo vāṇī vasudhā vāyurvikṛtiḥ

puruṣottamaḥ . yugāntaḥ śvasanaḥ śīghro dhūmārciḥ prāṇisevakaḥ ..

yugāntasthāne yugābha iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śaṅkhā bhramo jaṭī lolā vāyuvegī

yaśaskarī . saṅkarṣaṇaḥ kṣapā vālo hṛdayaṁ kapilā prabhā .. āgneyo

vyāpakāstyāgo homo yānaṁ pramā sukham . caṇḍaḥ sarveśvarī

ghūmaścāmuṇḍā sumukheśvarī .. pramāsthāne prabhā iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

tvagātmā malayo mātā haṁsinī bhṛṅgināyakaḥ . tenamaḥ śoṣako mīno

dhaniṣṭhānaṅgavedinī .. tvagātmāsthāne vigātmā iti tenamasthāne

yemana iti vā pāṭhaḥ . meṣṭhaḥ somaḥ paktināmā pāpahā

prāṇasaṁjñakaḥ .. meṣṭhasthāne seṣṭa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . yaḥ . ro raktaḥ

krodhinī rephaḥ pāvakastvojaso mataḥ . prakāśā darśeno dīpo ratakṛṣṇā

paraṁ balī .. stvojasasthāne ntejana iti ratakṛṣṇāsthāne raktakṛṣṇa iti vā

pāṭhaḥ . bhujaṅgeśo matiḥ sūryo dhātū raktaḥ prakāśakaḥ . vyāpako

revatī dāsaṁ kukṣyaṁśo vahnimaṇḍalam .. dāsasthāne dānamiti

kukṣyaṁśasthāne dakṣāṁśa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . ugrarekhā sthūladaṇḍo

vedakaṇṭhapalā purā . prakṛtiḥ sugalo brahmaśandaśca gāyako dhanam ..

vedakaṇṭhapalāsthāne vedakaścapalā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śrīkaṇṭha uṣmā

hṛdayaṁ muṇḍī tripurasundarī . savinduryonijo jvālā śrīśailo viśvatomukhī

.. śrīśailasthāne śrīśoṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . raḥ . laścandraḥ pūtanā pṛthvī

mādhavaḥ śakravācakaḥ . valānujaḥ piṇākīśo vyāpako māṁsasaṁjñakaḥ

.. mādhavasthāne mādhavī iti vā pāṭhaḥ . khaḍgī nādomṛtaṁ devī

lavaṇaṁ vāruṇī patiḥ . śikhā vāṇī kriyā mātā bhāminī kāminī priyā ..

mṛtasthāne mṛḍamiti lavaṇasthāne maraṇamiti vā pāṭhaḥ . jvālinī veginī

nādaḥ pradyumnaḥ śoṣaṇo hariḥ . viśmātmamantrau balī ceto merurgiriḥ

kalā rasaḥ .. mantrasthāne mandra iti kalāsthāne kaṇā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . laḥ .

vo vālo vāruṇī sūkṣmā varuṇo medasaṁjñakaḥ . khaḍgīśo jvālinī vaṅkaḥ

kalasadhvanivācakaḥ .. vaṅkasthāne raṅka iti kalasadhvanisthāne

kalasaṁravi iti vā pāṭhaḥ . utkārīśastu nā vīto vajrā sphik sāgaraḥ śuciḥ .

tridhātuḥ śaṅkaraḥ śreṣṭho viśeṣo yamasādanam .. vaḥ .. śaḥ savyaśca

kāmarūpī kāmarūpo mahāmatiḥ . saukhyanāmā kumāro’sthi śrīkaṇṭho

vṛṣaketanaḥ .. vṛṣaghnaḥ śayanaṁ śāntā subhagā visphuliṅginī .

mṛtyurdevo mahālakṣmīrmahendraḥ kulakaulinī .. bāhurhaṁso

viyadbaktraṁ hṛdanaṅgāṅkuśaḥ khalaḥ . vāmoruḥ puṇḍarīkātmā kāntiḥ

kalyāṇavācakaḥ . haṁsaścāne hiṁsā iti vā pāṭhaḥ . śaḥ .. ṣaḥ śveto

vāsudevaśca pītā prajñā vināyakaḥ . parameṣṭhī vāmabāhuḥ śreṣṭho

garbhavimocanaḥ .. pītāsthāne prītā iti prajñāsthāne śraddhā iti vā

pāṭhaḥ . lambodaro yamaujeśaḥ kāmadhuk kāmadhūmakaḥ . suśrīruṣmā

vṛṣo lajjā marudbhakṣyaḥ priyaḥ śivaḥ . kāmadhūmakasthāne

kāladhūmaka iti vā pāṭhaḥ . sūryātmā jaṭharaḥ koṣo mattā vakṣovidāriṇī .

kalakaṇṭho madhyabhinnā buddhātmā malapūḥ śivaḥ .. ṣaḥ .. so haṁsaḥ

suyaśā viṣṇurbhṛgvīśaścandrasaṁjñakaḥ . jagadvījaṁ śaktināmā mohaṁ

veśavatī bhṛguḥ .. suyaśāsthāne sujana iti mohasthāne so’haṁ iti vā

pāṭhaḥ . prakṛtirīśvaraḥ śuddho prabhā śvetā kulojjvalaḥ . dakṣapādo

mṛtaṁ brāhmī paramātmā paro’kṣaraḥ .. surūpā ca guṇeśo gauḥ

kalakaṇṭho vṛkodarī . prāṇādyāśca purādevī lakṣmīḥ somo hiraṇyapuḥ ..

durgottāriṇī sanmohājjīvo mūrtirmanoharaḥ .. durgottāriṇisthāne

durgottāriṇī iti sanmohātsthāne sanmohā iti manoharakhyāne manoyava

iti vā pāṭhaḥ . saḥ . haḥ śivo gaganaṁ haṁso nāgaloko’mbikāpatiḥ .

nakulīśo jagatprāṇaḥ prāṇeśaḥ kapilā malaḥ .. malasthāne mata iti vā

pāṭhaḥ . paramātmātmajo jīvo yavākaḥ śāntido’ṅganaḥ . mṛgo bhayo

ruṇāsthāṇuḥ kruṭakūpavirāvaṇaḥ .. yavākasthāne varāka iti aṅganasthāne

aṅgula iti kruṭakūpavirāvaṇasthāne kūṭakoparivāraṇa iti vā pāṭhaḥ .

lakṣmīrmaviharaḥ śambhuḥ prāṇaśaṅkirlalāṭajaḥ . svakopavāraṇaḥ śūlī

caitanyaṁ pādapūraṇaḥ .. maviharasthāne harihara iti svakopasthāne

sakopa iti vā pāṭhaḥ . mahālakṣmīḥ paraṁ nādo meghanādo harirmataḥ .

vindurdurgā priyā devī meghaśyāmeśvaraḥ pumān .. dakṣapādaḥ

sadāśambhuḥ śākhoṭaḥ somamaṇḍalam .. haḥ Laḥ pṛthvī vimalā

mogho’nanto havyavahā sitā . vyāpinī śivadā ketujagatsārataraṁ haṭhaḥ

.. glaurmṛḍānī ca vedārthaḥ sāro nārāyaṇaḥ svayam . jaṭharo nakuliḥ pītā

śiveśo’naṅgamālinī .. Laḥ .. kṣaḥ kopastumbukaḥ kālo rūkṣaḥ

saṁvartakaḥ paraḥ . nṛsiṁho vidyutā māyā mahātejā yugāntakaḥ ..

stumbukasthāne stughuka iti rūkṣasthāne vyakṣyamiti parasthāne paya iti

vā pāṭhaḥ . parātmā krodhasaṁ hārau valānto meruvācakaḥ . sarvāṅgaḥ

sāgaraḥ kāmaḥ saṁyogāntyastripūrakaḥ .. valāntasthāne nalānta iti

sarvāṅgasthāne sarvāga iti vā pāṭhaḥ . kṣetrapālo mahākṣobho

mātṛkāntānalakṣayaḥ . mukhaṁ kavyavahānantā kālajihvā gaṇeśvaraḥ .

chāyāputtraśca saṁghāto malayaḥ śrīrlalāṭakaḥ .. kṣaḥ .. iti

nandanabhaṭṭācāryaviracitaṁ varṇābhidhānaṁ samāptam ..

वर्णद — varṇada Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899varṇada «varṇa-da» mfn. giving colour, colouring, dyeing

mfn. giving tribe &c.

varṇada «varṇa-da» n. a kind of fragrant yellow wood

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

varṇada 1) adj. «Farbe gebend.» — 2) n. «ein best. wohlriechendes gelbes

Holz» (kālīyaka) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

varṇada na° varṇaṁ dadāti dā—ka . 1 kālīyake gandhadravye . jaṭā° . 2

varṇaprade tri0

वर्णिन् — varṇin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899varṇin mf («iṇī») n. having a partic. colour, coloured

varṇin mf («iṇī») n. (ifc.) having the colour or appearance of.

mf («iṇī») n. belonging to the caste or tribe of (see «jyeṣṭha-v-«)

varṇin m. a painter

varṇin m. a writer, scribe

varṇin m. a person belonging to one of the four castes

varṇin m. a religious student or Brahnia-cārin (q.v.) (cf.

varṇin m. a partic. plant (?)

varṇin m. pl. N. of a partic. sect

varṇin mf («iṇī») n. («iṇī») f. a woman belonging to one of the higher

castes

mf («iṇī») n. any woman or wife

mf («iṇī») n. turmeric

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

varṇin a. [varṇo’styasya ini] (At the end of comp.) 1 Having the colour or

appearance of.

(2) Belonging to the caste of. —m.

(1) A painter.

(2) A scribe, writer.

(3) A religious student, a Brahmachārin q. v.; athāha varṇī Ku. 5. 65,

52; varṇāśramāṇāṁ gurave sa varṇī vicakṣaṇaḥ prastutamācacakṣe R. 5.

19.

(4) A person of any one of the four principal castes.

— Comp.

—liṁgin a. disguised as, or wearing the marks of, a religious

student; sa varṇiliṁgī viditaḥ samāyayau yudhiṣṭhiraṁ dvaitavane

vanecaraḥ Ki. 1. 1.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

varṇin (von varṇa) 1) adj. am Ende eines comp. P. 5, 2, 132. a) «das

Aussehen von — habend»: kumārau devavarṇinau R. 2, 92, 28. — b) «zu

der Kaste der — gehörig»: brāhmaṇa- P. 5, 2, 132, Sch. jyeṣṭha- «ein

Brahmane» KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 19. — 2) m. a) «eine zu einer der vier Kasten

gehörige Person» YĀJÑ. 2, 83. Spr. 303. KĀM. NĪTIS. 2, 33. — b) «ein

Brahmane im ersten Lebensstadium, ein» Brahmacārin P. 5, 2, 134. AK.

2, 7, 42. H. 808. an. 2, 284. MED. n. 125. HALĀY. 2, 239. RAGH. 5, 19.

KUMĀRAS. 5, 52. 65. KATHĀS. 24, 91. ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 257. —

c) pl. Bez. einer best. Secte Hall in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. S. 53. — d)

«Maler» H. an. MED. e) «Schreiber» diess. — f) vielleicht «eine best.

Pflanze»: palāśaśaravarṇinām (= lekhakānām NĪLAK.) MBH. 12, 2652. in

der Verbindung sarva- adj. (yūpa) 14, 2630 erklärt NĪLAK. varṇin durch

palāśakāṣṭhamaya. — 3) f. «Weib» H. 504. HALĀY. 2, 326. «eine Frau aus

hoher Kaste» VĀGBH. 7, 70. — Vgl. varavarṇin, varavarṇinī.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

varṇin varṇin,

I. adj., i. e. varṇa + in, f. nī, Belonging to a caste or tribe.

II. m.

1. A painter.

2. A scribe.

3. A religious student, Ragh. 5, 19.

4. A man of either of the four castes.

III. f. nī.

1. A woman.

2. Turmeric.

— Comp. vara-varṇinī, f. 1. an excellent woman, Rām. 3, 53, 30. 2. a

virtuous woman, Chr. 47, 39. 3. Gaurī. 4. Lakṣmī. 5. Sarasvatī. 6.

turmeric. 7. lac. 8. a yellow pigment = rocanā.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

varṇin a. having a cert. colour, coloured, having the appearance or

belonging to the caste of (—°); m. a person belonging to one of the four

castes, esp. a religious student.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

varṇin varṇ-in, a. coloured; -°, having the appearance; of; belonging to

the (Brāhman etc.) caste; m. man belonging to one of the four castes;

Brāhman in the first stage, religious student, Brahmacārin: pl. a certain

monastic order;

-ī, f. woman; woman of high caste.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

varṇin pu° varṇo’styasya ini . 1 citrakare 2 lekhake 3 brahmacāriṇi medi° .

athāha varṇī vidito maheśvaraḥ kumāraḥ . 4 viprādijātau ca varṇināṁ hi

badho yatra smṛtiḥ .

विपाण्डु — vipāṇḍu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vipāṇḍu «vi-pāṇḍu» mfn. pale, pallid («-tā» f.)

mfn. painted with different yellow colours

vipāṇḍu «vi-pāṇḍu» mfn. «-ḍura» mf («ā») n. pale, pallid

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vipāṇḍu (2. vi + pā-) adj. «weisslich, bleich» SUŚR. 1, 95, 13. ŚIŚ. 9, 3.

KIR. 5, 6. KATHĀS. 87, 31.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vipāṇḍu a. whitish, pale, abstr. -tā f.

विशद — viśada Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899viśada «vi-śada» mf («ā») n. (prob. fr. 1. «śad») «conspicuous», bright,

brilliant, shining, splendid, beautiful, white, spotless, pure (lit. and fig.;

«am» ind.) &c.

mf («ā») n. calm, easy, cheerful (as the mind, the eye, a smile)

mf («ā») n. clear, evident, manifest, intelligible (compar. «-tara»)

mf («ā») n. tender, soft (to the touch; as food, wind, odour)

viśada «vi-śada» mf («ā») n. (ifc.) skilled or dexterous in, fit for

mf («ā») n. endowed with

viśada «vi-śada» m. white (the colour)

viśada «vi-śada» m. N. of a king (the son of Jayad-ratha)

viśada «vi-śada» n. yellowish sulphurate of iron

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-tā» f. clearness, distinctness (v.l.)

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-nara-karankāya» (ā. «-yate»), to resemble a white

human skull

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-prajṇa» mfn. of clear understanding, keen-witted,

sagacious

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-prabha» mfn. of pure effulgence, shedding pure light

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-dātman» mfn. pure-hearted

viśada «vi-śada» n. «-dānana» mfn. (ifc.) one whose face is radiant with

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

viśada a.

(1) Clear, pure, pellucid, clean, spotless; yogatidrātaviśadaiḥ

pāvanairavalokanaiḥ R. 10. 14, 19. 39; 8. 3 praṇayaviśadā dṛṣṭiṁ vaktre

dadāti na śaṁki tā Ratn. 3. 9. Ki. 5. 12.

(2) White, of a pure, white colour; nirdhautahāragulikāviśadaṁ

himāṁbhaḥ R. 5. 70; Ku. 1. 44. 6. 25, Śi. 9. 26, Ki. 4. 23.

(3) Bright, shining, beautiful; Ku. 3. 33; Śi. 8. 70.

(4) Clear, evident, manifest.

(5) Calm, free from anxiety, at ease: jāto mamāyaṁ viśadaḥ

prakamaṁ (aṁtarātmā) S. 4. 21, V. 3. —daḥ The white colour. (viśadīkṛ)

8. U. ‘to explain make clear, illustrate’).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

viśada 1) adj. (f. ā) a) «klar, hell, blank, heiter, rein»; = śukla, pāṇḍura,

śuci u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 22. TRIK. 3, 3, 211. H. 1392. 1436. an. 3, 339.

MED. d. 39. HALĀY. 1, 132. acchasphaṭika- (ambhas) MEGH. 52.

nirdhautahāraguṭikā- (himāmbhas) RAGH. 5, 70. śīdhu Spr. 3322. madya

SUŚR. 2, 477, 3. Oel 1, 182, 3. Urin 2, 82, 15. vīrya 1, 148, 9. vyoman

RĀJA-TAR. 3, 375. prabhā ŚIŚ. 9, 26. RAGH. 4, 18. 9, 38. candrapādāḥ

MEGH. 71. candrikā RAGH. 19, 39. daśanāṁśavaḥ KUMĀRAS. 6, 25. —

hāramayūkha BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 25. himācala KIR. 5, 12. śṛṅgocchrāyaiḥ

kumudaviśadaiḥ MEGH. 59. sphaṭika- (nagendra) 63. vapus GĪT. 1, 12.

kadamba 2, 8. kaca AK. 2, 6, 2, 49. H. 570. śastra BHĀG. P. 8, 10, 14.

Auge SUŚR. 2, 141, 17. kumudaviśadāni prekṣitāni MEGH. 41.

prītiviśadairnetraiḥ RAGH. 17, 35. viśvāsaviśadāṁ dṛśam RĀJA-TAR. 8,

1279. Mund SUŚR. 2, 235, 6. prasādaviśadānana RĀJA-TAR. 3, 25.

adhara KUMĀRAS. 3, 33. oṣṭhastāmbūladyutiviśadaḥ ŚIŚ. 8, 70. smita

KUMĀRAS. 1, 45. BHĀG. P. 4, 16, 9. dantāvabhāsaviśadasmitavaktrakānti

ṚT. 3, 18. svarūpaṁ brahmacaryaṁ ca MBH. 4, 186. antarātman ŚĀK. 97.

āśaya BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 45. 4, 20, 10. hṛtpadma KAIVALJOP. bei MUIR, ST.

4, 304. hṛdaya Spr. 4568. cetas 2071. viśadātman 2680. 4232. yaśas

KATHĀS. 22, 36. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 11. kīrti 8, 21, 4. RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1152.

anuvṛtti BHĀG. P. 3, 4, 12. nṛpaśrī RĀJA-TAR. 4, 373. -prajña 5, 79.

vijñāna SARVADARŚANAS. 29, 18. svarūpāvabhāsa 47, 18. phalapaṅkti

MĀRK. P. 43, 39. nijadīrghavaṁśaviśadapreṅkhatpatākākṛti Inschr. in

Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 6, 506, Śl. 22. «rein, lauter», von einem Menschen

KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 34. — b) «klar, deutlich, verständlich»; = vyakta TRIK. H.

an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 67. viśadapaṭuravaiḥ PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 14. ucchūsita

RAGH. 8, 3. niḥśvāsa (suviśada) MṚCCH. 48, 22. śāstra HARIV. 15701

(viṣada die ältere, viśada die neuere Ausg.). vivekaviśadā kathā RĀJA-

TAR. 2, 113. bhāratavyākhyā Verz. d. Oxf. H.2,a, No. 14. fg. 161,b,35

(su-). 257,b,31 (-tara). — c) «weich anzufühlen» MBH. 12, 6856. 14, 1416.

von Speisen im Gegens. zu khara PAT. zu P. 7, 3, 69. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 35.

4, 2, 16. H. 921, Schol. SUŚR. 1, 246, 21. der Südwind 76, 14. von einem

Geruch MBH. 12, 6848. 14, 1409. — d) «geschickt zu Etwas

(geschmeidig)»: nṛtyaprayogaviśadau caraṇau MṚCCH. 9, 19. — e) am

Ende eines comp. «behaftet mit»: kāsaśvāsādiduḥkha- SARVADARŚANAS.

101, 1. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten, eines Sohnes des Jayadratha, BHĀG.

P. 9, 21, 23. — Vgl. vaiśadya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

viśada A King who was the son of Jayadratha and father of King Senajit.

(Bhāgavata, Skandha 9).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

viśada viśada,

I. adj.

1. Of a white colour, Megh. 41; Śiś. 9, 26; Kir. 5, 12.

2. Clear, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3322.

3. Pure, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2680; spotless, Śāk. d. 97.

4. Evident.

5. Beautiful.

II. m. White, the colour.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

viśada a. clear, pure, distinct, intelligible; tender, soft; dexterous, fit for

(—°). Abstr. -tā f.

शवल — śavala Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

śavala See śabara, śabala.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śavala s. śabala.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śavala śavala,

I. adj.

1. Variegated, of a variegated colour, Mālat. 145, 12; grown or yellow,

Vikr. d. 109 (cf. Wilson, Spec. of the Theatre of the Hind. 2. ed. i. 250,

n.).

2. Imitative.

3. Articulated, Rājat. 5, 68 (divided, viz. by rivers).

II. f. lī.

1. A brindled cow.

2. The cow of plenty, Vaśiṣṭha’s cow, Rām. 1, 52, 21.

III. n. Water.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śavala pu° śava—kalan . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ . 3

tadvarṇavatyāṁ dhenau strī amaraḥ .

शार — śāra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf («ā») n. (in most meanings also written «sāra»; of doubtful

derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed

with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2

mf («ā») n. yellow

śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and

yellow, green

śāra m. (also «śāraka») a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at

backgammon

śāra m. air, wind

śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. «śṝ»)

śāra mf («ā») n. («ī») f. a chessman &c. (see m.)

śāra m. a kind of bird (= «śāri»)

śāra m. Kuśa grass

śāra n. a variegated colour

śāra Vṛiddhi form of «śara», in comp.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā]

(1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted.

(2) Yellow. —raḥ

(1) A variegated colour.

(2) Green colour.

(3) Air, wind.

(4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake

trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(5) Injuring, hurting

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj.

«bunt, scheckig» P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461.

MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. —

2) m. a) «ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, — Figur» H. 487.H. an.

MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294.

pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) «Wind» P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an.

MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. —

3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-«Gras»

ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śāra śāra,

I. adj.

1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with

greyand white).

2. Yellow.

II. m.

1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10).

2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green.

3. Variegating.

4. Air, wind (cf. sāra).

5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf.

sāra).

III. f. rī.

1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16.

2. Kuśa grass.

— Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also

f. ī).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a

draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ

.) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati—te aśaśārat ta .

śāra na° śāra—ac, śṛ—ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3

vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° .

शारत्व — śāratva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāratva «śāra-tva» n. variety of colour, yellowness
शाव — śāva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāva m. (prob. fr. 1. «śū» for «śvi»; cf. «śiśu») the young of any animal

(cf. «mṛga-śāva»)

śāva mfn. (fr. «śava») cadaverous, relating to a dead body, produced by

or belonging to a corpse &c.

mfn. dead

mfn. of a cadaverous or dark yellowish colour, tawny

śāva n. defilement caused by contact with a corpse or the death of a

relation

śāva w.r. for «śyāva».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śāva a. (vī f.) [śava-aṇ]

(1) Relating to a dead body; caused by the death (of a relative);

daśāhaṁ śāvamāśaucaṁ sapiṁḍeṣu vidhīyate Ms. 5. 59, 61.

(2) Tawny, dark-yellowish. —vaḥ

(1) The young of any animal, a fawn, cub; kva vayaṁ kva

parokṣamanmatho mṛgaśāvaiḥ samamedhito janaḥ S. 2. 18;

mṛgarājaśāvaḥ R. 6. 3, 18. 37.

(2) A dark-yellowish colour.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāva (vgl. śiśu) m. «das Junge eines Thieres» H. 338. HALĀY. 2, 347.

mṛgāḥ sārdhaṁ śāvaiḥ HARIV. 15439. siṁha- 9105. KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 4.

RAGH. 6, 3. 18, 36. ŚĀK. 105, 14. Spr. 3254. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28.

UTTARAR. 94, 6 (122, 12). MĀRK. P. 43, 54. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 112.

SARVADARŚANAS. 119, 21. Vgl. mṛga- (auch MBH. 3, 16164. R. 3, 24,

18. ŚĀK. 51. BHĀG. P. 4, 2, 12).

śāva (von śava) adj. «einem Leichnam angehörig, von einer Leiche

herrührend»: karau BHĀG. P. 2, 3, 21. kapāla HARIV. 384. kalevara SĀV.

5, 61 (śyāva MBH. 3, 16809. śāva ed. Bomb., welches NĪLAK. ohne alle

Noth durch śyāma erklärt). svatanūdbhava so v. a. «entseelt» HARIV.

1142 (śocya die neuere Ausg.). āśauca PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 10. M. 5, 59. 61.

fg. 74. YĀJÑ. 3, 18. n. so v. a. śāvamāśaucam MĀRK. P. 32, 23.

śāvaśeṣāsthinicaya R. 2, 77, 22 fehlerhaft für sāvaśeṣa-, wie die ed.

Bomb. liest.

śāva adj. fehlerhaft für śyāva H. 1396, v. l. und sonst.

śāva 1 śāba in den südindischen Hdschrr. nach PISCHEL.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śāva śāva,

I. i. e. śava + a, adj.

1. Relating to, or produced by, a dead body, Man. 5, 59.

2. Dead, Sāv. 5, 61.

II. (akin to śvi, cf. śiśu), m. The young of any animal, Utt. Rāmac. 122, 12

(siṁha-, A lion’s cub).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāva [1] m. the young of an animal.

śāva [2] a. relating to a dead body, cadaverous, dead.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śāva 1. śāv-a, m. [growing: 2. śū] young of an animal; 2. a. belonging to

a corpse (śava), caused by a death (imparity); n. impurity produced by a

corpse: -ka, m. young of an animal or bird.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāva pu° śava—ghañ . 1 śiśau śabdara° . svārthe ka . tatraiva

śavasyedam aṇ . 2 śavasambaddhe tri° trirātraṁ śāvamāśaucam iti

smṛtiḥ .

शिलाधातु — śilādhātu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śilādhātu «śilā-dhātu» m. «rock-mineral», chalk

m. yellow ochre

m. red chalk

m. a white fossil substance

m. an aluminous earth of a white or yellowish colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śilādhātu m. «weisse Kreide» TRIK. 2, 3, 6. «eine best. gelbe mineralische

Substanz» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — R. 2, 96, 2 (105, 2 GORR.). 5, 32, 37.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śilādhātu pu° śilāyā dhātuścaramadhāturiva śubhratvāt . 1 śvetopale

(khaḍī) trikā° . 2 pītavarṇe gairikabhede ca rājani° .

शोण — śoṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śoṇa mf («ā» or «ī») n. red, crimson, purple &c. &c.

śoṇa m. redness

śoṇa m. fire

śoṇa m. Bignonia Indica or a variety of it

śoṇa m. red sugar cane

śoṇa m. a chestnut or bay horse

śoṇa m. the river śona or Sone (also «ā», f.; it rises in Gondwana in the

district of Nagpore, on the table-land of Amara-kaṇṭaka, four or five miles

east of the source of the Narmadā [Nerbudda], and running first northerly

and then easterly for 500 miles falls into the Ganges above Pāṭali-putra or

Patnā) &c.

śoṇa m. N. of a partic. ocean

śoṇa m. of a man g. «naḍādi»

śoṇa m. of a prince of the Paṇcālas

śoṇa mf («ā» or «ī») n. («ā») f. see above

śoṇa n. blood

śoṇa n. red-lead

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śoṇa a. (ṇā or ṇī f.) [śoṇ-ac]

(1) Red, crimson, tinged red;

styānāvanaddhaghataśoṇitaśoṇapāṇiruttaṁsayiṣyati kacāṁstava devi

bhīmaḥ Ve 1. 21; āsvāditadvi daśoṇi taśoṇaśobhāṁ Mu. 1. 8; Ku. 1. 7.

(2) Bay, reddish-brown.

(3) Yellow. —ṇaḥ

(1) Crimson, the red colour.

(2) Fire

(3) A kind of red sugar-cane.

(4) A bay horse.

(5) N. of a male river, rising in Gondavana and falling into the Ganges

near Pātaliputra q. v.; pratyagrahītpārthivavāhinīṁ tāṁ bhāgīrathīṁ śoṇa

ivottaraṁgaḥ R. 7. 36.

(6) The planet Mars; cf. lohita. —ṇaṁ

(1) Blood.

(2) Red lead.

— Comp.

—aṁbuḥ N. of a cloud which is said to rise at the destruction of the

world.

—aśman m.,

—upalaḥ 1. a red stone. —2. a ruby.

—padmaṁ a red lotus.

—puṣpakaḥ the Kovidāra tree.

—ratnaṁ a ruby.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śoṇa 1) adj. (f. ā und ī P. 4, 1, 43. VOP. 4, 17) «roth, hochroth» AK. 1, 1,

4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 140. H. 1395. an. 2, 156. MED. ṇ. 31. fg. HALĀY. 4, 48.

ROSS H. 1242. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 282. ṚV. 1, 6, 2. 126, 4. 3, 35, 3. 5,

33, 9. 10, 20, 9. MBH. 3, 15597. 4, 1677. 1826. 6, 751. R. 5, 12, 35.

KATHĀS. 37, 162. 167. śoṇo dhāvati VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 105. vṛṣan

ṚV. 9, 97, 13. yadidaṁ ghṛte hute śoṇamivārcirujjvalati KĀṬH. 8, 9. TS. 7,

3, 18, 1. KUMĀRAS. 1, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 30, 22. -rāga KATHĀS. 23, 78.

109, 120. -śiras adj. (Vogel) HARIV. 1121. tālu 1145. mukha SĀH. D. 34,

4. oṣṭha KATHĀS. 35, 11. kara 105, 2. roṣasuśoṇadṛṣṭi BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 24.

maṇimālā CHANDOM. 53. śoṇita- Spr. (II) 1073. KĀVYAPR. (1866) 70,

13. SĀH. D. 146, 5. sindūra- KATHĀS. 19, 68. kuṅkuma- BHĀG. P. 10, 60,

8. amlāna AK. 2, 4, 2, 54. -padma GĪT. 3, 5. -padmaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

-saroja Verz. d. Oxf. H. 141,b, No. 289, Z. 5. aśoṇa AV. 19, 60, 1 wohl

fehlerhaft für aśīrṇa. — 2) m. a) «Röthe» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. H. 1395. BHĀG.

P. 1, 11, 2. — b) «Feuer» H. an. MED. — c) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: =

śyonāka diess. = śyonākaprabheda und raktekṣu RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d)

N. pr. eines in Amarakaṇṭaka entspringenden und bei Pāṭaliputra in die

Gañgā sich ergiessenden Flusses AK. 1, 2, 3, 33. TRIK. H. 1090. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 3, 52. LIA. 1, 82. MBH. 2, 373. 796. 3, 8150. 12910. 14233.

HARIV. 9512. 12827. R. 1, 33, 20 (34, 18 GORR.). R. GORR. 1, 37, 4. 4,

40, 20. RAGH. 7, 33. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 65. 16, 1. 9. PRĀYAŚCITTEND.

11, «b», 8. MĀRK. P. 57, 21. BHĀG. P. 5, 19, 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 255, «a»,

15. 339, «a», 30. fg. 40. -saṁgama 39,b,25. gaṅgāśoṇam P. 2, 4, 7, Schol.

śoṇā f. MBH. 6, 337 (śoṇa VP. 183). — e) N. pr. eines Meeres DHAR. im

ŚKDR. — f) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. ŚAT. BR. 13,

5, 4, 16. — 3) f. ā s. u. 2) d) am Ende. — 4) n. a) «Blut.» — b) «Mennig»

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. dadhi- und śauṇāyana.

śoṇa 2) d) am Ende, śoṇā f. auch R. ed. Bomb. 1, 31, 20. 35, 1.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śoṇa śoṇa, i. e. probably (although already in the Vedas). sa-varṇa,

I. adj.

1. Crimson, of a crimson colour, of chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr.

214, 11.

2. Red in the face, from passion, etc.

II. m.

1. Crimson, the colour of the red lotus.

2. A horse of a reddish or bright chesnut colour, Vedāntas. in Chr. 214,

10.

3. Fire.

4. A red sort of sugar-cane.

5. The name of a river.

6. A flower, Bignonia indica.

III. n.

1. Blood.

2. Red lead.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śoṇa a. red, deep-red; m. redness, N. of a river.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śoṇa śoṇa, a. red, crimson; m. redness (C., rare); N. of a river, the Sone

or Red River which flows into the Ganges at Pāṭaliputra (C.): -tā, f.

redness;

-aśva, a. having red horses, ep. of Droṇa.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śoṇa ṛ gatau . varṇe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka°-varṇe

aka°-seṭ .) varṇaśceha raktībhāvaḥ . śoṇati sūryaḥ sandhyāyām . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śoṇa gato saka° varṇe aka° bhvā° para° seṭ . śoṇati aśīṇīt ṛdit caṅi na

hrasvaḥ .

śoṇa na° śoṇa—ac . 1 sindūre 2 rudhire ca rājani° . 3 raktekṣau 4

śoṇākabhede rājani° . 5 maṅgale grahe 6 agnau 7 citrake 8 nadabhede sa

ca amarakaṇṭakadeśagataḥ pāṭaliputrasannikṛṣṭe gaṅkāyāṁ militaḥ . 9

raktavarṇe pu° 10 tadvati tri° medi° . 11 samudrabhede dharaṇiḥ .

शोभा — śobhā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śobhā f. (ifc. f. «ā») splendour, brilliance, lustre, beauty, grace, loveliness

(«kā śobhā» with loc., «what beauty is there [in that]» i.e. «it has no

beauty»; «śobhāṁ na-kṛ», «to look bad or ugly»; ifc. often = «splendid»,

«excellent» e.g. «śaurya-śobhā», «splendid heroism»; «karma-śobhā», «a

masterpiece») &c. &c.

f. distinguished merit

f. colour, hue

f. wish, desire

f. a kind of metre

f. turmeric

f. the yellow pigment Go-rocanā

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śobhā [śubh-a]

(1) Light, lustre, brilliance, radiance.

(2)

(a) Splendour, beauty, elegance, grace, loveliness;

vapurabhinavamasyāḥ puṣyati svāṁ na śobhāṁ S. 1. 19; Me. 52, 59.

(b) Natural beauty, grandeur (as of a mountain); adriśobhā R. 2.

27.

(3) An ornament, graceful expression; śobhaiva maṁdarakṣu

bdhakṣubhitāṁbhodhivarṇanā Śi. 2. 107.

(4) Turmeric.

(5) A kind of pigment (= gorocanā q. v.)

— Comp.

—aṁjanaḥ N. of a very useful tree.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śobhā śobh-ā, f. splendour, beauty, grace, loveliness (-° sts. = splendid,

extraordinary); colour (rare): kā śobhā, what good is there in (lc.) = is a

bad thing: -bat-ī, f. N. of a town;

-vākya, n. handsome speech.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śobhā strī, śobhante’nayā . (śubha + karaṇe ghañ . ṭāp .) dīptiḥ .

tatparyāyaḥ . kāntiḥ 2 dyutiḥ 3 chaviḥ 4 . ityamaraḥ .. dyutī 5 chavī 6 iti

taṭṭīkā .. abhikhyā 7 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. śubhā 8 bhāḥ 9 śrīḥ 10 bhāsā 11

bhā 12 iti śabdaratnāvalau .. suṣamā 13 chāyā 14 vibhā 15 dṛkpriyā 16

bhānam 17 bhātiḥ 18 kamā 19 ramā 20 . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. tasyā

lakṣaṇam .

sā śobhā rūpabhogādyairyat syādaṅgavibhūṣaṇam .

śobhaivakāntirākhyātā manmathāpyāyanojjvalā .. ityujjvalanīlamaṇiḥ ..

* .. gopīviśeṣaḥ . yathā —

dṛṣṭastvaṁ śobhayā gopyā yuktaścandanakānane .

sadyo macchabdamātreṇa tirodhānaṁ kṛtaṁ tvayā ..

śobhā dehaṁ parityajya jagāma candramaṇḍalam .

tatastasyāḥ śarīrañca snigdhaṁ tejo babhūva ha ..

saṁvibhajya tvayā dattaṁ hṛdayena vidūyatā .

ratnāya kiñcit svarṇāyakiñcinmaṇivarāya ca ..

kiñcit strīṇāṁ mukhābjebhyaḥ kiñcidabjāya kiñcana .

kiñcit kiśalayebhyaśca puṣpebhyaścāpi kiñcana ..

kiñciccandanapaṅke bhyastoyebhyaścāpi kiñcana .

kiñcit phalebhyaḥ śasyebhyaḥ supakke bhyaśca kiñcana .

kiñcinnūtanavastrebhyo dugdhe bhyaścāpi kiñcana .. iti

brahmavaivarte prakṛtikhaṇḍe 9 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. haridrā . gorocanā . iti

rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śobhā strī śubha—a . 1 dīptau sā śobhā rūpabhogādyairyat

syādaṅgavimūṣaṇam . śobhaiva sāntirākhyātā manmathāpyāyanojjvalā

ujjvalamaṇyuktārthe ca 3 gopībhede brahmavai° pra° 9 a° . 4 haridrāyāṁ

5 gorocanāyāṁ rājani° .

सितरण्जन — sitaraṇjana Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitaraṇjana «sita-raṇjana» mfn. yellow

sitaraṇjana «sita-raṇjana» m. yellow (the colour)

सु — su Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. «savati, -te», to go, move ( «sru»).

su (= 1. «sū») cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; «savati, sauti», only in 3.

sg. pr. «sauti» and 2. sg. Impv. «suhi») to urge, impel, incite ; to possess

supremacy

su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) «sunoti, sunute» (in 3. pl. «sunvanti, sunvire»

[with pass. sense] and «suṣvati»; p. «sunvat» or «sunvāna» [the latter

with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. «suṣāva, suṣuma» &c. ; p. in Veda

«suṣuvas» and «suṣvāṇa» [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to

on «suṣuvāṇa» with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. «asāvīt» or «asauṣīt,

asoṣṭa» or «asaviṣṭa»; in also Impv. «sotu, sutam», and p. [mostly pass.]

«suvāna» [but the spoken form is «svāna» and so written in , «suv-» in ;

and 3. pl. «asuṣavuḥ» ; fut. «sotā» ; «soṣyati» ; «saviṣyati» ; inf. «sotave,

sotos» ; «sotum» Gr.; ind. p. «-sutya» ; «-sūya» , to press out, extract

(esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare

(wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. «sūyate» (in also ā. 3. sg. «sunve» and 3. pl.

«sunvire» with pass. sense; aor. «asāvi» Caus. «-sāvayati» or «-ṣāvayati»

(see «abhi-ṣu» and «pra-su»; aor. «asūṣavat» accord. to some «asīṣavat»)

Gr.: Desid. of Caus. «suṣāvayiṣati» Desid. «susūṣati, -te» Iutens.

«soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti»

su (= 2. «sū»), (only in 3. sg. «sauti» see «pra-sū») to beget, bring forth.

su ind. (opp. to «dus» and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek];

perhaps connected with 1. «vasu», and, accord. to some, with pron. base

«sa», as «ku» with «ka»; in Veda also «sū» and liable to become «ṣu» or

«ṣū» and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following «na» may

become «ṇa»; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right,

virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily,

willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with

«u», = «forthwith, immediately»; with «mo» i.e. «mā u», = «never, by no

means»; «su kam» often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. «tiṣṭhā su kam

maghavan mā parā gāḥ», «do tarry O Maghavan, go not past» ; «su»

always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at

the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word,

but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles,

exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. «su-baddhvā», «having well bound» ;

or even to a finite verb e.g. «su-nirvavau»

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following).

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial «ṣ» stands

for an orig. «s»):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. —II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess

power or supremacy. —III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is

changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u)

(1) To press out or extract juice.

(2) To distil.

(3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.

(4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice.

(5) To bathe.

(6) To churn. —Desid. (suṣūsati-te) —WITH ud to excite, agitate. —pra

to produce, beget.

su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and

Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the

following senses:

(1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi.

(2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c.

(3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ

sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ

H. 1. 22.

(4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v.

(5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c.

(6) Worthy of respect or reverence.

(7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and

distress.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. —2. having keen organs, acute.

—aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.

—accha a. see s. v.

—aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well.

—alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v.

—asti, —astika see s. v.

—ākāra, —ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.

—āgata see s. v.

—ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172.

—ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22.

—iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire.

—ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3.

(

—ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (—ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying;

netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2.

6, R. 15. 97. —2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a

hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. —2. praise, a word of praise.

—uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. —2. a good or clever saying.

—3. a correct sentence.

—uttara a. 1. very superior. —2. well towards the north.

—utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (

—naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion.

—unmada, —unmāda a. quite mad or frantic.

—upasadana a. easy to be approached.

—upaskara a. furnished with good instruments.

—kaṁṭakā the aloe plant.

—kaṁḍuḥ itch.

—kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. —2. a yam. —3. a sort of grass.

—kaṁdakaḥ onion.

—kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible;

vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said

than done.’ —2 easy to be managed. (

—rā) a tractable cow. (

—raṁ) charity, benevolence.

—karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. —2.

active, diligent. (—m.) N. of Viśvakarman.

—kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in

giving and using (money &c.).

—kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant.

—kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper.

—kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. —2. beautifully joined. (—m.)

a bee.

—kāṣṭhaṁ firewood.

—kuṁdakaḥ an onion.

—kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. —2. beautifully young

or youthful. (

—raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. —2. a kind of sugar-cane. —3. a kind of

grain (śyāmāka). —4 a kind of mustard. —5. the wild Champaka. (

—rā) 1. the double jasmine. —2. the plantain. —3. the great-

flowered jasmine.

—kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. —2. rice (śāli). (—kaṁ) the

Tamālapatra.

—kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine.

—kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. —2. pious, virtuous, righteous.

—3. wise, learned. —4. fortunate, lucky. —5. making good sacrifices or

offerings (—m.) 1. a skilful worker. —2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ.

—kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. —2. thoroughly done. —3. well-

made or constructed. —4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. —

5. virtuous, righteous, pious. —6. lucky, fortunate. (

—taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service;

nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. —2.

virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva

menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. —3. fortune,

auspiciousness. —4. recompense, reward.

—kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. —2. kindness, virtue. —3.

practice of penance. —4. auspiciousness.

—kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. —2. virtuous, pious, good,

righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4.

132; Bg. 7. 16. —3. wise, learned. —4. benevolent. —5. fortunate, lucky.

—kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41.

—keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree.

—kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. —2. of Śiva. —3. of Indra. —4. of Mitra and

Varuṇa. —5. of the sun. —6. of Soma.

—gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. —2. graceful, elegant. —3. easy

of access; Pt. 2. 144. —4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga).

(

—gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. —2. happiness.

—gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. —2 well-bestowed. (

—taḥ) an epithet of Buddha.

—gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. —2. sulphur. —3. a trader.

(

—dhaṁ) 1. sandal. —2. small cumin seed. —3. a blue lotus. —4. a

kind of fragrant grass. (

—dhā) sacred basil.

—gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. —2. the red Tulasī1. —3. the orange. —4. a

kind of gourd.

—gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes.

—2. virtuous, pious. (

—dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. —2. the Supreme Being. —3. a kind

of sweet-smelling mango. (

—dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. —2. a kind of fragrant grass. —

3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. —2. areca nut. —3. cloves. -mūlaṁ

the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat.

—gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. —2. sulphur. —3. a kind of rice. (

—kaṁ) the white lotus.

—gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. —2. easy. —3. plain,

intelligible.

—gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane

access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above.

—gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged;

sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390.

—gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. —2. used or applied

properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously

invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a

term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ

bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1.

—grāsaḥ a dainty morsel.

—grīva a. having a beautiful neck. (

—vaḥ) 1. a hero. —2. a swan. —3. a kind of weapon. —4. N. of one

of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. —5. of Śiva. —6. of Indra. —7. N. of a

monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went

to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought

his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he

would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed

Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his

hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of

Rāma.

—gla a. very weary or fatigued.

—cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (—m.) 1. a discerning or

wise man, learned man. —2. the glomerous fig-tree.

—carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. (

—taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. —2. merit; tava

sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. (

—tā, —trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.

—carman m. the Bhūrja tree.

—citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. —2. a kind of speckled snake.

—citrā a kind of gourd.

—ciṁtā, —ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or

consideration.

—ciram ind. for a very long time, very long.

—cirāyus m. a god, deity.

—cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs.

—celakaḥ a fine cloth.

—chatraḥ N. of Śiva. (

—trā) the river Sutlej.

—jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. —2. kind, benevolent. (

—naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. —2. a

gentleman. —3. N. of Indra’s charioteer.

—janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya

vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. —2. a number of good men. —3. bravery,

—janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī

nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. —2. legitimate, lawfully born.

—jalaṁ a lotus.

—jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. —2. a kind of speech thus described by

Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam .

sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … —jāta a. 1.

wellgrown, tall. —2. well made or produced. —3. of high birth. —4.

beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8.

—tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. —2. extremely delicate or

slender, very thin. —3. emaciated. (

—nuḥ, —nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ

paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10.

—taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. —2. (hence) melodious.

—tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. —2. having great

heat. (—m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. —2. the sun.

(—n.) an austere penance.

—tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best.

—tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. —2. exceedingly, very, very

much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā

cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. —3. more

so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan

gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. —4. consequently.

—tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

—talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below

the earth; see pātāla. —2. the foundation of a large building.

—tiktakaḥ the coral tree.

—tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. —2. very pungent. —3. acutely painful. (

—kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. —2. N. of a sage; nāmnā

sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. —2. N. of Śiva.

—tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. (

—gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree.

—tejas a. 1. very sharp. —2. very bright, or splendid. —3. very

mighty. (—m.) a worshipper of the sun.

—dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. —2. liberal or rich in

sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. (

—ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā

magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1

—daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan.

—dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth.

—daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. —2. an actor, a dancer. (

—tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.

—darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. —2.

easily seen. (

—naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. —2. N. of

Śiva. —3. of mount Meru. —4. a vulture. (

—nī —naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. (

—naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa.

—darśanā 1. a handsome woman. —2. a woman. —3. an order, a

command. —4. a kind of drug.

—dā a. very bountiful.

—dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist.

—dāman a. one who gives liberally. (—m.) 1. a cloud. —2. a

mountain. —3. the sea. —4. N. of Indra’s elephant. —5. N. of a very poor

Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched

rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and

glory.

—dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. —2. a special gift given on

particular solemn occasions. —3. one who offers such a gift.

—dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. —2. a fine day or weather

(opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense.

—dīrgha a. very long or extended. (

—rghā) a kind of cucumber.

—durlabha a. very scarce or rare.

—dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great

distance. —2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a

distance’).

—ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact.

—dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (—f.) a pretty woman.

—dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (—m.) 1. a good archer or

bowman. —2. Ananta, the great serpent. —3. N. of Viśvakarman.

—dharman a. attentive to duties. (—f.) the council or assembly of

gods. (—m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. —2. one diligent in properly

maintaining his family.

—dharmā —rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā);

yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27.

—dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. —2. kind, good. —3. happy,

prosperous. —4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).

—dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (

—dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (—f.) a

good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular

kind of royal palace. —2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. (

—syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. —2. N. of Umā,

or of one of her female companions. —3. a sort of pigment.

—dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire.

—naṁdā N. of a woman.

—nayaḥ 1. good conduct. —2. good policy.

—nayana a. having beautiful eyes. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. —2. a woman in general.

—nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. —2. having a good nave or

centre. (

—bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. —2. the Maināka mountain q. v.

—nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. (

—taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.

—niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. —2. polite, civil. (

—taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. —2. good policy or prudence.

—nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. —2. good

policy. —3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.

—nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good.

(

—thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. —2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. —3. Ved. a good

leader.

—nīla a. very black or blue. (

—laḥ) the pomegranate tree. (

—lā) common flax. (—laṁ), —nīlakaḥ a blue gem.

—netra a. having good or beautiful eyes.

—nau n. water (?).

—pakva a. 1. well-cooked. —2. thoroughly matured or ripe. (

—kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango.

—patnī a woman having a good husband.

—pathaḥ 1. a good road. —2. a good course. —3. good conduct.

—pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road.

—padmā orris root.

—parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. —2. having good or

beautiful leaves. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. —2. a class of bird-like beings of a

semi-divine character. —3. any supernatural bird. —4. an epithet of

Garuḍa. —5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. —parṇā, —parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses.

—2. a pool abounding with lotuses. —3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa.

—paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. —2. well-fitted.

—parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (—m.) 1. a

bamboo. —2. an arrow. —3. a god, deity. —4. a special lunar day (as the

day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). —5.

smoke. (—f.) white Dūrvā grass.

—palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. —2. skilfully retreated.

—pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. —2. a fit

or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.

—pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet.

—pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). —2. N. of the son of

Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.

—pītaṁ a carrot. (

—taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta.

—puṁsī a woman having a good husband.

—puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. (

—ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. —2. the Śirīṣa tree. (

—ṣpī) the plantain tree. (

—ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. —2. the menstrual excretion.

—puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. —2. having the

hair thrilling or bristling.

—pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. —2. well-filling. (

—raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). —pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree.

—prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. —2. public, notorious.

—pratarkaḥ a sound judgment

—pratibhā spirituous liquor.

—pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. —2. very celebrated, renowned,

glorious, famous. (

—ṣṭhā) 1. good position. —2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. —3.

establishment, erection. —4. installation, consecration.

—pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. —2. consecrated —3.

celebrated. (

—taḥ) the Udumbara tree.

—pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. —2. well-versed in. —3. well-

investigated, clearly ascertained or determined.

—pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. —2.

having a beautiful trunk. (

—kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. —2. of Śiva. —3. of the elephant

of the north-east quarter.

—prapāṇaṁ a good tank.

—prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. (

—bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā

suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 —2. the earliest dawn.

—prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer.

—prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. —2. close contact.

—3. dexterity.

—prasannaḥ N. of Kubera.

—prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. (

—daḥ) N. of Śiva.

—priya a. very much liked, agreeable. (

—yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. (

—yā) 1. a charming woman. —2. a beloved mistress.

—phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. —2. very fertile. (

—laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. —2. the jujube. —3. the Karṇikara

tree. —4. a kind of bean. (

—lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. —2. the plantain tree. —3. a variety of

brown grape. —4. colocynth.

—phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone.

—baṁdhaḥ sesamum.

—bala a. very powerful. (

—laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. N. of the father of Śakuni.

—bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva.

—bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. —2. strong-armed. (

—huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a

demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the

sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R.

11. 29.

—bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. (

—dhaḥ) good information or advice.

—brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. —2. N. of one of the

sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.

—bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly

favoured. —2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ

subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. —3.

pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. —4.

beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu

kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. (

—gaḥ) 1. borax. —2. the Aśoka tree. —3. the Champaka tree. —4.

red amaranth. (

—gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. —1. considering

oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu

subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. —2. vain, flattering oneself.

—bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. —2. an

honoured mother —3. a kind of wild jasmine. —4 turmeric. —5. the

Priyangu creeper. —6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife.

—bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree.

—bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. (

—draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (

—drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q.

v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.

—bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. —2. the Bilva

tree.

—bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. (

—taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge

subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. —2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite

saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya

sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. —3. a good remark; bālādapi

subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). —bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. —2.

abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.

—bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree.

—bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree.

—bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. (

—bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this

word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi,

Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22;

Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8.

—maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. —2. abounding in sacrifices.

—mati a. very wise. (

—tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence,

friendship. —2. a favour of the gods. —3. a gift, blessing. —4. a prayer,

hymn. —5. a wish or desire. —6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of

60,000 sons.

—madanaḥ the mango tree.

—madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.

—madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted.

—madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman.

—mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. (

—naḥ) 1. wheat. —2. the thorn-apple. (

—nā) the great-flowered jasmine.

—manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. —2.

well-pleased, satisfied. (—m.) 1. a god, divinity. —2. a learned man. —3. a

student of the Vedas. —4. wheat. —5. the Nimba tree. (—f., n.; said to be

pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ

Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate

sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.;

Śi. 6. 66. (—f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. —2 the Mālatī creeper. —

phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg.

—maṁtu a. 1. advising well. —2. very faulty or blameable. (—m.) a

good adviser.

—maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha.

—mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of

Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna

—mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. —2.

pleasing. —3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. (

—khaḥ) 1. a learned man. —2. an epithet of Garuḍa. —3. of Gaṇeśa.

—4. of Śiva. (

—khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. (

—khā, —khī) 1. a handsome woman. —2. a mirror.

—mūlakaṁ a carrot.

—mekhalaḥ the Munja grass.

—medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (—m.)

a wise man. (—f.) heart-pea.

—meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. —2. N. of Śiva.

—yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage.

—yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—yuktaḥ N. of Śiva.

—yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.

—raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. —2 a kind of mango tree.

—raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. —2. the orange. —3. a hole cut in a house

(suraṁgā also in this sense). (

—gaṁ) 1. red sanders. —2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a

house-breaker.

—raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant.

—rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree.

—raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree.

—rata a. 1. much sported. —2. playful. —2. much enjoyed. —4.

compassionate, tender. (

—taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. —2. copulation, sexual union

or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a

female-messenger, a go-between. —2. a chaplet, garland for the head. —

prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19.

—ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction.

—rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. —2. sweet. —3. elegant

(as a composition). (

—saḥ, —sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (—sā) N. of Durgā. (

—sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. (

—saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. —2. fragrant grass.

—rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (—

m.) 1. a good king. —2. a divinity.

—rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). —

jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.

—rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. —2.

wise, learned. (

—paḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. (

—bhaṁ) tin.

—lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. —2. fortunate.

(

—ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining,

ascertaining. —2. a good or auspicious mark.

—labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable,

feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9;

idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. —2. ready for, adapted to,

fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4.

—3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily

provoked, irascible.

—locana a. fineeyed. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a beautiful woman. —2. N. of the wife of Indrajit.

—lohakaṁ brass.

—lohita a. very red. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. —2 correct utterance. (

—ktraḥ) N. of Śiva.

—vacanaṁ, —vacas n. eloquence.

—varcakaḥ, —varcikaḥ —kā, —varcin m. natron, alkali.

—varcalaṁ linseed.

—varcasaḥ N. of Śiva.

—varṇa see s. v.

—vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. —2. the day of full

moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of

Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense).

—vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. —2. patient, enduring. —3. easy

to be borne. (

—hā) a lute.

—vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. —2. a pleasant dwelling. —3. an agreeable

perfume or odour.

—vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s

house. —2. a married woman whose husband is alive.

—vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. (

—taḥ) a hero. (

—taṁ) heroism.

—vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (—f.) a shrewd or clever

woman.

—vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. —2. a king.

—vidat m. a king.

—viditraṁ 1. a household, family —2. wealth.

—vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for

sauvidalla q. v). (

—llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem.

—vidallā a married woman.

—vidha a. of a good kind.

—vidham ind. easily.

—vinīta a. well-trained, modest. (

—tā) a tractable cow.

—vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. —2. well-furnished,

wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya

na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare

tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. —3. well done or performed.

—vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. (

—jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. the poppy. (

—jaṁ) good seed.

—vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel.

—vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. —2. of heroic strength, heroic,

chivalrous. (

—ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. —2. abundance of heroes. —3. the fruit of

the jujube. (

—ryā) wild cotton.

—bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. —2. a hymn of praise.

—vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta

vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. —2. well-rounded,

beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā .

modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi

sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ

(where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (

—ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69.

—vela a. 1. tranquil, still. —2. humble, quiet. (

—laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.

—vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly

religious or virtuous. (

—taḥ) a religious student. (

—tā) 1. a virtuous wife. —2. a tractable cow, one easily milked.

—śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.

—śaka a. capable of being easily done.

—śalyaḥ the Khadira tree.

—śākaṁ undried ginger.

—śāradaḥ N. of Śiva.

—śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled.

—śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined.

—śikhaḥ fire. (

—khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. —2. a cock’s comb.

—śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood.

—śīma a. cold, frigid. (

—maḥ) coldness.

—śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. (

—lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. —2. N. of one of the eight favourite

wives of Kṛṣṇa.

—śrīkā the gum olibanum tree.

—śruta a. 1. well heard. —2. versed in the Vedaś. (

—taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work,

together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical

authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.

—śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. —2. well-fitted; Māl. 1.

—śleṣaḥ close union or embrace.

—satyā N. of the wife of Janaka.

—saṭṭaś agreeable to look at.

—sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow).

—saraṇa. N. of Śiva.

—saha a. 1. easy to be borne. —2. bearing or enduring well. (

—haḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—sāra a. having good sap or essence. (

—raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. —2. competence. —3.

the red-flowering Khadira tree.

—sāravat n. crystal.

—sikatā 1. good sand. —2. gravel. —3. sugar.

—stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. —2. in health,

healthy, faring well. —3. in good or or prosperous circumstances,

prosperous. —4. happy, fortunate. (

—sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3.

121. (susthita in the same sense).

—sthatā —sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare,

happiness. —2. health, convalescence.

—smita a. pleasantly smiling. (

—tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.

—svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. —2. loud.

—hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. —2. beneficial, salutary.

—3. friendly, affectionate. —4. satisfied. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate.

(—m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27;

maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. —2. an ally.

-bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend.

—hṛdaḥ a friend.

—hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. —2. dear, affectionate, loving.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.).

sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und

sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1.

sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma,

suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med.

4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl

praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf.

soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi)

saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1.

pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. «auspressen, keltern» (den Soma): sunu

somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1.

andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4,

35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi

somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ

107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23.

soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5.

śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca

vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3,

2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. «braut» ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4,

17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. — suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2.

2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8,

6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ

sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam

Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. «der Saft» d. h.

Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā

sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7.

madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13.

AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG.

P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta,

adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta.

adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl.

adhiṣavaṇa.

abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1)

«kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.» ŚAT. BR.

1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate

AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4.

3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti

vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ

kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12.

abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14,

2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. «mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und

ausdrücken»: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10.

kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17.

partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30.

KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) «bespritzen»: abhisoṣyantaṁ

raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3,

Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs.

ā «keltern» u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai

tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava

sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2.

āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti.

ud «aufregen»: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P.

3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava).

ni desid. vgl. nisusūs.

nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63.

65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum

finitum zu ziehen.

pra «fortkeltern»; partic. «fortgesetzt gepresst, der» Soma «einer nicht

bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung»: pūrṇamāse vai

devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ

sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram

PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY.

3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND.

UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl.

1. prasava, prasut. — caus. «fortgesetzt keltern lassen»: prasāvayet

NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284.

vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. «zerkeltern»:

suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11.

sam «gleichzeitig» (Soma) «keltern»: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4,

6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl.

saṁsava, saṁsutasoma.

abhisam «gleichzeitig keltern für» (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi

saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1.

su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115

(preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl.

ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai

P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24,

32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P.

7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic.

suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208.

MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. («in Bewegung

setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken» (von

Savitar’s Wirkung); «aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas;

Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas»; med. «sich weihen» u. s. w. «lassen»:

savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26.

AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54,

2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra

udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā

sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa «in der Weihe

begriffen, geweiht» TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu

lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8.

5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (=

niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR.

8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9.

sarvaṁ vastatsutam «zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt» 13, 4, 2, 17.

sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme

candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante

Comm.) so v. a. «in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden» MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na

sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. «schleudere» BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ

rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1.

savitar, savīman.

anu «nach Andern antreiben» u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu

ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3.

apa «wegschicken, vertreiben» ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat

100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11.

abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. «weihen für» (acc.): oṣadhīḥ

ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. «begaben mit»: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13,

2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

ā «zutheilen, zusenden, schicken»: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a

smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82,

5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2,

29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV.

BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā

sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum «sende» so v. a. «werfe auf» 10, 99, 7.

«herbeischaffen, hercitiren»: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1.

āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti.

ud «aufwärts gehen heissen»: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati

KĀṬH. 19, 5.

ni, partic. -ṣuta «hineingegeben, eingeworfen»: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni

niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5.

nis «fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen»: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ

ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2.

niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3.

parā «wegscheuchen» u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni

parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16.

5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4.

pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. «geheissen, (heraus)

getrieben» (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1,

1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti («bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches»)

darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a.

«zusammenraffen.» — Vgl. pariṣūti.

pra «in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen» (namentlich

von Savitar gesagt); «heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten,

überlassen»: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53,

3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124,

1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā

suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1,

9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1.

8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ

prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1.

vahvannaṁ prasuvīran «zur Verfügung stellen» ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān

ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi «hingeben» AV.

12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti «überlassen» (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4,

1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v.

a. «schleudere» Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta «angetrieben,

gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist» ṚV. 1, 113. 1.

arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa

prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ «entsandt» (Pfeil) 6,

75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2.

savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5,

2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. — ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- «keine

Erlaubniss habend» ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. «nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt»

ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. — AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū

te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-,

brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-.

adhipra «wegschicken von» (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi

prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7.

abhipra «hintreiben zu»: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. —

sūta «veranlasst, geheissen» 11, 12.

pratipra, partic. -sūta «wieder verstattet» Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23.

vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1.

su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen.

su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP.

9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl.,

suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave).

savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18,

10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5)

VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati

(CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22.

sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7,

2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und

suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P.

8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). «zeugen, gebären» ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168,

9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ

«wurde geboren» 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta

10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. «brüten» (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164,

22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der

späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. «gebären»: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte

M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R.

1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64.

28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34.

38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12.

asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908.

3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH.

5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13,

18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire

KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P.

104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5,

2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk

BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. «erzeugen»: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und

Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. «erzeugen»

uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ

KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26.

khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17,

66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300.

sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt — payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr.

(II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act.

Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā «gekalbt habend» M. 8,

242. vanye sattve sūte «wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī.

nis vgl. niḥṣūti.

pra 1) «gebären»: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287.

MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate

MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403.

VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ

prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P.

49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P.

3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R.

7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1,

15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum

BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. «erzeugen»: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena

prasaviṣyadhvam «Nachkommenschaft haben» BHAG. 3, 10. «erzeugen» in

uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM.

NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125.

aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham — dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate

saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante

citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ

prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta «trugen Früchte» BHĀG. P.

4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498.

(śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) «geboren werden,

entspringen, entstehen»: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10,

36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1,

2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053.

prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15,

128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949.

sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7,

17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic.

prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā «geboren habend, niedergekommen» (die

Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED.

t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180,

8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1).

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137

(śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21.

HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8.

jananī prasūtatanayā «deren Tochter niedergekommen ist» Spr. (II) 6033.

prasūtamātrā «eben niedergekommen» KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) «geboren,

erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden» H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc.

(auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2.

tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye

RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8.

R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH.

23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20.

kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3.

kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula-

PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57,

25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67.

matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970.

bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ

srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi

saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta

TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta

MED. n. 87. — b) n. «Blüthe, Frucht»; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. «Blüthe»

auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13.

BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 («engendre» BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3.

prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti,

prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su).

anupra, partic. -sūta «darauf entstanden»:

sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361.

abhipra, partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: mātuḥ pituḥ

karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964.

saṁpra 1) «erzeugen»: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — —

sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2)

«geboren werden»: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH.

3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt

MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām

12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā

guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti.

vi «gebären»: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40,

17.

sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā

samasūyata HARIV. 1784. «erzeugen» in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi

saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252.

su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt,

suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96.

su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen

Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines

vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa

handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4,

27. «wohl, gut»; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: «gewiss,

leichtlich, völlig» u. s. w. wie «wohl» in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die

indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana

(pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol.

MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK.

nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist

in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya

mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7.

mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su

1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7.

paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21.

asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4,

32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ

jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63.

vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su

sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2.

nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva «nicht wohl» TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22,

3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1.

jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH.

8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ

svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8,

1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su

saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275.

svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. — MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed.

Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st.

svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1.

cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am

Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche

compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg.

195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2,

2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta «schön geschmückt» MBH. 3, 2114.

surakṣita «wohl gehütet» 2144. suprīta «hocherfreut» R. 1, 1, 76.

sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya «gut zu

handhaben» PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara «überaus reizend» MBH. 1,

5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam

«ganz vollständig» HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta «ganz gemein» R. GORR. 2,

11, 24. susita «schön weiss» PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha «sehr

wohlriechend» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara «sehr schwer zu

vollbringen» MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa «ein schönes Schwert» MBH. 6,

5639. subhakṣya «eine prächtige Speise» Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya «einen

guten Gefährten habend» M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa «eine schöne Stirn habend» R.

1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) «leicht auszuführen», sulabha (s. d.) «leicht zu

erlangen», susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) «leicht zu befriedigen.» — su verhält sich

wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of

su), and ii. 2, Ātm.

1. To beget, Man. 10, 32.

2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par.

Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of

generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 =

Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass.

I. suta,

1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185.

2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9.

3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175.

jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living

children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-,

m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma),

epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet

Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa.

śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128.

II. sūla,

1. Engendered.

2. Born. f. tā,

1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5.

2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn.

III. sūna,

1. Born, produced.

2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A

daughter. n.

1. Bringing forth, parturition.

2. A flower.

— With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu,

1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation).

2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10.

3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90.

— With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū).

— With pra pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 30.

2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44.

3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the

Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta,

1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M.

2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2.

3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8.

4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19.

5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she

has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl.

Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr.

d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n.

1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13.

2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus.

— With saṁpra sam-pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 33.

2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of

the Par.).

— Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu).

su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the

last).

su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go.

su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr.

*vasvām),

I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1.

II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g.

Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns,

1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5.

2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35.

3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12.

4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām,

1. Better.

2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108.

3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3.

4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55.

5. Consequently, of course.

— Cf. [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. —

adhi = S.

abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting.

ā & vi = S.

sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta.

su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °— in

adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in

E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted.

abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp.

abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee).

pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously

pressed.

su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.).

su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son,

and suṣuti.

su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and

u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used

independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in

C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka

°-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva

suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 .

16 .

viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 .

4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 .

praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ .

kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti

bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā .

supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā

vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

su avya° su—ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5

mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya

nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta

ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su

praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ

sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ .

सुवर्ण — suvarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899suvarṇa «su-varṇa» &c. see s.v.

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» mf («ā») n. of a good or beautiful colour, brilliant in

hue, bright, golden, yellow &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. gold, made of gold

mf («ā») n. of a good tribe or caste

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a good colour

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a good tribe or class

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a kind of bdellium

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. the thorn-apple

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a kind of metre

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. N. of a Deva-gandharva

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of an ascetic

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of a minister of Daśa-ratha

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of a son of Antarīkṣa, Vp.

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of a king of Kāśmīra

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of a poet

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. (rarely n.) a partic. weight of gold (= 1 Karsha, =

16 Māṣas, = 80 Raktikās, = about 175 grains troy) &c.

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a gold coin

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a kind of bulbous plant (= «suvarṇālu»)

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a kind of aloe

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a kind of sacrifice

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. turmeric

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. Sida Rhomboidea or Cordifolia

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. another plant (= «svarṇakṣīrī»)

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. a bitter gourd, colocynth

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. N. of one of the seven tongues of fire

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» m. of a daughter of Ikṣvāku (the wife of Su-hotra)

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» mf («ā») n. («ī») f. the plant Salvinia Cucullata

(perhaps w.r. for «sukarṇī»).

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. gold (of which 57 synonyms are given) &c. &c.

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. money, wealth, property, riches

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. a sort of yellow sandal-wood

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. the flower of Mesua Roxburghii

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. a kind of vegetable (= «gaura-suvarṇa»)

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. red ochre (= «suvarṇagairika»)

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. the right pronunciation of sounds

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. N. of a Tīrtha

suvarṇa «su-varṇa» n. of a partic. world

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

suvarṇa a. [śobhano varṇo’sya]

(1) Of good or beautiful colour, brilliant in hue, bright, yellow, golden.

(2) Of a good tribe or caste.

(3) Of good fame, glorious, celebrated. —rṇaḥ

(1) A good colour.

(2) A good tribe or caste.

(3) A sort of sacrifice.

(4) An epithet of Śiva.

(5) The thorn-apple. —rṇā

(1) One of the seven tongues of fire.

(2) Black aloe-wood.

(3) Turmeric.

(4) Colocynth. —rṇaṁ

(1) Gold.

(2) A golden coin (—m. also); nanvahaṁ daśasuvarṇān prayacchāmi

Mk. 2.

(3) A weight of gold equal to 16 Māṣas or about 175 grains Troy (m.

also).

(4) Money, wealth, riches.

(5) A sort of yellow sandal-wood.

(6) A kind of red chalk.

(7) N. of a tree (nāgakeśara).

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ N. of Śiva.

—ākhyaḥ 1. N. of a tree (nāgakeśara). —2. the thorn-apple.

—abhiṣekaḥ sprinkling the bride and bridegroom with water into

which a piece of gold has been dropped.

—kadalī a variety of plantain.

—kartṛ, —kāra, —kṛt m. a goldsmith.

—gaṇinaṁ a particular method of calculation in arithmetic.

—gairikaṁ a kind of red-halk.

—jīṁvikaḥ N. of a tribe; (gāṁcikaḥ śāṁkhikaścaiva kāṁsyako

maṇikārakaḥ . suvarṇajīvikaścaiva paṁcaitevaṇijaḥ smṛtāḥ .. —puṣpaḥ the

globe-amaranth.

—puṣpita a. a bounding in gold; e. g. suvarṇapuṣpitāṁ pṛthvīṁ

vicinvaṁti trayo janāḥ . śūraśca kṛtavidyaśca yaśca jānāti sevituṁ Pt. 1.

45.

—pṛṣṭha a. coated with gold, gilded.

—biṁduḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. —2. a form of Śiva.

—mākṣikaṁ a kind of mineral substance.

—yūyī yellow jasmine.

—rūṣyaka a. abounding in gold and silver.

—retas m. an epithet of Śiva.

—vaṇij m. N. of a mixed caste

—varṇaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—varṇā turmeric.

—siddhaḥ an adept who has acquired gold by magical means.

—steyaṁ stealing of gold (one of the five Mahāpātakas q. v.).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

suvarṇa 1) adj. (f. ā) a) «schönfarbig, schön aussehend», insbes. «von

schimmernder Farbe, goldig» (Gegens. durvarṇa) ṚV. 10, 68, 3. Wasser

AV. 1, 33, 1. stokāḥ 12, 3, 28. 13, 1, 22. 3, 16. TBR. 3, 7, 6, 1. darbha

KĀṬH. 31, 14. ṢAḌV. BR. 4, 7. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. Ind. St. 8, 273. dāsī MBH.

3, 14695. 13, 3427. ŚRUT. 22. mārjāra MBH. 5, 5437. Besonders von der

Farbe des Goldes: suvarṇaṁ hiraṇyam TBR. 1, 4, 7, 4. 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 4, 5.

3, 3, 4, 5. 8, 2, 4. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 1, 7. 13, 1, 1, 3. 2, 3, 2. MBH. 3, 2262.

R. 1, 74, 5. hiraṇyaṁ ca suvarṇaṁ ca 2, 76, 15. nach dem Comm. zu R.

soll suvarṇa «Gold» und hiraṇya «Silber» bedeuten. — b) «golden»:

suvarṇarajatābhyāṁ kuśībhyām TBR. 1, 5, 10, 1. 7. ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 5, 2.

12, 8, 3, 11. CHĀND. UP. 1, 6, 6. 3, 19, 1. bhūṣaṇāni R. GORR. 2, 99, 34.

— c) «zu einer guten Kaste gehörig» MBH. 13, 2607. — 2) n. «Gold» AK. 2,

9, 94. H. 1043. an. 3, 231. MED. ṇ. 84. fg. HALĀY. 2, 18. RATNAM. 87.

RĀJAN. 13, 8. AV. 15, 1, 2. sarvaṁ suvarṇaṁ (?) haritam TBR. 3, 12, 6,

6. ŚAT. BR. 11, 4, 1, 8. PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 7, 2. M. 8, 131.

321. 11, 250. -caura 49. -steya 98. fg. 101. MBH. 13, 3936. fgg. -rajataiḥ

R. 2, 32, 14. SUŚR. 1, 142, 17. 227, 19. -cūrṇa 369, 4.

durjanahutāśataptaṁ kāvyasuvarṇaṁ viśuddhimāyāti Spr. (II) 2858.

4074. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 41, 7. 42, 6. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 356. BHĀG. P.

5, 16, 21. PAÑCAT. 191, 25. -maṇikulyā RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. -muṣṭi LALIT.

ed. Calc. 202, 4. -bhasmana Verz. d. B. H. No. 994. -dāna Verz. d. Oxf. H.

87,a,36. fg. suvarṇāṅkuśa «aus Gold» R. 1, 53, 17. 2, 81, 2. RAGH. 3, 64.

HIT. 10, 9. 11, 5 -rūpakaśata RĀJA-TAR. 6, 45. zu den werthvollen Gaben

gehören: -dhenu Verz. d. Oxf. H. 35,a,33. -medinī 45,a,24. -vṛṣabha 26.

fg. — 3) m. (seltener n.) «als Gewicht ein» Karsha «Gold» AK.2,9,87.

TR.3,3,141. H. 884. H. an. MED. M.8,134. fg. YĀJÑ.1,362. COLEBR. Alg.

2. SUŚR.2,175,13. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH.1,1,17. WEBER, JYOT. 83. Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 307,b,4. PRĀYAŚCITTEND.7,a,8. M.8,213. 220. 361. śataṁ

śatasahasrāṇi suvarṇasya MBH. 3, 483. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 102. sāṣṭe śate

suvarṇānām AK.3,4,1,13. MṚCCH. 34,13. 18. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 151,a,10.

PAÑCAT. 134,3. fgg. HIT. 98,11, v. l. dvisuvarṇadhanam P. 6, 2, 55, Schol.

adhyardha-, dvi- adj. 5, 1, 29, Vārtt., Schol. VET. in LA. (III) 23, 18. 28, 4.

ṭaṅkasahasrasuvarṇa 24, 4 schwerlich richtig (suvarṇa wohl zu

streichen). BURNOUF, Intr. 238. HIOUEN-THSANG 2, 29. — 4) n. «Geld,

Reichthum» H. an. — 5) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = suvarṇālu

(suvarṇānu MED.) und kṛṣṇāguru, n. H. an. m. MED. n. = haricandana

MED. = nāgakesara RĀJAN. 6, 179. = gaurasuvarṇa 7, 152. m. =

kaṇaguggulu (vgl. suvarṇakaṇa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. «Stechapfel» ŚKDR.

nach AK. (vgl. 2, 4, 2, 58). — 6) n. «eine Art Röthel» (svarṇagairika)

RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — 7) n. «richtige Aussprache der Laute» ŚAT. BR. 14,

4, 1, 28. -vid 11, 4, 1, 8. — 8) «eine Art Opfer», n. H. an. m. MED. — 9) m.

«ein best.» Daṇḍaka-«Metrum» Ind. St. 8, 408. — 10) f. ā Bez.

verschiedener Pflanzen: = haridrā RĀJAN. 6, 198. = vāṭyālaka ŚABDAC.

im ŚKDR. = svarṇakṣīrī RĀJAN. 5, 53. — 11) f. ī «eine best. Pflanze», =

ākhukarṇī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. richtig sukarṇī unsere Hdschrr. — 12) N. pr.

a) m. a) eines Devagandharva MBH. 1, 4814. — b) pl. einer Klasse von

Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu MĀRK. P. 94, 23. — g) eines Büssers MBH.

13, 4678. fgg. — d) eines Rathgebers des Fürsten Daśaratha R. GORR. 2,

82, 11. — e) eines Sohnes des Antarīkṣa VP. 463. — z) eines Fürsten der

Kāśmīra RĀJA-TAR. 1, 97. — b) f. ā einer Tochter Ikṣvāku’s und Gattin

Suhotra’s MBH. 1, 3787. — c) n. a) eines Tīrtha MBH. 3, 7096. — b) einer

Erde: savurṇākhyaṁ jagat MBH. 5, 3551. — Nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu

P.2,4,31. TRIK.3,5,10 und SIDDH. K. 249,a,5 ist suvarṇa m. n. Vgl.

sauvarṇa u. s. w. und svarṇa.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

suvarṇa 1 I A Devagandharva. A famous celibate, he attended the

birthday celebrations of Arjuna. (Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 122, Verse

58).

suvarṇa 2 II A Brahmin sage with his body golden in colour. He once held

a talk with Manu about meritorious acts and sins. (Anuśāsana Parva,

Chapter 98).

suvarṇa (m) (M) A unit of measurement in ancient India

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

suvarṇa a. of a beautiful colour or appearance, glittering golden;

belonging to a good caste. n. gold, riches; m. (n.) a cert. weight of gold.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

suvarṇa su-varṇa, a. V. E.: having a beautiful colour, brilliant, glittering,

golden; made of gold (rare); belonging to a good caste (E., rare); n. (V.,

C.) gold; wealth; m. (rarely n.) a weight = one Karṣa of gold; m. N.: —

kaṅkaṇa, n. glod bracelet;

-kartṛ, m. goldsmith;

-kāra, m. id.;

-cūla, m. a bird;

-dāna, n. gift of gold;

-dvīpa, m. n. gold island, perhaps Sumatra;

-pārśva, N. of a locality;

-puṣpa, a. having gold as flowers (earth);

-bindu, N. of a temple;

-maya, a. (ī) consisting of gold;

-roman, m. (golden-fleeced), ram;

-lekhā, f. streak of gold (on a touchstone);

-vat, 1. ad. like gold; 2. a. containing or possessing gold, opulent: -ī, f.

N. of a town in Dakṣiṇā-patha;

-vas-tra+ādhi, n. money, clothes, etc.;

-sānūra, N. of a locality;

-siddha, m. adept in the magical obtainment of gold.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

suvarṇa na° suṣṭhu varṇo’sya . 1 svanāmakhyate dhātubhede amaraḥ 2

haricandane medi° . 3 svarṇagairike ratnamā° 4 dhane hemaca° . 5

nāgakesare rājani° . karṣaṁ suvarṇasya suvarṇasaṁjñam ityukte

karṣamite 6 kāñcane pu° līlā° . 7 yajñabhede 8 dhustūre 9 kaṇaguggulau

ca pu° rājani° . suṣṭhu varṇo rūpasakṣaraṁ vāsya . 10 surūpe 11

sundarākṣarayukte ca tri° . na suvarṇamayī tanuḥ paraṁ nanu vāgapi

tāvakī tathā naiṣa° . 12 karṣaparimāṇe vaidyaka° . agniretasśabde 59 pṛ°

kanakaśabde ca 1644 pṛ° suvarṇadhātūvapattiguṇādikaṁ dṛśyaṁm .

tavya śodhanasāraṇaprakārādikaṁ bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā tatra

pāraṇāya yogya suvarṇamāha dāhe raktaṁ sitaṁchede niṣake

kuṅkumaprabham . tāraśulvotthitaṁ snigdhaṁ komalaṁ guru hema sat

(sat uttamam) chede tu kaṭhinaṁ rūkṣaṁ vivarṇaṁ samalaṁ dalam .

dāhe chede’sitaṁ śvetaṁ kaṣe tyājyaṁ sphuṭaṁ laghu . dalaṁ (doyata)

iti loke sphuṭaṁ yad ghanāhataṁ sphuṭati . śodhanavidhiḥ

pattalīkṛtapatrāṇi hemno vahnau pratāpayet . niṣiñcet taptataptāni taile

takre ca kāñjike . gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāye tu tridhā tridhā . evaṁ

hemnaḥ pareṣaḥñca dhātanāṁ śodhanaṁ bhavet . athāśuddhasya

dodhaḥ valaṁ savīryaṁ harate narāṇāṁ rogavraja poṣayatīha kāye .

asaukhyakāryeva sadā suvarṇamaśuddhametanmaraṇañca kuryāt .

svarṇasya māraṇavidhiḥ svarṇamya dviguṇaṁ sūtamamlena saha

mardayet . tadgolakasamaṁ gandhaṁ nidadhyādadharottaram .

svarṇasya atitanūkṛtapatrasya . gandham gandhakacūrṇam . golakañca

tato ruddhvā śarāvadṛḍhasapuṭe . triṁśadvanopalairdadyāt puṭānyeva

caturdaṁśa . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasma gandho deyaḥ punaḥ punaḥ .

ruddhvā savastrakuṭṭitacikvaṇamṛttikayā vanopalaḥ (goghaṭhāḥ iti loke)

nirutthaṁ yat punarna jīvati . athānyaprakāraḥ kāñcane galite gandhaṁ

ṣoḍaśāṁśena niḥkṣipet . cūrṇayitvā tathāmleta ghṛṣṭvākṛtvā tu golakam .

golakena samaṁ gandhaṁ dattvā caivādharottaram . śarāvasaṁpuṭe

dhṛtvā puṭettriṁśad vanopalaiḥ . evaṁ saptapuṭairhema nirutthaṁ

bhasma jāyate . atrāpi pūrvavadgandhaḥ . anyacca kāñcanārarasairghṛṣṭā

samasūtakagandhayoḥ . kajjalīṁ hemapatrāṇi lepayet samayā tayā .

samayā hemapatra samayā kāñcanāratvacaḥ kalkairmūṣāyugnaṁ

prakalpayet . dhṛtvā tatsampuṭe golaṁ mṛnmūṣāsampuṭe ca tat . nidhāya

sandhirodhañca kṛtvā saṁśovya golakam . vahniṁ kharataraṁ

kuryādevaṁ dattvā puṭatrayam . nirutthaṁ jāyate bhasmasarvakarmasu

yojayet . kāñcanāraprakāreṇa lāṅgalī hanti kāñcanam . lāṅgalī (karihārī)

jvālāmukhī tathā hanyāt tathā hanti manaḥśilā . śilāsindūrayoścūrṇaṁ

samayorarkadugdhakaiḥ . saptaghā bhāvanān dadyācchoṣayecca punaḥ

punaḥ . tatastu galite hemni kalko’yaṁ dīyate samaḥ .

punardhamedatitarāṁ yathā kalko vilīyate . evaṁ velātrayaṁ dadyāt

kalakaṁ hemamṛtirbhavet . evaṁ māritasya suvarṇasya guṇāḥ suvarṇaṁ

śītalaṁ vṛṣyaṁ valyaṁ guru rasāyanam . svādu tiktaṁ ca tuvaraṁ pāke

ca svādu picchilam . pavitraṁ vṛṁhaṇaṁ netryaṁ

medhāsmṛtimatipradam . hṛdyamāyuṣkara kāntivāgviśuddhisthiratvakṛt .

viṣadvayakṣayonmādatridoṣajvaraśoṣajit . vṛṣyaṁ vṛṣāya kāmukāya hitam

. asamyaṅmāritaṁ svarṇaṁ valaṁ vīryañca nāśavet . karoti

rogānmṛtyuñca taddhanyād yatnatastataḥ tadbhedādikaṁ rājani° uktaṁ

yathā dāhe’tiraktamatha yacca sitaṁ chidāyāṁ kāśmīrakānti ca vibhāti

nikāṣapaṭṭe . snigdhañca gauravamupaiti ca yattulāyāṁ jānīta

devakanakaṁ mṛdu raktapītam . tatraikaṁ rasavedhajaṁ tadaparaṁ

jātaṁ svayaṁbhūmijaṁ kiñcānyadbahulohasaṅkarabhavaṁ ceti tridhā

kāñcanam . tatrādyaṁ kila pītaraktamapara raktaṁ tato’nyat yathā

gaurābhaṁ taditi krameṇa gaditaṁ syāt pūrvapūrvottamam . tatra

rasavedhajasya karaṇaprakāraḥ ānīya pāradaṁ devi! sthāpayet

prastaropari . tasyopari japenmantraṁ sarvabandhamayātmakam .

sāṣṭasahasraṁ deveśi! prajapet sādhakāgraṇīḥ .

svayambhūpuṣpasaṁyukte vastre cāruṇasannibhe . saṁsthāpya pāradaṁ

devi! mṛtpātra yugale śive! . puṣpayuktena sūtreṇa badhnīyāt

bahuyatnataḥ . mṛttikayā rajenaiva dhānyasya parameśvari! .

lepayedbahuyatnena raudre śuṣkāṇi kārayet . punaśca lepayeddhīmān

tato vahnau viniḥkṣipet . aṣṭamīnavamīrātrau kṣipennaiva sureśvari! .

atha vā parameśāni! mṛtpātre sthāpayedrasam . vallīrasena taddravyaṁ

śodhayed bahuyatnataḥ . ghṛtanārīrasenaiva tathaiva śodhanaṁ caret .

evaṁ kṛte tu guṭikā yadi syāt dṛḍhabandhanā . dhustūrañca samānīya

madhye śūnyañca kārayet . kṛṣṇākhyatulasīyoge tathā ghṛtakumārikā .

evaṁ kṛte vahniyoge bhasmasāt jāyate dhruvam . bhasmayāge bhavet

svarṇaṁ dhanadāyāḥ prasādataḥ . vivarṇaṁ jāyate dravyaṁ yadi pūjāṁ

na cācaret mātṛkā bhedatattre 5 pa° . bahulohasaṅkarabhavasya

karacavidhiḥ gāruḍe 188 a° . suvarṇakaraṇaṁ śṛṇu ityupakrame pītaṁ

dhustūrapuṣpañca sīsakañca palonmitam . pāṭhālāṅgalaśākhā ca

mūlamāvartanāṅbhavet . suvarṇaṁ cāmbau dahyamānaṁ na kṣoyate

yathoktaṁ yājña° agnau suvarṇamakṣīṇam .

karṣamitabrāhmaṇasvāmikakāñcanarūpasuvarṇaharaṇaṁ mahāpāta t .

mahāpātalanirūpaṇe pāyaścittavivekaḥ .

सुवर्णक — suvarṇaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899suvarṇaka mfn. golden

mfn. of a beautiful colour

suvarṇaka m. Cathartocarpus Fistula

suvarṇaka m. (ifc.) a Karsha of gold

suvarṇaka n. gold

suvarṇaka n. yellow brass

suvarṇaka n. lead

suvarṇaka m. or n. (?) a kind of plant (v.l. «-ṇa-kṣīrī»)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

suvarṇaka gaṇa pakṣādi zu P. 4, 2, 80. 1) m. «Cathartocarpus (Cassia)

fistula» AK. 2, 4, 2, 4. RATNAM. 21. BHĀVAPR. 5. — 2) n. «Gold»:

labhedbahu suvarṇakam MBH. 3, 5021. 13, 5384. am Ende eines adj.

comp.: bahu- «wobei viel Gold gespendet wird» R. 1, 1, 91 (98 GORR.). 7,

99, 8. — 3) am Ende eines adj. comp. «ein» Karsha «Gold»: niṣkaṁ (so

lesen wir st. niṣka der ed. Bomb.) pañcasuvarṇakam MBH. 18, 306. — 4)

n. «gelbes Messing» H. 1047. «Blei» 1041. — 5) «eine best. Pflanze» WISE

147. suvarṇakṣīrī st. dessen SUŚR. — Vgl. bahu- und sauvarṇakāyana.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

suvarṇaka na° suvarṇamiva kāyati kai—ka . 1 pikṣe hemaca° . suṣṭhu

varṇo’sya kap . 2 sundaravarṇayakte tri° .

हरि — hari Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hari mfn. (for 2. see col.3) bearing, carrying (see «dṛti» and «nātha-h-«).

hari mfn. (prob. fr. a lost «hṛ», «to be yellow or green»; for 1. «hari» see

above, col.2) fawn-coloured, reddish brown, brown, tawny, pale yellow,

yellow, fallow, bay (esp. applied to horses), green, greenish &c, &c.

hari m. yellow or reddish brown or green (the colour)

hari m. a horse, steed (esp. of Indra) &c. &c.

hari m. a lion &c.

hari m. the sign of the zodiac Leo

hari m. the sun

hari m. = «hari-nakṣatra»

hari m. a monkey &c.

hari m. ( also, a ray of light; the moon; Phaseolus Mungo; a jackal; a

parrot; a peacock; the Koil or Indian cuckoo; a goose; a frog; a snake;

fire)

hari m. the wind or N. of Vāyu (god of the wind)

hari m. of Indra &c.

hari m. (esp.) N. of Viṣṇu-Kṛiṣṇa (in this sense thought by some to be

derived from «hṛ», «to take away or remove evil or sin») &c.

hari m. of Brahmā

hari m. of Yama

hari m. of śiva

hari m. of śukra

hari m. of Su-parṇa

hari m. of a son of Garuḍa

hari m. of a Rākṣasa

hari m. of a Dānava

hari m. of a son of Akampaua (or Anukampana)

hari m. of a son of Tārakākṣa

hari m. of a son of Parājit

hari m. of a son of Parāvṛit

hari m. of a worshipper of Viṣṇu

hari m. of various authors and scholars (esp. of the poet Bhartṛi-hari as

the author of the Vākya-padīya; also with «miśra, bhaṭṭa, dīkṣita» &c.)

hari m. of a mountain

hari m. of a world (cf. «hari-varṣa»)

hari m. of a metre

hari m. of a partic. high number

hari pl. men, people (= «manuṣyāḥ»)

mfn. a partic. class of gods under Manu Tāmasa

hari mfn. («ī») f. N. of the mythical mother of the monkeys ‘holus’,

‘helvus’, ‘fulvus’; Lith. ‘zalias’, ‘zelti’; Slav. ‘zelenu’; Germ. ‘gelo’, ‘gelb’;

Eng. ‘yellow’.]

hari ind. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2; for 2. an exclamation («alas!»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hari a. [hṛ-in]

(1) Green, greenishyellow.

(2) Tawny, bay, reddishbrown (kapila); hariyugyaṁ haristasmai

prajibāya puraṁdaraḥ R. 12. 84, 3. 43.

(3) Yellow. —riḥ

(1) N. of Viṣṇu; hariryathaikaḥ puruṣottamaḥ smṛtaḥ R. 3. 49.

(2) N. of Indra; R. 3. 55, 68, 8. 79.

(3) N. of Śiva.

(4) N. of Brahman.

(5) N. of Yama.

(6) The sun.

(7) The moon.

(8) A man.

(9) A ray of light. (10) Fire.

(11) Wind.

(12) A lion; Bv. 1. 50, 51.

(13) A horse.

(14) A horse of Indra; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca vartaṁte vājinaḥ

S. 1, 7. 7.

(15) An ape, a monkey; U. 3. 45, R. 12. 57.

(16) The cuckoo.

(17) A frog.

(18) A parrot.

(19) A snake. (20) The tawny green or yellow colour.

(21) A peacock.

(22) N. of the poet Bhartṛhari.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ 1 a lion. 2. N. of Kubera. 3. of Śiva.

—aśvaḥ 1 Indra. —2. Śiva.

—kāṁta a. 1. dear to Indra. —2. beautiful as a lion

—kelīyaḥ the country called vaṁga q. v.

—keśaḥ N. of Śiva.

—gaṁdhaṁ a kind of sandal.

—caṁdanaḥ —naṁ 1. a kind of yellow sandal (the wood or tree);

R. 3. 59, 6. 60; S. 7. 2; Ku. 5. 69. —2. one of the five trees of paradise;

paṁcaite devataravo maṁdāraḥ pārijātakaḥ . saṁtānaḥ kalpavṛkṣaśca

puṁsi vā haricaṁdanaṁ Ak. (

—naṁ.) 1. moonlight. —2. saffron. —3. the filament of a lotus.

—tālaḥ (by some regarded as derived from harita) a kind of

yellow-coloured pigeon. (

—laṁ) yellow orpiment; H. D. 1; Śi. 4. 21; Ku. 7. 23, 33. (

—lī)

(1) the Dūrvā grass. —2. a streak or line in the sky. —3. = haritālikā

(1). —tālakaḥ a kind of yellow-coloured pigeon. (—kaṁ) 1. yellow

orpiment. —2. a theatrical de coration. —tālikā 1. the fourth day of the

bright half of Bhādrapada. —2. the Dūrvā plant. —turaṁgamaḥ N. of Indra.

—dāsaḥ a worshipper or votary of Viṣṇu. —dinaṁ a particular day sacred

to Viṣṇu. —devaḥ the asterism Śravaṇa. —dravaḥ 1. a green fluid. —2.

powder of the blossoms of the Nāgakeśara tree. —druḥ a tree. —dvāraṁ

N. of a celebrated Tīrtha or sacred bathing-place. —netraṁ 1. the eye of

Viṣṇu. —2. the white lotus. (—traḥ) an owl. —padaṁ the vernal equinox.

—parṇaṁ a radish. —priyaḥ 1. the Kadamba tree. —2. a conch-shell. —3. a

fool. —4. a madman. —5. Śiva. (—yaṁ) the root Uśīra. —2. a sort of

sandal. —priyā 1. Lakṣmī. —2. the sacred basil. —3. the earth. —4. the

twelfth day of a lunar fortnight. —bhaktaḥ a worshipper of Viṣṇu. —bhuj

m. a snake. —maṁthaḥ, —maṁthakaḥ a chick-pea. —locanaḥ 1. a crab.

—2. an owl. —vaṁśaḥ N. of a celebrated work by Vyāsa supplementary to

the Mahābhārata. —varṣaḥ N. of one of the nine divisions of Jambudvīpa.

—vallabhā 1. Lakṣmī. —2. the sacred basil. —vāsaraḥ ‘Viṣṇu’s day,’ the

eleventh day of a lunar fortnight (ekādaśī). —vāhanaḥ 1. Garuḍa. —2.

Indra. -diś f. the east. —vījaṁ yellow orpiment. —śaraḥ an epithet of Śiva

(Viṣṇu having served Śiva as the shaft which burnt down ‘the three cities’

or cities of the demon Tripura). —sakhaḥ a Gandharva. —saṁkīrtanaṁ

repeating the name of Viṣṇu. —sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ N. of Arjuna. —hayaḥ 1.

Indra; R. 9. 18. —2. the sun. —3. N. of Skanda. —4. of Gaṇeśa. —haraḥ a

particular form of deity consisting of Viṣṇu and Śiva conjoined. -ātmakaḥ

1. N. of Garuḍa. —2. of Śiva’s bull. —hetiḥ f. 1. the rain-bow;

kathamavalokayeyamadhunā harihetimatīḥ (kakubhaḥ) Māl. 9. 18. —2. the

discus of Viṣṇu. -hūtiḥ the ruddy goose; Śi. 9. 15.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hari UṆĀDIS. 4, 118. 1) adj. «fahl, blassgelb, gelblich» (namentlich als

Farbe des Rosses); «grünlich» AK. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1396. an. 2, 470. fg.

MED. r. 100. fg. HALĀY. 4, 50. ṚV. 4, 15, 7. 8. 5, 27, 2. Agni heisst vṛṣā

hariḥ 7, 10, 1. 8, 25, 23. VS. 13, 42. insbes. der Rosse des Indra NAIGH.

1, 15. du. ṚV. 1, 20, 2. 35, 2. 55, 7 u.s.w. 2, 18, 4. TS. 6, 5, 9, 2. pl. ṚV.

3, 44, 1. 50, 2. 4, 16, 1 u.s.w. 6, 47, 18. des Vāyu 4, 48, 5. harīṇāṁ patiḥ

8, 24, 14. als Farbe des Soma 1, 121, 8. 8, 58, 5. 9, 30, 5. 32, 2. 50, 3.

divā harirdadṛśe naktamṛjraḥ 97, 9. 10, 96, 2. 6. VS. 8, 11. der Soma —

Steine ṚV. 3, 44, 1. 5. des Indra — Keils 4. Indra’s selbst (nach Comm.) 3.

des Feuers 8, 43, 4. des suparṇa AV. 19, 65, 1. der Sonne ṚV. 10, 96, 1.

1, 95, 1. des haṁsa AV. 10, 8, 18. vṛṣā hariḥ VS. 38, 22; vgl. ŚAT. BR. 14,

3, 1, 26 und vārṣāhara. Haare ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. 3, 2, 1, 3. pitā hariḥ

heisst Varuṇa AV. 5, 11, 1. — Rosse (subst. s. bes.) MBH. 3, 1720. R. 3,

9, 5. 10. 5, 12, 34. RAGH. 3, 43. 12, 84. -śmaśrujaṭādhara MBH. 13, 2660.

-locana R. 4, 16, 9. candana (vgl. haricandana) MBH. 7, 2922. -madhyā

(zugleich Viṣṇu) RĀJA-TAR. 3, 416. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 2. śaṣpa BHĀG.

P. 10, 20, 11. -dhūmrakeśa HARIV. 12949. -piṅga MBH. 1, 8080. -piṅgala

13, 7414. R. GORR. 1, 60, 12. 4, 20, 21. 7, 23, 4, 32. — 2) m. a) «Ross»,

insbes. Indra’s (s. auch unter 1) AK. H. 1233. TRIK. 2, 8, 41 (hariḥ

krāntaḥ zu lesen). H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 281. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 11903.

11921. 12003. 13, 4896. HARIV. 4943. RAGH. 12, 103. KATHĀS. 19, 108.

harito harīṁśca «die Rosse des Sonnengottes und» Indra’s ŚĀK. 6, 5. 166.

BHĀG. P. 8, 11, 16. — b) «Löwe» AK. 2, 5, 1. 3, 4, 25, 177. H. 1283. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 2, 59. 5, 70. MBH. 3, 15645. 7, 7634. R. 2, 97, 5. RAGH. 2,

59. VIKR. 16. ZdmG.27, 96. SĀH. D. 237, 16. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 47. Spr.

(II) 3366. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 44. 8, 2, 6. 10, 9. 10, 53, 56. — c) «der Löwe im

Thierkreise» VARĀH. BṚH. 18, 16. 19, 2. 24, 14. — d) «Affe» AK. 3, 4, 25,

177. H. 1292. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 76. 5, 70. MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. 3,

16275. R. 1, 16, 6. 2, 96, 22. 3, 20, 26. 78, 19. 4, 28, 28. 38, 26. 30. 7,

91, 10. UTTARAR. 65, 14 (84, 9). RAGH. 12, 57. 15, 99. WEBER, RĀMAT.

UP. 299. — e) «Schakal» (bhīru) NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. in Verz. d. Oxf. H.

194,a, No. 445. — f) «Papagei» AK. H. an. MED. «Pfau, der indische

Kuckuck» und «Gans» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — g) «Frosch» AK. H. 1354. H.

an. MED. HALĀY. 3, 40. 5, 70. «Schlange» AK. H. an. MED. — h)

«Phaseolus Mungo» (mudga) H. 1172. — i) «die Sonne» AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 99.

H. an. MED. HĀR. 11. HALĀY. 1, 35. 5, 70. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 18. — k)

«Lichtstrahl» AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 86. H. an. MED. — l) «der Mond» AK. H. an.

MED. HĀR. 13. HALĀY. 5, 70. — m) «Wind» AK. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1,

76. 5, 70. «der Gott des Windes» R. ed. Bomb. 1, 32, 23. vāyu v. l. im

Comm. — n) ein Name a) Indra’s AK. TRIK.1,1,57. H. 171. H. an. MED.

HALĀY.1,52.5,70. JAṬĀDH. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 191,a,29. Spr. (II) 207.

R.1,15,26. RAGH.3,43. 55. 68.9,57. 12,103. ŚĀK. 95,1. 156. 162.

BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 53,19. SĀH. D. 237,16. — b) Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s

AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 28. H. 214. H. an. HALĀY. 1, 23. 5, 70. Ind. St. 1, 79. 2, 7.

92. 9, 81. BHAG. 11, 9. 18, 77. MBH. 1, 1167. 3, 15553.6, 301. HARIV. 10.

2382. 7447. R. 1, 31, 13. 45, 23. RAGH. 3, 49. KUMĀRAS. 7, 44. ŚĀK.

165. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 286. KṚṢṆAJ. 222 u.s.w. Spr. (II) 671. 3452.

6408. 6859. 7173. 7369. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 5. 99, 1. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 126.

416 (zugleich adj.). 451. PRAB. 54,12. BHĀG.

P.1,2,23.4,30,24.7,10,24.8,1,30. PAÑCAT. Pr. 1. VET. in LA. (III)1,14.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 45,b,31. SĀH. D. 237,16. HALL 126. SARVADARŚANAS.

46,3. 57. 16. 66,15. 67,9. 69,13. 17. 72,4. BURNOUF, Intr. 131. — g)

Jama’s AK. H. 184. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 72. 5, 70. — d) Brahman’s und

Śiva’s MED. hariṁ (= Brahman Comm.) harantamanuyanti devāḥ TAITT.

ĀR. 10, 49. — e) Śukra’s und Suparṇa’s (vgl. unter 1)

NĀNĀRTHADHVANIM. a. a. O. — z) «des Feuers» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

KĀLAC. 1, 15. — o) «ein best. Metrum: metrical sequence»COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 8). — p) elliptisch für -nakṣatra «das» Nakshatra Śravaṇa

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 60, 21. 98, 17; vgl. harideva. — q) pl. = apatya NAIGH.

2, 2. — r) «eine best. hohe Zahl» bei den Buddhisten VYUTP. 182. Mel.

asiat. 4, 638, N. — s) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter Manu

Tāmasa VP. 262. MĀRK. P. 74, 57. BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 28. = jayāḥ in einer

früheren Geburt Verz. d. Oxf. H. 56,b,33. — b) eines Sohnes des Garuḍa

MBH. 5, 3598. — g) eines Rākṣasa MBH. 3, 16365. — d) eines Dānava

HARIV. 2283. 14284. — e) verschiedener Männer: ein Sohn Akampana’s

(Anukampaka’s) MBH. 7, 2030. fgg. 12, 9151. fgg. Tārakākṣa’s 8, 1417.

fgg. Parājit’s HARIV. 1980. Parāvṛt’s VP. 421, N. 12. ein Verehrer Viṣṇu’s

BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 11. = bhartṛ- TRIK.2,7,26. ZdmG.7,164. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

161,b,9. 162,b,30. 247,b,13. Verz. d. Tüb. H. 13. SARVADARŚANAS.

140,1. 144,5. 146,5. — Verz. d. B. H. No. 969. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b, No.

760. 335,a, No. 787. 352,b,7 (sein Geschlecht). RĀJA-TAR. 6, 166. HALL

31. 50. 75. — z) einer Welt H. an. MED.; vgl. harivarṣa. — 3) f. harī N.

«der Urmutter der Affen» MBH. 1, 2624. 2628. R. 3, 20, 26. — Vgl. nara-,

nṛ-, bhartṛ-, vana-, śrī-, sarva-.

hari (von 1. har) adj. «tragend» u. s. w. in dṛti- und nātha- P. 3, 2, 25.

hari1 1) Adj. «fahl, blassgelb, gelblich» (namentlich als Farbe des Rosses)

; «grünlich.» 2) m. a) «Ross», insbes. Indra’s. b) «Löwe.» c) «der Löwe im

Thierkreise.» d) «Affe.» e) «Schakal.» f) «Papagei» g) Pfau ; der indische

Kuckuck. (!) h) Gans i) «Frosch.» k) «Schlange.» l) «Phaseolus Mungo.» m)

«die Sonne.» n) «Lichtstrahl.» o) «der Mond.» p) «Feuer.» q) «Wind, der

Gott des Windes.» r) Bein. a) Indra’s. b) Viṣṇu-Kṛṣṇa’s. g) Jama’s. d)

Brahman’s. e) *Śiva’s. z) Śukra’s. h) Suparṇa’s. s) «ein best. Metrum.» t)

elliptisch für harinakṣatra «das Mondhaus Śravaṇa» u) «eine best. hohe

Zahl» (buddh.). v) Pl. = apatya. w) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Klasse von Göttern

unter Manu Tāmasa und = jayās in einer früheren Geburt. b) eines

Sohnes des Garuḍa. g) eines Rākṣasa. d) eines Dānava. e) verschiedener

Männer. z) eines Berges VP.2,4,41. h) einer Welt. 3) f. harī N.pr. «der

Urmutter der Affen.»

hari2 Adj. «tragend» u.s.w. in dṛti- und nātha-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hari 1 I A synonym of Viṣṇu. (See under Viṣṇu).

hari 2 II A warrior of Subrahmaṇya. (Śalya Parva, Chapter 45, Verse 61).

hari 3 III A warrior who fought on the side of the Pāṇḍavas and was

killed by Karṇa.

hari 4 IV An asura, the son of Tārakākṣa, who got from Brahmā a boon

enabling him to prepare Mṛtasaṅjīvanī. (a medicine to revive dead

people). (Karṇa Parva, Chapter 33, Verse 27).

hari 5 V Son of King Akaṁpana. Though he was as powerful and

proficient in archery as Mahāviṣṇu, and equal in prowess to Indra in war

he got into the hands of his enemies and was killed. (Droṇa Parva,

Chapter 52, Verse 27).

hari 6 VI A particular sect of the attendants of Rāvaṇa. They attacked

the army of monkeys. (Vana Parva, Chapter 285).

hari 7 VII A very powerful bird born in Garuḍa’s dynasty. (Udyoga Parva,

Chapter 101, Verse 13).

hari 7i VIII A particular species of horses. They possess long hairs on the

neck and are golden in colour. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 23, Verse 13).

hari 1x IX A daughter born to Kaśyapaprajāpati by his wife Krodhavaśā.

Lions and monkeys originated from this Hari. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa,

Araṇyakāṇḍa, Canto 14).

hari x X A son of Dharmadeva. Dharmadeva begot four sons, Hari, Kṛṣṇa,

Nara and Nārāyaṇa of the daughters of Dakṣa. (Devi Bhāgavata, 4th

Skandha).

hari xi XI A sect of Devas. During the Tāmasamanvantara there were

four such sects, viz. Haris, Satyas, Supāras and Sudhīs. (See

Manvantara).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hari hari (curtailed harit),

I. adj.

1. Green.

2. Tawny.

3. Yellow, Indr. 1, 7; Arj. 4, 12.

II. m.

1. Green, tawny, yellow, the colour.

2. Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, Hit. pr. d. 28, M. M.; Pañc. pr. d. 1.

3. Indra, Śāk. d. 156.

4. Śiva.

5. Yama.

6. The sun, Mālat. 149, 1.

7. The moon.

8. A ray of light.

9. Fire.

10. Wind.

11. A horse (of Indra; cf. the ved. use of harit, and Śāk. 6, 5); Arj. 4,

32.

12. A lion, Vikr. d. 16.

13. A parrot.

14. The Indian cuckoo.

15. A peacock.

16. A goose.

17. An ape, Utt. Rāmac. 84, 9.

18. A frog.

19. A snake.

20. One of the varṣas, or divisions, into which the continent is divided.

— Comp. nara-, and nṛ-, m. Viṣṇu, in his fourth avatāra, as a lionheaded

man, Bhāg. P. 5, 18, 7; 7, 8, 27.

— Cf. A. S. growan; O.H.G. groen, groni; A. S. groen, grene; also geal,

gealla; Lat. gilvus; [greek] and probably [greek] cf. harit.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hari a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. horse, esp. the steeds of Indra (2,

but also 20-200), lion, ape, the sun, fire, wind, E. of Viṣṇu, Indra etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hari har-i, a. [3. hṛ, be yellow] tawny, yellow (esp. of horses); greenish

(rare, C.); m. (C.) steed (sp. of Indra); lion; monkey; N. of Indra and

(more commonly) of Viṣṇu-kṛṣṇa; N. of a various men; (hari)-keśa, a.

tawny-haried;

-gaṇa, m. troop of horses; N.;

-ghoṣa, m. N.;

-candana, m. (?) Indra’s sandal tree (one of the five trees in Indra’s

paradise); kind of sandal tree; n. yellow sandal;

-candra, m. N.;

-cāpa, m. n. Indra’s bow, rainbow.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hari pu° hṛ—in . 1 viṣṇau 2 siṁhe 3 sarpe 4 vānare 5 bheke 6 śukakhage

amaraḥ . 7 cadre 8 sūrye 9 vāyau 10 aśve 11 yame 12 hare 13 brahmaṇi

14 kiraṇe jambudvīpasya 15 varṣabhede 16 indre ca medi° 17 mayūre 18

kokile 19 haṁse 20 vahnau śabdara° . bhartṛharināmake vākyapradīya

granthakārake 21 paṇḍite trikā° . 22 piṅgalavarṇe 23 hari dvarṇe

hemaca° 24 tadvati tri° . hariṁ viditvā haribhiśca vājibhiḥ raghu . 25 pīte

anekārthako° .

हरिक — harika Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harika m. (for 2. see p.1291, col.2) a thief, gambler

harika m. (for 1. see p.1289, col, 2) a horse of a yellowish or reddish

brown colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harika (von 1. hari) 1) m. «ein gelbliches Ross» H. 1242. — 2) am Ende

eines adj. comp. (f. ā) in a- «nicht das Wort» hari «enthaltend» (Gegens.

harivant) LĀṬY. 3, 1, 18.

harika (von 1. har) m. «Dieb» und «Würfelspieler» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei

WILSON.

harika1 *harika m. «ein gelbliches Ross.» Vgl. aharika

harika2 *harika m. 1) «Dieb.» 2) «Würfelspieler.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harika hari + ka, m. A horse of a yellowish-blue tint.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harika pu° hari + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharidvarṇāśve hemaca0

हरिकः — harikaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

harikaḥ [hari-saṁjñāyāṁ kan] 1. A horse of a yellowish or tawny colour.

(2) A thief.

(3) A gambler (with dice)

harikaḥ A diamond.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

harikaḥ puṁ, (harireva . hari + svārthe saṁjñāyāṁ vā kan .)

pītaharitavarṇāśvaḥ . tatparyāyaḥ . hālakaḥ 2 . iti hemacandraḥ .. cauraḥ

. akṣakrīḍakaḥ . iti kecit ..

हरिण — hariṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇa mf («ī») n. (the fem. «hariṇī» belongs to «harita») fawn-coloured,

yellowish, tawny (also said of unhealthy complexion), greenish, green

hariṇa m. yellowish (&c.) the colour

hariṇa m. a deer, antelope, fawn, stag (one of 5 kinds, others being

called «ṛṣya, ruru, pṛṣata, mṛga») &c. &c.

hariṇa m. an ichneumon

hariṇa m. a goose

hariṇa m. the sun

hariṇa m. a minor division of the world

hariṇa m. N. of Viṣṇu or śiva

hariṇa m. of a Gaṇa of śiva

hariṇa m. of a serpent. demon

hariṇa m. of an ichneumon (v.l. «harita»)

hariṇa mf («ī») n. («ī») f. see below.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hariṇa a. (ṇī f.) [hṛ-inan]

(1) Pale, whitish.

(2) Reddish or yel lowish white. —ṇaḥ

(1) A deer, an antelope; (said to be of five kinds: —hariṇaścāpi

vijñeyaḥ paṁcabhedo’tra bhairava . ṛṣyaḥ khaḍgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca

mṛgastathā Kalikā P.); api prasannaṁ hariṇeṣu te manaḥ Ku. 5. 35.

(2) The white colour.

(3) A goose.

(4) The sun.

(5) Viṣṇu.

(6) Śiva.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. deer-eyed, fawn-eyed. (

—kṣaḥ) N. of Śiva. (

—kṣī) ‘deer-eyed’, a woman with beautiful eyes.

—aṁkaḥ 1. the moon. —2. camphor.

—kalaṁkaḥ, —dhāmanu m. the moon.

—nayana, —natre, —locana a. deereyed, fawn-eyed.

—nartakaḥ a Kinnara.

—hṛdaya a. deer-hearted, timid.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariṇa UṆĀDIS. 3, 46. 1) adj. proparox. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. «fahl, gelblich» (vgl.

hari, harit, harita) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1392. an. 3, 233. MED.

ṇ. 87 (lies viśade). HALĀY. 4, 47. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. die Sonne

PRAŚNOP. 1, 8 = MAITRJUP. 6, 8. ein siecher Mann MBH. 2, 1741. 5,

3742. 13, 4828. 5886. 5889. fgg. f. ī s. u. harita. — 2) m. a) «Gazelle

(Antilope cervicapra» MOLESWORTH s. v. haraṇa) AK. 2, 5, 8. 3, 4, 3, 24.

H. 1293. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 75. VIŚVA a. a. O. ṚV. 1, 163, 1. 5, 78, 2.

gehörnt AV. 3, 7, 1. 2. 6, 67, 3. yaddhariṇo yavamatti VS. 23, 30. TS. 5, 5,

19, 1. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 9, 8. -carman KAUŚ. 16. MBH. 3, 11342. 15629. R.

2, 34, 50. SUŚR. 1, 46, 20. 73, 6. 200, 8. 15. VĀGBH. 6, 44. RAGH. 9, 57.

KUMĀRAS. 5, 15. ad ŚĀK. 78. Spr. (II) 7368. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 28.

KATHĀS. 22, 128. 96, 26 (arthahariṇāḥ «Reichthümer als Gazellen»).

BHĀG. P.3,21,44.8,2,21. PAÑCAT. 140,23. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,a,1. v. u. —

lolākṣī R. 5, 25, 45. -locanā 33, 17. hariṇākṣa adj. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 65.

f. hariṇākṣī Spr. (II) 637. 2509. 6519. KATHĀS. 33, 88. PRAB. 40, 12.

hariṇekṣaṇā Spr. (II) 6408. śiśuhariṇadṛś 3801. — b) «die Sonne; Gans»;

ein N. Viṣṇu’s und Śiva’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) N. pr. a) eines

Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2152. — b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s Journ. of the Am.

Or. S. 6, 523. — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12, 4942 nach der

Lesart der ed. Bomb.; harita ed. Calc. — 2) f. ī gaṇa gaurādi zu P. 4, 1, 41.

a) «Gazellenweibchen» AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. TS. 7, 4, 19, 2 (v. l. zu VS. 23,

20). MBH. 3, 2424. 11342. HARIV. 4827. R. 3, 62, 37. RAGH. 2, 11. 9, 55.

14, 69. Spr. (II) 1456. 7370. CAURAP. 28. BHĀG. P. 5, 8, 1. 9, 23, 8.

cakitahariṇīprekṣita MEGH. 102. cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā 80. — b) Bez.

«zweier Pflanzen»: = mañjiṣṭhā und svarṇayūthī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

Bez. «einer best. Schönen» H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śukābhā HALĀY. 4,

53. — d) «eine Statue von Gold» AK. H. 1464. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O.

HALĀY. 1, 131. Spr. (II) 5497. — e) «ein best. Metrum» H. an. (vṛtta st.

vṛnta zu lesen). MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. metrical sequenceCOLEBR. Misc.

Ess. 2, 162 (XII, 4). ŚRUT. 39. CHANDOM. 93. Ind. St. 8, 394. fg. — f)

Bez. «einer best.» Svarabhakti Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. WEBER,

PRATIJÑĀS. 108. — g) N. pr. a) einer Apsaras RAGH. 8, 78. — b) einer

Yakṣiṇī SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 297 (67). — g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s)

BHĀG. P. 8, 1, 30. — Vgl. mandara-, vegi-, hāriṇa, hāriṇika.

hariṇa 1) Adj. (f. hariṇī) gehört zu harita «fahl, gelblich» (auch von der

Farbe siecher Männer) ; «grünlich, grün.» 2) m. a) «Gazelle», wohl

«Antilope cervicapra» ŚIŚ.6,9.13,56. b) «Ichneumon» MAITR.S.3,9,3

(116,17). Vgl. f)greek). c) die Sonne. d) «Gans.» e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s und

Śiva’s. f) N.pr. a) eines Schlangendämons. b) eines Gaṇa Śiva’s. g) eines

Ichneumons MBH.12,138,31. vgl. 20 «b).» 3) f. ī a) «Gazellenweibchen»

ŚIŚ.12,30. b) «Rubia Munjista» RĀJAN.6,192. c) «gelber Jasmin»

RĀJAN.10,99. d) Bez. «einer best. Schönen.» e) «eines Statue von Gold.»

f) Pl. Bez. «der Verse» AV.18,2,11-18 KAUŚ.80,3.5.82.83. VAITĀN.37,24.

g) «ein best. Metrum.» h) «eine best. Svarabhakti.» i) N.pr. a) einer

Apsara’s. b) einer Yskṣṇī. g) der Mutter Hari’s (Viṣṇu’s).

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hariṇa A nāga which belonged to the Airāvata family. It was burnt to

death at the Sarpasatra of Janamejava. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 57, Verse

11).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hariṇa (akin to harit, cf. hari),

I. adj., f. ṇī, Yellowish-white, MBh. 13, 5893; Rājat. 5, 482.

II. m.

1. Yellowish-white (the colour).

2. White.

3. A deer, an antelope, Pañc. 140, 23.

4. A goose.

5. Viṣṇu, Śiva.

6. A minor division of the world.

III. f. ṇī.

1. A doe, Megh. 80; 102.

2. Yellow jasmine.

3. A beautiful woman.

4. A golden image, Rājat. 5, 15.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariṇa a. fallow, pale, yellowish, green; m. a kind of antelope (f. -ṇī),

ichneumon, N. of a serpent-demon etc.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hariṇa hariṇa, a. (ī) yellowish, tawny (also of unhealthy complexion); m.

antelope, gazelle: -ka, m. dim. gazelle;

-dhāman, m. abode of the antelope, moon;

-nayanā, f. gazelle-eyed woman;

-lakṣman, m. (marked with an antelope), moon;

-lāñchana, m. id.;

-locana, a. gazelle-eyed;

-śiśu, m. fawn;

-akṣa, a. (ī) gazelle-eyed: -ī, f. — woman.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hariṇa puṁstrī° hṛ—inan . svanāmakhyāte 1 paśau amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 2

śive 3 viṣṇau 4 haṁse 5 śuklavarṇe 6 pāṇḍuvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . hariṇaḥ śītalo vaddha° viṇmūtro dīpano lathuḥ . rase pāke ca

madhuraḥ sugandhaḥ sannipātahā rājava° tanmāṁsaguṇāḥ . hariṇaścāpi

vijñeyaḥ pañcabhedo’tra bhairava! . ṛṣyaḥ khaṅgo ruruścaiva pṛṣataśca

mṛgastathā . ete balipradāneṣu carmadāne ca kīrtitāḥ kālikāpu° 66 a° .

हरिणी — hariṇī Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariṇī f. a female deer, doe &c. &c.

f. Rubia Munjista

f. yellow jasmine

f. one of the four kinds of beautiful women (corresponding to the kind

of man termed «mṛga»)

f. a golden image

f. a kind of metre (four times -, )

f. a kind of Svara-bhakti (q.v.)

f. N. of an Apsaras

f. of a Yakṣiṇī

f. of the mother of Hari (Viṣṇu) pl. N. of the verses

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hariṇī

(1) A female deer, doe; cakitahariṇīprekṣaṇā Me. 82, R. 9. 55, 14. 69.

(2) One of the four classes of women (also called citriṇī q. v.)

(3) Yellow jasmine.

(4) A good golden image.

(5) N. of a metre.

(6) The green colour.

(7) Turmeric.

(8) Madder.

— Comp.

—dṛś a. deer-eyed. (—f.) a deer-eyed woman; kimabhavadvipine

hariṇīdṛśaḥ U. 3. 27.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariṇī s. u. hariṇa und harita.

hariṇī s.u. hariṇa und harita.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hariṇī A daughter of Hiraṇyakaśipu, also called Rohiṇī. She was married

to Viśvapati, an Asura. Vana Parva, 211, 18).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariṇī -> hariṇa & harita.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hariṇī hariṇī, f. (of hariṇa) V., C.: female deer, gazelle; C.: golden image;

N. of an Apsaras: -dṛś, f. gazelle-eyed woman;

-nay-anā, f. id.;

-rūpā-ya, den. Ā. resemble a gazelle.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

hariṇī strī, (hariṇa + ṅīṣ .) mṛgī . (yathā, raghuḥ . 2 . 11 .

dhanurbhṛto’pyasya dayārdrabhāvamākhyātamantaḥkaraṇairviśaṅkaiḥ

.

vilokayantyo vapurāpurakṣṇāṁprakāmavistāraphalaṁ hariṇyaḥ ..)

svarṇapratimā . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 50 .. (harita + ṅīṣ . tasya naḥ .) haritā

. nārībhedaḥ . vṛttabhedaḥ . iti medinī .. (tallakṣaṇaṁ yathā —

nasamaralā gaḥ ṣaḍvedairhayairhariṇī matā .. vistārastu

chandaḥśabde draṣṭavyaḥ ..) mañjiṣṭhā svarṇayūthī . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

taruṇī . varastrī . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. (surāṅganābhedaḥ . yathā, raghuḥ .

8 . 79 .

carataḥ kila duścaraṁ tapastṛṇavindoḥ pariśaṅkitaḥ purā .

prajighāya samādhibhedinīṁ harirasmai hariṇīṁ surāṅganām ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hariṇī strī haritavarṇā strī ṅīṣ tasya naḥ . 1 haritadvaṇāṁyāṁ striyāṁ

medi° 2 svarṇapratimāyām amaraḥ . 3 svarṇayuthyāṁ 4 mañjiṣṭhāyāṁ

rājani° . 5 taruṇyāṁ 6 varastriyāṁ śabdara° vasuyugahayainarsau mnau

mlo go yadā hariṇī tadā vṛ° ra° uktalakṣaṇake 7 saptadaśākṣarapādake

chandomede hariṇasya strī ṅīṣ . 8 mṛgyāñca 9 apsarogede . carataḥ kila

duścaraṁ tapaḥ pṛṇavindīḥ pariśaṅkitaḥ purā . prajighāya

samādhibhedigīṁ harirasmai hariṇīṁ surāṅganām raghuḥ .

हरित् — harit Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harit mfn. fawn-coloured, pale yellow, yellowish, pale red, fallow, bay,

tawny, greenish &c. &c.

harit m. pale yellow, reddish, bay (the colour)

harit m. a horse of the Sun («harito harīṁś ca», acc pl. «the horses of the

Sun and of Indra»)

harit m. emerald

harit m. a lion

harit m. the sun

harit m. N. of Viṣṇu

harit m. Phaseolus Mungo (prob. w.r. for «hari»)

harit f. a female horse of a reddish colour, a bay mare (applied to the

horses of Soma, Indra, and Tvaṣṭṛi, and esp. to «sapta-haritaḥ», «the 7

horses of the Sun», thought to symbolize the days of the week)

harit f. a quarter of the sky &c.

harit pl. rivers (= «nadyas»)

mfn. grass or a species of grass

mfn. turmeric

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

harit a. [hṛ-iti]

(1) Green, green ish.

(2) Yellow, yellowish.

(3) Greenish-yellow. —m.

(1) The green or yellow colour.

(2) A horse of the sun, a bay horse; satyamatītya harito harīṁśca

vartate vājinaḥ S. 1.; diśo haridbhirharitāmiveśvaraḥ R. 3. 30, Ku. 2. 43.

(3) A swift horse.

(4) A lion.

(5) The sun

(6) Viṣṇu.

(7) The kidneybean. —m. n.

(1) Grass.

(2) A quarter, region.

(3) A quarter or point of the compass; R. 3. 30.

(4) Turmeric (usually f. only in the last 3 senses). —COMP. —aṁtaḥ

the end of the quarters (digaṁta); Bv. 1. 60. —aṁtaraṁ different regions,

various quarters; Bv. 1. 15. —aśvaḥ

(1) the sun; Ki. 2. 46; R. 3. 22, 18. 23; Śi. 11. 56. —2. the arka plant.

—garbhaḥ green or yellowish Kuśa grass with broad leaves. —parṇaṁ a

radish. —maṇiḥ (harinmaṇiḥ) an emerald; Śi. 3. 49. —varṇa a. greenish,

green-coloured.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harit UṆĀDIS. 1, 99. ŚĀNT. 2, 10. 1) adj. «falb, gelblich, grünlich» (m.

«gelbe» u. s. w. «Farbe») AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 23, 145. 6, 2, 19. TRIK. 3,

3, 194. H. 1394. an. 2, 210. MED. t. 174. HALĀY. 4, 49. VIŚVA bei

UJJVAL. f. «eine falbe Stute» ṚV. 10, 33, 5. (agneḥ) yukṣvā hyaruṣī rathe

harito deva rohitaḥ 1, 14, 12. 4, 6, 9. 7, 5, 5. 42, 2. der Sonne (vgl. 2) a)

NAIGH. 1, 15. sieben ṚV. 1, 50, 8. 115, 3. fgg. 121, 13. 4, 13, 3. 5, 45, 10.

7, 60, 3. svasāraḥ 66, 15. zehn 9, 63, 9 (vgl. jedoch SV. II, 5, 1, 8, 3).

sūraścidā harito asya rīramat 10, 92, 8. AV. 13, 2, 4. 6. 28. 3, 17. TS. 2,

3, 8, 2. Indra’s du. ṚV. 3, 44, 3. des Tvaṣṭar 6, 47, 19. Soma 9, 69, 9.

seine Rosse suparṇyaḥ 86, 37. die Finger 38, 3. — PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 31. —

śmaśru MBH. 7, 7894 (hari- ed. Bomb.). R. GORR. 1, 15, 4. haridbhūtaṁ

jalam 4, 40, 50. marakata (vgl. harinmaṇi) BHĀG. P. 8, 2, 4. — 2) m. a)

«Sonnenross» TRIK. 2, 8, 42. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. KUMĀRAS. 2,

43. RAGH. 3, 30. ŚĀK. 6, 5. — b) = harinmaṇi «Smaragd» BHĀG. P. 10, 41,

21. — c) «Löwe; die Sonne»; ein N. Viṣṇu’s ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. —

d) «Phaseolus Mungo» (mudga) schlechte v. l. für hari H. 1172. — 3) f. a)

«Weltgegend» NAIGH. 1, 6. AK. 1, 1, 2, 2. TRIK. 3, 3, 194. H. 166. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 1, 100. VIŚVA a. a. O. pavamāno harita ā viveśa ṚV. 8, 90,

14 (vgl. v. l. AV. 10, 8, 3). ŚAT. BR. 2, 5, 1, 5. pratīcī R. 7, 75, 10. RAGH.

3, 30. Spr. (II) 4758. aindrī (vom Vorhergehenden zu trennen) KATHĀS.

103, 204. dhanapateḥ RĀJA-TAR. 1, 43. uttara- 290. SĀH. D. 79,13.

312,1. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 255,b,19. — b) pl. so v. a. nadyaḥ «Flüsse» NAIGH.

1, 13. — 4) «Gras» MED. (m. n.). VIŚVA; «ein best. Gras» H. an.

Dūrvā-«Gras» VIŚVA. — Vgl. hari und harita.

harit 1) Adj. «falb, gelblich, grünlich», 2) m. a) «Sonnenross.» b)

«Smaragd.» c) «Löwe.» d) «die Sonne.» e) Bein. Viṣṇu’s. f) «Phaseolus

Mungo.» Richtig hari 3) f. a) «eine falbe Stute.» b) «Weltgegend.» c) Pl.

«Flüsse.» 4) m. n. «Gras oder ein best. Gras, Dūrvā-Gras.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harit harit (for original harant, cf. hiraṇa),

I. adj. Green.

II. m.

1. Green, the colour.

2. A horse of the sun (properly, his rays), Chr. 287, 8 = Rigv. i. 50, 8.

3. A lion.

4. The sun, Śāk. 6, 5.

5. Viṣṇu.

6. Kidney bean.

III. m. and n. Grass.

IV. f.

1. A quarter, or point of the compass, Śiś, 9, 28.

2. Turmeric.

— Cf. [greek] Goth. gulth; A. S. gold (see hari, Yellow, and hiraṇa); akin

is also Goth. glitmunjan, To shine; cf. also [greek] Goth. gras; A. S.

graes.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harit a. fallow, yellowish, greenish. m. a fallow horse, esp. of the Sun-

god, emerald; f. a fallow mare; region, quarter of the sky.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

harit har-it, a. [3. hṛ] yellowish, tawny; greenish (rare, P.); m. (C.) horse

of the sun; emerald (rare, P.); f. tawny mare (V.); quarter of the sky (V.,

C.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

harit puṁ, (harati nayanamanāṁsīti . hṛ + hṛsṛruhiyuṣibhya iti . uṇā° 1 .

99 . iti itiḥ .) nīlapītamiśritavarṇaḥ . sabujaraṅ iti bhāṣā .. tatparyāyaḥ .

pālāśaḥ 2 haritaḥ 3 . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 5 . 14 .. śyāmaḥ 4 . iti śabdaratnāvalī

.. aśvaviśeṣaḥ . iti medinī .. sūryāśvaḥ . iti trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ .. yathā, kumāre

. 2 . 43 .

utpāṭya meruśṛṅgāṇi kṣuṇṇāni haritāṁ khuraiḥ .

ākroḍaparvatāstena kalpitāḥ sveṣu veśmasu ..) mudgaḥ . iti

hemacandraḥ .. siṁhaḥ . sūryaḥ . viṣṇuḥ . iti kecit .. haridvarṇaviśiṣṭe, tri

..

harit strī, (hṛ + itiḥ .) dik . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 3 . 1 .. (yathā, raghuḥ . 3 . 30 .

tatāra vidyāḥ pavanātipātibhirdiśo haridbhirharitāmiveśvaraḥ ..)

haridrā . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

harit puṁ, klī, (hṛ + itiḥ .) tṛṇam . iti medinī ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harit pu° hṛ—iti . 1 nīlapītamiśritavarṇe (pātāraraṅga palāśavarṇa ca

amaraḥ 2 tadvati tri° . 3 sūryāśve trikā° 4 mudge hemaca° . 5 siṁhe 6

sūrye 7 viṣṇau ca pu° 8 diśi strī amaraḥ . 9 haridrāyāṁ rājani° 10 tṛṇe

na° medi° .

हरित — harita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harita mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. yellowish, pale yellow, fallow, pale red, pale

(also, «pale with fright»), greenish, green (also; «verdant» as opp. to

«śuṣka» «dry») &c. &c.

harita m. yellowish (the colour)

harita m. Phaseolus Mungo qr Lobatus

harita m. a lion

harita m. N. of a son of Kaiśyapa

harita m. of a son of Yadu

harita m. of a son of Rohita

harita m. of a son of Rohitāśva

harita m. of a son of Yuvanāśva

harita m. of a son of Parāvṛit

harita m. of a son of Vapushmat

harita m. of an ichneumon (v.l. «hariṇa»)

harita m. pl. the descendants of Harita (also called «harītāḥ»), āśvśr. (cf.

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. N. of partic. verses of the (also «haretā

mantrāḥ»)

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. of a class of gods in the 12th Manvantara

harita mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. («ā») f. Dūrvā grass (= «nīla-dūrva»

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. turmeric

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. a brown-coloured grape

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. Sesbana Aegyptiaca

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. a kind of Svara-bhakti

harita n. a yellowish or greenish substance

harita n. gold

harita n. greens, vegetables («unripe grain»

harita n. a kind of fragrant plant (= «sthauṇcyaka»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

harita a. (tā or hariṇī f.) [hṛ-itac] Green, of a green colour, verdant;

ramyāṁtaraḥ kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ S. 4. 10; Ku. 4. 14; Me. 21; Ki. 5.

38.

(2) Tawny.

(3) Dark-blue. —taḥ

(1) The green colour.

(2) A lion.

(3) A kind of grass.

— Comp.

—aśman m. 1. an emerald. —2. blue vitriol.

—chada a. green-leaved.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harita UṆĀDIS. 3, 93. 1) adj. (f. ā und hariṇī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39.

VOP. 4, 27. AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL.

zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. hariṇī in der älteren, haritā in der späteren Sprache)

«falb, gelblich; grünlich, grün» (daher auch im Gegensatz zu śuṣka dem

«verdorrten Kraut») AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1395. MED. t. 175.

HALĀY. 4, 49. mṛga ṚV. 10, 86, 3. Rosse MBH. 13, 4923. Bart des Indra

ṚV. 10, 23, 4. Wagen u. s. w. 3, 44, 1. 4. 10, 96, 3. 9. Soma und was

dazu gehört: śṛṅge śiśāno hariṇī 9, 70, 7. ruc 111, 1. 10, 94, 2. AV. 6, 49,

2. dhānāḥ 18, 4, 34. Frosch ṚV. 7, 103, 4. 6. 10. takman AV. 1, 23, 2. 5,

22, 2. 6, 20, 3. śocañchuṣkāsu hariṇīṣu jarbhurat ṚV. 10, 92, 1. vanaspati

9, 5, 10. AV. 10, 8, 31. kuśa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 6. Gras LĀṬY. 2, 11, 15.

KĀṬH. 32, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 8. HARIV. 3574. R. GORR. 2, 65, 16. 3, 73, 39.

KIR. 5, 38. AK. 2, 1, 10. 9, 16. TRIK. 3, 3, 297. H. 955. HALĀY. 2, 4.

BHĀG. P. 3, 22, 30. Bohne SUŚR. 1, 197, 18. kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ

ŚĀK. 86. — ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 20. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5,

54. 8, 17. 9, 44. 30, 12. fg. 54, 30. 34. 67, 5. 68, 91. BṚH. 2, 5. LAGHUJ.

1, 6. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. -puṣpa KAUŚ.10. 26. 116.

vaiḍūryamaṇiratnābhaḥ prāsādo haritaprabhaḥ HARIV. 8985. -pāṇḍu

SUŚR. 1, 159, 19. -kapiśa MEGH. 21. haritāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 4, 14. —

gomaya wohl «frischer Kuhmist» KAUŚ. 19. GOBH. 4, 8, 12. «gelb» als

Farbe des Goldes AV. 4, 37, 4. 7, 99, 1. 10, 2, 33. 3, 3. 11, 2, 12. 15, 2, 1.

ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 6. rukma KĀṬH. 10, 14. VS. 23, 37. AIT. BR. 1, 23. TS.

6, 2, 3, 1. TBR. 1, 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 9, 8. 3, 9, 6, 5. «gelb» (vor Schrecken),

«bleich» (vgl. hariṇa) TS. 6, 5, 5, 2. hariṇī śyāvā «gelbbraun» (ohne Röthe)

als Farbe der Schwangeren TBR. 2, 3, 8, 1. — 2) m. a) «Phaseolus Mungo»

(mudga) H. 1172. «ein best. Gras», = manthānaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b)

«Löwe» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) pl. Bez. eines Abschnittes des

AV. 19, 22, 5. hierher vielleicht haritā mantrāḥ (so trennen wir) Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 93,a,1 v. u. — d) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern im 12ten

Manvantara MĀRK. P. 94, 23. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 29. — b) verschiedener

Männer P. 4, 1, 100. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 56, 7 (haritakutsa-

zu lesen; vgl. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3). Kaśyapa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. ein

Sohn Jadu’s HARIV. 4206. Rohita’s 758. BHĀG. P. 9, 8, 1. Rohitāśva’s VP.

373. Yuvanāśva’s 369. Parāvṛt’s (vgl. hari) 420. 421, N. 13. Vapushmant’s

MĀRK. P. 53, 27. pl. Harita’s Nachkommen (vgl. hārita) P. 2, 4, 67, Vārtt.

ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3 (im comp.). — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12,

4942. hariṇa ed. Bomb. — 3) f. haritā a) Dūrvā-«Gras» TRIK. 3, 3, 194.

MED. = haridrā «Gelbwurz» DHANV. 1, 17. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = jayantī,

kapiladrākṣā, pācī und nīladūrvā RĀJAN. ebend. — b) «eine best.»

Svarabhakti (v. l. haritā und hā-) Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. — 4) f.

hariṇī s. u. hariṇa — 5) n. a) «Gold» AV. 5, 28, 5. 9. 11, 3, 8. KĀṬH. 8, 5. —

b) «Grünes» so v. a. «Gemüse» CARAKA 1, 27. — c) «eine best.

wohlriechende Pflanze», = sthauṇeyaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pīta-

und hārita.

harita 1) Adj. (f. haritā) in der älteren Sprache hariṇī «falb, gelblich» (von

der Gesichtsfarbe eines Erschrockenen) ; «grünlich, grün» 304,23. 2) m.

a) «Phaseolus Mungo.» b) «eine best. Grasart», = manthānaka

RĀJAN.8,135. c) «Löwe.» d) Pl. Bez. «bestimmter Sprüche.» Auch haritā

mantrāḥ. e) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Gruppe von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu.

b) verschiedener Männer. g) eines Ichneumons. 3) f. haritā a) «Dūrvā-

Gras» ŚIŚ.4,21 (am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā) = nīladūrvā RĀJAN.8,108.

b) «Gelbwurz.» c) «grüne Traube» RĀJAN.11,104. d) «Sesbania

aegyptiaca» RĀJAN.4,133. e) «eine best. Svarabhakti.» 4) n. a) «gelblicher

oder grünlicher Stoff» ŚAT.BR.14,7,1,20.2,12. b) «Gold.» c) «Grünes», so

v.a. «Gemüse» VIṢṆUS.5,85 (nach dem Comm. «unreifes Getraide).» d)

eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze, = sthauṇeyaka.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

harita 1 I A King who was the grandson of Hariścandra and son of

Rohita. (Bhāgavata, 10th Skandha).

harita 2 II A King, who was the son of Vapuṣmān and grandson of

Svāyambhuvamanu. He was King of Haritavarṣa in the island of Śālmali.

(Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 50, 28; Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa, 2, 3).

harita 3 III A son born to Yadu of the nāga woman called Dhūmravaṇā.

He founded an independent kingdom in the Nāga island and became a

prominent leader of the Madgura tribe. (Hari Vaṁśa, 2, 38; 29, 34).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harita harita,

I. adj., f. tā, or iṇī (cf. hariṇa),

1. Green, Megh. 21; Hit. i. d. 178, M. M. (in haritī-kṛta, adj. Made

green)

2. Dark blue, Kir. 5, 38.

3. Grassy.

II. m.

1. Green, the colour.

2. A lion.

III. f. tā.

1. Bent grass.

2. Turmeric.

3. A brown grape.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harita (f. ā, older hariṇī fallow, pale, yellow, green. m. N. of sev. men

etc.; f. haritā Dūrvā grass; n. gold, greens, any yellowish or greenish

substance.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

harita har-ita, a. (ā, C.: hariṇī, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright);

greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass;

vegetable;

-kapiśa, a. yellowish brown;

-cchada, a. having green leaves;

-dhānya, n. green = unripe corn;

-pattra-maya, a. (ī) formed of green leaves; (harita) -sraj, a. bearing

yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain

(steed; Br.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harita pu° hṛ—itac . 1 siṁhe 2 manthānatṛṇe rājani° 3 haridvarṇe 4

tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca . 5 dūrvāyāṁ medi° 6

jayantyāṁ 7 haridrāyāṁ 8 kapiladrākṣāyāṁ 9 pācyāṁ 10 nīladūrvāyāñca

strī rājani° ṭāp . 11 sthauṇeyake na° rājani° .

हरितत्व — haritatva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritatva «harita-tva» n. yellowish green (the colour)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haritatva n. Nom. anstr. zu harita 1) CARAKA.124,6.

हरिताल — haritāla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritāla m. a kind of pigeon of a yellowish green colour, Columba

Hurriyals

haritāla n. yellow orpiment or sulphuret of arsenic (described as the seed

or seminal energy of Viṣṇu = «harer vīryam»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

haritāla &c. See under hari.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haritāla (von harita) 1) m. «eine Taubenart, Columba Hurriyala» (s.

HAUGHTON unter hariyāla) RĀJAVALLABHA im ŚKDR. — 2) f. ī a) = dūrvā

«Panicum Dactylon» H. 1193. an. 4, 300. MED. l. 167. HĀR. 240. HALĀY.

2, 36. — b) «Schwertklinge» H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — c) Bez. «des 4ten

(3ten) Tages in der lichten Hälfte des» Bhādrapada RĀJAMĀRTAṆḌA im

ŚKDR. — d) «eine best. Linie am Himmel» H. an. MED. «der Luftraum»

(chāyāpatha) HĀR. — 3) n. AK. 3, 6, 3, 32. «Auripigment, Arsenicum

flavum» TRIK. 2, 9, 35. H. 1058. MED. RATNAM. 287. RĀJAN. 13, 67.

dhātavo haritālasya MBH. 3, 11617. haritālārdrapīta HARIV. 4083. -darī R.

4, 37, 7. 5, 5, 12. SUŚR. 1, 132, 17. 133, 5. 2, 66, 2. 252, 5. 536, 16. ārdra

KUMĀRAS.7,23. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 44,9. 54,30. 110. 81,7. HEM.

YOGAŚ.3,108. Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S.6,505, Śl. 16. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 320,b, No. 760. — Vgl. āla und tāla.

haritāla 1) m. «eine Taubenart, Columba Hurriyala.» 2) ī a) «Panicum

Dactylon.» b) «Schwertklinge» c) «der 4te (oder 3te) Tag in der lichten

Hälfte des Bhādrapada.» d) «*eine best. Linie am Himmel.» e) «*der

Luftraum.» 3) n. «Auripigment, Arsenicum flavum» RĀJAN.13,2.65.

ŚIŚ.4,21.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

haritāla (Ṃ) A mineral (yellow orpiment) got from mountains, which is

red like the clouds at dusk. (Vana Parva, Chapter 158, 94).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

haritāla haritāla, i. e. harita + āla,

I. n. Yellow orpiment.

II. f. lī.

1. Bent grass.

2. A line in the sky.

3. A sort of creeper.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

haritāla n. auripigment; -maya, f. ī made of it.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haritāla haritā-la, n. yellow orpiment: -maya, a. (ī) formed of yellow

orpiment.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haritāla na° harivarṇasya pītavarṇasya tālaḥ pratiṣṭhā yatra . 1 pītavarṇe

upadhātubhede sa haritālasamānanavāṁśukaḥ māghaḥ . 2

pītavarṇapakṣibhede puṁstrī° rājani° . striyāṁ ṅīṣ . svārthe ka . haritāle

na° amaraḥ . haritālaṁ dvidhā proktaṁ patrākhyaṁ piṇḍasaṁjñakam .

tayorādyaṁ guṇaiḥ śreṣṭhaṁ tato hīnaguṇaṁ param . svarṇavarṇaṁ guru

snigdhaṁ sapatraṁ ābhrapatravat . patrākhyaṁ tālakaṁ vidyād

guṇādyaṁ tadrasāyanama . niṣpavaṁ piṇḍasadṛśaṁ svalpasatvaṁ tathā

guru . strīpuṣpahārakaṁ svalpaguṇaṁ tat piṇḍatālakam . hapati ca

haritālañcārutā dehajātām sṛjati ca bahutāpāmaṅgasaṅkocapīḍām .

vitarati kaphavātau kuṣṭharogaṁ vidadhyādidamaśitamaśuddham

māritañcāpyasamyak . tālakaṁ kaṇaśaḥ kṛtvā taccūrṇaṁ kāñjike pacet .

dolāyantreṇa yāmaikaṁ tataḥ kūṣmāṇḍajadravaiḥ . tilataile pace dyāma

yāmañca triphalājale . evaṁ yantre caturyāmaṁ pakva śuddhyati tālakam

. atha tālasya māraṇavidhiḥ sadalaṁ tālakaṁ śuddhaṁ

paunarnavarasena tu . khalve vimardayedekaṁ dinaṁ paścādviśāṣayet .

tataḥ punarnavākṣāraiḥ sthālyāmūrdhaṁ prapūrayet . tatra tadvolakaṁ

dhṛtvā punastemaiva pūrayet . ākaṇṭhaṁ piṭharaṁ tasya pidhānaṁ

dhārayenmukhe . sthālīṁ culyāṁ samā ropya kamādvahni vivardhayet .

dinānyantaraśūnyāni pañca vahniṁ pradāpayet . evaṁ tanmriyate tālaṁ

mātrā tasyaikaraktikā . anupānānyanekāni yathāyogyaṁ prayojayet .

evaṁ śodhitasya māritasya tālakasya guṇāḥ . haritālaṁ kaṭu snigdhaṁ

kaṣāyoṣṇaṁ haredviṣam . kaṇḍū kuṣṭhāsyarogāmrakaphapittakacavraṇān

. tālakaṁ harate rogān kuṣṭhamṛtyujvarāpaham . śodhitaṁ kurute kāntiṁ

vīryavṛrdhiṁ tathāyuṣam bhāvapra° . haritālakhagamāṁsaguṇāḥ

haritālo’lpaviṭkaḥ syāt kaṣāyo madhuro laghuḥ .

raktapittapaśamanastṛṣāghno vātakopanaḥ rājani° .

हरिद्रा — haridrā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridrā f. see below.

haridrā f. Curcunia Longa, turmeric or its root ground to powder (46

synonyms of this plant are given) &c.

f. N. of a river

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

haridrā [hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ dravati dru-gatau-ḍa]

(1) Turmeric.

(2) The root of turmeric powdered; see Malli. on N. 22. 49.

— Comp.

—āna a. of a yellow colour. (

—bhaḥ) 1. the yellow colour. —2. Zedoary.

—gaṇapatiḥ, —gaṇeśaḥ a particular form of the god Gaṇeśa.

—rāga, —rāgaka a. 1. turmeric-coloured. —2. unsteady in

attachment or affection, fickle-minded (as a lover); (thus defined by

Halayudha:

—kṣaṇamātrānurāgaśca haridrārāga ucyate).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

haridrā haridrā, f. Turmeric, Sch. ad Vikr. d. 53; MBh. 3, 12880; Rājat. 5,

381.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haridrā haridrā, f. turmeric: -rāga, a. whose affection lasts only as long as

the colour of turmeric.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

haridrā strī, (haritaṁ pītavarṇaṁ rātīti . harit + rā + kaḥ . ṭāp .)

oṣadhiviśeṣaḥ . haluda iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . niśāhvā 2 kāñcanī 3 pītā 4

varavarṇinī 5 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 41 .. kāverī 6 umā 7 varṇavatī 8 gaurī 9

pīñjā 10 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. pītavālukā 11 hemanāśā 12 bhaṅgavāsā 13

gharṣiṇī 14 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. pītikā 15 rajanī 16 niśā 17 mehaghnī 18

bahulā 19 varṇinī 20 rātrināmikā 21 . iti ratnamālā .. harit 22 rañjanī 23

svarṇavarṇā 24 suvarṇā 25 śivā 26 dīrgharāgā 27 haladdī 28 varāṅgī 29

janeṣṭā 30 varā 31 varṇadātrī 32 pavitrā 33 haritā 34 viṣaghnī 35 piṅgā 36

maṅgalyā 37 maṅgalā 38 lakṣmīḥ 39 bhadrā 40 śiphā 41 śobhā 42

śobhanā 43 subhagāhvayā 44 śyāmā 45 jayantikā 46 . asya guṇāḥ .

kaṭutvam . tiktatvam . uṣṇatvam .

kaphavātāsrakuṣṭhamehakaṇḍuvraṇanāśitvam . dehavarṇavidhāyitvañca .

iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. * .. anyacca .

haridrā kaphapittāsnaśothakaṇḍuvraṇāpahā . iti rājavallabhaḥ .. api ca

.

haridrā kāñjanī pītā niśākhyā varavarṇinī .

kṛmighnā haladī yoṣitpriyā harivilāsinī ..

haridrā kaṭukā tiktā rūkṣoṣṇā kaphapittanut .

varṇyātvagdoṣamehāsraśothapāṇḍuvraṇāpahā .. * .. atha vanaharidrā

.

araṇyahaladīkandaḥ kuṣṭhavātāsranāśanaḥ . * . atha karpūraharidrā .

dārvī bhedāmragandhā ca surabhiścāru dāru ca .

karpūrā padmapatrā syāt surabhiḥ suranāyikā ..

āmragandhiharidrā yā sā śītā vātalā matā .

pittahṛnmadhurā tiktā sarvakaṇḍavināśinī .. iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haridrā strī hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ dravati dru—gatau ḍa . svanāmakhyāte

opadhibhede . haridrā kaṭukā tiktā rūkṣoṣṇā kaphapittanut . varṇyā

tvagdoṣame hāsraśothapāṇḍuvraṇāpahā . (vanaharidrā)

araṇyahaladdīkandaḥ kuṣṭhavātāsranāśanaḥ . (karpūraharidrā) dārvī

bhedāmragandhā ca surabhiścārudāru ca . karpūrā padmapatrā syāt

surabhiḥ suranāyikā āmragandhirharidrā yā sā śītā vātalā matā .

pittahṛnmadhurātiktā sarvakaṇḍūvināśinī bhāvapra° .

हरिद्राभ — haridrābha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridrābha «haridrā-bha» («-drābha») mfn. resembling turmeric; of a

yellow colour ; m. Curcuma Zerumbet or Terminalia Tomentosa

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haridrābha (haridrā + ābhā) 1) adj. «gelb» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. — 2) m.

«Curcuma Zerumbet Roxb.» und «Terminalia tomentosa W. et. A.»

ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR.

haridrābha *haridrābha 1) Adj. «gelb.» 2) m. a) «Curcuma Zerumbet.» b)

«Terminalia tomentosa.»

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haridrābha pu° haridreva ābhāti ā + bhā—ka . 1 pītasāle (piyāsāla) 2

karvurake 3 pītavarṇe ca . 4 tadvati tri° amaraḥ .

हरिद्वर्ण — haridvarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haridvarṇa «harid-varṇa» mfn. green-coloured, of a yellowish golden

colour

हरिनेत्र — harinetra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harinetra «hari-netra» n. the eye of Viṣṇu

n. a white lotus

n. an eye of a greenish colour

harinetra «hari-netra» mfn. having yellow eyes

harinetra «hari-netra» m. an owl

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harinetra n. 1) Hari’s d. i. Viṣṇu’s «Auge» MĀRK. P. 81, 52. — 2) «eine

weisse Lotusblüthe» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

harinetra 1) adj. «gelbäugig»: Śiva MBH. 14, 194. — 2) m. «Eule» TRIK. 2,

5, 14. HĀR. 185.

harinetra1 n. 1) «Hari’s ~, d.i. Viṣṇu’s Auge.» 2) «*eine weisse

Lotusblüthe» RĀJAN.10,182.

harinetra2 1) Adj. «gelbäugig.» 2) *m. «Eule.»

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harinetra a. yellow-eyed (Śiva).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harinetra na° harernetramiva . 1 śvetapadme rājani° . 6 ta° . 2

viṣṇorlocane . hareḥ siṁhasyeva netramasya dīrṣatvāt . 3 pecake

puṁstrī° trikā° striyāṁ ṅīṣ .

हरिपिङ्ग — haripiṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haripiṅga «hari-piṅga» mfn. yellowish-brown

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haripiṅga Adj. «gelblich braun» MBH.1,222,31.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

haripiṅga a. yellowish-brown.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haripiṅga hari-piṅga, a. yellowish brown: -la, a. id.;

-prabha, a. tawny-coloured. -bhakti, f. worship of Viṣṇu;

-bhaṭa, m. N.;

-bhaṭṭa, m. N. of various scholare;

-madhyā, a. f. having a tawny waist; having a waist reminding of

Viṣṇu.

हरिमन् — hariman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariman m. (for 2. see p.1292, col.1) death, illness

m. time

hariman m. (for 1. see p.1289, col.2) yellow colour, yellowness (as a

disease), jaundice

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

hariman m.

(1) Yellowness.

(2) Paleness.

(3) Time.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariman (von hari) UṆĀDIS. 4, 147. m. «gelbe Farbe, Bleichheit,

Gelbsucht» ṚV. 1, 50, 11. fg. AV. 1, 22, 1. 9, 8, 9. 19, 44, 2. «die Zeit»

(kāla) UJJVAL.

hariman m. «gelbe Farbe, Bleichheit, Gelbsucht.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hariman hariman, m.

I. i. e. hari + iman, Paleness, Chr. 289, 11 = Rigv. i. 50, 11.

II. i. e. hṛ + iman, Time.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariman m. yellowness, a kind of disease.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hariman hari-man, m. yellowness, jaundice (V.).

हरिम्भर — harimbhara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harimbhara «hari-m-bhara» mfn. bearing the yellow-coloured

(thunderbolt)

हरिय — hariya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariya m. a horse of a reddish or bay colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariya (von hari) m. «ein falbes Ross» H. 1238.

hariya *hariya m. «ein falbes Ross.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hariya hariya (derived from hari), m. A horse of yellow colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hariya pu° hariṁ harivarṇaṁ yāti yā—ka . pītavarṇaghaṭake hemaca° .

हरियः — hariyaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

hariyaḥ A yellow-coloured horse.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

hariyaḥ puṁ, (hariṁ pītavarṇaṁ yāti prāpnotīti . yā + kaḥ .)

pītavarṇaghoṭakaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ ..

हरिवर्पस् — harivarpas Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harivarpas «hari-varpas» («hari-«) mfn. having a yellowish or greenish

appearance

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harivarpas adj. «gelbliches —, grünliches Aussehen darbietend»: die Erde

ṚV. 3, 44, 3. Indra 10, 96, 1.

harivarpas Adj. «gelbliches ~, grünliches Aussehen habend.»

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harivarpas a. green-coloured.

हरिश्चन्द्र — hariścandra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariścandra «hari-ścandra» («hari-«) mfn. (see «candra») having golden

splendour ; m. N. of the 28th king of the solar dynasty in the Tretā age

(he was son of Tri-śaṅku, and was celebrated for his piety; accord. to the

Mārkaṇḍeya-Purāṇa he gave up his country, his wife and his son, and

finally himself, to satisfy the demands of Viśvāmitra; after enduring

incredible sufferings, he won the pity of the gods and was raised with his

subjects to heaven; accord. to see under «śunaḥśepa», p.1082, col.3: in

later legends Hari-ścandra is represented as insidiously induced by

Nārada to relate his actions with unbecoming pride, whereupon he was

degraded from Svarga, one stage at each sentence, till stopping in time

and doing homage to the gods he was fixed with his capital in mid-air; his

aerial city is popularly believed to be still visible in the skies at particular

times; cf. «saubha») &c.; N. of various authors &c. m. or n. (?) N. of a

place ; n. N. of a Liṅga ; «-caritra» n. N. of wk.; «-tīrtha» n. N. of a Tīrtha ;

«-pura» n. the city of Harikandra (= «saubha») ; a mirage ; «-purāṇa» n.

«-yaśaś-caudra-candrikā» f. «-ścandrākhyāyikā», f. «-ścandropākhyāna» n.

N. of wks.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariścandra (hari + ścandra) 1) adj. «gelb —, golden schimmernd» ṚV. 9,

66, 26. — 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten mit dem patron. Vaidhasa aus dem

Geschlecht des Ikṣvāku AIT. BR. 7, 13. ŚĀÑKH. BR. 15, 17. MAITRJUP. 1,

4. ein Ṛṣi (Rājarṣi?) P. 6, 1, 153. im Epos ist Har. ein Sohn Triśañku’s, der

für seine Frömmigkeit und Freigebigkeit mit seinen Unterthanen in den

Himmel erhoben, aus diesem aber wegen seines Hochmuths wieder

vertrieben wird und mit seiner Stadt (vgl. saubha) im Luftraum schweben

bleibt, H. 701. MBH. 2, 294. 484. 488. fgg. 12, 614. 13, 187. 3290. 5663.

fg. 18, 106. HARIV. 754. fgg. 11110. Spr. (II) 4830. VP. 372 nebst N. 9.

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 252. MĀRK. P. 7, 1. fgg. BHĀG. P. 9, 7, 6. 16, 31. 10,

72, 21. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 648. 7, 798. DAŚAK. 8, 1 v. u. WILSON, Sel. Works

1, 181. 362. Verz. d. B. H. No. 1198. als Autor No. 941. N. pr. eines

historischen Fürsten Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 35. fg. eines Sohnes des

Bharahapāla Verz. d. Oxf. H. 276,a,8. — 3) N. pr. eines Wallfahrtsortes

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,16. 42,a,11. — Vgl. haricandra.

hariścandra 1) Adj. «gelb ~, golden schimmernd.» 2) m. N.pr.

verschiedener Fürsten. Im Epos ist es ein Sohn Triśañku’s, der für seine

Frömmigkeit und Freigebigkeit mit seinen Unterthanen in den Himmel

erhoben, aus diesem aber wegen seines Hochmuths wieder vertrieben

wird und mit seiner Stadt im Luftraum schweben bleibt. 3) N.pr. einer

Oertlichkeit.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

hariścandra 1 I A King of the solar dynasty very much reputed for his

unique truthfulness and integrity. He was the son of the famous Triśaṅku.

hariścandra 2 II An emperor of ancient times, to whom Brahmā gave as

a gift a palace which automatically produced everything desired by its

owner. He was lord over the seven islands. About his former birth and the

plenitude of his riches the Padma Purāṇa (Uttara khaṇḍa, Chapter 32) has

the following story to say:-

hariścandra 3 III A Sanskrit poet who lived in the 9th century A.D. The

mahākāvya called «Dharmaśarmābhyudaya» is his main work. This

mahākāvya comprises of 21 contos. He has composed another work

called «Jīvandharacampū».

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hariścandra hari-ścand + ra (see cand), m. The name of a king.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariścandra a. having a golden-coloured splendour; m. N. of sev. kings.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hariścandra hari-ścandra, a. having a yellow or golden lustre (Soma,

RV.1); m. N. of a king of the race of Ikṣvāku; in E. a son of Trisaṅku, who

having been elevated with his subjects to heaven and expelled thence

owing to his pride, remained suspended in mid-air with his city (Saubha):

(hari) -śmaśāru, a. having a tawny beard (RV.1);

-śmaśru, a. id. (E.);

-siṁha, m. N. of a king;

-soma, m. N.;

-svāmin, m. N.;

-haḍaukasa, m. N.;

-haya, a. having tawny steeds, ep. of Indra;

-hara, m. sg. Viṣṇu and Śiva in person; du. or °-, Viṣṇu and Śiva; N. of

a various men;

-kathā, f. discourse about viṣṇu and Śiva;

-heti, f. Indra’s weapon, rainbow; Viṣṇ’s weapon, discus: -mat, a.

adorned with a rainbow, -hūti, m. (called after the discus or cakra), the,

Cakravāka or ruddy goose (Anas casarca).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hariścandra pu° hariḥ candra iva ṛṣau suṭ . sūryavaṁśye triśaṅguputre

nṛpabhede . ṛṣibhinne tu na suṭ . haricandra eva .

हरिश्री — hariśrī Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hariśrī «hari-śrī» mfn. beautifully yellow, gold-coloured

mfn. blessed with Soma

mfn. blessed with or abounding in horses

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hariśrī adj. 1) «schön gelb, goldfarben»: Heerde VĀLAKH. 2, 10. PAÑCAV.

BR. 15, 3, 10. — 2) Soma — «beglückt»: mada ṚV. 8, 15, 4.

hariśrī Adj. 1) «schön gelb, goldfarben.» 2) «Soma-beglückt.»

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hariśrī a. shining or beautiful as gold.

हारिद्र — hāridra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hāridra mfn. (fr. «haridrā») coloured with turmeric, yellow &c. &c.

hāridra m. a yellow colour

hāridra m. the Kadamba tree

hāridra m. a kind of vegetable poison

hāridra m. a kind of fever (also of animals)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hāridra 1) adj. «mit» Haridrā («Gelbwurz) gefärbt, gelb» überh. P. 4, 2, 2,

Vārtt. 5 (proparox.). H. 1394. HALĀY. 4, 50. MED. r. 241. Kleid ĀŚV.

GṚHY. 1, 19, 11. KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 8, 3. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 4, 8. SUŚR. 1, 111,

7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 58. TATTVAS. 12. varṇa MBH. 4, 1331. 12, 10058.

10065. meha CARAKA 8, 4. mūtra SUŚR. 2, 525, 10. saṁnipāta Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 319,b, No. 758. — 2) m. a) «Nauclea Cadamba» (kadamba)

«Roxb.» HĀR. 96. MED. — b) «ein best. vegetabilisches Gift»:

haridrātulyamūlo yo hāridraḥ sa udāhṛtaḥ BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR.

hāridra 1) Adj. «mit Gelbwurz gefärbt, gelb» überh. GAUT. ĀPAST.

hāridraudana VARĀH.JOGAJ.6,17. 2) m. a) «Nauclea Cadamba.» b) «ein

best. vegetabilisches Gift» med. 97. BHĀVAPR.1,270.

RASENDRAC.42,11.21. c) «ein best. Fieber» BHĀVAPR.3,79. «beim Büffel»

GAL.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

hāridra hāridra, i. e. haridrā + a,

I. adj.

1. Stained with turmeric.

2. Yellow.

II. m.

1. Yellow, the colour.

2. The Kadamba tree.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

hāridra a. dyed with turmeric, yellow.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

hāridra hāridra, a. coloured with turmeric (haridrā), yellow.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hāridra pu° haridrayā raktaḥ aṇ . 1 kadambavakṣe tatpuṣpasya

pītaprāyatvāt tathātvam . 2 haridrayā rakte tri° medi° .

हारिद्रः — hāridraḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

hāridraḥ

(1) A yellow colour.

(2) The Kadamba tree.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

hāridraḥ puṁ, kadambavṛkṣaḥ . (haridrayā raktam . haridrā +

haridrāmahārajanābhyāmañ vaktavyaḥ . 4 . 2 . 2 . ityasya vārtikoktyā añ

.) haridrārañjite, tri . iti medinī .. haridrāvarṇaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ ..

(yathā, bṛhatsaṁhitāyām . 5 . 58 .

dūrvākāṇḍaśyāme hāridre vāpi nirdiśenmarakam ..) viṣabhedaḥ . yathā

haridrātukhyamūlo yo hāridraḥ sa udāhṛtaḥ . iti bhāvaprakāśaḥ ..

हालक — hālaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hālaka m. a horse of a yellowish brown or tawny colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hālaka m. «ein Pferd von bestimmter Farbe» (pītaharitacchāya), = harika

H. 1242. — Vgl. upa-, avahālikā.

hālaka *hālaka m. «ein Pferd von bestimmter Farbe» pītaharitacchāya.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hālaka pu° hāla + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharitavarṇāśve hamaca° .

हालकः — hālakaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

hālakaḥ A horśe of a yellowishbrown colour.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

hālakaḥ puṁ, potaharitavarṇāśvaḥ . yathā —

haritaḥ pītaharitacchāyaḥ sa eva hālakaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ ..

हेमगौर — hemagaura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899hemagaura «hema-gaura» mfn. of a golden yellow colour («-rāṅga» mfn.

having golden yellow limbs)

hemagaura «hema-gaura» m. a kind of tree (= «kiṁkirāta»)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

hemagaura 1) «goldgelb»: -gaurāṅga SKĀNDA-P. im ŚKDR. — 2) m. «ein

best. Baum», = kiṁkirāta RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

hemagaura 1) Adj. «goldgelb.» 2) *m. «ein best. Baum», = kiṁkirāta.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

hemagaura pu° hemeva gauraḥ pītaḥ puṣpeṇa . 1 aśokavṛkṣe rājani° 2

svarṇatulyapīte tri° .

हैम — haima Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haima mfn. wintry, brumal, caused or produced by snow or ice

mfn. covered with snow

mfn. relating to or coming from the Himālaya (as pearls)

haima m. N. of a mountain

haima n. hoar-frost, dew

haima mf («ī») n. (fr. 3. «heman», of which it is also the Vṛiddhi form in

comp.) golden, consisting or made of gold &c.

mf («ī») n. of a golden yellow colour

haima m. N. of śiva

haima m. Gentiana Cherayta

haima m. (scil. «kośa») the lexicon of Hema-candra

haima mf («ī») n. («ā») f. yellow jasmine

haima mf («ī») n. («ī») f. id.

haima m. Pandanus Odoratissimus

haima «haimana» &c. see col.1.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

haima a. (mī f.) [hima-heman-aṇ]

(1) Cold, wintry, frigid.

(2) Caused by frost; mṛṇālinī haimamivoparāgaṁ R. 16. 7.

(2) Golden, made of gold; pādena haimaṁ vililekha pīṭhaṁ R. 6. 15;

Bk. 5. 89; Ku. 6. 6.

(3) Of a golden yellow colour. —mā —mī Yellow jasmine. —maṁ Hoar-

frost, dew. —maḥ An epithet of Śiva.

— Comp.

—mudrā, —mudrikā a golden coin.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haima (von hima) 1) adj. a) «von Schnee» oder «Eis herrührend»: uparāga

RAGH. 16, 7. Wasser RĀJAN. 14, 63. MADAN. 8, 19. «mit Schnee

bedeckt»: himavataḥ pādaḥ MBH. 7, 2172. — 2) «vom» Himālaya

«kommend»: Perlen VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 2. 5. «zum» H. «in Beziehung

stehend»: Śiva MBH. 13, 1178. — 3) m. N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 13,

1434.

haima (von hema) adj. «von» Hema d. i. Hemacandra «verfasst»; m. «ein

von ihm verfasstes Wörterbuch» (kośa) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 183,a,5. 185,b,32.

44. 194,a,2. 195,b,2. 211,a,9. Schol. zu VĀSAVAD. S. 15.

haima (von hema = 2. heman) 1) adj. (f. ī) «von Gold, golden» VOP. 7,

19. M. 1, 9. MBH. 3, 10207. 15719 (heman ed. Bomb.). 16654. 13, 4437.

R. 2, 92, 32. 3, 48, 11. 4, 33, 25. 5, 45, 3. CARAKA 10, 9. MEGH. ed. ST.

73. IV. RAGH. 6, 15. VIKR. 157. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 1, 6. 26, 9. 73, 2.

KATHĀS. 59, 9. AK. 2, 8, 1, 32. H. 717. HALĀY. 2, 268. VOP. 6, 14.

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 277. fg. PRAB. 71, 3. BHĀG. P. 3, 33, 16. 6, 2, 44. 7,

10, 53. 10, 50, 53. PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 7. BHAṬṬ. 5, 89. — 2) m. «Gentiana

Cherayta Roxb.» RĀJAN. 9, 15. — 3) f. ā «gelber Jasmin» ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — 4) f. ī dass. ebend. «Pandanus odoratissimus» RĀJAN. 10, 70. =

kṣīriṇī 5, 5.

haima1 1) Adj. a) «von Schnee oder Eis herrührend.» b) «mit Schnee

bedeckt.» c) «vom Himālaya kommend, zum H. in Beziehung stehend.» 2)

m. N.pr. eines Berges.

haima2 Adj. «von Hema-, d.i. Hemacandra verfasst» ; m. «das von ihm

verfasste Wörterbuch.»

haima3 1) Adj. (f. ī) «von Gold, Golden.» 2) *m. «Gentiana Cherayta.» 3)

*f. ā «gelber Jasmin.» 4) *f. ī a) das. b) «Pandanus odoratissimus.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

haima haima, i. e. heman + a,

I. adj.

1. Cold.

2. Golden, Vikr. d. 157.

II. n. Hoar-frost.

III. f. mī, Yellow jasmine.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

haima [1] a. of snow or ice.

haima f. ī2 golden.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haima haima, a. 1. caused by snow, ice, or frost (hima); covered with

snow; 2. composed by Hema (-candra); m. Hemacandra’s dictionary; 3.

(ī) made of gold (hema), golden.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haima tri° hime bhavam aṇ . 1 himajātamātre 2 prātaḥkālīnahimajāte jale

na° rājani° . 3 bhūnimbe pu° rājani° . hemno vikāraḥ aṇ ṭilopaḥ . 4

svarṇavikāre 5 svarṇamayapadārthe ca tri° .

Comments

Write a comment

*